You are on page 1of 1024

H515/H551

SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

PN: RCFM4700L

H515/H551

SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

H515
H551
SERVICE MANUAL

PN:RCFM4700L

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT
CODE

COMPANY
RICOH

SAVIN

H515

GESTETNER
9768

FAX4700L

3960

H551

9878

FAX4800L

3695

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.

DATE

COMMENTS

12/95

Original Printing

2/98

H551 (FAX4800L) Addition

7/98

Reprint

9/98

H132 Internet Fax Addition

Rev. 3/98

Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1. Features List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . .
1.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

1-2
1-2
1-6
1-7

1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT . .


1.3.1. Mechanical Components
1.3.2. Electrical Components .
1. PCBs . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

2. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
3. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
4. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
5. Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
6. Optional Equipment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . .


1.5.1. Transmission (PSTN) . . . . . . . .
1.5.2. Reception (PSTN) . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3. Transmission (ISDN) . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4. Reception (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.5. Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1-15
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20

1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . .


1.6.1. Distribution Diagram . . . . . . .
1.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit . . . . .
1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

1-21
1-21
1-23
1-23

2. DRAM Backup

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Document Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3. Drive Mechanism

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

4. Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2. Image Scanning
H515/H551

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
i

SM

Rev. 3/98

1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6


2. Partial Image Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3. Scanning Double-sided Documents . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.1.3. Video Processing . . . . . . . . .


2.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion
2.1.5. Process without Halftone . . . . . .
1. Background Detection . . . . . . . .
2. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11

3. Thresholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
4. Erasure of irregular dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
5. OR processing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.1.6. Process with Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


1. Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2. MTF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. Halftone process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12


2.1.7. Data Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2. PRINTING . . . . . . . .
2.2.1. Printing Process - Overview
2.2.2. OPC Drum . . . . . .
2.2.3. Charge . . . . . . . .
2.2.4. Laser Exposure . . . . .
1. Overview . . . . . . . .
2. Block Diagram

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-17
2-17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

3. Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18


4. Print Density Adjustment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

5. Toner Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


2.2.5. Toner Supply
2.2.6. Development
2.2.7. Paper Feed
1. Overview . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

2-20
2-23
2-28
2-28

2. Paper Lift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29


3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
4. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
5. Drive Mechanism

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.2.8. Registration . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.9. Transfer and Separation . . . . . .
2.2.10. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.11. Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction
SM

ii

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-35
2-37
2-40
2-41
2-45

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing


. . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.2.14. Paper Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.3.1. Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode . . . . . . . . 2-51
3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . 2-53
4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode . . 2-55
2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
1. Service Call Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2. Excessive Jam Alarms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

3. Periodic Service Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59


4. PM Call

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

5. Effective Term of Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60


2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission
2.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting . . .
2.3.5. Fax On Demand . . . . .
2.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

2-61
2-63
2-66
2-68

2.4. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69


2.4.1. MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
1. SCP (System Control Peripheral) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69


4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F) . . . . . . . . . 2-70
5. ROM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

6. DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
7. SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
8. Video SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
9. Voice A/D converter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

10. Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70


11. IC Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
2.4.2. MFDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
1. Energy Saver CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73


4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
5. DTMF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

H515/H551

iii

SM

Rev. 3/98

6. DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73


7. DRAM Backup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

8. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73


9. Fuse and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2.4.3. PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.4.4. NCU (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
1. Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . . . .


3.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk)
3.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3. Fax on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4. Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5. Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6. Function Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-2
3-2
3-5
3-6
3-9
3-10
3-12

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . .
4.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . .
4.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02)
4.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . .
4.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . .
4.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . .
4.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . .
4.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . .
4.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . .
4.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . .
4.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . .
4.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . .
4.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . .
4.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . .

SM

iv

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

H515/H551

4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test Free Run (Function 11) . . . . . .
4.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . .
4.1.20. Software Download (Function 12) . .
4.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12) . . .
4.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12) .
4.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards
1. When downloading/uploading software .

Rev. 3/98

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-12
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-18

2. When replacing the MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19


3. When replacing the MFDU or other components . . . . . . 4-20
4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13)
4.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . .
4.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . .
4.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . .
4.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . .
4.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17)
4.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . .
4.2.1. System Switches . . .
4.2.2. Scanner Switches
. .
4.2.3. Printer Switches . . .
4.2.4. Communication Switches
4.2.5. G3 Switches . . . . .
4.3. NCU PARAMETERS

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

4-24
4-24
4-36
4-38
4-41
4-49

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . 4-78


4.4.1. Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.4.2. Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.7. PM TABLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


5.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1. Document Table and Tray .
5.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly . .
5.1.3. Left Cover . . . . . . .
5.1.4. Right Cover . . . . . .
5.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly
5.1.6. Top Cover . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4

5.2. ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5


5.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
H515/H551

SM

Rev. 3/98

5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5


5.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.4. ADF Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3. SCANNER . . . .
5.3.1. Exposure Glass
5.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers .
5.3.3. Xenon Lamp . .
5.3.4. Tx Motor . . .
5.3.5. Mirrors . . . .
5.3.6. Stamper . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11

5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12


5.4.1. Laser Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . .
5.5.1. Development Unit . . . . . .
5.5.2. Transfer Roller . . . . . . .
5.5.3. Main Motor and Gears . . . .
5.5.4. Toner End Sensor . . . . . .
5.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17

5.6. FUSING . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1. Thermistor . . . . . . . .
5.6.2. Fusing Unit . . . . . . .
5.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers . . . .
5.6.4. Fusing Lamp . . . . . . .
5.6.5. Hot Roller . . . . . . . .
5.6.6. Pressure Roller . . . . . .
5.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-20
5-20
5-20
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-25
5-25

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5.7. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box . . . . . . . .
5.7.2. Paper End Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed
Sensor, and Relay Connector . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator

. . . 5-27
. . . 5-28

5.8. PCBs . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1. PSU . . . . . . . .
5.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE
5.8.3. Power Pack . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. . . 5-26
. . . 5-26
. . . 5-26

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31

5.9. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32


5.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.9.2. Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

SM

vi

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL) .


5.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover . . . .
5.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components
5.10.3. Paper Size Sensor . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT


5.11.1. Replacement .
5.11.2. Tools Required
5.11.3. Preparation . .
5.11.4. Adjustment . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

5-35
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-36

5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .


5.12.1. Overview . . . . .
5.12.2. Scanner Parameters
1. Contrast . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41

2. Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.12.3. Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
1. Margins (Main Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1. Blank Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2. Black Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3. Dirty Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4. Uneven Image Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5. Vertical Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.7. Vertical White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.8. Horizontal White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.9. Black Dots/Spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.11. Faint Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.12. Vertical Black Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.13. Unfused Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.14. Ghost Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper . . . . . . . . .
6.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left) . . . .
6.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image

6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-17

6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18


6.2.1. ADF/Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
1. Non Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
H515/H551

vii

SM

Rev. 3/98

2. Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
3. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
4. Multi-feed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

6.2.2. Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21


1. Non-feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer
3. Jam - Fusing Exit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

4. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
5. Multi-feed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

6.4. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30


6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.5.1. Defective Sensor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.5.2. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

ISDN TYPE 140


1. INSTALLATION
1.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1. User Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2. Service Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1. Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2. Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES
2.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02) . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03) . . 2-3
2.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04) . . . 2-3
2.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05) . . 2-3
2.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06) . 2-4
2.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07) 2-4
2.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08) . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09) . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10) . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11) . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12) . . . 2-6
2.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13) . . . . . . . . 2-6
SM

viii

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

2.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7


2.2.1. G4 Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS *

. . . . . . . 2-20

3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1. ERROR CODES . . . . . . .
3.1.1. D-channel Layer Management
3.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1 . . . .
3.1.3. D-channel Link Layer . . .
3.1.4. D-channel Network Layer . .
3.1.5. B-channel Link Layer . . .
3.1.6. B-channel Network Layer . .
3.1.7. Transport Layer . . . . . .
3.1.8. Session Layer . . . . . .
3.1.9. Document Layer . . . . .
3.1.10. Presentation Layer . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6

3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES * . . . . . . . . . . .


3.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5) .
3.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8

3.3. LEDs * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9


3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List


A.1. How to Print the Dump List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2. How to Read the Dump List . . .
A.2.1. Data Format . . . . . . . .
A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List
A.2.3. Layer 1 Status . . . . . . .
1. Activation Procedure from the TE

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

A-2
A-2
A-4
A-7
A-8

2. Activation Procedure from the NT . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8


3. Termination Procedure from the NT

. . . . . . . . . . . A-9

B. G4 Parameter Locations
B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
1. Communication Parameter Display . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
H515/H551

ix

SM

Rev. 3/98

2. Default Communication Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

3. Network Used for G3 Transmission

. . . . . . . . . . . B-2

4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . B-2


5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
6. Specified Two Step Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission . . . . . . . . . . B-3
8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
C. Conditions for Receiving a Call

PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 100


1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1. Command and Status Signals
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . .
2.2.3. Print Density Control . . . .
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . .


2.3.1. Overview . . . .
2.3.2. Main Scan Direction
2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . .


3.1.1. Models FAX2700L,FAX2400L,& FAX3700L
. . .
3.1.2. Model FAX4700L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3. Operation Panel Decals . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3. INSTALLATION

3.2. SIMM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4


3.2.1. Type 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2. SIMM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
SM

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items) . . . . . . . . . 3-5


3.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-6


3.4.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . .
3.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection .
3.5.2. DOS Based Computers . . . . .
1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7

2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7


3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.5.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers

. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . .
4.1.1. Level 1 Menus . . . . . .
4.1.2. Level 2 Menus . . . . . .
4.1.3. Dump Mode . . . . . . .
4.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize
4.1.5. Factory Reset . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


4.2.1. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.2. Counter Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3. BIT SWITCHES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

H515/H551

xi

SM

Rev. 3/98

PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 200


1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1. Command and Status Signals
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . .
2.2.3. Print Density Control . . . .
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . .


2.3.1. Overview . . . .
2.3.2. Main Scan Direction
2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction
2.3.4. LEDs . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

3. INSTALLATION
3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1. SIMM MEMORY . . . .
3.2.2. PostScript SIMM . . . .
3.2.3. LocalTalk / Serial Interface

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4

3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-5


3.3.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2. LocalTalk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . .
3.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection .
3.4.2. DOS Based Computers . . . . .
1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection
2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6

. . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7


3.4.3. Apple Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

SM

xii

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


4.1.1. Controller Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2. Controller Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4.2.1. Dump Mode+ . . . . .
4.2.2. Factory Reset . . . . .
4.2.3. Printer Interface Reset . .
4.2.4. Counter Reset . . . . .
4.3. BIT SWITCHES

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140


1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS

1
2

. . . . . . . . 2

2.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . 2


2.3. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4. TWAIN CAPABILITY

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3. QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140


Comparison

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3.1. BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . 3


Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial Prefixes
3.2. BASIC RECEPTION

. . . . . . 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.3. USING THE FAX MACHINES SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . 4


3.4. USING THE FAX MACHINES PRINTER

. . . . . . . . . . 4

4. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION . . .


4.1. USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.2. DIRECT TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


4.3. DIRECT RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.4. MEMORY TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
H515/H551

xiii

SM

Rev. 3/98

SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9


Memory TX File Quick Delete (Fax Function 27)

. . . . . . 9

4.5. MEMORY RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10


SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.6. SCANNING (Fax Function 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

The Scan Auto route Option

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4.7. PRINTING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . 14

5. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . .

15

5.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP


(Service Function 05)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE


TESTS (Service Function 18)
DIU Internal Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

DIU External Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

6. PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS AND LISTS

. . . .

19

6.1. TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT - TCR . . . . . . 19


6.2. MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS . . . 20
Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Failure Report

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

6.3. USER PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21


6.4. SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

7. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS . . . . . . . . .
8.1. COMMUNICATIONS

22
24

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

8.2. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26
64

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F


OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2


2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SM

xiv

H515/H551

Rev. 3/98

2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4


2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5


2.5. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH . . 11
4.4. SENSORS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140S


1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2


2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5. JAM RELEASE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.6. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


2.7. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH 12
4.4. SENSORS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4.5. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

H515/H551

xv

SM

Rev. 3/98

H551 SERVICE MANUAL


OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3


1.2.1 Features List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2.2 Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7


1.2.3 Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment . . . . . . 1-8
1.3 Overall Machine Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 SEP/SUB Coding

. . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 Selective Polling (SEP/PWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


2.1.2 Sub-address (SUB/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 JBIG Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Memory Reception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 SG3-V.34 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL Units .


3.3.1 Hard Disk Unit (80MB) . . .
3.3.2 ISDN G4 Interface . . . .
3.3.3 G3 Interface . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Fax On Demand . . . . .
3.3.5 Paper Feed Unit (Front Flow)
3.3.6 Paper Feed Unit (Side Flow)
3.3.7 Counter . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8 Printer Unit . . . . . . .
3.3.9 Data Protection . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-2
3-2
3-4
3-7
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-18

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.A USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SM

xvi

H515/H551

4.1.1 Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . .


4.1.2 Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02) . .
4.1.3 Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . . . .
4.1.4 Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . . . .
4.1.5 Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . . . .
4.1.6 RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . . . .
4.1.7 RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8 Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . . . .
4.1.9 Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.10 DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.11 NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.12 Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.13 Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.14 Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . . . .
4.1.15 Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . . . .
4.1.16 ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.17 Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . . . .
4.1.18 Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free
Run (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.19 RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.20 Software Download (Function 12) . . . . . .
4.1.21 Software Upload (Function 12) . . . . . . .
4.1.22 SRAM Data Download (Function 12) . . . . .
4.1.23 Modem Software Upload (function 12) . . . .
4.1.24 Optional G3 Board Software Download . . . .
4.1.25 Optional G3 Board Modem Software Download .
4.1.26 Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards . . . .
4.1.27 Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) . .
4.1.28 Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . . . .
4.1.29 Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . . . .
4.1.30 Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . . . .
4.1.31 Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . . . .
4.1.32 G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17) . .
4.1.33 Printing Confidential Files . . . . . . . . .
4.2 BIT SWITCHES . . . . .
4.2.1 System Switches . . .
4.2.2 Scanner Switches . . .
4.2.3 Printer Switches . . .
4.2.4 Communication Switches
4.2.5 G3 Switches . . . . .
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS
H515/H551

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

Rev. 3/98

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-11

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-11
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-19
4-21
4-23
4-25
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-31

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

4-31
4-31
4-45
4-47
4-50
4-58

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
xvii

SM

Rev. 7/2000

4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

. . . . . . 4-76

4.4.1 Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-76

4.4.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-77

4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


6.2 ERROR CODES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4 ROM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16


6.4.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . .

6-16

PARTS CATALOG
6. PARTS CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SM

xviii

H515/H551

Rev. 9/98

INTERNET FAX OPTION H132


1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

. . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


1.2 FEATURES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 NETWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3


1.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

1.3.2 LAN FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4

1.3.3 200-DPI PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

1.3.4 200-DPI SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

1.3.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

1.3.6 FORWARDING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

1.3.7 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PAPER) . . . . . . . . . .

1-9

1.3.8 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PC)

. . . . . . . . . . .

1-10

1.3.9 TRANSFER REQUEST THROUGH THE INTERNET . . . .

1-11

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS H132


2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

. . . . . .

2-1

2.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


2.1.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

2.1.2 MAIL RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4

2.1.3 MAIL BROADCASTING


(E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED)

. . . . . . . .

2-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7

2.1.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

2.1.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-14

2.2 LAN FAX TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16


2.3 IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

2.3.1 IC FAX MONITOR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

2.3.2 IC VIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

2.4 IMAGE DATA PATH

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19

2.4.1 TIFF-F FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19

2.4.2 DCX FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-21

2.5 NIC BOARD

2-22

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSTALLATION H132
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD
H515/H551

xix

3-1

. . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SM

3.1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Rev. 9/98

. . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

3.2 INITIAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

3.2.1 PROGRAMMING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

3.2.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

3-5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 INITIAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12

3.3.1 CHECKING THE LEDS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12

3.3.3 LOOP BACK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

3.3.2 LINK CHECK

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES H132


4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . .
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 LAN BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 20)


4.1.2 LINK CHECK (FUNCTION 20)

4-1

. . .

4-1

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

4.1.3 LOOP BACK TEST (FUNCTION 20)

. . . . . . . . . .

4-3

4.1.4 LAN PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 20) . . . . . . . . . .

4-4

4.2 LAN SWITCHES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

TROUBLESHOOTING H132
5. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION . . .
5.2 LAN TEST FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1
5-1
5-9

5.2.1 LINK CHECK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

5.2.2 LOOP BACK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . .

5-10

5.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10

5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . .

5-11

5.4 SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . .


5.4.1 INTERNET FAX

5-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-18

5.4.2 IC FAX MONITOR


5.4.3 COM REDIRECTOR

APPENDIX A H132
1. LAN BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
6.1 LAN CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
6.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SM

xx

A-1

H515/H551

Rev. 9/98

6.1.2 BASIC TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

6.1.3 AVOIDING DATA COLLISION . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2

6.2 ETHERNET

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

6.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-4

6.2.2 ETHERNET FRAME STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . .

A-4

6.2.3 MAC ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-5

6.3 LAN HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6


6.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-6

6.3.2 RELAY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-6

6.4 TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS . . . . . . A-8


6.4.1 REPEATERS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-8

6.4.2 BRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-9

6.4.3 SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-10

6.4.4 ROUTERS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-11

6.4.5 GATEWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-12

6.5 NETWORK PROTOCOLS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

6.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-13

6.5.2 DATA TRANSMISSION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-13

6.5.3 NAME SERVICE PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-14

6.5.4 ROUTING PROTOCOL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-14

6.5.5 TRANSFER PROTOCOL

6.6 TCP/IP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

6.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-16

6.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS WITH IP PROTOCOL

. . . . . . .

A-16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-16

6.6.3 IP ADDRESS

6.6.4 IP ADDRESS FORMAT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-16

6.6.5 SUBNET AND SUBNET MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-17

6.6.6 TCP AND UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-18

APPENDIX B H132
1. E-MAIL BASICS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

7.1 PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1


7.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

7.1.2 SENDING AND RECEIVING

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2

7.1.3 E-MAIL NETWORKS

7.2 INTERNET MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4


7.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H515/H551

xxi

B-4

SM

Rev. 9/98

7.2.2 CHARACTER CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-4

7.2.3 MESSAGE ADDRESS NOTATION . . . . . . . . . . .

B-4

7.2.4 DNS AND DOMAINS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-5

7.2.5 TRANSFER OF INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . .

B-6

7.2.6 VERIFYING INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-7

7.3 MESSAGE HEADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-8

7.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-8

7.3.2 HEADER FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-8

7.3.3 HEADER TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-9

7.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-10

7.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-10

7.3.6 DATE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-11

7.3.7 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-11

7.4 SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-12

7.4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-12

7.4.2 SMTP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-12

7.5 POP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-13

7.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-13

7.5.2 POP SERVER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . .

B-13

7.6 MIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-14

7.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-14

7.6.2 MIME FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-14

7.6.3 MIME HEADER

B-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.4 DATA TYPES SUPPORTED WITH MIME

. . . . . . . .

B-15

7.6.5 MULTIPART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-15

7.6.6 BINARY DATA ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-17

7.6.7 BASE 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-17

APPENDIX C
CONFIGURATION SHEET FOR H132-41 INTERNET FAX

. . . C-1

PARTS CATALOG
PARTS LIST (H132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

SM

xxii

H515/H551

ISDN TYPE 140


H551 OVERALL INFORMATION
FAX OPTION H132 OVERALL INFORMATION

H515 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 100
H551 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
FAX OPTION H132 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

TAB
POSITION 2

H515 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

TAB
POSITION 1

Rev. 9/21/98

H551 INSTALLATION
FAX OPTION H132 INSTALLATION

H515 SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140
H551 SERVICE TABLES
FAX OPTION H132 SERVICE TABLES

TAB
POSITION 4

PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 200

TAB
POSITION 3

H515 INSTALLATION

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F


H551 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
FAX OPTION H132 TROUBLESHOOTING

TAB
POSITION 5

H515 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX A

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX B


H551 PARTS CATALOG

H132 PARTS CATALOG


FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX C

TAB
POSITION 7

H551 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

TAB
POSITION 8

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140S

TAB
POSITION 6

H515 TROUBLESHOOTING

Important Safety Notices


Laser Safety

WARNING FOR LASER UNIT


This machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams can cause
permanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or look along the laser beam
path while the main power is on.

H516c502.WMF

Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)


CAUTION
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

OVERALL MACHINE
INFORMATION

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION


1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Desktop type transceiver

Memory Capacity
ECM: 128 kbytes

Circuit
PSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)

SAF:
Standard: 1 Mbytes: 80 pages
With 2 Mbyte option: 240 pages
With 4 Mbyte option: 400 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD plus Function Upgrade Card: 3000 pages
Measured using ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter)

Connection
Direct couple
Document Size
Length:
105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]
Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assisted
Up to 14 m [46 ft] after adjustment
Width:
148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]
Thickness:
0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils]
(equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)

Compression
MH, MR, EFC, MMR, SSC (MMR only with
ECM and G4)
SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and raw
data

Document Feed
Automatic feed, face down

Protocol
Group 3 with ECM
Group 4 (ISDN G4 option required)

ADF Capacity
50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper or
A4 size 70 g/m2 paper)
25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size
20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)

Modulation
V.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter
(PHM), V.21 (FM)

Scanning Method
Flat bed, with CCD

Data Rate (bps)


G3: 14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400,
Automatic fallback
G4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps

Scan Width
219.5 mm [8.64 ins] 1% (A4/Letter)
260.1 mm [10.2 ins] 1% (B4)
308.9 mm [12.2 ins] 1% (A3/Double Letter)

I/O Rate
With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

Scan Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan:
Standard - 100 lpi
Detail - 200 lpi
Fine - 400 lpi

Transmission Time
G3: 6 seconds at 14400 bps; Measured with
G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1 test
document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
G4 (option): 3 seconds at 64 kbps; Measured with an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Printing System
Laser printing, plain paper, dry toner

SM

1-1

H515

Paper Size and Capacity


Standard Cassette: 250 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4
Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.
Maximum Printing Width
208 mm [8.1 ins]

1.2. FEATURES
1.2.1. Features List
KEY:
O = Used, X = Not Used,
A = With optional memory 2M/4M only
B = With optional memory 80M (HDD) only
C = With optional function upgrade card only
D = With optional Fax On Demand kit only
E = With optional 100 sheet cassette only
F = With optional paper feed unit only
G = With optional counter only
H = With optional handset only (US only)
I = With optional printer interface unit only
J = With optional G4 kit only

Print Resolutions
Fax and Copy Mode:
Main scan: 400 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi
Printer Mode: 300 x 300 dpi

Equipment
ADF
Book scan
Built-in handset
Bypass feed: 1 sheet
Cabinet
Counter
Cutter
Handset
Hard disk
Manual feed mechanism (ADF)
Marker (Stamp)
Monitor speaker
Optional cassette: 100 sheets
Optional Fax On Demand kit
Optional paper feed unit
(up to 2 units)
Optional printer interface

Power Supply
USA:
115 20 Vac, 60 1 Hz
Power Consumption (Base Machine Only)
Standby:
Minimum 2 W (see Note)
Normal 30 W
Transmitting: 60 W
Receiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)
Copying: 330 W (Maximum: 950 W)
Note: 2W mode is not available if any of the
following options are installed.
- Printer interface unit
- G4
- RS232C interface
Operating Environment
Temperature: 17 - 28 C [63 - 82 F]
Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh

Video Processing Features


Contrast
Halftone (Basic & Error Diffusion)
MTF
Reduction before tx (B4 -> A4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> B4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> A4)
Scanning Resolution - Standard
Scanning Resolution - Detail
Scanning Resolution - Fine

Dimensions (W x D x H)
475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]
Excluding handset, trays, and optional units
Weight
Approx. 42 lbs
Excluding CTM, handset, trays, and optional
units

H515

1-2

O
X
X
O
X
G
X
H
B
X
O
O
E
D
F
I

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

SM

Communication Features User Selectable


Action as a transfer broadcaster
AI Redial (last ten numbers)
Answering machine interface
Authorized Reception
Auto-answer delay time
Auto dialing (pulse or DTMF)
Auto Document
Auto image density selection
Auto paper size selection
Automatic Voice Message
Batch Transmission (max 6 files)
Broadcasting
Chain Dialing
Communication Result Display
Confidential ID Override
Confidential Reception
Confidential Transmission
Direct Fax Number Entry
Economy Transmission
Fax on demand
Forwarding
Free Polling
Groups (9 groups)
Group Transfer Station
Hold
ID Transmission
Immediate Redialing
Immediate Transmission
Keystroke Programs
Length Reduction
Memory Transmission
Multi-step Transfer
Next Transfer Station
OMR
On Hook Dial
Ordering Toner
Page Count
Page separation mark

Communication Features User Selectable


Parallel memory transmission
O
Personal Codes
O
Personal Codes with Conf. ID
A or B
Partial Image Area Scanning
C
Polling Reception
O
Polling Transmission
O
Polling tx file lifetime in the SAF
O
Quick Dial
O
(Standard: 64 stations)
Reception modes (Fax, Tel)
O
Remote control features
X
Remote Transfer
A or B
Restricted Access
O
Secured Polling
O
Secured Polling with Stored ID
O
Override
Secure Transmission
X
Send Later
O
Silent ringing detection
X
Speed Dial
O
(Standard: 100 stations)
Telephone Directory
O
Tonal Signal Transmission
O
Transfer Request
O
Transmission Deadline (TRD)
A
Turnaround Polling
X
Two-step Transfer
X
Two in one
O
Voice Request (immed. tx only)
X

A or B
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
A or B
O
O
X
O
A or B
O
O
A or B
D
A or B
O
O
A or B
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
A or B
X
O
O
X
O
O

Communication Features Service Selectable


AI Short Protocol
Auto-reduction override option
Busy tone detection
Cable Equalizer
PSTN
ISDN
Closed Network (tx and rx)
Continuous Polling Reception
Dedicated tx parameters
ECM
EFC
Inch-mm conversion before
transmission

Scanning Resolution - Superfine


Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi when printing

SM

O
O
O
O
J
O
O
O
O
O
O

X
O

1-3

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

Communication Features - Auto


Automatic fallback
O
Automatic redialing
O
Confidential reception
A or B
Dual Access
O
Substitute reception
O

mm-inch conversion when printing


Page retransmission times
Protection against wrong conn.
Resolutions available for reception
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
200 x 400 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
Resoln stepdown override option
Short Preamble
Well log
Other User Features
Area code prefix
Automatic service call
Center mark
Checkered mark
Clearing a memory file
Clearing a polling file
Clock
Confidential ID
Copy editing (Erase Center/Margin)
Copy mode
Copy Mode Restriction
Counters
Daylight Saving Time
Destination Check
Direct entry of names
File Retention Time
File Retransmission
Function Programs
Hard Disk Filing System
ID Code
Label Insertion ("From xxx")
Language Selection
LCD contrast control
Memory Lock
Memory Lock ID
Modifying a memory file
Multi Sort Document Reception
Multicopy mode
Own telephone number
Energy Saver (Night Timer and
standby mode)

H515

Other User Features


Print density control
Printing a memory file
RDS on/off
Reception Mode Switching Timer
Reception time printing
Reduction/Enlargement
Remaining memory indicator
Remote ID

Reverse Order Printing


RTI, TTI, CSI
Secure ID
Service Report Transmission
Speaker volume control
Specified Cassette Selection
Substitute reception on/off
Telephone line type
Toner Saving Mode
TTI/CIL on/off
User Function Keys (5 keys)
User Parameters
Wild Cards

X
Service
O
O
O
O
O
A or B

X
O
A or B
O
D
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
A or B
O

Reports - User-initiated
Authorized Reception List
Charge Control Report
File List
Forwarding List
Group List

O
O
X
X
X
X
O

O
O
O
X
O
X
O
A , B,
or D
A or B
O
X
O
O
F
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Reports - Automatic
Charge Control Report
Communication Failure Report
Confidential File Report
Error Report
Fax On Demand Report
Memory Storage Report
Mode Change Report
Polling Clear Report
Polling Reserve Report
Polling Result Report
Power Failure Report
TCR (Journal)
Toner Cassette Order Form
Transfer Result Report
Transmission Result Report

O
O

O
X
O
A or B
O

X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
B, C
O
B, C
O
O
O
Service
A or B
A or B
X
A or B
O
O
O

1-4

SM

B, C
O
O
O
B
O
O
X
O
O

Service Mode Features


Auto Paper Select test
Back-to-back test
Bit switch programming
Book mode test
Buzzer test
Cable equalizer
Comm. parameter display
Counter check
Country code
DTMF tone test
Echo countermeasure
Effective term of service calls
Error code display
Excessive jam alarm
File Transfer
Hard Disk Utilities (Format etc.)
LCD contrast adjustment
Line error mark
Memory file printout (all files)
Modem test
NCU parameters
Operation panel test
Periodic service call
PM Call
Printer mechanism test
Printer test patterns
Programmable attenuation
Protocol dump list
RAM display/rewrite
RAM dump
RAM test
Ringer test
Scanner lamp test
Scanner mechanism test

X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

SM

Service Mode Features


Sensor initialization
Serial number
Service monitor report
Service station number
Software upload/download
SRAM data download
System parameter list
Technical data on the TCR
Thermal head parameters
Transmission Status Report
User data transfer

1-5

X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

Reports - User-initiated
Hard Disk File List
Personal Code List
Program List
Quick Dial List
Specified Cassette Selection List
Speed Dial List
TCR
Transmission Status Report
User Function List
User Parameter List

1.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items


The following table lists how the capacity of each programmable item
change after the optional function upgrade card is installed.
Standard

H515

1000
200
2000
3000
64
1000
30
200

100

1000
164
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys plus
100 Speed Dial
codes)
200
2000
164
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys plus
100 Speed Dial
codes)

256

1000

30

50

50

1-6

200
200
500
1200
64
100
9
200

64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)
Maximum number of communication
records for the TCR (Journal) stored in the
memory
Maximum number of addresses specified
for features such as Authorized Reception
and Specified Cassette Selection
Maximum number of personal codes

1000

300

Maximum number of destinations per


program
Maximum number of destinations used for
all programs
Maximum number of Auto Documents

200

200

Maximum number of memory files plus


polling rx files
Maximum number of memory files
Maximum number of destinations per file
Maximum number of destinations overall
Maximum number of pages overall
Number of Quick Dials
Number of Speed Dials
Number of Groups
Maximum number of destinations per Group
Maximum number of destinations dialed
from the ten-key pad overall
Maximum number of programs

With function
upgrade card

64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)

Item

500

SM

The following table indicates which items of optional equipment can be or


cannot be installed at the same time.
 indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installed at the
same time.
X indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot be installed at
the same time.
IC Cards
A
A: Feature Expander 2M/4M
B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD)
C: Function Upgrade Card
D: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card
E: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool
(Service Tool)

B
X

D
4
X

4
4

B
X

C
4

D
4
4

4
4

E
4
4
X
X

Other
A
A: Paper Feed Unit Type F
B: Paper Feed Unit Type S
C: 100 Sheet Cassette
D: Printer Interface
E: G4

SM

X
4
4
4

1-7

E
4
4
4

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment

1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT


1.3.1. Mechanical Components

10

11

12

13
14

15

16

17

18
H515V001.wmf

No.

Name
Laser Unit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
H515

SBU
R2 Roller
R1 Roller
Document Feed Roller
Separation Pad
Pick-up Roller
CTM (Cleaning Toner
Magazine)
Hot Roller
Hot Roller Strippers
Paper Feed-out Rollers
Fusing Pressure Roller
OPC Drum
Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
Development Unit
Paper Feed Rollers
Cassette (Standard)

Description
Consists of the LDDR (Laser Diode Driver), focusing
lens, F Lenses, hexagonal mirror motor, and other laser
optic components.
Scans the original.
Feeds the document out of the ADF.
Feeds the document across the scanner.
Feeds the document into the scanner.
Allows only one page to the ADF.
Picks up pages of the document from the document table
one at a time.
Consists of the toner cartridge, cleaning unit, used toner
tank, charge corona unit, and quenching lamp.
Heat from this roller fuses the toner to the copy paper.
Takes the paper off the hot roller after fusing.
Feeds the paper out of the printer.
Applies pressure to the paper during the fusing process.
The latent image is written on to the surface of the
organic photoconductor drum.
Applies a charge to the paper to pull the toner off the
drum and onto the copy paper.
performs the registration process.
Consists of the development roller, toner application
roller, toner supply bar, and transfer roller.
Pick up the top sheet of paper from the stack in the
cassette and feeds it into the printer.
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper.
1-8

SM

11

10

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.3.2. Electrical Components

5
4
3

12

2
1

13

14

24
23
22

15
21

16
17

18

H515V003.wmf

20

19

29
28
30

27

31
26

25

32
33

SM

1-9

H515V004.wmf

H515

1. PCBs
No.

Name

Description

27

MFDU (M-zone Facsimile


Driver Unit)

Contains the drivers for the motors, a dc-dc converter,


the energy saving mode CPU, and other drive
electronics.
Controls the machine. It contains the main CPU, flash
ROM, system RAM, etc.
Contains a relay and switches for interfacing the
machine to the network and the handset.
Controls the operation panel.

28
26
30
25
7
32

MFCE (M-zone Facsimile


Control Engine)
NCU (Network Control
Unit)
OPU (Operation Panel
Unit)
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
LDDR (Laser Diode
Driver)
Power Pack
SBU

29

Supplies power to the machine, and switches the


fusing lamp on/off.
Drives the laser diode.
Supplies the high voltages to the corona wire, transfer
roller, and development rollers.
The sensor on this board reads and converts the light
reflected from the document into an analog video
signal.

2. Motors
No.
1
23
21
4
31
33

H515

Name
Tx Motor
Main Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Hexagonal Mirror Motor
Ozone Fan Motor
Fusing Fan Motor

Description
Stepper motor, drives the scanner.
Brushless dc motor, drives the drum, fusing unit,
development unit, and CTM.
Stepper motor, drives the registration roller and the
paper feed mechanisms in the cassettes.
High-speed dc motor, drives the hexagonal mirror in
the laser printer optics.
Removes the ozone-laden air from the vicinity of the
drum, and filters out the ozone out of the machine.
Cools the interior of the machine.

1-10

SM

No.
5
9
10
6
3
17
24
16
19
18

Name
Document Sensor
B4-width Sensor
A3-width Sensor
Scan Line Sensor
Toner End Sensor
Paper Size Detector
Paper End Sensor
Registration Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor
Fusing Exit Cover Switch
Bypass Feed Sensor

15

Description
Detects the presence of a document in the feeder.
Detects the presence of a B4 width document (256mm,
10.1").
Detects the presence of an A3 width document
(297mm, 11.7").
Detects when a page is approaching the auto shading
position.
Detects when the toner has run out.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette. The
user must install the correct size actuator.
Detects when the paper cassette is empty.
Detects when paper has aproached the registration
roller.
Detects when the paper has been fed out of the printer.
Detects whether the fusing exit cover is open or closed.
Detects when a sheet of paper has been inserted into
the bypass feed slot. The registration roller will then
feed the paper a short distance into the machine to
prepare for printing.

4. Interlock Switches
No.
20
22

Name
Interlock Switches:
Fusing Unit Cover
Top/Front Cover.

Description
If the fusing unit cover is open, the +5VLD power
supply for the laser diode will be interrupted. If the top
and/or front covers are open, the interlock switch will
interrupt the +5VLD power supply for the laser diode
and the +24VD power supply for the power pack,
motors, and other components.

5. Others
No.
8
12
14
13
11
2

Name
Stamper Assy
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing Lamp
Monitor Speaker
Zener Diode

Description
Stamps a red circle on each page that has been
successfully fed through the scanner.
Interrupts the ac power to the fusing lamp if the
temperature of the thermostat surface exceeds 400C.
Monitors the temperature at the hot roller surface.
Heat from the lamp will heat the fuser roller to fuse the
toner to the paper.
Allows the user to listen to the condition of the
telephone line.
Ensures that the charge given to the drum by the
charge corona wire does not exceed -750 volts.

6. Optional Equipment
No.
40

SM

Name
Counter

Description
Counts the number of prints.

1-11

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

3. Sensors

39

40
42

38

41

43
37
36
44
35

45

34

46
47
H515V510.wmf

No.

Name
Printer Interface

37

IC Card (Upper Slot)


42
43

IC Card (Lower Slot)


100 Sheet Cassette

44

Paper Feed Units


34
35
36

H515

G4 Interface (CiG4)
Microphone jack for the
Fax On Demand kit
RS232C Interface Board

Description
Allows the machine to be connected to a computer as
a laser printer. The following components are part of
the printer interface unit. (Refer to the Printer
Interfaces service manual for details.)
38 - Controller Board
39 - Interface Board
An IC card inserted into this slot will increase the SAF
memory capacity. Either a 2 MB or 4 MB DRAM card,
or an 80 MB hard disk (41) can be installed.
Either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand
Card can be installed.
Increases the paper capacity by 100 sheets.
The following components part of the 100 sheet
cassette.
45 - Paper Size Detector
46 - Paper End Sensor
47 - Paper Feed Clutch
The machine can have up to two paper feed units.
Each unit will increase the paper capacity of the
machine by 500 sheets.
This interfaces the machine with an ISDN network.
Allows the users to record their own voice messages
for Fax On Demand applications.
Allows the machine to be connected to a computer as
an external fax device.
This option may not be available in some countries.

1-12

SM

Function
Upgrade
Card

Feature
Expander
2M

Feature
Expander
4M

HDD
Interface

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

Fax On
Demand
Card

80MB HDD

Bus Interface

IC Card
(Type A)

IC Card
(Type B)

Lower Slot

RS232C
Interface

Upper Slot

Parallel Interface
Serial Interface

CiG4-SV
G4 Interface

DRAM
(2MB)

MFCE

Flash ROM
(2MB)

SRAM
(128kB)

SCP

Voice
A/D
Converter

CG ROM
(512kB)

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

Video SRAM
(24kB)

VPP4F

LPC

R144EFXL
Modem

SBU

Microphone
(FOD)

MFDU

LDDR
Laser Synch.

Hybrid IC

Printer
Interface

EXIO1
EXIO2

NCU

DTMF
Receiver

Speaker

Power
Saver CPU

Sensors

DC/DC
Converter

PSU

Clutches

Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor

MFPD

Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter

Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components

100 Sheet
Cassette

Operation
Panel

PFUs
H515V501.wmf

SM

1-13

H515

1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL


The MFCE (M-zone Facsimile Control Engine) contains most of the logical
components for overall system control, and direct interfaces to the IC cards,
an RS232C interface*, and a G4 interface (CiG4-SV). The MFDU (M-zone
Facsimile Drive Unit) contains the interfaces to the power supply, sensors,
drive components, and optional equipment.
* The RS232C interface may not be available in some countries.

There are two CPUs in the machine: the main CPU (SCP) on the MFCE
board and the energy saver CPU on the MFDU board. In energy saver
mode, the main CPU will be switched off and the energy saver CPU is used.
The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can be
updated through either an IC card slot or from the remote control center
using RDS (Remote Diagnostic System).
The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fonts
used on the display and in reports.
The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, work
area, and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80
MB with the installation of either an IC memory card or a hard disk.
The 128 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. The capacity
can be increased by an additional 512 kB with the installation of the Function
Upgrade card. The SRAMs are battery backed-up.
The MFCE board has two IC card slots.
The upper IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:
Feature Expander Type 140 - 2M (2 MB DRAM)
Feature Expander Type 140 - 4M (4 MB DRAM)
Feature Expander Type 140 - 80M (Hard disk interface with 1 MB
DRAM and 32kB SRAM*)
The lower IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:
Fax On Demand Card (512 kB SRAM*)
Function Upgrade Card (256 kB Flash ROM and 512 kB SRAM*)
Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)
* The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turned off or the
machine goes into the 2-watt energy saver mode (referred to as Level 2 energy saver mode
in section 2-3). However, the data in the SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is disconnected from the machine. Whenever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card is
removed for the use of the service tool, perform the instructions listed in section 4-1 to avoid
any data loss.

H515

1-14

SM

1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.5.1. Transmission (PSTN)

CiG4
CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Pa ge
Memory

ECM
Memory

Modem

NCU

To
PSTN

VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F


LDDR: Laser H515V502.wmf
Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit
Immediate Transmission:
The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data will undergo the
analog/digital video processing, the data is then sent to the DCR block in the
SCP through the DCMMR for compression.
The compressed data will then be sent to either the FIFO memory or the
ECM memory, before it is sent to the telephone line through the modem.
Memory Transmission:
The processed video data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block in
the SCP, where the data is compressed into MMR format or kept as raw
data. The data is then stored in the SAF memory.
At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress the
data from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress the data again
for transmission. The compressed data will be passed to either the FIFO
memory or the ECM memory, then to the telephone line through the modem.
Parallel Memory Transmission:
This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memory
and to send the same document simultaneously.
The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and will
send a copy of the data through the modem at the same time.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.

SM

1-15

H515

1.5.2. Reception (PSTN)

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

CiG4
CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Page
Memory

ECM
Memory

Modem

NCU

From
PSTN

H515V503.wmf
VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F
LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit

Data from the line will pass through the NCU to the modem. After the modem
demodulates the data, it will pass through either the FIFO memory or the
ECM memory. The data is then sent to the DCR block of the SCP chip to be
decompressed.
At the same time, the demodulated data is also sent to the SAF memory as
a backup, in case of a mechanical failure during printing. (This is known as
substituted reception.)
The decompressed data will then be sent to the page memory for printing.
After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent to
the LDDR through the LCP for printing.

H515

1-16

SM

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

CiG4

To
ISDN

CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Modem

Page
Memory

ECM
Memory

NCU

G3
G4
VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F
LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
H515V504.wmf
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit

G4 Immediate Transmission:
The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data undergoes the
analog/digital video processing, and is there sent to the DCR block in the
SCP through the DCMMR for compression.
The DCR block will then compress the data into MMR format, and will be
sent to the CiG4-SV board for G4 transmission.
G4 Memory Transmission:
The video processed data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block in
the SCP, where the data is compressed into the MMR format or kept as raw
data, it will then be stored in the SAF memory.
At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress the
data from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress it again into
the MMR format. The MMR compressed data will then be sent to the
CiG4-SV board for transmission.
G3 Transmission over an ISDN:
The analog data is converted into PCM (Pulse Coded Modulation) format in
the codec, it is then sent over the ISDN.
Parallel Memory Transmission:
This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memory
and to transmit the same document simultaneously.
The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and will
send a copy of the data through the CiG4 board.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.

SM

1-17

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.5.3. Transmission (ISDN)

1.5.4. Reception (ISDN)

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

From
ISDN

CiG4
CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Modem

Page
Memory

ECM
Memory

NCU

H515V505.wmf

VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F


LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit

G4 Reception:
Data from the ISDN line is first sent to the SAF memory. The data will then
be decompressed at the DCR block in the SCP, and will be sent to the page
memory.
After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent to
the LDDR through the LCP for printing.
G3 Reception from the ISDN:
Data from the ISDN line first will be sent to the modem through the codec,
where it is converted into an analog signal. After the modem demodulates
the data, the DCR block in the SCP will decompress the data from either the
FIFO or the ECM memory.
At the same time, a copy of the demodulated data is backed up in the SAF
memory, in case of mechanical problems during printing (this is known as
substitute reception).
The decompressed data is then passed to the page memory for printing.
After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent to
the LDDR through the LCP for printing.

H515

1-18

SM

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

CiG4
CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Modem

Page
Memory

ECM
Memory

NCU

H515V506.wmf

VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F


LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit
Single copy
The scanned data is sent to the page memory after video processing in the
VPP4F. After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is
sent to the LDDR through the LIF block.
Multi-page copy
The scanned data will be sent to the SAF memory after video processing
(VPP4F) and compression (DCMMR). After all the pages have been stored
in the SAF memory, the data is sent to the DCMMR block again for
decompression, then it is sent to the page memory for printing.

SM

1-19

H515

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.5.5. Copying

1.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface

Scanner

VPP4F

SAF
Memory

Buffer
Memory

CiG4
CiG4-SV

MFCE

CODEC
Line Buffer

DCMMR
SCP

Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)

DCR

LPC

FIFO

Modem

Page
Memory

ECM
Memory

NCU

H515V507.wmf
VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F
LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit

After a page of data has been stored in the printer interfaces page memory,
the data is sent to the LDDR through the LCP.
The page memory on the MFCE is not used when printing from the optional
printer interface.

H515

1-20

SM

1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION

+5V

CiG4

+24V
-9V

Top/Front
Cover

Fusing Exit
Cover

+5V
+5VD
+5VBAT

+5VLD

Memory Card/
HDD Interface

100 Sheet
Cassette

+5V
(HDD I/F only)

+24VD

F1

FOD/
Function Up grade
Card

+5V
+5VD
+12VP

SCP
(CPU)

+24V
+12VP
-9V

Interlock
Switches

+5V
+12VP

MFCE

+24VM
+5V

+24VMON

RS232C
I/F

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.6.1. Distribution Diagram

MFDU

+24VM

Optional
Equipment

+5V

AC LIne

AC Inlet

+24VM
+5V

PFU

PSU
F1
+24V

Main
Switch
F2

+5V

AC Switching + 2 4 V
Circuit

+12VP

DC/DC

+5V

+24VM
Polygonal Mirror Motor
Main Motor
Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Ozone Fan Motor
Power Pack
Clutches

-9V

DC/DC

+5VE

Power Saver
CPU

PFU

DC/DC

+5VE

+24VD

Lamp Stabilizer
Stamper
Quenching Lamp
Fusing Fan Motor
Mechanical Counter
Machanical Counter

+12.4V

DC/DC

Fusing Lamp
Control

+24VD

+24VM
+5V

+5V

WAKEUP

+24V
+5VE

+12.4V

+5V
+5VE
-9V

+5VLD

+5V

NCU

SBU

Operation
Panel

LDDR

Sensors

+24V
+5V
Printer
I/F

H515V508.wmf

The PSU supplies +24V dc power to the FDU, and supplies ac power to the
fusing lamp directly.
The FDU converts the +24V dc power supply to the following supplies.

SM

1-21

H515

Power Supply
+24V
+24VD
+24VM
+12.4V

+12VP

+5V
+5VE
+5VLD

+5VD

+5VBAT

-9V

H515

Description
Normally on when the main switch is on.
Supplies +24V to the fusing unit on/off switching circuit. It is interrupted
if the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the motors and power pack. This is interrupted by the main
CPU while the machine is in energy saver mode. It is also interrupted if
the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the SBU. It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down by
the energy saver CPU.
Supplied to the Flash ROMs on the MFCE and the optional IC cards,
and it is used only when rewriting the contents in the Flash ROM.
It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down by the energy saver
CPU.
Interrupted by the energy saver CPU when the machine is in Level 2
(2-watts) energy saver mode.
Used when the machine monitors activation signals from the NCU,
document feeder, or operation panel when the machine is in energy
saving mode.
Supplies the laser diode. It is interrupted if the fusing exit cover interlock
switch or the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the DRAM and the optional SAF memory card on the MFCE to
back up the stored data for one hour, if the power is switched off (if data
is stored). A rechargeable battery on the MFDU is used to generate
+5VD while the machine is turned off.
Supplies the system RAM and the real time clock inside the SCP on the
MFCE while the machine is turned off. A lithium battery is used to
generate +5VBAT while the machine is turned off. See section 1.6.2 for
details.
Supplies the CiG4 board through the MFCE. It is interrupted when the
+5V supply is shut down by the energy saver CPU. See section 1.6.2
for details.

1-22

SM

MFDU

MFCE

+5VD

DRAM (SAF)
IC Memory Card

CN1-16

+5V

1VDET
1SAFFLG
CN1-13

+5V

[C]

OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit

+5VE

SCP
CPU

5RTCCS

[B]

RTC
+5VBAT

SRAM

CN1-17
+5VE

+5V

Voltage
Detector

Q7/Q25

DC/DC

1VDET

SW2

1SAFFLG

BAT1 [A]

BAT1 [D]

H515V509.wmf

1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup


+5VBAT supplies the SRAM, which contains system parameters and
programmed telephone numbers, and the real time clock (RTC) inside the
SCP.
While the machine is on, even in an energy saver mode, the +5VBAT supply
is generated from the +5VE signal [B].
While the machine is turned off, the lithium battery (BAT1 on the MFCE [A])
is used as the +5VBAT supply.
The signal 5RTCCS informs the main CPU whether the back-up power
(+5VBAT) is being supplied from the battery or from the +5V power supply. If
the power is coming from the battery, the main CPU is disabled.

SM

1-23

H515

2. DRAM Backup
While the machine is on, the +5VD supply, which generated from the +5V
signal, supplies the DRAM.
In energy saver mode level 2, the energy saver CPU will disable the +5V
supply if there is no data in the DRAM. However, if there is data in the
DRAM, the +5V supply will not be disabled, and +5VD will continue to supply
the DRAM. If the machine has a hard disk, the +5V supply will only be killed
if there are no received fax messages or fax messages for transmission on
the disk.
While the machine is turned off, the rechargeable battery ([D] BAT1 on the
MFDU) will supply the voltage to the SAF memory. It can back up the DRAM
for an hour.
The battery [D] will generate about 3 volts (max. 3.2 volts). The dc/dc
converter will pump up this voltage to 5 volts so it can be used for DRAM
backup. The CPU will monitor the voltage of the +5VD supply with the
1VDET signal. When the battery has run down to 4.4 volts, the CPU will stop
the dc/dc converter by dropping 1SAFFG to low, stopping the DRAM backup.
Note that recharging the battery [D] takes one or two days after it has been
discharged.
Cross-reference
Energy Saver Modes: Section 2.3.1

H515

1-24

SM

DETAILED SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. SCANNER
2.1.1. Mechanisms

[A]

[B]

[C]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

1. Document Detection

[D]

H515D002.wmf

H516D500.wmf

The machine will detect when a document has been placed in the ADF and
the documents width is monitored by the document sensor [A], the B4 width
sensor [B], and the A3 width sensor [C].
The sensors will determine the document width as shown in the table below.
Document
Size
A4/
Letter
B4
A3/
Double Letter

Document
Sensor

B4-width
Sensor

A3-width
Sensor

On

Off

Off

On

On

Off

On

On

On

Actual Document Width


Range
Less than 235 mm
(Less than 9.25")
235 mm to 268 mm
(9.25" to 10.55")
More than 268 mm
(More than 10.55")

The fold-down extension [D] is used to support longer documents.

SM

2-1

H515

2. Pick-up and Separation

[F]
[D]

[A]

[E]

[B]
[C]

H515D003.wmf

Plate [A] will align the leading edges of the pages of the document. When
the tx motor starts rotating, the mechanical clutch mechanism in the ADF
roller unit will lift up the pick-up roller [B] to feed the bottom sheet of the document. Then, the feed roller [C] will feed the sheet into the scanner. The
separation rubber plate [D] will prevent the feed roller from feeding more
than one sheet at a time.
Because the line speed of the R1 roller [E] is 3 times faster than the feed
and pick-up rollers, the release mechanism [F] will release the feed and pickup rollers from the motor drive. This will cause the rollers turn at the same
speed as the R1 roller, because they are still gripping the paper.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical clutch mechanism: Group 3 Facsimile Manual, page 2-2-8

After all the pages have been scanned, the tx motor [G] will reverse direction
to move the ADF roller unit [H] down into the standby position.
[G]

[H]

H515D005.wmf

H515

2-2

SM

3. Drive Mechanism

[D]

[E]

[A]

[C]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[B]

[F]

H515D004.wmf

The tx motor [A] drives the pick-up roller [B], feed roller [C], R1 roller [D], and
R2 roller [E] through the timing belt [F].
The scanning speed for each resolution mode is as follows.
Resolution
Standard - Storage to SAF (Memory Tx or Multi-copy
mode)
Standard - Immediate Tx or Single copy mode
Detail
Fine

Scan speed (/A4)


1.47 s
2.95 s
2.95 s
5.90 s

The maximum acceptable document width is 304 mm (12.0") wide.


The maximum acceptable document page length can be adjusted to 0.6 m
(23.6"), 1.2 m (47.2"), or 14 m (46 ft). The default setting is 1.2 m.
Cross reference
Maximum document length: Scanner Switch 00, bits 2 and 3.

SM

2-3

H515

Error Conditions
The machine detects a document jam if any of the following conditions occurs.
Jam Condition
Non-feed
Incorrect sensor
conditions
Maximum document
length exceeded
Error at power on

Error during feed-out

Cover open
Manual interruption

H515

Description
The scan line sensor did not turn on within 3
seconds of the start of pre-feeding.
The scan line sensor switches on while the
document sensor is off.
The scan line sensor did not turn off after the
maximum document length had been fed.
The machine detected a document at power up.
The machine detected a document placed in the
ADF while the machine was feeding out the final
page of the document, or while attempting to feed
a jammed document just after the machine was
switched on.
The ADF cover and/or printer cover was opened
while the machine was working.
The machine detected that the Stop key was
pressed during scanning.

2-4

Error
Code
1-00

1-01
1-10

1-17

No error
code
No error
code

SM

4. Stamping

MFDU

SCP
(CPU)

+24VD

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

MFCE

CN10-6

LPC

EXIO-1

24

CN10-5

[A]

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

H515D501.wmf

The original will stop at the stamping position after the page was transmitted
(immediate transmission) or scanned into memory (memory transmission)
was successfully or unsuccessflully.
If the Stamp LED is on, the CPU will drop the voltage at CN10-5 for 500 ms
to activate the stamper solenoid [A]. Then, the original is fed out of the scanner.
If the Stamp LED is off, the machine will feed out the original without stamping.
This feature can be switched on or off by the user.

SM

2-5

H515

2.1.2. Image Scanning *

[B]

[F]

[G]

[A]

[E]

[C]

[D]
H515D006.wmf

The scanner consists of a xenon lamp [A], exposure glass [B], mirrors ([C],
[D] and [E]), lens [F], and SBU [G].
The light reflected from the document is focused onto the CCD (Charge Coupled Device) on the SBU [G] through mirrors ([C], [D] and [E]) and lens [F].
1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion
Standard: The machine will feed the document in 7.7 line/mm steps. In text
mode, it will scan in accordance with the setting of scanner bit switch 00 - bit
4. In halftone mode, it will skip every other line.

Immediate tx/ Copying


Scanning to memory

Scanner bit switch 00


Bit 4 = 0
Bit 4 = 1
Scan - 7.7 l/mm
Scan - 3.85 l/mm
Tx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm
Tx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm
(OR processed)
(Every other line is skipped)
OR processing is always
disabled.

Detail: The machine will feed and scan the document in 7.7 line/mm steps.
The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion.
Fine: The machine will feed and scan the document in 15.4 line/mm steps.
The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion. In memory transmission, if the other terminal cannot receive a message at Fine resolution,
alternate lines (even-numbered lines) are deleted before transmission.

H515

2-6

SM

2. Partial Image Scanning *

Scan Skip Length


(L1)

Scanning Area

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Scan Skip Area

Scan Length
(L2)

Top Margin (2 mm)

Bottom Margin (2 mm)


H515D504.wmf

When partial image scanning is enabled, the machine will only scan the area
"L2 "after the machine skips the area "L1".
L1 - Scan skip length
L2 - Scan length
Error Condition (Error Code 1-00)
If the scan line sensor turns off before the machine starts scanning the
document (the document is too short), the machine will detect an error.
Note: This function cannot be used with copying, immediate transmission, or
scanning an OMR sheet.
Cross Reference
Partial image scanning on/off - User parameter 06, bit 5
Programming the scan skip length and scan length - User function 74

SM

2-7

H515

3. Scanning Double-sided Documents


When this feature is enabled, the machine will scan all of the odd-numbered
pages first, then will scan the even-numbered pages. (The user has 60 seconds to prepare the even-numbered pages after the odd-numbered pages
have been scanned.)
After all pages have been scanned, the machine will sort the scanned pages
into the correct sequence inside the SAF memory.

Original Document
1

Even-numbered Pages
1

Odd-numbered Pages

6
Sorting

x
y
1

H515D505.wmf

In the example, if the last page of the original is a blank page, the machine
will send 6 pages if the user scans the last page, or will send 5 pages if the
user does not scan the last page (the machine will warn the user that the
numbers of odd and even pages do not match in this case).
The transmitted page sequence will be correct in each case.
Original Document
1

Even-numbered Pages
1

Odd-numbered Pages

Blank
2

6
Sorting

x
y
1

6
Blank

H515D506.wmf

H515

2-8

SM

The error conditions are listed below.

60 seconds has passed after


scanning all of the odd-numbered
pages.
Numbers of odd and
even-numbered pages were
different.
The Stop key was pressed during
scanning.

Machines Action
Asks the user whether the
machine can send the scanned
pages, or erase them.
Erases all the scanned pages and
prints a File Reserve Report with
an error message.
Asks the user whether the
machine can send the scanned
pages, or erase them.
Stops scanning and returns to
standby mode.

Error Code
5-21

None
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Condition
Memory overflows during
scanning.

None
None

Note: This function cannot be used with copying or immediate transmission.


Note
Scanning double-sided documents on/off can only be selected with a User Function Key.

SM

2-9

H515

2.1.3. Video Processing

SBU

MFDU

MFCE

+12.4V

CN71-2
Amp.

VIDEO
PH1B

CCD
Driver

RSB
SHB

VPP4F

CN71-7

Analog
Process

CN1-36

CN71-3

CN1-35

CN71-4

CN1-38

CN71-5

CN1-37

A/D
Conversion
Digital
Process

Video
SRAM

h515d502.wmf

CCD
A/D Conversion/
Shading Correction

No

Halftone ?
Yes

Background
Detection

Gamma Correction

MTF

MTF

Thresholding

Halftoning
Dither
or Error Diffusion

Erasure of Irregular
Dots

Halftone
Image

OR Processing

Image/Text
Separation

Text

Output

H515D503.wmf

H515

2-10

SM

2.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion


Before scanning a page, the machine will scan the shading plate and keep
the peak voltage for each pixel of the CCD. The VPP4F will first convert the
analog data into an 8-bit digital data. At the same time, the VPP4F performs
the shading correction using the peak voltage that was detected when scanning the shading plate.
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Cross-reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual, section 2-3

2.1.5. Process without Halftone


1. Background Detection

Each pixel is tested in relation to its neighbors to determine whether it


is background noise and should be deleted.

2. MTF

MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thin


lines, points, and complex characters.

3. Thresholding

Each video data element is compared against the threshold level,


which depends on the contrast selected by the user. If an element is
lighter than the threshold level, it is compared to a white (0) , otherwise
it will become a black (1).

4. Erasure of irregular dots

After being converted to white or black by the above thresholding, if an


element is irregular as compared to the surrounding pixels, it is
outputed in the opposite color. The central pixel is compared with the
surrounding eight pixels to determine whether this process is
necessary. There are ten cases, as shown below, in which conversion
is done. This will result in a noise-free and clean image.

H515D647.wmf

5. OR processing

SM

2-11

H515

When the user selects Standard or Detail resolution, the VPP4F will
perform the OR processing to convert the scanned resolution into the
resolution required for transmission.

2.1.6. Process with Halftone


1. Gamma correction

Gamma correction corrects the response of the image sensor to the


various shades in the gray scale from black to white. Also, it converts
each pixel into a 6-bit data (64 levels) for the halftone process.

2. MTF

MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thin


lines, points, and complex characters.

3. Halftone process

Each pixel is converted to six-bit data (0 - 63) using either the dither or
the error diffusion formula. At the same time, if the pixel is on a edge of
a image pattern, it is enhanced to provide a sharp outline.
Then, each pixel is thresholded with the corresponding threshold in a
dither matrix or error diffusion matrix.
2.1.7. Data Switching
When halftone is used and image/text separation is enabled, the VPP4F will
perform both the halftoning procedure and the image/text separation procedure to each pixel in parallel. At the end of these processes, the VPP4F will
choose the data from one of these processes.
Cross Reference
Scanner switches 00 to 08 for video processing parameters

H515

2-12

SM

2.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion


The machines scanner is designed in inch units, but can convert the
scanned data into mm-format, if the other terminal does not have an inchbased printer.

G3 Immediate Transmission
Rx terminals resolution
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF

Unknown

inch

mm

inch and mm

mm
inch

inch
inch

mm
inch

inch
inch

G3 Memory Transmission
If the message was scanned in inch resolution units.
Rx terminals resolution
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF

Unknown

inch

mm

inch and mm

mm
inch

inch
inch

mm
inch

inch
inch

If the message was scanned in mm resolution units.


(e.g., Messages for transfer and forwarding scanned by another terminal)
Rx terminals resolution
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF

SM

Unknown

inch

mm

inch and mm

mm
mm

inch
mm

mm
mm

mm
mm

2-13

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The following tables show the actual transmitted data resolution units in various cases.

2.2. PRINTING
2.2.1. Printing Process - Overview

H515D550.wmf

This machine uses a "write to black" system, using negative toner.


The charge corona wire supplies the drum surface a negative charge
of about -750 V.
The exposed area (latent image) on the drum lowers the voltage to
about -100 V.
The development roller carries toner to the latent image on the drum
surface. The bias voltages during printing are as follows:
Toner application roller : -700 V
Development roller: -400 V
The transfer roller pulls the toner from the drum onto the paper.
A constant current of +4 A is applied. The antistatic brush is used to
help separate the paper from the drum.
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum after the
image is transferred to the paper.
The quenching lamp reduces the negative charge on the drum to about
-50 V.

H515

2-14

SM

2.2.2. OPC Drum


[A]
[B]
[E]

[C]

H515D604.wmf

An organic photoconductor drum [A] is used in this machine. The diameter of


the drum is 30 mm. It is driven by the main motor [B] through a gear train.
The toner application roller [C], development roller [D], and transfer roller [E]
are also driven by the same gear train. The drum unit can be replaced by the
user.
2.2.3. Charge
[C]

[E]

[A]
[D]

[B]
H515D605.wmf

The CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) contains a charge corona unit. The
corona wire [A] generates negative ions when the power pack [B] applies a
constant current of -305 5 A (the voltage is about -5.3 kV). The grid plate
[C] ensures that the charge is uniformly spread out. The zener diode [D]
ensures that the charge on the drum does not exceed -750 50 V.
The charge corona unit contains a wire cleaner [E] for user maintenanace.
The ozone fan on the left hand side of the machine provides air flow to the
charge corona unit. The ozone filter (a paper filter coated with carbon)
decomposes the ozone that is generated around the drum by the corona
discharge.

H515

2-15

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[D]

Charger Leak Detection:


The machine detects a charger leak error when MFDU CN21-8 stays low for
3 seconds or more (6 seconds or more at power on) during either in standby
mode or while the corona wire is being charged. When this occurs, the
machine will warn the customer by lighting the Call Service indicator (error
code 9-17).
Charge Control

MFDU

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

+24VM

+24V

MFCE
+24VMON

CN21-1
Power
Pack

ON

CN21-3

Driver
(QA1)

SCP
(CPU)

EXIO-1
(IC3)
LPC

LEAK

EXIO-2
IC4

CN21-8
-698V
Drum

H515D510.wmf

In this machine, a higher corona wire current is used to counter black bands
on copies. The charge on the drum will exceed the zener diode voltage
because of this higher current.
The leak signal is sent if the power pack is on, and the drum is not being
properly charged.

H515

2-16

SM

2.2.4. Laser Exposure


1. Overview
[E]
[F]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[D]

[B]

[A]

[C]
H515D606.wmf

The components of the laser section are basically the same as those
described in section 4-3-3 in the Group 3 Facsimile manual. The drum [A] is
positioned in the same plane as the laser unit, so there is no need of a
second mirror to change the optical path.
POINTS TO NOTE:
The focusing lens [B] is a barrel toroidal lens.
The shield glass [C] is used to prevent toner and dust from entering the
laser optics area.
An optical fiber [D] passes the reflected laser beam to the laser sychronization detector circuit in the MFDU.
The speed of the hexagonal mirror motor [E] depends on the printing
resolution:
Mode
Fax - mm mode (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
Copy and fax - inch mode (400 x 400 dots/inch)
Printer mode (300 dpi)

Speed
10436.45 rpm
10636.45 rpm
7977.8 rpm

The strength of the beam emitted from the LD unit [F] is 5 mW at a


wavelength of 780 nm.
The dimensions of the dot on the drum are 85 m by 85 m.
The charge on the exposed areas of the drum drops to about -100 V, while
on non-exposed areas it remains at about -750 V.
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-3-3

H515

2-17

SM

2. Block Diagram
MFDU

LDDR

SCP
(CPU)

LD Enable

1-2

Laser
Diode
Controller

26-6

1-39

26-4

1-40

26-2

1-41

DATA

1-4
Control

1-6

MFCE
Laser
Diode

Mirror Motor Lock

Hexagonal
Mirror
Motor

EXIO-2
(IC4)

15-4
Mirror Motor Enable

EXIO-1
(IC3)

15-3

Fiber
Optical Fibre

PD1

LPC

Laser
Synch.
Detector

1-42

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

H515D511.wmf

The LPC on the MFCE board monitors and controls the laser diode timing
(MFDU CN26-2) and transfers data for printing to the laser diode (MFDU
CN26-4).
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: page 4-3-13

3. Error Conditions
LD Failure:
The machine will detect a LD failure when the Laser Synchronization signal
is not detected within 10 ms of the LD ready signal. When this occurs, the
machine will warn the customer by displaying the Call Service indicator
(error code 9-20). Refer to section 6.3: Service call conditions.
Mirror Motor Failure:
The machine will detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 does not
go low within 10 seconds of the hexagonal mirror motor being turned on.
The machine will also detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 goes
back to a high for 3 seconds or more during mirror motor operation. When
either error occur, the machine will warn the customer by displaying the Call
Service indicator (error code 9-23). Refer to section 6.3: Service call
conditions.

H515

2-18

SM

4. Print Density Adjustment

Print Image Density (User parameter 12, Bits 3 and 4)


Normal
Lighten
Darken
80 %
40 %
160 %
80 %
40 %
160 %
100 %
40 %
160 %
20 %
20 %
100 %

Mode
Normal
Halftone
Normal
Halftone

Copy Mode
Fax Mode

To change the pulse width, (duration) the duty cycle of the laser pulse is
changed. For example, to make the print density 40% of normal, the laser is
only kept on for 40% of the normal duration for each pixel.
5. Toner Saving Mode

[E]

[D]

[G]

[F]

H515D649.wmf

Toner saving is done by reducing the number of dots actually printed, not by
varying the development bias. In toner saving mode, the image data is
filtered through the following four-line matrix.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th

line
line
line
line

1
0
0
0

0
0
1
0

1
0
0
0

0
0
1
0

1
0
0
0

0
0
1
0

1
0
0
0

0
0
1
0

1
0
0
0

0
0
1
0

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

(1: Actual data printed, black or white; 0: Always a white pixel)

H515

2-19

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The SCP chip controls the print image density by changing the laser pulse
width to adjust the width of the dots across the page. The beam strength is
not adjusted in this model. The following table shows the relationship
between the pulse width and the image density.

Note: Toner saving mode is only used when printing fax messages and
reports. (However, toner saving is disabled when receiving a halftone mode message in NSF/NSS mode.)
When toner saving mode is selected, the print image density is
automatically set to "Normal"; because in some cases, the image
may become invisible if the Lighter setting is used.
Cross Reference
Toner Saving Mode: User parameter 12, bit 2

Edge Enhancement
In toner saving mode, the machine will print a black pixel whenever the data
changes from white to black in the main scan direction, to ensure that the
edges on the image are printed more clearly.
2.2.5. Toner Supply
[A]

[B]
[C]

H515D617.wmf

This machine uses monocomponent toner, which is composed of resin and


ferrite. The toner mixing bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner supply
roller [B]. The toner supply roller supplies the toner to the development unit.
The main motor [C] drives the toner supply mechanism through a gear train.
Toner is supplied to the development unit from the outer openings [D, E] in
the CTM. The spiral mechanism [F] on the toner supply bar distributes toner
through the development unit.
The openings in the central area of the CTM [G] allows the toner to circulate
upwards from the development unit. This circulation prevents an excessive
toner supply to the development unit and ensures that the toner remains
fresh. This helps to prevent blurred images.

H515

2-20

SM

Initial Toner Supply Mode


When the first CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) is installed in a new
machine, the machine will automatically supply toner to the development unit
for 90 seconds. This function will be automatically performed after a RAM
reset level 1 or 2 is performed.

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The initial toner supply mode must be executed by a technician when the
development unit is replaced.
Cross Reference
Initial Toner Supply: RAM address 4805C8(H)
(See sections 4.5 and 5.5.5 for more details)

CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) Detection


At the following times, the machine will detect if a CTM is installed by
checking the power supply to the quenching lamp (this is part of the CTM).
At power-up.
When the machine comes back to normal mode from the Level 2
Power Saver Mode.
When the cover is opened and then closed.
The machine will disable all printing processes if a CTM is not installed.

[A]

H515D624.wmf

Toner End Detection


Toner near-end is detected by the toner end sensor [A], which is located
below the toner tank.
While the main motor is rotating, the machine will detect the toner end
condition by monitoring the output voltage from the toner end sensor . The
voltage from the sensor is close to 5 V when the toner tank is full and
becomes low when toner is almost empty.

H515

2-21

SM

MFDU

Toner Tank

MFCE
SCP
(CPU)

+5V
7-9

Toner End Sensor

EXIO-2
(IC4)

7-10

LPC

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

H515D512.wmf

Toner near-end condition: When the CPU detects a low output from the
toner end sensor for more than 30 seconds, the CPU will start to blink the
Add Toner indicator. This is the toner near-end condition.
Toner end condition: After the toner near-end condition is detected, the
machine can print 100 more sheets, then the CPU will disable all printing
operations. This is the toner end condition.
The machine will clear the toner near-end or toner end condition when the
power is switched off and back on, or when the cover is opened and closed,
and if the output from the toner end sensor goes back high again.
However, when the machine is turned off/on or when the cover is opened
and then closed, the machine requires about 30 seconds to check for a toner
near-end condition again. So, if the user prints something within this 30
seconds period without changing the CTM, the machine will allow the
printout to be made, but the print quality may be poor.
If the cover is opened and closed without installing a new toner supply, the
addional 100 sheet counter will not be reset. The counter will remain at its
previous count.

H515

2-22

SM

2.2.6. Development
[C]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[E]

[F]
[D]
H515D616.wmf

[B]
[A]

Overview
There are two rollers in the development unit: the Toner Application Roller [B]
and the Development Roller [D]. The transfer roller [F] is used to transfer
toner from the drum onto the paper.
The toner supply bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner application
roller [B]. Toner is attracted to the toner application roller because it has a
magnetic layer. As the toner application roller turns past the toner metering
blade [C], only a thin coating of negatively charged toner particles stays
adhered. (Refer to section 4-4-2 of the Group 3 Facsimile manual.)
During printing, a bias voltage of -700 V is applied to the toner application
roller and another bias voltage of -400 V is applied to the development roller.
The toner is carried from the toner application roller to the development roller
[D] by the potential difference between these two rollers.
The exposed area (latent image) on the drum surface [E] is at -100 V. The
development roller applies toner to these exposed areas on the drum as the
drum turns past the development roller.
The development roller is made of a soft rubber to ensure that it does not
damage the surface of the drum. The development roller can be ordered as
a separate spare part because it always contacts the toner application roller.
The speed ratio between the drum, development roller, and the toner
application roller is about 1 : 1 : 3. The toner application roller rotates three
times faster than the development roller, so it deposits a layer of toner three
times as thick onto the development roller. This provides a clearer image.
Also, the toner application roller rotates in the opposite direction to the
development roller, which helps to keep the toner level constant on the
development roller.

H515

2-23

SM

Development Bias
[A]

[E]

[A]

[D]
[B]

[C]

H515D619.wmf

H515D618.wmf

The power pack [A] supplies the voltages to the toner application roller [B],
toner metering blade [C], and bias brush [D], and the development roller [E].
Bias Control (During Printing)

Print Data

White

Black

Toner

GND
Drum Exposed Area

- 100V

Development Roller

- 400V

Toner Application Roller

- 700V
- 750V

Drum Surface Voltage

H515D655.wmf

A charge of -700 40 V is applied to the toner application roller, and -400


10 V is applied to the development roller. Toner transfers from the toner
application roller to the development roller and on to the laser exposed areas
on the drum, based on the voltage differences between the rollers and the
drum, as shown below.

H515

2-24

SM

Bias Control (After Each Page)

Drum
- 750 V
- 400V

Development
Roller

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

After each page, the machine


removes toner from the
development roller and returns it to
the development unit. To do this,
-400V is applied to the
development roller, but no bias is
applied to the toner application
roller.

Toner does not transfer to the


development roller at A, but will
remain on the toner application
roller when the toner passes
between the two rollers.

- 400V

Toner
Application
Roller

The remaining toner on the


develpment roller does not transfer
to the drum at B, but transfers to
the toner application roller at C.

GND

In some cases, positively charged


toner may transfer to the drum in
this condition. So, a positive
current is applied to the transfer
roller after each page, so that the positively charged toner on the
drum does not transfer to the transfer roller. (not shown).

H515D651.wmf

Toner
Toner Application Roller

GND

Development Roller

- 400V

Drum Surface Voltage

- 750 V

H515D656.wmf

H515

2-25

SM

Bias Control (Other)


At the start and the end of any print process (including the cleaning and
initial toner supply modes), -50 50 V is applied to the toner application
roller, and +250 15 V is applied to the development roller. This is to prevent
toner from transferring to the drum.
Toner

Development Roller

+250V

Drum Surface Volta ge

GND

Toner Application Roller

- 50V

H515D650.wmf

Note that the voltage difference between the toner application and
development rollers is kept the same as in printing, at 300 V. This will keep
the same amount of toner on the development roller at all times during the
complete print run.

H515

2-26

SM

Bias Control Circuit


Serial Interface
Bus Interface

MFCE

MFDU
Toner Application
Roller
Development
Roller
Transfer
Roller

Power
Pack

Bias 1
Transfer 0
Transfer 1

SCP
(CPU)

21-6
21-7
21-4

Driver
QA1

EXIO-1
(IC3)
LPC

21-5

H515D513.wmf

The CPU controls the voltages to the toner application and development
rollers using the Bias 0 and Bias 1 signals as shown in the following table.
In
Out

H515

Bias 0
Bias 1
Toner Application
Roller
Development Roller

Low
Low

High
Low

Low
High

High
High

- 700 V

- 50 V

Off

Off

-400 V

+ 250 V

-400 V

Off

2-27

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Bias 0

2.2.7. Paper Feed


1. Overview

[F]

[E]
[B]

[A]
[C]
H515D514.wmf

[D]

The standard cassette [A] holds 250 sheets and the bypass feed slot [B]
feeds 1 sheet at a time. An optional 100 sheet cassette [C] and two types of
500 sheet optional paper feed units are also available.
This machine can have up to 2 optional 500 sheet paper feed units. Refer to
the separate paper feed unit service manuals for details on the optional
paper feed units.
The registration roller [D] will rotate counter-clockwise direction when the
standard cassette is used. The registration roller will rotate in the clockwise
direction when the bypass feed slot [B] or the 100 sheet cassette is used.
When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feed
sensor [E] is turned on, and the machine will prefeed the paper into the
machine until the registration sensor [F] is turned on.
Note: The bypass feed slot can only be used for copying or for printing from
a PC (Personal Computer), when using the optional printer interface.

H515

2-28

SM

2. Paper Lift Mechanism


Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassette
[C]
[B]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[A]

[B]

[D]
H515D608.wmf

[D]

H515D609.wmf

When the cassette is installed after paper is loaded, the slide lock [A] is
pushed by the projection [B] and will become unlatched from the bottom
hook [C].
Once the slide lock is unlatched, the bottom plate is raised by the pressure
springs and the top sheet of the paper stack is pushed upward against the
corner separators [D]. This will ensure that the stack of paper is kept at the
correct height.

H515

2-29

SM

3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection


Standard Cassette/Optional Universal Cassette
The paper size detector [A] is located
at the front of the cassette. The
machine will determine the size of
the paper in the cassette by
monitoring the three microswitches in
the detector. The machine will inform
the customer with the Add Paper
indicator if the paper size cannot be
detected.

[B]

When the cassette runs out of paper,


the paper end sensor actuator [B] will
drop through a slot in the bottom
plate.

H515D610.wmf

[A]

Selectable cassette paper sizes:


USA model: Letter, Legal
Europe model: A4, A5 sideways
Asia model: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
The following diagram shows the relationship between the activated
microswitches and the selected paper size.
Microswitch USA Model
000

-----

001
010
011
100
101
110
111

Legal
----Letter
-----------------

Europe
Model
-----

Asia
Model
-----

----------------------------F/F4
A4
A4
--------A5 sideways A5 sideways

Example: Letter size paper


Microswitches
: 0: High

: 1: Low

Note: "-----" indicates that the machine detects


that a cassette is not installed.

H515D658.wmf

H515

2-30

SM

Bypass Feed Slot


This machine cannot detect paper width when the bypass feed slot is used.
The maximum feed length for bypass feed is 600 mm.
The mimimum feedable paper width is 191 mm.
[A]
Optional 100 Sheet Cassette

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The paper size detector [A] is located at


the left hand side of the 100 sheet
cassette. The microswitches operate in
the same manner as in the standard
cassette.
When the 100 sheet cassette runs out
of paper, the paper end sensor actuator
will [B] drop through a slot .
The microswitches in the cassette are
connected to the machine by connector
CN20, Located in the lower left corner
of the machine.

H515D611.wmf

[B]

Paper Size/Paper End Detection


Paper End
Paper End Sensor
Standard Cassette

MFDU
MFCE

20-5

SCP
(CPU)

25-3
Paper Size Detector
Standard Cassette

25-4
25-6

EXIO-2
(IC4)

7-1
Paper Size Detector 100
Sheet Cassette

LPC

7-2
7-4

Paper End Sensor


100 Sheet Cassette

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

7-1
Paper End

2nd Paper Feed Unit

1st Paper Feed Unit


H515D515.wmf

H515

2-31

SM

4. Pick-up and Separation


Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassettes
The pick-up and separation mechanism is a corner separator type. The
corner separators and the paper feed rollers allow only one sheet to feed at
a time.
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-5-4

The paper feed motor will start to rotate when the printer is ready for printing.
By-pass Feed Slot
There is no pick-up or separation system in the by-pass feed slot, because
only one sheet can be fed from this slot.
5. Drive Mechanism
Standard Cassette
[B]

[D]

[A]

[C]

H515D612.wmf

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism. When the
standard cassette is used, the paper feed motor will rotate in the clockwise
(CW) direction, driving the paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller
[C], as shown in the diagram.
The clutch gear box assembly [D] will only allow the semi-circular paper feed
rollers to rotate once for each sheet of paper.
While the registration roller is rotating counter-clockwise (CCW), paper
cannot be fed into the machine from the optional 100 sheet cassette or
bypass feed slot. This means that if a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass
feed slot during printing from the standard cassette, this sheet will not be fed
into the machine.

H515

2-32

SM

Bypass Feed Slot


[C]

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[B]

[A]

H515D613.wmf

When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feed
sensor [A] is turned on. The machine will rotate the paper feed motor in the
counter- clockwise (CCW) direction to prefeed the paper until the registration
sensor is turned on, or for 1 second, whichever is first. (See section 2-2-8 for
a diagram of the registration sensor.)
When the paper feed motor rotates counter-clockwise, the projection [B] will
disengage the gear [C] inside the clutch gear box assembly as shown in the
diagram. This will prevent any drive from being transmitted to the paper feed
rollers for the standard cassette.
If a sheet of paper remains in the bypass feed slot for longer than the Auto
Reset Time (System Switch 0B), the machine will automatically feed it out.
The default time is three minutes. The machine cannot print incoming fax
messages while there is a sheet of paper in the bypass feed slot. Feeding
the page out after the Auto Reset time allows incoming faxes to be printed
even if someone had left paper in the by-pass feed slot.
Sheets of paper longer than 600 mm cannot be fed from the bypass feed
slot, or a paper jam will occur (error code 9-81).
Note: The bypass feed slot can be used only for copying and for printing
from a PC (Personal Computer) using the optional printer interface.

H515

2-33

SM

Optional 100 Sheet Cassette


[C]

[B]

[A]
[D]

H515D614.wmf

When the machine feeds a sheet of paper from the 100 sheet cassette, the
paper feed motor [A] rotate in the counter-clockwise (CCW) direction to drive
the paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller [C] as shown in the
diagram.
The paper feed clutch [D] in the optional 100 sheet cassette ensures that the
semi-circular paper feed rollers rotate only once for each sheet of paper.
The bypass feed slot can be used with the optional 100 sheet cassette.
Paper Feed Priority
If there is an optional cassette and/or paper feed unit installed in the
machine, the priority for paper feed is decided in accordance with the
following rules.
The paper in the bypass feed slot has the first priority (for copying and
printing from a PC only).
If the machine has optional 500 sheet paper feed units and all the cassettes contain paper of the same size, the machine will use the lower
paper feed unit first, the upper paper feed unit second, the paper in the
optional 100 sheet cassette third, and the paper in the standard cassette last.
If the cassettes contain different sizes, the machine will select the paper size as explained in section 2-2-13.

H515

2-34

SM

2.2.8. Registration

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[A]

[B]

H515D615.wmf

The registration sensor [A] is positioned above the registration roller [B].
When a cassette (Standard, Paper Feed Unit, or 100 Sheet Cassette) is
used, the machine will stop the paper feed motor for a few moments after the
registration sensor is initially turned on.
When the bypass feed slot is used, the machine will prefeed the paper into
the machine until the registration sensor is turned on (or for 1 second,
whichever comes first).
The paper feed motor start rotating immediately after laser scan starts.
When the leading edge of the paper touches the pressure rollers, the
momentum of the paper will correct any skew.

H515

2-35

SM

Jam Detection

When the
standard
cassette is used
When any of the
paper feed
stations or the
bypass feed slot
is used.

When the upper


paper feed unit is
used.

When the lower


paper feed unit is
used.

When the bypass


feed slot is used

When the 100


sheet cassette is
used.

H515

Condition
When the registration sensor is not turned on within
2.0 seconds of the paper jam timing signal.
When the paper feed-out sensor is not turned on
within 2.6 seconds after the paper feed motor starts to
feed paper for printing (not for prefeed).
When the registration sensor is not turned off within X
seconds after it turned on.
X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds
(67.546 mm/ s : paper feed speed)
When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit is
not turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
clutch in the upper paper feed unit was switched on.
When the registration sensor in the fax machine is not
turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
motor started.
When the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit is
not turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
clutch in the lower paper feed unit was switched on.
When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit is
not turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
motor in the lower paper feed unit started.
When the registration sensor is not turned on within 2
seconds after the paper feed motor starts rotating for
printing.
(This error is not generated during prefeed, to allow
the users to change their minds after putting paper in
this slot. When the bypass feed sensor is turned on,
the machine will prefeed the paper for up to 1 second
and will stop feeding even if the registration sensor is
not turned on. If the registration sensor did not turn on
during prefeed, the machine will check for the above
error when printing starts.)
When the bypass feed sensor is not turned off within
11.9 seconds after it is turned on.
Using the same formula as above (error code 9-08), it
works out that individual sheets cannot be longer than
about 60 cm.
When the registration sensor is not turned on within
2.0 seconds of the paper feed clutch turning on.

2-36

Error Code
9-07

9-08

9-08

9-50

9-51

9-52

9-53

9-80

9-81

9-82

SM

2.2.9. Transfer and Separation

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[B]

[A]
H515D620.wmf

Instead of using a transfer corona wire, this machine uses a transfer roller,
which comes in contact with the drum surface of the drum.
A constant current of +4 0.2 A is applied to the transfer roller [A] from the
power pack [B]. The positively biased transfer roller pulls negatively charged
toner off the drum. The combination of the curvature of the drum and the
antistatic brush are used to cause the paper to drop away from the drum for
paper separation.

H515D653.wmf

Temperature and humidity have less effect on the supply of ions when the
transfer current is held constant. With a constant voltage, ions may dissipate
in some conditions.

H515

2-37

SM

Cleaning Mode
If the paper size is smaller than the printed image, or if a paper jam occurs
during printing, toner may be transferred onto the surface of the transfer
roller. To prevent this toner from transferring onto the back side of copies, the
transfer roller has to be cleaned before the next printing run.
While the machine is in the cleaning mode, the power pack will supply
-1000V 50 V to the transfer roller, and will charge the drum to -750 V. The
negatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back onto
the drum.
The machine will automatically perform the cleaning mode procedure in the
following conditions:
At power on (when the fusing temperature reaches half of the standby
temperature).
When the cover is opened and then closed during the printing process.
After a printer jam has been cleared.
After the bypass feed slot has been used (each page). This will only be
done if printer switch 00 bit 3 is set to 1.
The CPU controls the transfer roller voltage through the power pack using
the Transfer 0 and Transfer 1 signals as shown below (for a circuit diagram,
see Bias Control Circuit in section 2-2-6).

In
Out

H515

Transfer 0
Transfer 1
Transfer Roller

Low
Low
+ 4 A

High
Low
- 1000 V

2-38

Low
High
Off

High
High
Off

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Timing Chart: Cleaning Mode

Corona

H515D663.wmf

Before the cleaning mode starts, the main motor, charge corona, and
quenching lamp are turned on.
T1. Cleaning bias of -1000V is applied to the transfer roller.
T2. A positive constant current of + 4 0.2 A is applied to the transfer roller
to transfer back to the drum any toner which is positively charged by the
transfer roller.

H515

2-39

SM

2.2.10. Cleaning
[E]

[B]

[C]
[A]

[D]

H515D621.wmf

The cleaning unit and the used toner tank are contained in the CTM,
(Cleaning Toner Magazine).
The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the
image is transferred to the paper. A magnetic roller [B] will transfer the used
toner into the used toner tank [D]. The mylar blade [C] will scrape the toner
off the magnetic roller and into the used toner tank [D].
When the CTM is removed from the machine, the cleaning roller cover [E] is
closed by a spring. This will prevent the removed toner from falling out of the
unit.
There is no used toner overflow detection mechanism because the used
toner tank is large enough for the lifetime of the installed CTM.

H515

2-40

SM

2.2.11. Fusing
Fusing Lamp Control
When the main switch is turned on, the machine will turn on the fusing lamp
to raise the fusing temperature to 80 C in about 4 seconds. For printing, the
machine raises the fusing temperature to 190 C.
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

When the Energy Saver Key is pressed or the energy saver timer expires,
the machine will go into a energy saver mode. In the Level 2 Energy Saver
Mode the fusing lamp is turned off. The user can select to keep the fusing
lamp off or at 80C during Energy Saver Mode Level 1.
Cross Reference:
Energy Saver Modes: Section 2-3

If the printing operation continues for more than 3 minutes, the machine
keeps the fusing temperature at 180C.
Points to Note:
Standby temperature: 80 C
Printing start temperature: 165 C
Printing temperature: 190 C
Thermistor maximum: 250 C (monitored by a comparator)
Thermostat maximum: 150 C (the temperature of the hot roller would
be about 400 C)

5 minutes (= Power saver timer)


3 minutes

Temperature

190C
180C

175C

165C = Print ready

Print Start

80C
or
Room Tem p

80C

Power ON

Ring
Detection
or
Copy Start

Room temp.
Fusing
ON
OFF

H515D654.wmf

H515

2-41

SM

Fusing Control
MFCE

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

SCP
(CPU)

CN1-22

CN1-24

LPC

Thermistor Output

CN1-27

CN1-23
1HTSAFE

ADCL

ADCH

CN1-26

VPP4F
(A/D Converter)

PSU
EXIO-1
(IC3)

CN12-1
CN12-2

MFDU

Fusing Lamp
Control

EXIO-2
(IC4)
Thermostat

Comparator

Thermofuse
Fusing Lamp
Thermistor
Initial Detection On/Off

H515D516.wmf

During normal operation, the CPU controls the fusing lamp based on input
from the thermistor using the above circuit.
When the machine is turned on, or when it comes back from the Level 2
Energy Saver Mode, it will determine if the thermistor circuit is intact by
temporarily closing the initial detect switch circuit on the MFDU. If the
thermistor is connected properly, the machine will begin its normal operation.
If it is not, an Auto Service Call (error code 9-22, sub-code 09) will be
generated.
As a backup safety measure, when the temperature of the hot roller reaches
about 400 C, the thermostat will open.
The machine will turn on the cooling fan when the fusing temperature
reaches 120 C. It is turned the cooling fan off when the fusing temperature
drops below 120 C.

H515

2-42

SM

Fusing Unit Drive

H515D622.wmf

[B]

The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train. The paper
feed-out sensor [B] detects when the paper has been fed out of the unit.

Jam Detection - Paper Feed Out


The machine will detect a paper jam when the paper feed-out sensor is not
turned off within X seconds or more after it is turned on (Error Code 9-09).
X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds
(67.546 mm/s is the paper feed speed)

H515

2-43

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

[A]

Fusing Unit Service Call Conditions


Conditions
At power on

Standby mode

During
printing

After printing

At any time

H515

If there is any problem with the thermistor.


(This detection is also done when the machine comes
back to the normal mode from Energy Saver Mode
Level 2.)
If the fusing temperature stays below the standby
temperature for more than 18 seconds when fusing
lamp ON is selected in Energy Saver Mode Level 1.
If the fusing temperature takes more than 40 seconds to
reach 165C from the standby temperature.
If the fusing temperature stays above 190C for more
than 60 seconds.
If the fusing temperature stays below 140 C for more
than 1 seconds during printing.
If the fusing temperature takes more than 20 minutes to
go down to 100C when the machine goes into Energy
Saver Mode Level 1.
When fusing lamp OFF is selected for Energy Saver
Mode Level 1.
When fusing lamp ON is selected for Energy Saver
Mode Level 1.
If the fusing temperature reaches 250C.

2-44

Error Code
(9-22)
Sub-code 09

Sub-code 05

Sub-code 02
Sub-code 01
Sub-code 07

Sub-code 03
Sub-code 04
Sub-code 08

SM

2.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction


Incoming pages that are only slightly longer than the copy paper may be
reduced in the sub-scan direction. Whether or not this occurs, depends on
the settings of printer switches 04 and 05. (Refer to section 4.2.3)

If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 1 (Enabled), the data will be reduced in the


page memory to fit on the copy paper. However, data will only be reduced if
the length of the incoming page is between 5 mm shorter and the selected
maximum length. This maximum incoming page length that can be reduced
is depended on the copy paper size and on the reduction ratio that is stored
in printer switches 04 and 05.
Each paper size can be programmed with a separate reduction ratio. In each
of the two bit switches, there is one bit for each possible paper size. The
combination of the bit settings determines the ratio for that paper size.
Bit No.

Bit 7

Bit 6

Switch
No.

Not
used

Sw 04
Sw 05

Not
used

0: 4/3
0:

Bit 5

Bit 4
F, F4

Legal
1: 4/3
0:

Bit 3
A4

0: 8/7
1:

Bit 2

Bit 1
Not
used

Bit 0
A5
sideways

Letter
1: 12/11
1:

The following table shows the maximum incoming page length that can be
reduced for each copy paper size. All length are in millimeters. The factory
setting of the reduction ratio is 4/3.
Lines/mm mode
Copy Type

Printable
Page Length

Letter
Legal

279.2 mm
355.6 mm

Maximum reducible incoming page length.


Ratio = 4/3
Ratio = 8/7
Ratio= 12/11
365.2 mm
313.0 mm
298.7 mm
467.0 mm
400.3 mm
382.1 mm

Lines/inch mode
Paper Type

Printable
Page Length

Letter
Legal

279.4 mm
355.6 mm

H515

Maximum reducible incoming page length.


Ratio = 4/3
Ratio = 8/7
Ratio= 12/11
365.8 mm
313.4 mm
299.2 mm
467.4 mm
400.6 mm
382.3 mm

2-45

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Reduction Enabled

Incoming pages that are longer than the maximum length will not be
reduced, but will be printed on two pages and treated in accordance with the
setting of bit 1 of printer switch 00. If this bit is 1, the bottom few lines of the
page will be repeated onto the top of the second page.
Reduction Disabled
If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 0 (Disabled), the data will not be reduced.
However, if the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the
excess portion will not printed. The value of x can be from 0 to 15 mm. It is
determined by the setting of bits 4 to 7 of printer switch 03.
Hex value
0
0

Value of X
0
1
and so on until

15

Messages that are more than x mm longer than the copy paper will be
printed on two pages in accordance with the setting of bit 1 of printer switch
00 as explained earlier.

H515

2-46

SM

2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing


The machine can use both inch and mm resolution units for printing. If the
resolution unit detection is enabled, the machine will choose the right
resolution unit for printing, as requested by the remote terminal, during the
exchange of protocol signals. (Refer to the table.)
Unknown
mm
inch

inch
inch
inch

mm
mm
inch

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Tx terminals resolution unit


Resolution unit
ON
detection
OFF

Cross reference
Resolution unit detection on/off - Printer switch 00, bit 7

2.2.14. Paper Size Selection


If the machine has the optional 100 sheet cassette and/or an optional 500
sheet paper feed unit installed, the paper size to use is decided using the
following rules.
If all the cassettes contain paper of the same size, the machine will use
the paper in the lower paper feed unit first, the paper in the upper paper
feed unit second, the paper in the 100 sheet cassette third, and the paper in the standard cassette last.
If the received page has to be split up and printed on two pages, both
pages will be the same size.
If the cassettes contain different sizes, the paper size chosen for printing the received fax message is selected in accordance with the following table of priorities. The table assumes that reduction is enabled and
that the reduction ratio is 4/3.
Received Fax
Message Size
A5 Sideways
Letter
A4
F, F4
Legal

A5 sideways
1
5(SR)
5(SR)
5(SR)
5(SR)

Letter
2
1
4(R)
4(R)
4(R)

Selected Paper Size


A4
F, F4
3
4
2
3
1
2
3(R)
1
3(R)
2(R)

Legal
5
4
3
2
1

The paper size priority is graded from 1 to 5.


S: The data has to be separated and printed on more than one
page.
R: The data is reduced to fit on the printer paper.
Some of the reports can be printed on A5 paper without page
separation. However, if only A5 paper is in the cassettes, reports
that need larger paper sizes will require page separation.

H515

2-47

SM

2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES


2.3.1. Energy Saver Modes

WAKEUP

MFCE

+5VE

+24VM

COMMAND

Energy Saver
CPU
(IC1)

STATUS

ON/OFF

+24VMON

+24VM

PSU

EXIO--2
(IC4)

SCP
(Main CPU)

Motors,
Clutches
and
Power Pack

+5VE

MFDU

Document Sensor

RESET

LPC

Q6 and Q13

EXRING

Energy Saver Key

Top/Front Cover
Interlock Switch

24

+5V

Energy Saver
LED

+24VD

Q2, Q3 and Q14

+5VE

DC/DC
Converter
(+24/+5V)

+5V

HOOK0/1

Ring Detection
Circuit

5
+5VE

Current Sensor
(Europe/Asia)

NCU

Operation Panel

H515D520.wmf

The machine has three levels of energy saver mode as shown below.

Main CPU
Energy Saver CPU
Energy Saver LED
LCD/LED
+5V Power Supply
+24VM Power Supply
Fusing Lamp
+24VM Power Supply

Normal
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

Level 0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
80 C or OFF
ON

Level 1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
80 C or OFF
ON

Level 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

In energy saver mode levels 0 and 1, the main CPU monitors and controls
the system. The fusing lamp is either turned off or kept at the standby temperature, depending on the setting of User Parameter Switch 05, bits 6 and
7.
In energy saver mode level 2 (also known as the 2-watt energy saver mode),
the main CPU and dc power supplies are shut down. The energy saver CPU
monitors the energy saver key, incoming calls, and the document sensor.
When the energy saver CPU detects an activity at any one of the conditions,
it activates the +5V supply with the WAKEUP signal to start up the main
CPU and other power supplies (+5VLD, +12.4V, +12VP, and -9V).
The following sections will explain how the machine uses these three
modes. Note: Energy saver mode will not operate if a printer interface, a G4
interface, or an RS232C interface is installed.

H515

2-48

SM

1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode


The flow chart on the next page will explain how the machine goes into a energy saver mode, depending on parameter settings and other machine
conditions.

- Energy Saver Timer When the energy saver timer expires (default value - 5 minutes) since the
last time a condition #1 operation was detected (see the flow chart), the machine will automatically go into a Energy Saver Mode. See the points
marked 1 on the flow chart.
Cross Reference
Energy saver timer initial setting: System Switch 0B, bits 2 and 3
(1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or Unlimited: Timer disabled)

- Energy Saver Key When the energy saver key is pressed, the machine will check if there are
any background operations in progress (these are the condition #2 operations on the flow chart). If there are none, the machine will automatically go
into a Energy Saver Mode. See point 2 on the flow chart.
Which Energy Saver Mode is Selected?
If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to maintain the fusing lamp at the standby temperature during Energy Saver Mode, the machine will enter Energy Saver
Mode Level 1. See point 3 on the flow chart.
If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to keep the fusing lamp off during Energy Saver
Mode, the machine checks for events listed on the flow chart as condition #3
events (see point 4 on the flow chart). If none exist, the machine will go to Energy Saver Level 2. If one or more condition exist, the machine will enter
Energy Saver Level 1 until all of the conditions are cleared. Then it will go to
the Energy Saver Level 2.
See the next flow chart for more details on how the machine changes from
Level 1 to Level 2.
Cross Reference
Fusing lamp control during Energy Saver Mode: User Switch 05, bit 6
(On at standby temperature, or Off)

Note
The "optional equipment" in condition #3 is either a Printer Interface, a G4 interface, or a
RS232C Interface.

SM

2-49

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Entering Energy Saver Mode from Standby

Standby Mode

System SW 0B
Bit 2,3

Unlimited
T=1, 3, or 5 minutes

Other

Key pressed
Original detected
Handset off-hook

Timer=T
Yes

Condition #1
No

If key was pressed


in the above
condition.

Energy Saver
Key ?

Energy Saver
Key ?

No

Yes
No

Yes

No

Condition #2

Timer=0

OR

Machine is in operation.
Machine is in a service call
condition.
Machine is in a service
mode operation.

Yes

Yes
OR

No

Energy Saver Mode


Level 1

User SW 05
Bit 6

Standby Temperature

LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User Sw 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

Fusing Lamp=OFF

Condition #3

No

Energy Saver Mode


Level 2
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON

Energy Saver Mode


Level 1

Yes

Mechanical Errors (Jam, Toner


end, Paper end, etc.)
Original detected
Communication Error
NCU Off Hook
Optional Equipment Installed
Memory 100%
Tx File/Polling Rx File Exists

Yes

No

Condition #4

Condition #3 all
cleared.

H515D626.wmf

H515

2-50

SM

2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode

The machine will not go into Level 2 energy saver mode if any of the following conditions exists.
Either a tx/rx/polling file is stored in the memory.
SAF memory not empty
Mechanical error(s)
NCU off-hook
Optional equipment installed (a printer interface, a G4 interface, or an
RS232C interface)
If there is a tx file in the memory
The machine will stay in Energy Saver Mode Level 1 until the programmed
time to send the message. The machine will then enter Level 0 while the
message is being sent. See point 1 on the flow chart.
When the Energy Saver timer expires
When the energy saver timer expires after the machine entered Level 1 for
the first time (or, if a tx file was present, after the message was transmitted),
the machine will enter Level 2 if both of the following conditions are met:
User Switch 05, bit 6 specifies Fusing Lamp Off
No condition #1 restrictions exist.
See point 2 on the flow chart.

SM

2-51

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The flow chart on the next page shows in more detail how the machine goes
from Energy Saver Mode Level 1 to Level 2.

Energy Saver Mode


Level 1
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User SW 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF
System SW 0B Bit 2,3
T=1, 3, or 5 minutes

Tx file in
memory ?

Timer=T

No

Yes
No
No

Tx time ?

Timer=0
Yes

Yes

User SW 05
Bit 6

Energy Saver Mode


Level 0
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User SW 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

No

OR

Fusing Lamp=OFF

Condition #1

No

Message Transmission

Yes

Mechanical Errors
Original detected
Communication Error
NCU Off-Hook
Optional Equipment Installed
Memory 100%
Tx File/Polling Rx File Exists

Energy Saver Mode


Level 2
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON

H515D627.wmf

H515

2-52

SM

3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode


The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine receives a fax
message while it is in a energy saver mode.

While the machine is in a Energy Saver mode, the energy saver CPU monitors ringing signals from the line. When the energy saver CPU has detected
two consecutive ringing signals, it activates the +5V supply to the main CPU
and will pass the ring detection process to the main CPU.
After the main CPU has detected a ringing signal, the machine will go to Energy Saver Mode Level 0 and receive the fax into memory. Level 0 mode
looks the same as the previous mode for users, but all of the system components are active in the background for receiving a fax message.
See point 1 on the flow chart.
Printing
If either of the following conditions is not met (condition #1 on the flow chart),
the machine will print out the fax message and then return to the Energy
Saver Mode in the manner described in the previous two flow charts at this
section.
Energy Saver mode is activated during the Night Timer period
The machine is currently in the Night Timer period.
If both conditions are met, the machine will return to the Energy Saver Mode
as described at the previous two flow charts at this section. It will print the fax
message after the Night Timer expires.
See point 2 on the flow chart.
Cross Reference
Night Timer On/Off: User Function 62
Programming the Night Timer period: User Function 72

SM

2-53

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Ring Detection

Energy Saver Mode


Level 2

Energy Saver Mode


Level 1

LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON

LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User SW 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

No

Ring Detection

Yes

Energy Saver Mode


Level 0
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

Memory Reception

Energy Saver Mode is enabled by


User Function 62, and the machine
is in a Night Timer period.

Condition #1

No

Fusing Heat-up
Message Printout

Yes

Energy Saving
Mode Program

H515D628.wmf

H515

2-54

SM

4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode


The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine wakes up from energy saver mode upon a manual operation, and how it will return back to a
energy saver mode.

While the machine is in a energy saver mode, either the energy saver CPU
(Level 2) or the main CPU (Level 1) monitors signals from the following (condition #1 on the flow chart).
Energy saver key
Document sensor
Off-hook detector on the NCU
When a signal from any one of the listed conditions have been detected, the
CPU will wake up all of the components and the machine will enter its normal operating mode, even during the Night Timer period.
After operations have been finished, the machine will return back to a energy
saver mode as explained in the previous sections.

SM

2-55

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Manual Wakeup Conditions

Energy Saver Mode


Level 2

Energy Saver Mode


Level 1

LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON

LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User SW 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

No

Condition #1
Energy Saver key pressed
Document set in ADF
NCU off-hook

Yes

Normal Mode
LCD=ON
LED=ON
Fusing=ON
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF

Phone communication
Fax transmission
Making copies
etc.

No

Operation
Finished ?
Yes

Message received
in memory ?

Yes

Message Printout

No

Standby Mode

Energy Saving
M ode Pr ogr am

H515D629.wmf

H515

2-56

SM

2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls


1. Service Call Conditions

Service Call Conditions

9-17
9-20
9-22
9-23
9-24
None
None

Sub-code
(8003B5H)
11 or 12
21
01 to 09
31 or 32
41 or 42
None
None

None

None

None

None

Error Code

Charge corona unit failure


Laser diode failure
Fusing lamp failure
Hexagonal mirror motor failure
Main motor failure
Excessive jams in the ADF/scanner
Excessive jams in the printer
The PM counter has reached the threshold (60,000
prints)
The PM interval has expired

Cross reference
Service station number: Service Function 13
Troubleshooting: Chapter 6

SM

2-57

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

The machine makes an automatic service call when any of the following conditions occurs.

2. Excessive Jam Alarms *


OR

JAM

CALL Threshold (=6)

6
5
4
3
2

Decrement
Reset to
zero

Decrement

1
0

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

72

NO-JAM1
DEC Threshold (=16)

16
12
8

16 pages fed without jam

16 pages fed without jam

16 pages fed without jam

4
0

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

72

NO-JAM2
CLR Threshold (=48)

48
32
48 pages fed without jam

16

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

72

H515D635.wmf

The excessive jam alarm will automatically notify the service station when
the machines scanner or printer has frequently jam problems.
Both types of jams (scanner & printer) has three counters allocated to each
called JAM, NO-JAM1, and NO-JAM2. Each of the counters have a set of
threshold values called CALL, DEC, and CLR respectively. (the values can
be adjusted.) The machine will use these counters to monitor both types of
jams as follows.
Each time a jam occurs: The JAM counter is increased by 1, and both the
NO-JAM1 and NO-JAM2 counters are set to zero. When the JAM counter
reaches CALL value (6 by default), the machine will send an Auto Service
Report with a System Parameter List to the programmed service station.
If a sheet of paper is fed without a jam occuring: Both the NO-JAM1 and
NO-JAM2 counters are incremented by 1. When the NO-JAM1 counter
reaches the DEC value (16 by default), the NO-JAM1 counter is set to zero,
and the JAM counter is decremented by 1. When the NO-JAM2 counter
reaches the CLR value (48 by default), both the NO-JAM2 and JAM counters are reset to zero.
The CALL, DEC, and CLR threshold values can be adjusted for each type of
jam by rewriting RAM data. The addresses of these thresholds are listed on
the following page. The listed default values above are examples only.

H515

2-58

SM

DEC (1 - 255; 0 = Disabled)


CALL (3 - 15; 0 = Disabled)
CLR
(Low)
(High)

Counters
JAM: Jam counter used to place a
service call
NO-JAM1: Counter used for JAM
counter decrement
NO-JAM2: Counter used for
clearing the JAM counter

Address (H)
ADF
Printer
48027E
480282
48027F
480283
480280
480284
480281
480285

Initial
Settings

Sys. Para.
List

10 (H)
06 (H)
30 (H)
00 (H)

X
Y

Address (H)
ADF
Printer

Sys. Para. List

480277

48027B

480276

48027A

480278 (Low)
480279 (High)

48027C (Low)
48027D (High)

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Parameters

The System Parameter List shows a complete list of jam counters.


The system parameter list gives the current setting for the values of the DEC
and CALL thresholds and the JAM counter values are listed as X, Y, and Z respectively. (Refer to section 4.1.2, System Parameter List.
The Call Service indicator will not light for an excessive jam alarm and the
machine can be operated normally after the automatic service call has been
made. Also, the counters related to the jam location are automatically reset
to zero after the call. The alarm is then disabled until either bit 3 (ADF jams)
or bit 4 (printer jams) of address 4805B0(H) is reset to zero.
3. Periodic Service Call
The periodic service call will notify the condition of the machine to the programmed service station. If this feature is enabled, the call is made
periodically, at a time interval programmed in the following RAM addresses.
Parameters
Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD)
00: Periodic Service Call Disabled
Date and time of the next call
Year: last two digits of the year (BCD)
Month: 01 through 12 (BCD)
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD)
Hour: 00 through 23 (BCD)

Address (H)
480379
48037A
48037B
48037C
48037D

To change the settings after programming, change the call interval. The machine will automatically change the remaining parameters by referring to the
interval and the current date and time.
The Call Service indicator will not light for a periodic service call and the machine can be operated normally after the service call had been sent.

SM

2-59

H515

4. PM (Periodic Maintenance) Call


If PM call featue is enabled, the machine will make an automatic service call
when the PM counter reaches the PM threshold.
Program the PM call interval at the following RAM addresses.
(Default setting: 60,000 sheets)
Address (H)
48021C
48021D
48021E

Bits 7 - 4
Tens
Thousands
Hundred thousands

Bits 3 - 0
Units
Hundreds
Ten thousands

Cross reference
PM call enable/disable: System switch 01, bit 0

The Call Service indicator will not light for a PM service call, and the machine can be operated normally after it has made the service call.
5. Effective Term of Service Calls
If a time limit for the effectiveness of service calls is programmed, the machine stops making automatic service calls after the time limit.
Program the time limit at the following addresses. This function is disabled
when all of these addresses are 00(H).

Year: last two digits of the year (BCD)


Month: 01 through 12 (BCD)
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD)

H515

2-60

Address (H)
480383
480384
480385

SM

2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission

The following table shows the differences between normal memory transmission and parallel memory transmission.

File Reserve Report


If the other terminal is busy

If transmission failed
If memory overflows during
scanning

If a document jam occurred


during scanning
How and when the scanned
message is erased from
memory
Memory threshold to start
scanning into memory
Meaning of the stamp mark
Batch numbering (P. x/x)

SM

Memory tx
Printed, if automatic report
printout is enabled.
Tries to resend the
message later.
Tries to resend the
remaining pages later.
Stops scanning and erases
all the scanned pages from
memory, if the user agrees
to erase them.

Stops scanning and deletes


all the scanned pages from
memory.
The complete message is
erased after all the pages
have been sent.
Depends on the setting of
communication switch 0D.
Default setting - 24kB
Successfully scanned.
Enabled

2-61

Parallel memory tx
Not printed.
Continues scanning the
document into memory, and
tries to resend it later.
Tries to resend the
remaining pages later.
Stops scanning and hangs
up the communication when
memory overflow is
detected. Then erases all
the scanned pages from
memory without notice.
Stops scanning and hangs
up the communication when
a document jam is detected.
Each page is erased after
the page has been
successfully sent.
Depends on the setting of
system switch 10.
Default setting - 512 kB
Successfully scanned.
Not available unless the
number of pages is
programmed manually.

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

When using the memory transmission, normally the machine will start dialing after the document has been completely scanned. When using the
Parallel Memory Transmission, the machine will start to dial at the same time
the machine starts scanning. If the document has multiple pages, the machine will scan the pages into memory and at the same time will send them.

In the following cases, the machine will use normal memory transmission
even if parallel memory transmission is enabled.
Send later transmission
Broadcasting
Transmission of an Auto Document only
File re-transmission from the hard disk filing system
Double-sided document transmission
Partial image transmission (if parallel memory tx is enabled, partial image scanning cannot be used)
Transfer request transmission
If the other terminal is busy
If an external telephone connected to the machine is in use
When communication switch 0A, bit 0 is set to 0 (See section 4.2.4.)
When remaining memory space is less than the threshold (default =
512 kB)
Using G4 transmission, parallel memory transmission is normally disabled
because the transmission speed is much faster than the scanning speed.
Transmission using parallel memory transmission is about twice as long as
normal memory transmission (using an ITU-T #1 test chart).
However, if the document contains pages with complicated images or when
sending a photo document using halftone, using parallel memory transmission may be faster than normal memory transmission.
If the user commonly sends this type of fax message, enable parallel memory transmission for G4 transmission by changing system switch 11, bit 7 to
1.

Cross Reference
Parallel memory tx (G3) On/Off
- User parameter 07, bit 2
Parallel memory tx (G4) On/Off
- System switch 11, bit 7
Memory threshold for enabling parallel memory tx - System switch 10, bits 0 to 7
Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing
- Communication switch 0A, bit 0

H515

2-62

SM

2.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting

In a transfer broadcasting operation, the transfer requester informs its own


fax number to the transfer station. The transfer station uses that number to
identify the requesters fax number, which the transfer station must dial to
send the transfer result report back to the requester.
Transmission of the transfer result report and selection of the number to dial
depends on the following three settings.
Setting
Conditions required for transfer result
report transmission
Action when there is no fax number in the
programmed Quick/Speed dials which
matches the requesters own fax number
Number of digits compared to find the
requesters fax number from the
programmed Quick/Speed dials.

Switch
Communication switch 0B, bit 3
0: Always
1: If there is an error
Communication switch 0B, bit 5
0: Transfer cancelled
1: Transfer continued
Communication switch 0C, bits 0 to 4
(default setting = 5 digits)

The requesters fax number format is normally as follows.


[ International access code ] [ Country code ] [ Area code ] - [ Local tel. no.]
A Pause (-) must be programmed between area code and local tel. no.
Before the machine transfers the message, the machine compares the last
few digits of the requesters own fax number with all the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials as shown in the diagram on the next page, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dial codes. (The default setting for the
number of digits compared is 5; see the above table.)
If the machine finds a number in which the compared digits match those of
the requesters own fax number, the machine will choose the number as the
destination for sending the report back. However, depending on the number
of digits compared, the machine may choose the wrong destination, as
shown in the example diagram on the next page.
Note that the machine does not compare the following:
Pause (-)
ISDN sub-address (/aaaa, aaaa is a sub-address number)
With a G4 transfer request, the G4 and G3 own fax numbers are informed
from the requester, then the machine compares the G4 number first, and the
G3 number second.

SM

2-63

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

This machine will use a new algorithm to identify the requesters fax number
to send back the transfer result report, because the transfer result report
sometimes did not reach the requester with the algorithm used in previous
models.

Example
Requester's Own Fax No.
0111201-2223456

Q01

3456

S00

Q02

020-4773456

S01

1223456
5413654

Q03

020-4776666

S02

00-4126567878
0454771748

Q04

00-81454771748

S03

No. of digits to compare

Result

Q05

2223456

S04

0634558989

Q01

Q06

00-4961969063456

S05

07474125899

Q05

Q07

0569723456

S06

00-85226356541

Q05

Q08

201-2223456

S07

00-12012223456

Q05

Q09

00-31204564569

S08

02212301564

Q08

Q10

013453456

S09

6524555

Q08

10

Q08

Q64

0875558888

11

S07

12

No match

13

No match

S99

00-496158756452

S100

With
Function Upgrade Card

2223456

S999

0454771759

H515D521.wmf

In the above example:


If the requester is within the same area, Quick Dial 05 or Quick Dial 08
is the correct destination, depending on the required dialing method for
numbers in the same country or area. The machine will select Quick
Dial 05 if it compares from 5 to 7 digits, and will select Quick Dial 08 if it
compares from 8 to 10 digits.
Or, if the requester is in another country, Speed Dial 07 is the correct
destination. The machine will select this number if it compares 11 digits.
Any setting higher than this will result in no match, due to the different
international access codes at the start of the numbers.
If the machine compares less than 4 digits, it will select Quick Dial 01.
If the number of digits to compare is set to zero, the machine will send
the report to the first Quick or Speed Dial number which a fax number
has been programmed in.
Note that the result can be changed depending on the locations where the
candidates are programmed. For example, if 00-12012223456 is programmed in Quick Dial 01, the machine always selects this number for
sending back the report, even if the transfer request is from within the same
country.
So, when programming the machine to act as a Transfer Station, the best
combination of the communication switch 0C setting and the programmed location of the requesters fax number has to be considered carefully.

H515

2-64

SM

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

If the machine can not find the destination for the report, either:
The machine will stop the transfer operation and will print a report locally (if bit 5 of communication switch 0B is 0).
The machine will continue the transfer operation and will print a result
report locally after finishing all the transfer operations (if bit 5 of communication switch 0B is 1).
Cross Reference to other parameters
ID code programming
- User function 61
Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to end receivers
- Communication switch 0B, bit 0
Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to next transfer stations
- Communication switch 0B, bit 1
Use of label insertion for the end receivers in a transfer operation
- Communication switch 0B, bit 2
Printout of the message when acting as a transfer station
- Communication switch 0B, bit 4

SM

2-65

H515

2.3.5. Fax On Demand


Fax On Demand is a polling application with pre-recorded voice assistance.
MFDU
DTMF
Receiver

MFCE
EXIO-2
(IC4)

LPC

SCP

NCU

Speaker

Microphone

HIC

Playback

Modem

Message Playback / Transmission

FOD Card
Voice A/D
Converter

Message Record

SRAM
(512kB)

Serial Interface
Bus Interface

H515D522.wmf

The machine can have up to 100 fax messages in the SAF memory for the
Fax On Demand application. Anyone who can access the machine can get
up to 5 fax messages in one polling operation using a DTMF tone sequence.
A password (Remote ID) can be used to secure the information from
unauthorized access.
The machine can have up to seven voice messages to instruct the caller
about the procedure (each message must be shorter than 30 seconds). The
voice messages are recorded using the microphone. The Voice A/D Converter on the MFCE will convert the messages into a digital format and store
them in the SRAM inside the Fax On Demand card. When playing back a
message or transmitting it to a caller, the Voice A/D Converter will convert
the digitized message back into an analog voice message and will send it to
the speaker or the NCU through the HIC on the MFDU.
The SRAM in the Fax On Demand card is backed up by a battery in the card
when the machine is turned off or when the machine is in the 2-watt (level 2)
energy saver mode.
Cross Reference
Fax On Demand On/Off - User parameter 07, bits 6 and 7
Storing Fax On Demand messages - User function 38
Voice message recording and playback - User function 75
Refer to the Operators Manual for more details.

H515

2-66

SM

Protocol Sequence

Rx

Dial

Tx

Rx

Dial

Ring Detection

Ring Detection

Message
"This is a fax service ... "

CNG

Message
"This is a fax service ... "
"1"
Box No.
Specified

"5"

No Box No.
Specified

"#"
Message

CNG

"#"
"#"

CNG/DTMF Detection

CNG/DTMF Detection

CNG

CED
NSF
DIS
Message
"Press Start ..."
CED
NSF
DIS
DIS or NSF

H515D523.wmf

After ringing detection, the machine will send a pre-recorded message, and
at the same time, will start to detect CNG signals or DTMF tones from the remote caller. The dedicated DTMF receiver on the MFDU is used to detect
both the CNG signals and DTMF tones.
If the machine detects CNG signals, the machine will go into the fax reception mode. If the machine detects the DTMF tone signals, the machine will
then send a voice prompt messages to instruct the caller what to do. After
the last message has been sent to the remote caller, the machine will go into
the fax transmission mode.
Sometimes the machine might not detect DTMF signals while the machine is transmitting a voice message. To avoid this, the messages
should instruct the caller to send DTMF signals after the message has
been finished.
While Fax On Demand is enabled, the machine will disable receiving Transfer Request using DTMF tones, because it may use the same key sequence.

SM

2-67

H515

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Tx

2.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System


If the machine has the hard disk option and a function upgrade card, the
hard disk can be used as a kind of document filing system.
The feature can be implemented in either of two ways:
Enable for specified parties only
Enable for all parties except those specified
The machine will keep fax messages that have been sent to enabled parties
and fax messages received from those parties in the hard disk.
Each filed message is given a unique cabinet number. Using this number,
the messages can be printed or resent later. Refer to the Operators Manual
for more details.
For transmission, the machine can file fax messages that were sent using
normal memory transmission. Messages that were sent using the following
features cannot be filed in the hard disk.
Parallel memory transmission Immediate transmission
Auto document
Confidential transmission
Messages sent from polling standby
Note that the machine cannot file messages that were sent using parallel
memory transmission. So, parallel memory transmission should be disabled
when using this function.
For reception, the machine can file any fax messages that were received, except the following.
Messages with a confidential ID
Messages received while Memory Lock was enabled
Messages for Transfer
If the total amount of filed messages exceeds the threshold (40 MB is the default), if the total number of filed pages exceeds 3000, or if the number of
files exceeds 500, the machine will delete files, starting from the oldest one.
Also, if a message takes up more than the 95% of the threshold (40 MB x
95% = 38 MB at default), the machine will not file it.
Cross Reference
Hard disk filing system on/off - User function 62
Programming specified parties - User function 85
Usage of specified parties - User parameter 09, bits 2 and 3
Filed message retransmission on/off - System switch 13, bit 2
Threshold memory space for this function - System bit switch 13, bits 0 and 1
Printing filed messages - User function 58
Deleting filed messages - User function 24

H515

2-68

SM

2.4. PCBs
2.4.1. MFCE

Function
Upgrade
Card

Feature
Expander
2M

Feature
Expander
4M

HDD
Interface

80MB HDD

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

Fax On
Demand
Card

IC Card
(Type B)

Lower Slot Upper Slot

CiG4-SV
G4 Interface

Serial I/F

IC Card
(Type A)

RS232C
Interface

Parallel I/F

MFDU

DRAM
(2MB)

MFCE

Flash ROM
(2MB)

SRAM
(128kB)

SCP

Voice
A/D
Converter

CG ROM
(512kB)

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

Video SRAM
(24kB)

VPP4F

LPC

R144EFXL
Modem

H515D530.wmf

1. SCP (System Control Peripheral)

CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
MMR + raw data compression for SAF storage (DCMMR)
DMA controller
Clock generation
Stepper motor control
DRAM backup control
Ringing signal/tone detection
Fusing lamp control

2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller)

Laser interface (LIF)


Voice A/D converter control
Serial interface to MFDU (EXIO and energy saver CPU)
Parallel interface to MFDU

3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL)

SM

V.21, V.27ter, V.29, V.17, and V.33 modems

2-69

H515

4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F)

Video signal and thermistor output A/D conversion


Digital video processing

5. ROM

2MB (16 Mbit) flash ROM for system software storage


512 kB (4 Mbit) mask ROM for LCD and report font storage (CGROM)

6. DRAM

2 MB DRAM shared between the Line Buffer (32 kB), ECM Buffer (128
kB), Page Memory (768 kB), and SAF memory (1 MB)
1 MB SAF memory, backed up by the battery on the MFDU
7. SRAM

128 kB SRAM for system and user parameter storage, backed up by


the battery on the MFCE

8. Video SRAM

8 kB SRAM for video processing

9. Voice A/D converter

Digital encoding of analog voice messages


Analog voice generation

10. Oscillators

42.20545 MHz oscillator for system clock generation


32.768 MHz oscillator for the real time clock. This is backed up by the
battery on the MFCE
38.00053 MHz oscillator for the VPP4F and R144EFXL modem
11. IC Card Slots

Upper slot for an optional Feature Expander (SAF memory)


Lower slot for an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand
Card

12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points


Item
SW2

H515

Description
Switches the backup battery ON/OFF

2-70

SM

Item

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

CN6

Description
Test connector for scanner adjustment
Pin 1 - Data enable clock
Pin 2 - Analog video signal
Pin 3 - Line synchronization clock
Pin 4 - Ground
Refer to section 5.11 for how to adjust the scanner.

SM

2-71

H515

2.4.2. MFDU

MFCE

SBU

Microphone
(Fax on Demand)

MFDU

LDDR
Laser Synch.

Hybrid IC

Printer
Interface

DTMF
Receiver

EXIO1
EXIO2

NCU

Speaker

Energy
Saver CPU

Sensors

DC/DC
Converter

PSU

Clutches

Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor

MFPD

Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter

Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components

100 Sheet
Cassette

Operation
Panel

PFUs
+24VD

Interlock Switches

+24VM

Parallel Interface
+24V
+5VLD

Serial Interface

+5V

H515D531.wmf

1. Energy Saver CPU

4 bit CPU for controlling the machine during energy saver mode.

2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver)

H515

Stepper motor driver.

2-72

SM

3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O)

Serial interface to the MFCE, operation panel, FPD, DTMF receiver,


and optional paper feed units
Parallel interface to the motors, clutches, sensors, and other electrical
components
4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC)
2-4 wire switching
Filters and amplifiers
Monitor speaker driver

DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

5. DTMF Receiver

DTMF signal detection for Transfer Request using DTMF and Fax On
Demand operations
Serial interface to the EXIO
6. DC/DC Converters

+5V, +12.4V, +12V, and -9V generation

7. DRAM Backup

+5VD generation for DRAM (SAF memory) backup

8. Interlock Switches

The top/front cover interlock switch disables the power supply to the
drive components, the laser diode, and the power pack.
The fusing exit cover interlock switch disables the laser diode power
only.
9. Fuse and Test Points
Item
F1
TP1
TP3
TP2
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7

SM

Description
250V/5A fuse for the +24VD power supply
-9V
COM1 ground
+5VE
+5VLD from both interlock switches
+24VD from the top/front cover interlock switch
Laser synchronization signal
+24V input from the PSU

2-73

H515

2.4.3. PSU

+24Vdc generation

F1

ACL

Main
Switch

F2
+24V

AC
Input
ACN

Surge
Protection

Surge
Protection

Switching
Circuit

PSU

Interlock
Switch

COM3

GND
+24VD

Fusing Lamp
Output

1HTORON

HTL

1HTON

Fusing
Control

HTN

H515D532.wmf

Fusing lamp ac power supply and control

2.4.4. NCU (USA)

JP5

TIP

OHDISW

RING

TRXD

24
V

Current
Sensor

JP6

OHDISW

NCU
Hook0
Hook1

T1

ExRing

R1

Ring Detect

24V

T1
Ext. Tel
DP/Off-Hook
Detection

R1
Relay

ExDI

H515D633.wmf

1. Jumpers
Item
JP5
JP6

H515

Description
These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is being tested in
back-to-back mode. Also set G3 switch 00 bit 7 to 1. (See section 4.2.5.)
Be sure to return these setting to default after testing is completed.

2-74

SM

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE
Refer to the Operators manual for the installation environment and how to
install and set up the machine.

Items to Program (Service Level)


Country code (NCU parameter 00)
Country code (System switch 0F)
Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B)
PABX access code (RAM address 4800BB)
PABX access method (RAM address 4800AD)
Machines serial number
Service stations fax number
PM call (System switch 01 - bit 0)
Periodic service call (RAM address 480379)

Function No.
Function 08
Function 01
Function 01
Function 06
Function 06
Function 14
Function 13
Function 01
Function 06

Items to Program (User Administrator Level)


Clock
Initial programming items (IDs)
On/off switches
Display/report language
Fusing power control during energy saver mode
(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)

Function No.
Function 91
Function 61
Function 62
Function 93

SM

3-1

Function 63

H515

INSTALLATION

3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING

3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

+CAUTION

Before installing optional units, perform the following:


1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system
parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.
3.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk)
Notes
Before installing the Hard Disk Unit, remove the optional Printer Interface Unit, if previously installed, Refer to service manual, section 3.3.5.
Printer Interface. On completion, re-install the printer interface unit.

After the hard disk unit is installed (steps 1 to 5 below) and the power
is initially turned on (step 6), the machine will give the appearance of
being dead. The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED indicators will be off and the machine will not accept key entries. This is
the correct condition for a newly installed hard disk unit.

[A]

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4
screws), the left cover [B] (3
screws and the connector
cover), and the IC card slot
cover [C] as shown.
[B]

[C]
H515I501.wmf

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the


hard disk unit [E] (4 screws).
Hook the grounding plate [F]
onto the bracket [D] and secure
the hard disk unit as shown.

[D]

[F]

H515

3-2

[E]

H515I502.wmf

SM

3. Set the battery switch [G] on the hard disk interface card to the ON
position.
4. Connect the harness [J] to the
hard disk interface card (red wire
towards the connector end) and
the hard disk unit (red wire
towards the top of the unit).
Insert the hard disk interface card
into the upper card slot.

[K]

[G]

[H]
H515I503.wmf

6. Turn on the power switch. The machine will appear to be dead.


The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED indicators Will
be off and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition for a newly installed hard disk unit.
Wait a full minute to allow the machine to properly initialize the hard
disk. DO NOT turn the power off or depress a key.
7. A. If after the one minute delay, the display panel is properly lit, proceed
directly to step 9.
B. If after a full minute has passed and the display panel remains blank,
proceed to step 8.
8.

A. Turn the machine off and disconnect the hard disk connector, CN77
(Blue Connector) from the MFDU board and turn the machine back on
.
B. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Hard Drive.
Initialization Procedure (Function 16). Refer to the service manual,
section 4.1.26.
C. Turn the machine off and re-connect the hard disk connector, CN77
(Blue Connector).
D. Turn the machine on and proceed to step 9.

9. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Bit Switch
Programming Procedure (Function 01). Set the System Switch 05, bit 4
to a 1. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.
10. Turn the Power switch off and after several seconds, turn the power
switch on.
Note: The hard disk was pre-formatted at the factory. It is not necessary to
perform Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16, section
4.1.27).

SM

3-3

H515

INSTALLATION

Note: The top four (4) pins (two per


row) on the hard disk unit are [J]
not used.
[I]
5. Connect the harness [K] (2 pins)
from the hard disk interface card
to the connector CN77 on the MFDU board.

11 Perform the following checks to ensure that the hard disk was properly
installed and initialized:
A. With the machine is the Standby Mode, ensure that the displayed
memory indicator on the Operation Panel is 100%.
B. Enter the Service Level Functions and print a copy of Group 3
System Parameter List (Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.2.
Ensure that HD (Hard Disk) is listed under PARAMETER (installed
options) and System Switch 05, bit 4 is set to a 1.
C. Print a RAM Dump (Function 06) of the address range of 700000(H)
to 7000FF(H). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.7. Note
the title on the printout is Memory Dump not RAM Dump.
Ensure that the following address locations contains the values listed
below. If any of the listed address locations contain a different value,
perform the Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16). Refer to
the Service Manual, section 4.1.27
70001E(H) - 50(H)

700022(H) - 00(H)

70001F(H) - 00(H)

700023(H) - 50(H)

700020(H) - FF(H)

700024(H) - 00(H)

700021(H) - FF(H)

700025(H) - 80(H)

12. Re-install the rear cover and the left cover.


13. Re-install the Printer Interface Unit, if removed. Refer to the Service
Manual, section 3.3.5.

+CAUTION

The hard disk interface card contains a lithium battery. The danger of
explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.

H515

3-4

SM

3.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface


Note: Before installing the ISDN G4 interface, remove the printer interface
unit, if precioulsy installed. Refer to the Service Manual section 3.3.5,
"Printer Interface"
Installation Procedure
[A]

[B]

2. Connect the ISDN board [D] to


the MFCE through the interface
connector [E] as shown.

[C]

H515I504.wmf

3. Secure the ISDN board [D] to the


machine with 2 screws and the
support holder [F] (1 screw).

[D]

4. Re-install the rear cover and the


left cover. Connect the phone
line cable.

[E]

[F]

H515I505.wmf

5. .Plug in the machine and turn on


the main switch.
6. Program the items required for
ISDN G4 communication with
user function 61 and service
function 17.
Refer to the ISDN Option Type
140 Service Manual for details.

H515I506.WMF

SM

3-5

H515

INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4


screws), and the left cover [B] (3
screws and the connector cover).
Then, remove the small cover [C]
from the rear cover as shown.

3.3.3. Fax on Demand


CAUTION: Before installing the Fax on Demand option, review all of
the precautions listed below.
1. The Fax on Demand card can only be inserted into the lower slot
because thepin configuration of the slots are not compatible.
The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are located
directly under each other. Example: o o o o o o o ------ o o o
o o o o o o o ------ o o o
The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pins
are adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o
o o o o o o o ----- o o o
2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install the battery
and turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting the card
into the machine.
3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to 1.
4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 0, each time that the card is removed and
re-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased.
When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), then
power off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform a
initialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.
5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 1, during the procedure listed
above, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The stored
data will not be erased.
6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - remove
card - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.
The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be off
and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition of turning on the machine without the card installed.
With System 16, bit 0 set to "1", at power on, the machine will look for
the installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, the
machine will lock up (appear to be dead).
Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,
insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.

H515

3-6

SM

7. The Fax on Demand card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT be
used in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the Service
Manual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.
The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the same
machine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine will
recognize that a different card was installed and will perform a
initialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.

With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will
look for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card but
will recognize that it is not the original card. The machine will
perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data
in the new card to allow the operator to load new data.
When the operator inserts the original Fax on Demand card into
the machine (power off - remove Function Upgrade card - insert
Fax on Demand card - power on). As indicated above, the machine will look for a card in the lower slot but again will recognize
that is a different card. Again, the machine will perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new card
to allow the operator to load new data.
At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of the
stored data in both the Fax on Demand and the Function Upgrade cards.
8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and the
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. The
machine will not perform the initialization procedure. When the original
Fax on Demand card is re- inserted, the stored data will not be erased.

SM

3-7

H515

INSTALLATION

Example: The Fax on Demand card initially installed and data is stored in
the card. The operator removes the Fax on Demand card and inserts a previously loaded the Function Upgrade card (power off remove Fax on Demand card - insert Function Upgrade card power on).

Installation Procedure
1. Turn the main switch off.
2 Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws and the IC card slot cover [B].
3. Remove the NCU cover [C] (1 screw) and install the FAX on Demand
feature cover [C]. Connect the harness [D] to CN73 on the MFDU board
as shown.
[A]

3. Install the battery into the IC card


and turn the battery switch to the
on position.
4. Insert the IC card [E] into the
lower slot and re-install the rear
cover. Connect the microphone
socket [F] into the NCU cover as
shown.
5. Turn on the main switch.
6. Enter the Service Level Function
and perform the Bit Switch
Programming Procedure
(Function 01). Set the System
Bit Switch 16, bit 0 to a 1.
Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.1.

[C]

[D]

[B]

H515I507.wmf

7. Perform the following checks to


ensure that the Fax on Demand
feature was properly installed
and initialized. Enter the Service
Level Functions and print a copy
of the Group 3 System
Parameter List (Function 02).
Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.2.

[E]

[F]
H515I508.wmf

Ensure that FOD (Fax on Demand) is listed under PARAMETER


(installed options) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a 1.
8. Refer the Operators Manual, page 226 for the programming procedures
for the Fax on Demand feature.

+CAUTION

The IC card contains a lithium battery.


The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

H515

3-8

SM

3.3.4. Counter

Note: Before installing the counter, remove the printer interface unit, if
previously installed. Refer to the
Service Manual, section 3.3.5. "Printer
Interface"
Installation Procedure

[B]
[A]
H515I509.wmf

[D]

2. Install the counter [C] as shown.

[C]

3. Connect the harness [D] to the


MFDU board, then re-install the
rear cover [A] (2 screws).

4. Plug in the machine and turn on


the main switch.

5. Make some copies and confirm


that the counter advances. If not,
check the harness connection
from the counter to the MFDU
board.

SM

H515I510.wmf

3-9

H515

INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rear cover [A]


(4 screws) and the small cover [B]
as shown.

3.3.5. Printer Interface


Note: Before installing the Printer Interface Unit, remove any other optional
units, if previously installed.
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4
screws) and two small covers [B]
(1 screw) and [C] as shown.

[A]

2. Attach the ground wire [D] (1


screw) to the machine and
re-install the rear cover [A] (1
screw at the lower left corner).

[D]
[B]

H515I511.wmf

[C]

3. Install two brackets [E] (2


screws) and [F] (2 screws) bottom screw of bracket [F] also
secures the rear cover as shown.
[E]

[F]
H515I512.wmf

4. Remove brackets [G] and [H] as


shown and install the new
brackets included in the kit.
[G]

H515I513.wmf

[H]

H515

3-10

SM

5. Connect the harness [I] to the


MFDU board through the lower
window in the rear cover and
secure the ground wire [J] to the
printer interface unit [K]. Hook
the printer interface unit onto the
brackets [G] and [H].

[I]

[J]

H515I514.wmf

7. Connect a parallel printer cable from the printer interface unit to the PC.
8. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
9. Confirm that the On Line indicator on the operation panel is lit. If not,
check the harness connection from the Printer Interface Unit to the
MFDU board.
10. Enter function 39 and print a
status sheet.

English
Reset
Initalize

Copy End

Continue

Feed

Reset
Initialize

Copy End

Continue

Feed

Level 1

Level 2

Exit
On Line

11. Apply decals 4 and 5 from the


decal sheet to the operation
panel as shown.

Reset
Initialize

Level 1

Continue

Copy End

Level 2

Exit
On Line

Feed

H515I515.wmf

Note: If installation of additional SIMM memory is desired, refer to the Printer


Interface Service Manual.
4

H515I516.wmf

SM

3-11

H515

INSTALLATION

[K]

6. Secure the unit [K] to the


machine (3 screws).

3.3.6. Function Upgrade


CAUTION: Before installing the Function Upgrade, review all of the
precautions listed below.
1. The Function Upgrade card can only be inserted into the lower IC card
slot because the pin configuration of the upper and lower slots are not
compatible.
The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are located
directly under each other. Example: o o o o o o o ------ o o o
o o o o o o o ------ o o o
The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pins
are adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o
o o o o o o o ----- o o o
2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install the
battery and turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting the
card into the machine.
3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to 1.
4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 0, each time that the card is removed and
re-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased.
When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), then
(power off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform a
initialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.
5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 1, during the procedure listed
above, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The stored
data will not be erased.
6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - remove
card - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.
The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be off
and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition of turning on the machine without the card installed.
With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will look for
the installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, the
machine will lock up (appear to be dead).
Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,
insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.

H515

3-12

SM

7. The Function Upgrade card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT be
used in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the Service
Manual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.
The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the same
machine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine will
recognize that a different card was installed and will perform a
initialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.

With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will
look for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card but
will recognize that it is not the original card. The machine will perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in
the new card to allow the operator to load new data.

When the operator inserts the original Function Upgrade card


into the machine (power off - remove Fax on Demand card - insert Function Upgrade card - power on). As indicated above, the
machine will look a card in the lower slot but again will recognize
that is a different card. The machine will again perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new card
to allow the operator to load new data.
At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of the
previously stored data in both the original Function Upgrade and
the Fax on Demand cards.
8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and the
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. The machine
will not perform the initialization procedure. When the original Function
Upgrade card is re-inserted, the stored data will not be erased.

SM

3-13

H515

INSTALLATION

Example: The Function Upgrade card initially installed and data is stored in
The card. The operator removes the Function Upgrade card and
inserts a previously loaded the Fax on Demand card (power off remove Function Upgrade card - insert Fax on Demand card power on).

Installation Procedure
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Remove the IC card slot cover.
3. Install the battery into the IC card and turn the battery switch to the on
position.
4. Insert the IC card [E] into the lower IC card slot.
5. Turn on the main switch.
6. Enter the Service Level Function and perform the Bit Switch
ProgrammingProcedure (Function 01). Set the System Bit Switch 16, bit
0 to a 1. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.
7. Perform the following checks to ensure that the Function Upgrade
feature was properly installed and initialized. Enter the Service level
Functions and print a copy of the Group 3 System Parameter List
(Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.2.
Ensure that Function Card listed under PARAMETER (installed
options) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a 1.
8. Refer the Operators Manual, page 299 for the Function Upgrade
programming procedure.

H515

3-14

SM

SERVICE TABLES AND


PROCEDURES

SM

4-A

H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

H515

4-B

SM

SM

4-C

H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

H515

4-D

SM

SM

4-E

H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

H515

4-F

SM

SM

4-G

H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

H515

4-H

SM

SM

4-I

H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4. SERVICE TABLES & PROCEDURES


4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS *
In this section, frequently
symbols.
- Start key
 - Function key
 - Yes key
- Up arrow key
- Right arrow key

used keys are referred to with the following


 - Stop key
 - No key
- Down arrow key

- Left arrow key

4.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01)

1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

BIT SWITCH
NO: _
0.SYSTEM 1.SCANNER 2.PRINTER
PLOTER
COMMUNICATE
3.G3
4.COMMUNICATION

3. To see the system bit switches: 


To see the scanner switches: 
To see the printer switches: 
To see the G3 switches: 

To see the communication switches: 


Example: Press 

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000

4. Scroll through the bit switches.


Increment bit switch:

Decrement bit switch:

Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

5. Adjust the bit switch.


Example: To change the value of bit 7,
press 

SM

4-1

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the units


electronic DIP switches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2. current
and default settings are listed on the system parameter list. (section4.1.2.)

6. Either:
Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.
Finish -  

4.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02)


The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and service
programmed setting of the machine. The listing includes the IDs settings,
the counters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BIT
Switches. Refer to the sample printout in section 4.8.1 and 4.8.2.
1.

      
then immediately 

2.

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE



NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

G3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST


PRESS

START
NO

3.

TO CANCEL

Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.
Name
SCN
TX
PM

Meaning
Scanned page counter
Transmitted page counter
PM counter

Name
PRT
RX
PM Default

PCU

Printed page counter using


the current master drum
Scanned page counter
using the ADF
Paper feed counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper feed counter
(Second paper feed unit)
Paper feed counter
(By-pass feeder)
Paper jam counter (total)
Paper jam counter (Jams at
the registration area)
Paper jam counter
(First paper feed unit)
Paper jam counter
(100-sheet cassette)
Printed page counter from
the PC printer interface
Reserved for future use.
Reserved for future use.

COPY

ADF
MAIN
Cassette
Cassette 3
BY-PASS
COPY JAM
PAPER JAM
CST 2 JAM
OPEN CST
JAM
PRN
PPC2
PPC4

H515

4-2

TONER
Cassette 2
OPEN
Cassette
DOC. JAM
EJECT JAM
MAIN CST
JAM
CST 3 JAM

Meaning
Printed page counter
Received page counter
Default setting for the PM
service call interval
Copied page counter
Printed page counter using
the current CTM
Paper feed counter
(First paper feed unit)
Paper feed counter
(100 sheet cassette)
Document jam counter

BY-PASS
JAM
PPC1

Fusing exit jam counter


Paper jam counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper jam counter
(Second paper feed unit)
Paper jam counter
(By-pass feeder)
Reserved for future use.

PPC3

Reserved for future use.

SM

A sample system parameter list is given below.

SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) *

* *
TTI

SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)


ROM VER.
[Version]
[Software release no.]
[Software release date]
ROM NO.
[Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]
R T I
T T I
C S I
CONFIDENTIAL ID
ID CODE
MEMORY LOCK ID
NUMBER
OWN NUMBER
OWN NUMBER(ISDN G4)
OWN NUMBER(ISDN G3)
SERVICE NUMBER
NCU PARAMETER

COUNTER

PRINTER INTERFACE
G4

Optional memory card or Hard Disk installed


Optional paper feed unit installed
Optional paper feed unit installed
Optional function upgrade card or Fax on demand kit
installed
- Optional printer interface installed
- Optional ISDN G4 kit installed

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

PARAMETER
SCAN THRESHOLD
2MB, 4MB or HD
CASSETTE 2
CASSETTE 3
FUNCTION CARD or FOD

SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)


(SWUSR) - User Parameter Settings

SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)


(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings

(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings

(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings

(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings

(SWG3)

- G3 Bit Switch Settings

H515M550.wmf

SM

4-3

H515

4.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03)


This function will allow the technician to display and scroll through the error
codes, if any, that had occured in the machine. The displayed message will
also include the time and date that each error had occured.
1.        ,

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 



2.

ERROR CODE
CODE=0-14

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

JAN

3:15PM

3. Either:

Scroll through the error codes - or


Finish -  

4.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04)


This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occured in
the machine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report will
include the time and date that each error had occurred.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

SERVICE MONITOR REPORT


PRESS

START
NO

TO CANCEL

3.
4.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05)
This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that were
exchanged during the last communication. Refer to the sample printout in
section 4.8.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST


PRESS

START
NO

TO CANCEL

3.

H515

4-4

SM

4.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06)


This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selected
address location and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data is
displayed in hexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed in
the RAM dump printout, refer to section 4.8.2. The function of each address is
described in sections 4-3 and 4-5.
1.       

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

RAM

3. 

MEMORY R/W

4. Input the address that you wish to see.


Example: Address 480020

MEMORY R/W

5. If you wish to change the data, move the

MEMORY R/W

0.MEMORY R/W

NO: _
1.MEMORY DUMP

ADDRESS= 000000

ADDRESS= 480020

DATA=2E

DATA=00

cursor to the data field: press

Example: 80, press  

DATA= 00

MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020

6. Type in the new data.

ADDRESS= 480020

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES



DATA= 80

7. Either:

View the previous address - press .


View the next address - press .
Finish -  

4.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06)


This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in the
selected address location. The function of each address is described in
sections 4-3 and 4-5. The current listing of each setting can be printed by
performing the RAM Dump Procedure. Refer to the sample printout in
section 4.8.2. Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, not
RAM Dump.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

2.  

SM

4-5

H515

NO: _

RAM
0.MEMORY R/W

3. 

1.MEMORY DUMP

MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.

FFH

4. Enter the first four digits of the start and


end addresses.
Example: Start at 480000, end at 4801FF.



MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH

5.

4.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07)


This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. The
current totals of the counters are also listed on the system parameter list.
Refer to the sample printout. in section 4.8.1.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

COUNTER R/W

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

0.COUNTER

1.PM COUNTER

2.CTM COUNTER

3.PCU COUNTER

COUNTER
TX : 000000
RX : 000000

SCN: 000000

3. Either:
Check the transmitted, received,
scanned and printed page counters, and
the printer and scanner jam counters press 

Check the PM counter - press 

Check the CTM counter - press 


Check the OPU counter - press
Example: Press

PRT: 000000

4. To change the contents of a counter,


input the new value, then press

.

5. To finish:  

H515

4-6

SM

4.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08)


This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modem
signals.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA

3. 

1.DTMF
3.RINGER

MODEM TEST
NO.01=V21

300BPS

PRESS "START"

4. Scroll through the available tests using

or .


SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

5. To start a test:

6. To stop the test: 


7. To finish:  
4.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08)
This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten key pad.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA

3. 

1.DTMF
3.RINGER

DTMF TEST
NO.01=TONE [0]
PRESS "START"

4. Scroll through the available tests using

or .

5. To start a test:

6. To stop the test: 


7. To finish:  
SM

4-7

H515

4.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08)


This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parameters
for such as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and the
number of rings before the machine will answer an incoming call. The
current value of each address is listed on the system parameter list. Refer to
the sample printout in section 4.8.1.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA

3. 

1.DTMF
3.RINGER

NCU PARAMETER SET


C.C =019
PRESS "YES/NO"

4. Scroll through the parameters using

or . If you want to change a value,


enter the new value at the keypad,
then press  .

5. To finish :  .
Note: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level.
Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.
4.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08)
This function is not available in U.S. models.

H515

4-8

SM

4.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08)


This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA

3. 

1.DTMF
3.RINGER

RINGER TEST
PRESS START

4. To start the test:


6. To stop : 

SM

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

7. To finish:  

4-9

H515

4.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09)


The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel and
all of the LED indicatiors.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

LED.LCD
PRESS START

3. To start the test, press .


The screen should turn black.
4. To stop the test, press 
5. To finish:  

4.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10)


This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

SCANNER

3. 

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

Xe LAMP

0.Xe LAMP

NO: _
1.ADF TEST

PRESS START

4. To start the test, press


5. To stop the test, press 
6. To finish:  

H515

4-10

SM

4.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10)


The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) test
procedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted into
the ADF without perfoming an actual FAX, or copy operation.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

SCANNER

3. 

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

ADF TEST

NO: _

0.Xe LAMP

1.ADF TEST

PRESS START

4. Place a document in the feeder,


then press

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

5. To stop the test, press  .


6. Finish:  
4.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11)
The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer section
on the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section of
the machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

PRINTER

3. 

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

PATTERN

NO: _

0.PATTERN

1.AGING TEST

ENTER CODE

CODE: _
NO

4. Press a key from  to .

PATTERN
CODE: 0

TO CANCEL

SCROLL

VERTICAL
PRESS

START

5. Press .
A test pattern is printed.
6. To finish:  

SM

4-11

H515

4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free Run (Function 11)
The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, the
machine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, the
xenon lamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print a
thin diagonal line on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test,
depress the STOP key.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

PRINTER

3. 

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

MECH. TEST

NO: _

0.PATTERN

1.AGING TEST

PRESS START

4. To start the free run, press .


5. To stop the test, press  .
6. To finish: 



4.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12)


The RAM test will allow the technician to verify the operation of the SRAM
and DRAM.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM

1.DRAM

2.COPY

3. Either:
Test the SRAM:
Test the DRAM:

Press 

Press 

If test is successful, the display shows "OK!!".


If test is unsuccessful, the display shows "ADDRESS=".
4. To finish: 

H515

.

4-12

SM

4.1.20. Software Download (Function 12)


Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machines software, use this
procedure to update the software in the machines Flash ROM.
This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROM
on the machines MFCE. The external medium for the new software can be
an MFCE or an EPROM board.

+CAUTION:

DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!


If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional
Fax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then
connect the MFCE [C] or EPROM board [D] with new software to the
opposite side of the tool.
The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Note:

The EPROM board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet the following
specifications.

[D]

[B]

[A]
[E] = ON

[C]
Size: 4 Mbits
Number of pins: 32
Socket 1: ROM0, D15 - D8
Socket 3: ROM0, D7 - D0

H515M551.wmf

Data width: 8 bits


Access speed: Faster than 150 ns
Socket 2: ROM1, D15 - D8
Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0

3. Turn on the machine.


Please read the note following step 11, if ROM upgrade includes rewriting
Boot Block.

SM

4-13

H515

4.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

5.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM

1.DRAM

2.COPY

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY

7. 

1.RAM COPY

COPY
FLASH ROM

-> MACHINE

PRESS START

8.
If the software is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of the display
display shows "OK".
If the software download fails, the bottom line shows "NG".
9. To finish, press

 .

10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version on it.
Note: In rare cases, the boot block will have to be rewritten. In such cases,
you must do the following in addition to the above procedure.
After step 3, set bit 5 of system switch 02 to 1.
After step 11, reset bit 5 of system switch 02 to 0.

H515

4-14

SM

4.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12)


This procedure copies the software from the machines installed MFCE to an
external MFCE.

+CAUTION

DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!


If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional
Fax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then
connect the external MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Note:

[D] = OFF

[B]
[A]

[C]

H515M552.wmf

The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


3. Turn the machine on.
4.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

5.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM

1.DRAM

2.COPY

SM

4-15

H515

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY

7. 

1.RAM COPY

COPY
MACHINE

-> FLASH ROM


PRESS START

8.
If the software is successfully uploaded, the bottom line of the display
shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the bottom line shows "NG".
9. Finish :  
10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

H515

4-16

SM

Rev. 9/96

4.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12)


This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCE
to the machines MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to save
any previous settings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.

+CAUTION

DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!


If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional
Fax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.
NOTE: Prior to performing this function, program the same country code in
the Fax machine as the external FCE. If this cannot be done, conduct the download process twice.

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

1. Turn the machine off.


2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then
connect the damaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

[D] = OFF

[B]
[A]

[C]

H515M552.wmf

Note: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn the machine on.
4.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

SM

4-17

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

H515

5.  

NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM

1.DRAM

2.COPY

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY

7. 

1.RAM COPY

COPY
MACHINE

-> RAM
PRESS START

8.
If the SRAM data is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of the
display shows "OK".
If the SRAM download fails, the bottom line of the display shows "NG".
9. Finish :  
10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
4.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards
If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand
Card, the card must be removed from the IC card slot before performing any
of the following procedures:
Downloading/uploading software
Replacing the MFCE
Replacing the MFDU or other components
Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 as
explained in section 3.3.6, to prevent the data inside the IC card from being
accidentally initialized.
Perform the procedures as explained below, to prevent data from being
erased from the card.
Note: Refer to section 1.2.2 for the type of data that can be
programmed in the Function Upgrade Card. The data in the Fax
On Demand Card are voice messages.
The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased if
the card or the hard disk interface is removed from the machine.
1. When downloading/uploading software
1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
switch on the IC card is at the ON position.
2. Turn the machine off, and remove the IC card.
3. Connect the data copy tool and ROM board or MFCE, and perform the
required procedure as explained in section 4.1.20 or 4.1.21.
H515

4-18

SM

4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off the
machine and disconnect the tool.

+CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the
lower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been
removed and all the data programmed in the card will not be
accessable.
5. Re-insert the IC card, then turn the machine on.
6. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.
2. When replacing the MFCE
When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in the
machine must have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had,
before the IC card is put back.

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
switch on the IC card is at the ON position.
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.
Do not turn the machine on at this point.
3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained in
section 4.1.22, then turn the machine on.
4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCE
inside, as explained in section 4.1.22.
5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn the machine on
and disconnect the tool.
6. Re-insert the IC card, and turn the machine on.
Note: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at
this point, go back to step 3 again.
7. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.

SM

4-19

H515

3. When replacing the MFDU or other components


When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other components
inside the machine, follow the procedure below.
1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
switch on the IC card is at the ON position.
2. Turn the machine off, remove the IC card, and replace the required
components inside the machine.

+CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the
lower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been
removed and all the data programmed in the card will not be
accessable any more.
3. After replacement has been completed, re-install the MFCE and the IC
card, then turn the machine on.
4. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.
4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13)
1.       

SERVICE SET

2.  

S.S.NO.

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

ENTER FAX NUMBER

<G3>

NO

TO CANCEL

3. Input the telephone number of the service station that will receive Auto Service
calls from this machine.

S.S.NO.
<G3>

YES

OR

CLR

. NO

212-555-1234

To use a G4 number, press the G4 key.


To erase the telephone number: press

4. If the display is correct:  


Cross Reference
Using a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input
- Function 36, Code No = 10

H515

4-20

SM

4.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14)


This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the
machine into the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during
the feature of placing an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed
on the System Parameter List.
1.      

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

SERIAL NO.
_

3. Enter the machines serial number at the


keypad.

SERIAL NO.

To correct a mistake: 

64997244292

4. If the display is correct:  

This procedure may be performed when installing the optional hard disk.
(Refer to section 3.3.1.)
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

HD
0.INITIAL

1.FORMAT

2.TEST

3. 

FILE INITIAL
PRESS START

4.
If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.

SM

4-21

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16)

4.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16)


NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation. The disk
was pre-formated at the factory.
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

HD
0.INITIAL

1.FORMAT

2.TEST

3. 

HD FORMAT
PRESS START

4.
Formatting the hard disk takes more than 30 minutes.
If the format was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.
4.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16)
1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _

HD
0.INITIAL

1.FORMAT

2.TEST

3. 

HD TEST
PRESS START

4.
If the test was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.

H515

4-22

SM

4.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17)


1.       

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

G4

then immediately 

2.  

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _ OR

01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP

NO

02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details of
the G4 parameter programming procedures.

SM

4-23

H515

4.2. BIT SWITCHES

+WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is
not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.

Note: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to
the System Parameter List printed by the machine. (Refer to section
4.1.2 for the System Parameter List printout procedure).
4.2.1. System Switches
System Switch 00
No

FUNCTION
RAM Reset
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Reset Level
No reset
Reset Level 2
Reset Level 3
Not used

COMMENTS
Reset Level 3: Erases all image data files stored in
the SAF memory and communciation files (e.g. polling
rx file). This setting is recommended for use when it is
necessary to clear the SAF.
Reset Level 2: In addition to those items erased by
Reset Level 3, the following items are erased: own
telephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI, report
data, programmed telephone numbers (Quick/Speed/
Groups, service station, etc.), NCU parameters,
personal codes.
After erasing, the machine will automaticly change the
two bits 0 and 1 back to "0".

1
No reset: Normal operation
Cross reference
RAM Reset Level 1 (Factory reset):
Change the data in RAM address 480000(H) to FF(H),
then turn the machine off and on. In addition to those
items erased by Reset Level 2, the clock and
scan/print registration settings are erased.
Note
After a RAM reset level 1 or 2, initial toner supply will
automatically be cycled for 90 seconds.

H515

4-24

SM

System Switch 00
FUNCTION
Technical data printout on
TCR (Journal)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

COMMENTS
1: Instead of the personal code, the following data are
listed on the TCR for each analog G3 communication.
e.g. V33 14 01 03 00 02
First set of numbers: Final modem type used
Second set of numbers: Final modem rate (for
example, 14 means 14.4 kbps)
Third and fourth numbers: Line quality data. Either a
measure of the error rate or the rx level is printed,
depending on the bit 3 setting below. (An M on the
report indicates that it is error rate, and an L indicates
Rx level.) The left hand figure is the low byte and the
right hand figure is the high byte (refer to the following
note for how to read the rx level). If it is a measure of
the error rate; a larger number means more errors.
Fifth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total number
of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Sixth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total number
of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
The fifth and sixth numbers are fixed at 00 for
transmission records and ECM reception records.

How to calculate the rx level listed on the TCR (Journal)


Example: V29 96 L 01 A0 00 00
The four-digit hexadeimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by
-16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.
So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB

Line quality data output


method
0: Measure of error rate
(during image data
transmission only)
1: Rx level

This bit determines the data type to be printed on the


TCR (Journal) when the technical data printout is
enabled by bit 2 above.

Line error marks on


received pages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge of


the page at any place where a line error occured in the
data. Such errors can be caused by a noisy line.

G3/G4 Communication
parameter display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD will show the key


parameters (see the next 2 pages). This is normally
disabled because it will cancel the CSI display for the
user.
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

Protocol dump list output


after each communication
0: Off 1: On

This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It


will show the content of the transmitted facsimile
protocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after
finishing testing.

SM

4-25

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

No

System Switch 00
No

FUNCTION

Amount of protocol dump


data in one protocol dump
list printout operation
0: Up to the limit of the
memory area for protocol
dumping
1: Last communication only

COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocol
dump list of the last communication only.

G3 Communication Parameters
Mode
Modem rate

Resolution

Compression
mode
Communication
mode

Width and
reduction
I/O rate

H515

DCS: ITU-T standard


NSS: Non-standard G3
144: 14400 bps
120: 12000 bps
96: 9600 bps
72: 7200 bps
48: 4800 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
ECM: With ECM
SSC: Using SSC
EFC: Using EFC
NML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)
0: 0 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line

4-26

SM

G4 Communication Parameters

Resolution

Width and
reduction
Transfer
Confidential
Other
parameters

MMR: MMR compression


MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)
T: Transfer
- : Other
C: Confidential
- : Other
The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the first bit
from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 3 - 1: Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5 - Engine type
0: mm, 1: inch
Bit 6 - Resolution unit
0: mm, 1: inch

System Switch 01
No

1-7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

PM call
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

This bit switch will determine whether the machine will


send an Auto Service Call to the service station when
it is time for PM.
Cross reference
Auto service calls: Section 2.3.2

Not used

Do not change the settings.

System Switch 02
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS
1: All messages in the memory (including confidential
rx messages) are sent to the fax number which is
programmed as the service station.
Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.
Cross reference
Service station number programming: Function 13

Programmed data transfer


(Back-to-back)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Memory file transfer


0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Do the following steps to transfer the data.


1. Connect two machines of the same type back to
back and enable back-to-back communication on both
machines. (For this machine, set bit 7 of G3 bit switch
00 to 1.)
2. Set this switch (System Switch 02, bit 1) to 1 on the
receiving machine.
3. Insert a sheet of paper in the ADF, and press Start
on both machines. The data is transferred.
4. Disable back-to-back communication and return this
bit to 0 after finishing.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

SM

4-27

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Compression
mode

System Switch 02
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Memory file printout


0: Disabled
1: Enabled

1: All SAF files, including confidential messages, can


be printed using Function 54 or 55.
Always reset this bit after printing the messages.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Software download area


0: All except the boot block
1: All areas, including the
boot block

0: This is the normal setting. For normal software


downloads, do not change this bit switch.
1: Set this bit to 1 only when you need to rewrite the
boot block in the Flash ROM using Function 12.
Cross reference
Software Download: Section 4.1.20

5
Keep this bit at 0 except for
the rare cases when the
Flash ROM boot block has
to be rewritten.

6
7

Memory read/write by RDS


Bit 7 6
Setting
0 0
Always disabled
0 1
User selectable
1 0
User selectable
1 1
Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.


(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will automatically
be locked out again after a certain time, which is
stored in System Switch 03 (see below). Note that if
an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch off
until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.

System Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

Length of time that RDS is


temporarily switched on
when bits 6 and 7 of
System Switch 02 are set to
"User selectable"

to
7

COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to "User selectable".
The default setting is 24 hours.

System Switch 04
No
0
1
2

FUNCTION
LCD contrast
Bit 2 1 0
0 0 0
0 0 1

1 1 0
1 1 1

Contrast
Brightest

Darkest

COMMENTS
Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast of the
LCD on the operation panel.

Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit must be set to 1 before changing any


dedicated transmission parameters.

Inclusion of the Start key in


Keystroke Programs
0: Not needed
1: Needed

0: The user does not need to press the Start key when
operating a keystroke program.

H515

4-28

SM

System Switch 04
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Master drum replacement


level
0: User
1: Service

0: The machine will ask the user to replace the drum


at 30,000 print intervals (default interval).
After the user replaces the drum, the machine will ask
the user if the drum has been replaced. If the user
answers yes, the machine will reset the OPC counter
to zero. The drum replacement interval is programmed
at addresses 480228 to 48022A(H). Refer to section
4.5 for more details.
1: The machine will not ask the user to replace the
drum.

G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID
programming level
0: User level
1: Service level

1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be programmed


using a service function.
The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a Group 4
option is installed.

Telephone line type


programming mode
0: User level
1: Service level

1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulse


dial) can only be programmed using a service function.

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

SM

4-29

H515

System Switch 05
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the setting.

G4 Terminal ID length limit


0: No limit
1: Limited

1: The length of the terminal ID is limited to 7


characters.

Display of both RTI and CSI


on the LCD
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of the


protocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed after
phase C.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Hard disk option


0: Not installed
1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard disk


option.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

6
7
System Switch 06
No
0
1-6
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Use of the Stop key during


memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Memory transmissions can be stopped by pressing


the Stop key. However, users might accidentally
cancel another persons memory transmission in
progress.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

On-screen function list


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the most frequently used


function numbers will be displayed for quick reference
whenever the user presses the Function key.

System Switch 07
No
0

FUNCTION
Date of monthly Fax On
Demand report printout

to
7

COMMENTS
00 - 31 (BCD).
[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)]
[01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04
is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).

System Switch 08
No
0
to
7

H515

FUNCTION
Time of monthly Fax On
Demand report printout

COMMENTS
00 - 23 hours (BCD).
00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)
01 (BCD) - 1 am

23 (BCD) - 11 pm
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04
is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).

4-30

SM

System Switch 09
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page
of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.

Inclusion of
communications on the
TCR when no image data
was exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications which reached phase C (message


tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR
(Journal).
1: Communications which reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR (Journal).
This will include telephone calls.

Automatic error report


printout
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed.


1: Error reports will be printed automatically after each
failed communication.

Printing of the error code on


the error report
0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

Listing of Confidential IDs


on the Personal Code List
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Confidential IDs registered with Personal Codes by


the users will appear on the Personal Code List.

Power failure report


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: A power failure report will be automatically printed


after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned last off.

Not used

Do not change the setting.


This bit will determine which set of priorities the
machine will use when listing remote terminal names
on reports.

Priority given to various


types of remote terminal ID
when printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >
Tel. number
1: Dial label > Tel. number
> RTI > CSI

SM

Dial Label: The name stored with the Quick/Speed


Dial number by the user.

4-31

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Addition of part of the


image data from
confidential transmissions
on the transmission result
report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Rev. 5/96
System Switch 0A
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used.

Keep this bit at 0.

Default communication
mode
0: G3
1: G4

These bits determine the machines standby default


communication mode if a G4 option has been installed.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Continuous polling reception


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This feature will allow a series of stations to be polled


in a continuous cycle.

Dialing on the ten-key pad


when the external
telephone is off-hook
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the


external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine or a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.

On hook dial
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.

Line used for G3


transmission
0: PSTN 1: ISDN

If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bit will determine


whether G3 transmissions go out over the PSTN or
the ISDN.
This bit switch has no effect if Communication Switch
07 bit 0 is set to 0.

Line used when the


machine falls back to G3
from G4 if the other end is
not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN

System Switch 0B
No
0
1

2
3
4
to
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Automatic reset timer


Bit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit

(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.


(Other): The machine will return to the standby mode
when the timer expires after the last operation.

Energy Saver mode timer


Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit

(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.


(Other): The machine will go into an Energy Saver
mode when the timer expires after the last operation.
Cross reference
Energy Saver modes: Section 2.3.1

Not used

Do not change the settings.

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the settings.)


System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the settings.)
System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the settings.)

H515

4-32

SM

System Switch 0F
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Country code for functional settings


(Hex)

0
to
7

00: France
01: Germany
02: UK
03: Italy
04: Austria
05: Belgium
06: Denmark
07: Finland
08: Ireland
09: Norway
0A: Sweden
0B: Switz.
0C: Portugal
0D: Holland
0E: Spain
0F: Israel

10: Not used


11: USA
12: Asia
13: Japan
14: Hong Kong
15: South Africa
16: Australia
17: New Zealand
18: Singapore
19: Malaysia
1A: China
1B: Taiwan
20: Turkey
21: Greece

The country code will determine the factory


settings of bit switches and RAM
addresses. However, it has no effect on the
NCU parameter settings and
communication parameter RAM addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 08, parameter
C.C.

No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Threshold memory level for


parallel memory
transmission

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

System Switch 10
COMMENTS
Threshold mount = N * 64 kbytes + 256 kbytes
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 04(H) = 512 kbytes

System Switch 11
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

TTI printing position


0: Superimposed on the
page data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information


that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).

CIL printing position


0: Printed before the data
leading edge
1: Superimposed on the
page data

Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprints information


that the customer considers to be important (G4
transmissions).

Label Insertion position


0: Left end 1: Right end

Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprints


information that the customer considers to be
important.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Use of parallel memory


transmission with G4
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

This bit will determine whether parallel transmission


can be used with a G4 transmission.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for details.

2
3
to
6

SM

4-33

H515

System Switch 12
No

COMMENTS

TTI/CIL printing position in


the main scan direction
0
to
7

FUNCTION

08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.


This setting will determine the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI is moved too far to the right, it may interfere with
the file number which is on the top right of the page.
On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more than
60 mm, it may overwrite the page number.

CIL: Command Information


Line (Group 4)

System Switch 13
No

0
1

2
3
to
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Remaining memory
threshold for activating the
hard disk filing system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Threshold
0
0
25%
0
1
50% (default)
1
0
75%
1
1
Not used

If the remaining hard disk space is below the threshold


value, the hard disk filing system cannot be used.
Adjust the threshold value to meet the customers
requirements.

Document retransmission
from the hard disk filing
system
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Enables retransmission of filed documents from the


hard disk.

Not used

Do not change the settings

System Switch 14
No

COMMENTS

Wait time between pages in


printer mode (with the
optional printer interface
unit)
0
to
7

FUNCTION

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting will determine


the machines wait time between pages in printer
mode.
A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing any
incoming fax message.
A shorter setting allows the fax machine to print
incoming fax messages while printing from a
computer. If the controller takes more than the
specfied time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the fax machine will release the printer
resources for fax output.
Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s

System Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515

4-34

SM

System Switch 16
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Function Upgrade Card or


Fax On Demand Card
0: Not installed
1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 after installing a Function Upgrade


Card or a Fax On Demand Card in the machines
lower IC card slot.
0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On
Demand Card is installed in the machines lower IC
card slot before power-off, all the data in these cards
will be initialized if the machine does not detect the
card at the next power-on.
1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On
Demand Card is installed in the machines lower IC
card slot before power-off, the machine will not start
up unless the machine detects the IC card or the data
copy tool at the next power-on. This will prevent the
data inside the card from being initialized while
replacing PCBs or downloading software.

Not used.

Do not change the setting.

1
to
7

System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change the settings)


SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)


System Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM

4-35

H515

4.2.2. Scanner Switches


Scanner Switch 00
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

MTF
0: Disabled

Text/photo separation in
halftone mode
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftone


quality.

Maximum transmittable
document length
Bit 3
2
Setting
0
0
600 mm
0
1
1200 mm
1
0
14 m
1
1
Not used

If the user wants to send very long documents such as


well logs, select 14 m.

OR processing for
immediate tx and copying
(Standard resolution)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0: The machine will scan the document in 3.85


line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine will scan the document in 7.7 line/mm
steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed before
transmission or making copies. Toner may be used up
earlier if OR processing is enabled.

OR processing for
immediate tx and copying
(Detail resolution)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0: The machine scans the document in 7.7 line/mm


steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine scans the document in 15.4 line/mm
steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed before
transmission or making copies. Toner may be depleted
quicker if OR processing is enabled.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

2
3

6
to
7

1: Enabled

Scanner Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Scanner Switch 02
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Contrast threshold with


halftone disabled - Normal
setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0E(H)

Scanner Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Contrast threshold with


halftone disabled - Lighten
setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 10(H)

Scanner Switch 04
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Contrast threshold with


halftone disabled - Darken
setting

H515

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0C(H)

4-36

SM

Scanner Switch 05
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Contrast threshold with
halftone enabled - Normal
setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 09(H)

Scanner Switch 06
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Contrast threshold with
halftone enabled - Lighten
setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0D(H)

Scanner Switch 07
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Contrast threshold with
halftone enabled - Darken
setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 02(H)

No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Contrast threshold for text
areas when halftone is
enabled

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F.
This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1 is at
0.
Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM

4-37

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Scanner Switch 08

4.2.3. Printer Switches


Printer Switch 00
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Page separation mark


0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0: No marks are printed.


1: If a received page has to be printed on two sheets,
an "x" inside a small box is printed at the bottom right
hand corner of the first sheet, and a "2" inside a small
box is printed at the top right hand corner of the
second sheet. This will help the user to identify pages
that have been split up.

Repetition of data when the


received page is longer
than the printer paper
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where the previous


page left off.
1: The final few mm of the data on of the previous
page are printed at the top of the next page.
See section 2.2.12 for details.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Cleaning mode after bypass


feed
0: Disabled
1: After each page is fed
from the bypass feed slot

0: Cleaning mode function is not performed if the


bypass feed is used.
1: Cleaning mode function is performed every time
after a sheet of paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

mm-inch conversion when


printing
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Printing is always done in inch format.


1: If the other end has scanned the document in mm
format, the machine will convert the data to inch
format before printing.
Refer to section 2.2.13 for details.

4
to
6

Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Printer Switch 02 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Length reduction of
received data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without length


reduction.
Cross reference
Page separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4 to 7.
1: Incoming pages are reduced in the length direction
when printing.
Cross reference
Reduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05
Page separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12

Not used

Do not change the settings.

1
2
3

H515

4-38

SM

Printer Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)

4
to
7

If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portion will
not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copy paper,
the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7
0
1
and so on until
F

x (mm)
0
1
15

Cross reference
Page separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switches 04 and 05
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch 03-0
above)
If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction before printing.
These switches determine the maximum reduction ratio for each paper size.
Cross reference
Page separation and data reduction: section 2.2.12.
0
to
7

Switch 04/05
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7

US
Not used
Not used
LT lengthwise
Not used
Not used
LG lengthwise
Not used
Not used

Europe
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used

Asia
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
F/F4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used

The available paper sizes depend on the machines country version.


Sw.04 0 4 1 4 0 8 1 12
Sw.05 : 0 = 3, 0 = 3, 1 = 7, 1 = 11



SM

4-39

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

No

Printer Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Printer Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515

4-40

SM

4.2.4. Communication Switches


Communication Switch 00

0
1

2
3

4
to
6
7

SM

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Compression modes
available in receive mode
Bit 1
0
Modes
0
0
MH only
0
1
MH/MR
1
0
MH/MR/MMR
1
1
Not used

These bits determine the compression capabilities to


be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.

Compression modes
available in transmit mode
Bit 3
2
Modes
0
0
MH only
0
1
MH/MR
1
0
MH/MR/MMR
1
1
Not used

These bits determine the compression capabilities to


be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Cross reference
EFC compression during transmission:
Communication Switch 01, bit 1.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Closed network (reception)


0: Disabled
1: Enabled

1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the


other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.

4-41

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

No

Communication Switch 01
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

ECM
0: Off 1: On

If this bit is 0, ECM is switched off for all


communications.

EFC during transmission


0: Off 1: On

If this bit is 0, EFC is switched off during transmission.

Wrong connection
prevention method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI

(0,1) - The machine will not transmit if the last 8 digits


of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of
the dialed telephone number. This does not work for
manual dialing.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last 4
digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will not transmit if the other end
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always go
ahead.

Operator call if no response


is received in reply to
NSF/DIS
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 if the user expects to receive phone


calls at the same number which the machine is
connected to.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Maximum printable page


length available
Bit 7 Bit 6
Setting
0
0
No limit
0
1
B4 and A4
1
0
A4
1
1
Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informed to the


transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

2
3

6
7

H515

4-42

SM

Communication Switch 02
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution
100 dpi
200 dpi
Low settings
3
6
High settings
6
12

Acceptable total error line


ratio
0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio of a page exceeds the acceptable


ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

Treatment of pages
received with errors during
G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN)
is received during G3
immediate transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is


received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM


is being used.
4
to
7

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Maximum number of page


retransmissions in a G3
memory transmission

COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM

4-43

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Burst error threshold


0: Low 1: High

Communication Switch 06
No

FUNCTION

Dialing requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Dialing requirements:
Austria
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Dialing requirements:
Norway
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Dialing requirements:
Denmark
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Dialing requirements:
France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Dialing requirements:
Switzerland
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Not used

COMMENTS
These switches are automatically set to the settings
required by each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.

Do not change the settings.

7
Communication Switch 07
No

3
to
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Fallback from G4 to G3 if
the other terminal is not a
G4 terminal
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Also see System Switch 0A bit 7.


Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the CPS
code set (Cause Value set) to determine G4 to G3
fallback.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Use of date and time


provided from the network
for the CIL (ISDN Only)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The date and time programmed in the receiving


terminal is used in the CIL.
1: The date and time informed in the document layer
from the remote terminal (through the network) is used
in the CIL (Command information line).

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings.)


Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0A
No

FUNCTION

Point of resumption of
memory transmission upon
redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1

H515

COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page.

4-44

SM

Communication Switch 0A
No
1
to
6
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Emergency calls using 999


0: Enabled 1: Disabled

If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to dial


999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT requirement in the
UK and some other countries.

Communication Switch 0B
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Use of Economy
Transmission during a
Transfer operation to End
Receivers
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Use of Economy
Transmission during a
Transfer operation to the
Next Transfer Stations
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Use of Label Insertion for


the End Receivers in a
Transfer operation
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit will determine whether the machine will use


the Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.

Conditions required for


Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there
was an error

0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine will


always send a Transfer Result Report back to the
Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer Result
Report if there were errors during communication
indicating that one or more of the End Receivers could
not be contacted.

Printout of the message


when acting as a Transfer
Station
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, this


bit will determine whether the machine prints the fax
message coming in from the Requesting Terminal.

Action when there is no fax


number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which
meets the requesting
terminals own fax number.
0: Transfer is Disabled
1: Transfer is Enabled

After the machine receives a transfer request, the


machine will compare the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N is
the number programmed in communication switch 0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in the
machine, the machine will reject the transfer request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine will accept the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the transfer
terminal, but will not be sent back to the requesting
terminal.
Refer to section 2.3.4 for more details.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

SM

4-45

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

These bits determine whether the machine will use the


Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying out
a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.

Communication Switch 0C
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Number of digits compared


to find the requesters fax
number from the
programmed Quick/Speed
Dials when acting as a
Transfer Station

00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine will compare the "own telephone number"
sent from the Requesting Terminal with all
Quick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,
starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed
Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the end
of the telephone numbers the machine will compare.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to the
first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine compared. If
Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the machine will send
the report to Quick 01. If Quick Dial 01 through 04 are
not programmed and Quick Dial 05 is programmed,
the machine will send the report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
Refer to section 2.3.4 for more details.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

0
to
4

5
to
7

Communication Switch 0D
No

0
to
7

FUNCTION
The amount of remaining
memory below which
ringing detection (and
therefore reception into
memory) is disabled

COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 kbytes
(e.g., 0C(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there
is no memory space left. This will result in
communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Minimum interval between
automatic dialing attempts

COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 seconds
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 seconds)
This value is the minimum time that the machine will
wait before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Minimum number of times


that a destination will dialed
when TRD is being used

COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times

Communication Switch 10
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
attempts to the same
destination

H515

COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times

4-46

SM

Communication Switch 11
No

FUNCTION

0
to
7

Immediate transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
attempts to the same
destination

COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times

Communication Switch 12
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
Memory transmission:
Interval between dialing
attempts to the same
destination

COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 13

0
to
7

FUNCTION
Immediate transmission:
Interval between dialing
attempts to the same
destination

COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 14
No

1
to
5

6
7

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Inch-to-mm conversion
during transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Transmitting is always done in inch format.


1: If the other end only has mm-based resolution for
printing, the machine will convert the scanned data to
mm-format before transmission.
Refer to section 2.1.8 for details.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Available unit of resolution


in which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factory


settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

Communication Switch 15
No
0
to
7

SM

FUNCTION
Available resolution for
receiving fax messages
Bit 0 1: 200 x 100/8 x 3.85
Bit 1 1: 200 x 200/8 x 7.7
Other bits: Not used

COMMENTS
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

4-47

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

No

Communication Switch 16 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Communication Switch 17 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515

4-48

SM

4.2.5. G3 Switches
G3 Switch 00

0
1

2
3
to
6

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Monitor speaker during


communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the


communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the
T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all
through the communication. Ensure that you reset
these bits after testing.

Monitor speaker during


memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory


transmission.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Back to back test


0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back to back


test.
115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5 and
JP6 on the NCU before doing the test.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

No

G3 Switch 01
No
0
to
3
4
5

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the settings.

DIS frame length


0: 6 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The 5th and 6th bytes in the DIS frame will not be
transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication
problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive
the extended DIS frames).

Not used

Do not change the settings.

6
7

SM

4-49

H515

G3 Switch 02
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

G3 protocol mode used


0: Standard and
non-standard
1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only
communicate with machines that send T.30-standard
frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Use of modem rate history


for transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials will


alway start at the highest modem rate.
1: The machine will refer to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.

AI short protocol
(transmission and reception)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual


for details about AI Short Protocol.

Short preamble
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual


for details about Short Preamble.

1
to
4

G3 Switch 03
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

DIS detection number


(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same


DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which can be caused by echo on the line.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

ECM frame size


0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes

1: ECM reception is disabled, which enlarges the SAF


memory.

CTC transmission conditions When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)
modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode) or
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)
four times (ITU-T mode).
ITU-T: New acronym for the CCITT.

Modem rate used for the


next page after receiving a
negative code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before


sending the next page if a negative code is received.
This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

H515

4-50

SM

G3 Switch 04
FUNCTION
0
to
3
4
to
7

COMMENTS

Training error detection


threshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below
this threshold, the machine will inform the sender that
the training has succeeded.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 05
FUNCTION

4
to
5
6
to
7

SM

These bits set the initial starting modem


rate for transmission.

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.


Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
Not used
1
1
Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6


and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set
at these speeds.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters


if you need to change this for specific
receivers.

4-51

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

0
to
3

COMMENTS

Initial Tx modem rate


Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
Other settings - Not used

G3 Switch 06
FUNCTION

0
to
3

4
to
7

COMMENTS

Initial Rx modem rate


Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
Other settings - Not used

The setting of these bits is used to inform


the transmitting terminal of the available
modem rate for the machine in receive
mode. Use a lower setting if high speeds
pose problems during reception.

Modem types available for reception


Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.33, V.17
Other settings - Not used

The setting of these bits is used to inform


the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive
mode.

The machine will automatically will


determine whether to use TCM or not.

G3 Switch 07
FUNCTION

0
1

PSTN cable equalizer


(tx mode)
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

2
3

PSTN cable equalizer


(rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher


frequencies because of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

4
to
7

Not used

Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515

4-52

SM

G3 Switch 09
FUNCTION

0
1

ISDN cable equalizer


(tx mode)
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the
following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

2
3

ISDN cable equalizer


(rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher


frequencies because of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the
following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Not used

Do not change the settings.


SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4
to
7

G3 Switch 0A
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Maximum allowable carrier


drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used

These bits will set the acceptable modem carrier drop


time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Maximum allowable frame


interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s
1: 13 s

This bit will set the maximum intervals between each


EOL signal (end-of-line) or intervals between each
ECM frame from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Reconstruction time for the


first line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by a


computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data
after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends
CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if
this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending
machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.

0
1

2
3

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should


come within 5 s of CFR.
7

SM

Not used

Do not change the setting.

4-53

H515

G3 Switch 0B
FUNCTION
0

Protocol requirements:
Europe
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Protocol requirements:
Spain
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Protocol requirements:
France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

PTT requirements: Germany


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

PTT requirements: France


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Not used

COMMENTS
The machine will not automatically reset these bits for
each country after a country code (System Switch 0F)
is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

Do not change the settings.

7
G3 Switch 0C
FUNCTION
0
1
2
to
7

COMMENTS

Pulse dialing method


Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal (P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden (N+1)
1
1
Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.

Not used

Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)


G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515

4-54

SM

4.3. NCU PARAMETERS


The following tables give the RAM addresses and units of calculation of the
parameters that the machine will use for ringing signal detection and
automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most
of these must be changed by RAM read/write (Function 06), but some can
be changed using NCU Parameter programming (Function 08); if Function
08 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is
programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
Function
Country code for NCU parameters

480400

480401
480402
480403
480404
480405
480406
480407

SM

Line current detection time


Line current wait time
Line current drop detect time
PSTN dial tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)

4-55

Unit
Remarks
Use the Hex value to program the
country code directly into this address,
or use the decimal value to program it
using Function 08 (parameter 00).
Country Decimal
Hex
France
00
00
Germany
01
01
UK
02
02
Italy
03
03
Austria
04
04
Belgium
05
05
Denmark
06
06
Finland
07
07
Ireland
08
08
Norway
09
09
Sweden
10
0A
Switzerland
11
0B
Portugal
12
0C
Spain
14
0E
Israel
15
0F
USA
17
11
Asia
18
12
Hong Kong
20
14
South Africa
21
15
Australia
22
16
New Zealand
23
17
Singapore
24
18
Malaysia
25
19
20 ms
Line current is not detected
if 480401 contains FF.
Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address

Address
480408
480409
48040A
48040B
48040C
48040D
48040E
48040F
480410
480411

480412
480413
480414
480415
480416
480417
480418
480419
48041A
48041B
48041C
48041D
48041E
48041F
480420
480421
480422
480423
480424

H515

Function
PSTN dial tone detection time
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone
time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop
time
PSTN wait interval (LOW)
PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ringback tone detection
time
PSTN ringback tone off detection
time
PSTN detection time for silent
period after ringback tone
detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent
period after ringback tone
detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone detection time
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone
time
PABX dial tone permissible drop
time
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX ringback tone detection time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone
detected (LOW)

4-56

Unit
20 ms

Remarks
If 480408 contains FF, the
machine will pause for the
pause time (address
48040D / 48040E).
See Note 2 (Italy). Refer to
page 4-63.

20 ms

Detection is disabled if this


contains FF.

20 ms
20 ms

20 ms

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

20 ms

If 48041B contains FF, the


machine will pause for the
pause time (480420 /
480421).

20 ms

Detection is disabled if this


contains FF.

20 ms
20 ms

SM

480425
480426
480427
480428
480429
48042A
48042B
48042C
48042D
48042E
48042F
480430
480431
480432

480433

480434
480435
480436
480437

SM

Function
Unit
Remarks
PABX detection time for silent
20 ms
period after ringback tone
detected (HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte)
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte)
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Busy tone ON time: range 1
20 ms
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
Busy tone ON time: range 2
Busy tone OFF time: range 2
Busy tone ON time: range 3
Busy tone OFF time: range 3
Busy tone ON time: range 4
Busy tone OFF time: range 4
Busy tone continuous tone
detection time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
Bits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bits at 0.
Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0 0
75%
0 1
50%
1 0
25%
1 1
12.5%
International dial tone frequency
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte)
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
International dial tone frequency
upper limit (low byte)
International dial tone frequency
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte)
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
International dial tone frequency
lower limit (low byte)

4-57

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address

Address

480439
48043A
48043B
48043C
48043D
48043E
48043F
480440
480441
480442
480443
480444
480445
480446
480447
480448
480449
48044A

Unit
20 ms

Make time for pulse dialing

480438

Function
International dial tone detection
time
International dial tone reset time
(LOW)
International dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval
(HIGH)
International dial wait interval
(LOW)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
Country dial tone reset time
(LOW)
Country dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
Country dial tone permissible
drop time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing
the DO relay and opening the
OHDI relay
Break time for pulse dialing

1 ms

Time between final OHDI relay


closure and DO relay opening or
closing
Minimum pause between dialed
digits (pulse dial mode)

1 ms

See Note 2 (Belgium).


Refer to page 4-63.

Hz (BCD)

20 ms

If 480443 contains FF, the


machine will pause for the
pause time (480448 /
480449).

1 ms

See Notes 3 and 6. Refer


to page 4-63. Function 08
(parameter 11).
See Note 3. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 12).
See Note 3. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 13).
See Notes 6. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 14).
See Note 3. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 15).
Function 08 (parameter 16).

1 ms

48044C

48044E
48044F
480450
480451

H515

Time waited when a pause is


entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
DTMF tone off time

20 ms

1 ms

4-58

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

48044B

48044D

Remarks
If 480438 contains FF, the
machine will pause for the
pause time (48043D /
48043E).

Function 08 (parameter 17).


Function 08 (parameter 18).

SM

480452

480453

480454
480455
480456
480457
480458
480459
48045A
48045B
48045C

Function
Tone attenuation level of DTMF
signals while dialing

Unit
-dBm x
0.5

Tone attenuation value difference


between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF
signals
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation
level after dialing

-Nx0.5
(dB)

ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation


level after dialing
Not used
Not used
Not used
Grounding time (ground start
mode)
Break time (flash start mode)

-dBm x
0.5

20 ms
1 ms

International dial access code


(High)
International dial access code
(Low)
PSTN access pause time

BCD

20 ms

48045D

48045E

48045F
480460
480461
480462

SM

-dBm x
0.5

Remarks
Function 08 (parameter
19). See Note 5. Refer to
page 4-63.
Function 08 (parameter
20). See Note 5. Refer to
page 4-63.
Function 08 (parameter
21). See Note 5. Refer to
section 4-63.
See Note 5. Refer to
section 4-63.
Do not change the setting.
Do not change the setting.
Do not change the setting.
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
The OHDI relay is open for
this interval.
For a code of 100:
48045B - F1
48045C - 00
This time is waited for each
pause input after the PSTN
access code. Up to 7
pauses can be inputed. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 48044F is
used.

Bits 7 to 5 - Progress tone detection level


Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 4 and 3 - Not used
Bit 2 - International dial tone detection method
0: Detect by time parameters
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Belgium - See Note 3) Refer to page
4-63.
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - PSTN dial tone detection method
0: Detect by time parameters
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Italy - See Note 3) Refer to page 4-63.
Bit 7 and 6 - Not used
Bit 5 1: Polarity detection enabled for rx (detection time = 500 ms)
Bit 4 1: Polarity detection enabled for tx (detection time = 500 ms)
Bits 3 to 0 - Not used
Not used
Do not change the setting.
Not used
Do not change the setting.
Not used
Do not change the setting.

4-59

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address

Address
480463
480464
480465
480466
480467
to
480471
480472
480473
480474
480475
480476
480477
480478
480479
48047A
48047B
to
480480

480481

480482

480483

H515

Function

Unit

Not used
Not used
Intercity dial prefix (HIGH)
Intercity dial prefix (LOW)

BCD
BCD

Not used

Remarks
Do not change the setting.
Do not change the setting.
For a code of 0:
480465 - FF
480466 - F0
Do not change the settings.

Acceptable ringing signal


frequency: range 1, upper limit
Acceptable ringing signal
frequency: range 1, lower limit
Acceptable ringing signal
frequency: range 2, upper limit
Acceptable ringing signal
frequency: range 2, lower limit
Number of rings until a call is
detected
Minimum required length of the
first ring

1000/ N
(Hz).

Minimum required length of the


second and subsequent rings
Ringing signal detection reset
time (LOW)
Ringing signal detection reset
time (HIGH)
Not used

Function 08 (parameter 02).


Function 08 (parameter 03).
Function 08 (parameter 04).
Function 08 (parameter 05).

Function 08 (parameter 06).

20 ms

20 ms

See Note 4. Refer to page


4-63. Function 09
(parameter 07).
Function 08 (parameter 08).

20 ms

Function 08 (parameter 09).

Interval between dialing the last


20 ms
digit and switching the Oh relay
over to the external telephone
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used

Function 08 (parameter 10).


Do not change the settings.

Factory setting: 500 ms

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time


Bit
3
2
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
Bits 7 to 5 - Not used
Bit 4 - DTMF detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Bits 3 to 0 - Not used

Do not change the setting.


If bit 4 is set to 0, Fax On
Demand and Transfer
operation using DTMF are
disabled.

4-60

SM

480484

480485
to
4804A0
4804A1
4804A2
4804A3
4804A4
4804A5
4804A6
4804A7
4804A8
4804A9
4804AA
4804AB
4804AC

4804AD

4804AE

SM

Function
Bits 7 to 5 - DTMF On detection time
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting
0 0 0 30 ms
0 0 1 40 ms
0 1 0 80 ms
0 1 1 140 ms
Bits 4 to 2 - DTMF Off detection time
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 0 30 ms
0 0 1 40 ms
0 1 0 80 ms
0 1 1 140 ms
Bits 1 and 0 - Not used.
Not used

Acceptable CED detection


frequency upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable CED detection
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CED detection
frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CED detection
frequency lower limit (low byte)
CED detection time
Acceptable CNG detection
frequency upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CNG detection
frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection
frequency lower limit (low byte)
CNG detection time

Unit

Remarks

Do not change the settings.

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)

Factory setting: 200 ms

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses contain


FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.

20 ms
Factory setting: 200 ms
20 ms
CNG on time
20 ms
Factory setting: 500 ms
CNG off time
20 ms
Factory setting: 200 ms
CNG On/Off time tolerance, and number of cycles required for detection (a
setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be
detected twice).
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
Bits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bit at 0.
Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
ON time tolerance
OFF time tolerance
0 0
150%
75%
0 1
100%
50%
1 0
50%
25%
1 1
25%
12.5%
Not used
Do not change the setting.

4-61

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address

Address
4804AF

4804B0

4804B1

4804B2
4804B3
4804B4
4804B5
4804B6
4804B7
4804B8
4804B9

Function
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency
lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency
lower limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
ISDN: Tx level from the modem

4804BA
4804BB
4804BC

ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission


level
ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)

Unit
Hz (BCD)

Hz(BCD)

20 ms

- dBm
Function 08 (parameter 01).
- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B5 (dB)
- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B6 (dB)
- dBm
- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B8 (dB)
- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B9 (dB)
- dBm

The setting must be


between -12dBm and
-15dBm.
- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BB (dB)

- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BC (dB)


-37-0.5N
(dBm)

4804BD

4804BE
to
4804D9
4804DA

H515

Not used

T.30 T1 timer

Remarks
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
If both addresses contain
FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
Factory setting: 360 ms

N must be between 0
(00(H)) to 31 (1F(H)).
Modem turn-off level is
automatically set at -3dBm
from the turn-on level.
Do not change the settings.

1s

4-62

SM

Notes
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 48045E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 Not used
Bit 0 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses
are changed.
480408 (if bit 0 = 1) or 480438 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in
address 480433.
48040B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20
ms)
48040C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20
ms)

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48044A to 48044F) are the values for
10 pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine will automatically compensate.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the
time specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480452/480454 dBm
Low frequency tone: - 0.5 x (N480452/480454 + N480453) dBm
Note: N480452, for example, means the value stored in address
480452(H)
6. 48044A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France Between Ds closing and Di opening
48044D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between
Ds opening and Di closing

SM

4-63

H515

Default Settings
The factory settings are quoted either in hexadecimal code (the actual
contents of the RAM address) if there is a H after the value in the table, or in
decimal (converted from the actual hex contents of the RAM address) if
there is no H after the value.
Some RAMs must be stored using BCD; see the NCU Parameter definition
table for details.
Note that the default settings may change after each countrys PTT tests.
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

480401

480402

480403

480404

480405

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

04H
04H
FFH
04H
05H
05H
05H
05H
04H
05H
05H
06H
04H
05H
04H
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH

80H
98H
FFH
71H
30H
20H
12H
36H
50H
12H
12H
08H
60H
63H
90H
98H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-64

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

480406

480407

480408

480409

48040A

04H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
03H
03H
02H
03H
03H
03H
02H
00H
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH

00H
70H
FFH
91H
70H
00H
40H
15H
00H
40H
40H
38H
90H
76H
10H
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
30H
FFH
FFH
FFH

75
105
FFH
21H
40
30
65
205
105
55
40
40
105
55
75
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
150
FFH
FFH
FFH

F4H
E8H
FFH
21H
F4H
150
F4H
F4H
F4H
E8H
00H
21H
F4H
EEH
80H
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2CH
FFH
FFH
FFH

01H
03H
FFH
02H
01H
00H
01H
01H
1
03H
01H
02H
01H
02H
02H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH

48040B

48040C

48040D

48040E

48040F

50
105
FFH
30
40
30
65
205
105
55
40
40
105
55
36
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH

2
4
FFH
50
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
5
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
8
FFH
FFH
FFH

0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
100
100
100
100
150
100
100
100

0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
5
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-65

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

480410

480411

480412

480413

480414

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
F4H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

04H
05H
04H
05H
05H
04H
04H
FFH
04H
05H
05H
06H
FFH
05H
04H
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH

98H
10H
30H
29H
12H
71H
60H
FFH
30H
12H
12H
08H
FFH
63H
60H
98H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH

480415

480416

480417

480418

480419

03H
03H
03H
03H
03H
04H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH

96H
50H
60H
29H
80H
05H
90H
FFH
70H
40H
40H
38H
FFH
20H
80H
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH

09H
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
05H
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
06H
FFH
05H
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH

00H
FFH
FFH
12H
FFH
20H
12H
FFH
FFH
FFH
12H
08H
FFH
63H
FFH
63H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH

03H
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
03H
FFH
00H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-66

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

48041A

48041B

48041C

48041D

48041E

00H
FFH
FFH
91H
FFH
00
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
40H
38H
FFH
76H
FFH
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH

100
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
30
65
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
40
FFH
55
FFH
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
150
FFH
FFH
FFH

58H
FFH
FFH
F9H
FFH
150
F4H
FFH
FFH
FFH
00
EFH
FFH
EEH
FFH
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2CH
FFH
FFH
FFH

02H
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
0
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
01H
FFH
02H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH

50
FFH
FFH
9
FFH
30
65
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
40
FFH
55
FFH
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH

48041F

480420

480421

480422

480423

02H
FFH
FFH
4
FFH
4
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
4
FFH
4
FFH
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
1
FFH
FFH
FFH

00H
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
200
200

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-67

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

480424

480425

480426

480427

480428

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
06H
05H
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
00
12H
FFH
60H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
08H
FFH
FFH
FFH
63H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
03H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH

480429

48042A

48042B

48042C

48042D

FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
80H
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
38H
FFH
FFH
FFH
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH

25
12
19
15
10
25
12
FFH
25
10
12
24
FFH
12
8
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12
FFH
FFH
FFH

25
12
19
15
10
25
12
FFH
25
0
12
30
FFH
12
8
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
24
20
FFH
15
8
8
FFH
27
25
12
15
FFH
25
FFH
24
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
24
17
FFH
15
8
23
37
37
0
37
22
FFH
25
FFH
24
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-68

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

48042E

48042F

480430

480431

480432

FFH
7
11
FFH
20
FFH
FFH
FFH
18
FFH
FFH
11
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
24
26
FFH
20
FFH
FFH
FFH
18
FFH
FFH
11
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
8
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
30
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
35
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

480433

480434

480435

480436

480437

42H
31H
42H
40H
41H
43H
42H
FFH
43H
40H
43H
51H
FFH
41H
41H
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH

04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
11H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

74H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
60H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
63H
20H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
11H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
10H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
76H
80H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-69

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

480438

480439

48043A

48043B

48043C

75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
55
75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

58H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
EEH
80H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

2
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
02H
02H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
17
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
55
36
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

2
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
33
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4
5
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

48043D

48043E

48043F

480440

480441

0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
150
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

4-70

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

480442

480443

480444

480445

480446

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

480447

480448

480449

48044A

48044B

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
200
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

67
50
252
58
53
61
53
61
255
61
100
60
61
58
75
61
77
61
61
61
255
61
61
61

65
60
66
60
62
67
67
60
67
59
60
60
66
62
60
61
62
66
66
66
68
66
66
66

4-71

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

48044C

48044D

48044E

48044F

480450

35
41
35
40
39
33
33
42
33
41
40
40
34
40
33
39
40
34
34
34
32
34
34
34

50
44
44
44
50
50
50
50
50
50
70
60
50
42
75
50
74
50
50
50
70
50
50
50

40
46
27
40
44
43
26
40
30
33
18
26
33
33
32
46
46
36
36
36
36
36
36
36

0
46
33
150
46
26
26
60
33
33
26
00H
33
33
100
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101

70
90
100
70
80
70
90
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

480451

480452

480453

480454

480455

70
90
100
70
80
70
90
75
70
70
70
70
70
70
140
90
100
110
110
110
110
110
110
110

12
14
18
12
7
12
18
18
18
18
18
12
18
18
12
12
14
12
12
12
20
12
12
12

4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34

34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34

4-72

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

480459

48045A

48045B

48045C

48045D

0
15
15
15
15
100
15
15
15
25
15
15
15
15
100
15
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

0
90
90
90
100
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
F0H
F9H
FFH
FFH
F0H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

19H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
09H
90H
16H
00H
09H
00H
00H
00H
07H
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

FFH
FFH
50
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

48045E

48045F

480465

480466

480472

80H
C0H
C0H
D1H
C0H
44H
40H
40H
80H
40H
40H
80H
40H
00
80H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H

10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

16H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

17
17
20
18
13
21
33
16
36
16
17
16
30
16
25
16
13
17
17
17
14
17
17
17

4-73

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

480473

480474

480475

480476

480477

23
48
84
77
54
72
50
56
67
56
51
51
78
52
50
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83

FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
16
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
16
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
24
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
24
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

2
01H
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1

15
10
10
10
9
5
10
25
10
10
5
1
10
15
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

480478

480479

48047A

480481

480482

5
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
10
10
5
1
10
15
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

04H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
2CH
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H

01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

4-74

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

480483

480484

4804A1

4804A2

4804A3

11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
31H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H

24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H

22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H

4804A4

4804A5

4804A6

4804A7

4804A8

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

30
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H

4-75

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

4804A9

4804AA

4804AB

4804AC

4804AD

00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H

96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H

32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H

4804AF

4804B0

4804B1

4804B2

4804B3

08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H

80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H

07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H

20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

4-76

SM

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

SM

4804B4

4804B5

4804B6

4804B7

4804B8

10
6
8
6
6
6
10
10
10
9
10
5
6
7
10
6
9
6
6
6
11
8
6
6

0
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
02H
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0

0
FEH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

10
6
8
6
6
6
10
10
10
9
10
5
6
7
10
6
9
6
6
6
11
8
6
6

0
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
02H
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0

4804B9

4804BA

4804BB

4804BC

4804BD

0
FEH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0BH
18H
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0DH
0DH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH

4-77

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Address

4804DA

France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

H515

53
53
53
53
59
59
53
53
53
53
53
92
53
53
80
59
53
47
53
53
53
53
53
53

4-78

SM

4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS


Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has four bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often
experience problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or
Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the four bytes will
be described.
4.4.1. Programming Procedure

1. Set bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 1. Refer to secion 4.1.1.


2. Either use Function 31 (for a Quick Dial number) or Function 32 (for a
Speed Dial number)
Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.

4. Press Quick Dial key 10.

Note: When selecting Speed Dial 10 with Function 32, press   at


the ten key pad.

5. Press  four times. (speed dial press five times)


6. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7
corresponding to the bit that you wish to change.
Example: Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7
7. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:
Select the next byte:
or

Select the previous byte:


until the correct byte is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press
9. To finish, press

.

 .

10. After finishing, reset bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 0.

SM

4-79

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

3.   

4.4.2. Parameters
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the
parameters are disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
CCITT T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting ,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
1 to 127 s (01h to 7Fh)
00h or FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 80h and FEh.
Switch 02
FUNCTION

0
to
4

Tx level
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0

0
1

5
to
7

3
0
0
0
0
0

1
1

2
0
0
0
0
1
:
:
1
1

Cable equalizer
Bit 7 6 5
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 1 1

COMMENTS

1
0
0
1
1
0

0
0
1
0
1
0

Setting
0
-1
-2
-3
-4

1
1

1
1

-15
Disabled

Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
Disabled

If communication with a particular remote


terminal often contains errors, the signal level
may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the
results are better.
When disabled, NCU parameter 01 setting is
used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on
the left.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
higher frequencies because of the length of
wire between the modem and the telephone
exchange when calling the number stored in
this Quick/Speed Dial.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or
more of the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such
as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed on


the left.

H515

4-80

SM

Switch 03
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Initial Tx modem rate


Bit 3 2 1 0
Setting (bps)
0 0 0 0
Not used
0 0 0 1
2,400
0 0 1 0
4,800
0 0 1 1
7,200
0
0 1 0 0
9,600
to
3
0 1 0 1
12,000
0 1 1 0
14,400
1

If training with a particular remote


terminal always takes too long, the
initial modem rate may be too high.
Reduce the initial Tx modem rate
using these bits.
Note: Do not use settings other than
listed on the left.

Disabled

Other settings:

Not used

4 Not used
to
7

Do not change the settings.

Switch 04
COMMENTS
The machine will use inch-based resolutions
for scanning. If inch only is selected, the
printed copy may be slightly distorted at the
other end if that machine uses mm-based
resolutions.

DIS/NSF detection method


Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
First DIS or NSF
0
1
Second DIS or NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are


interfering with the set-up protocol at the start
of transmission. The machine will then wait for
the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or
NSS.

Not used

Do not change the setting.

Compression modes available in


transmit mode
0: MH only
1: All available compression modes

This bit will determine the capabilities that are


informed to the other terminal during
transmission.

ECM during transmission


Bit 7 Bit 6
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled

For example, if ECM is switched on but is not


wanted when sending to a particular terminal,
use the setting of (0, 0).

0
1

2
3

6
7

Switch 05 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required


FUNCTION
0
to
3

SM

Data rate
Bits 3
0
0
1

2
0
0
1

1
0
0
1

0
0
1
1

COMMENTS
When disabled, the setting of G4
parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1)
setting is used.

Setting
64 kbps
56 kbps
Disabled

4-81

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

FUNCTION
Inch-mm conversion before tx
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
Inch-mm conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled

Switch 05 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required


FUNCTION
4
to
7

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Switch 06 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required


FUNCTION
0
to
3
4
to
7

Link Modules
Bits 3 2
0 0
0 0
1 1

1
0
0
1

0
0
1
1

COMMENTS
When disabled, the setting of G4
parameter switch 3 (bit 0) setting is
used.

Setting
Module 8
Module 128
Disabled

Not used

Do not change the settings.

Switch 07 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required


FUNCTION
0
to
3

Layer 3 protocol
Bits 3 2 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1

0
0
1
1

Setting
ISO 8208
T.70 NULL
Disabled

4
to
7

Packet modules
Bits 3 2 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1

0
0
1
1

COMMENTS

Setting
Module 9
Module 128
Disabled

When disabled, the setting of G4


parameter switch 6 (bit 0) setting is
used.

When disabled, the setting of G4


parameter switch 6 (bit 4) setting is
used.

Switch 08 - Not used

H515

4-82

SM

4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

+CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read
only.

344F28 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed Dial #100 - #999, when a Function Upgrade Card is used.
As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes.
344F28 to 344F2F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #100
344F30 to 344F37(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #101
344F38 to 344F3F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #102

346B40 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #999


480000(H) - RAM Reset Level 1
Change the data at this address to FF(H), then switch the machine off and on to reset all the
system settings.
Caution: Before using this RAM, print the settings of all the system parameters (System Parameter List) and RAM settings (RAM dump list) for scanner/printer registration settings.
Note: Initial toner supply will be carried out automatically after the reset. This should take
about 90 seconds.
480001 to 480004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
480001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
480002(H) - Year (BCD)
480003(H) - Month (BCD)
480004(H) - Day (BCD)
480006 to 480015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
480018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
480019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
48001A(H) - Boot program checksum (low)
48001B(H) - Boot program checksum (high)
48001C(H) - Main program checksum (low)
48001D(H) - Main program checksum (high)
48001E(H) - RDS program update counter
480020 to 48003F(H) - System bit switches
480040 to 48004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
480050 to 48005F(H) - Printer bit switches
480060 to 48007F(H) - Communication bit switches
480080 to 48008F(H) - G3 bit switches

SM

4-83

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

004003 to 00400B(H) - ROM part number and suffix (ASCII)


Example: The part number is H5157210A
004003(H) - 48(H)
004004(H) - 35(H)
004005(H) - 31(H)
004006(H) - 35(H)
004007(H) - 37(H)
004008(H) - 32(H)
004009(H) - 31(H)
00400A(H) - 30(H)
00400B(H) - 41(H)

4800A0(H) - User parameter switch 00


Bit 0: Stamp home position
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 1 and 2: Scanning contrast home position
Bit
2
1
Setting
0
0
Normal
0
1
Lighten
1
0
Darken
Bit 3: Do not adjust
Bits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position
Bit
5
4
Setting
0
0
Standard
0
1
Detail
1
0
Fine
Bit 6: Transmission mode home position
0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate tx
Bit 7: Halftone home position
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
4800A1(H) - User parameter switch 01
Bits 0 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Settings return to home position after transmission

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800A2(H) - User parameter switch 02


Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 3: TSI included in transmitted messages
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TID printing (G4)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 7: Not used
4800A3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions)
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception)
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception)
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions)
Bit 6: Polling clear report
Bit 7: TCR (Journal)
4800A4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output
Bit 1: Fax On Demand report output
Bits 2 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports

0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

4800A5(H) - User parameter switch 05


Bit 0: Substitute reception
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received
0: Possible, 1: Impossible
Bits 2 and 3: Not used
Bits 4 and 5: Restricted Access
Bit
5
4
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled at all times
1
0
Enabled during Night Timer periods only
1
1
Not used
Bit 6: Fusing lamp control during energy saver mode
0: Lamp off, 1: Standby temperature (80 C)
Bit 7: Not used

H515

4-84

SM

4800A7(H) - User parameter switch 07


Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission
Bit 3: Reduction before transmission
Bits 4 and 5: Not used
Bits 6 and 7: Fax On Demand
Bit
7
6
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled without password (Remote ID)
1
0
Enabled with password (Remote ID)
1
1
Not used

0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

4800A8(H) - User parameter switch 08


Bit 0 and 1: Multi-copy reception (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
multicopied.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are multicopied.
Bits 2 and 3: Authorized reception
Bit
3
2
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1
1
Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this
feature are accepted.
Bits 4 and 5: Specified cassette selection
Bit
5
4
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
printed on paper from a specified cassette.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are printed on paper from a specified cassette.
Bits 6 and 7: Forwarding (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
forwarded.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are forwarded.

SM

4-85

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4800A6(H) - User parameter switch 06


Bit 0: TTI/CIL printing (CIL is used with ISDN option)
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Closed network for transmission
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Batch transmission (memory card required)
Bit 5: Partial image scanning during memory tx
Bits 6 to 7: Not used

4800A9(H) - User parameter switch 09


Bits 0 and 1: Memory lock (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered.
Bits 2 and 3: Hard disk filing system
(optional hard disk and the function upgrade card required)
Bit
3
2
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified are for this feature
kept in the hard disk for filing.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are kept in the hard disk for filing.
Bits 4 to 7: Not used
4800AA(H) - User parameter switch 10
Bit 0: Reverse order printing
Bit 1: 2 into 1
Bits 2 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Halftone type

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: Error diffusion, 1: Dither

4800AB(H) - User parameter switch 11


Bit 0: Transfer request using DTMF tone signals 0: Not accepted, 1: Accepted
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the "Tone" mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone
Bits 2 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration
0: Once, 1: No limit
4800AC(H) - User parameter switch 12
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Toner saving mode
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 3 and 4: Printout image density (Fax mode)
Bit
4
3
Setting
0
0
Normal
0
1
Lighten
1
0
Darken
1
1
Not used
Bits 5 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Copy operation
0: Possible, 1: Prohibited
4800AD(H) - PSTN access method
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
PSTN
0
1
Loop start
1
0
Ground start
1
1
Flash start
4800B8(H) - User function 62 settings
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
24 hours
1
0
Disabled
1
1
72 hours
Bits 2 to 7: Not used

H515

4-86

SM

4800B9(H) - User function 62 settings


Bit 0: Night timer
Bits 1 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by
system switch 03

Bits 5 and 6: Not used


Bit 7: Daylight saving time

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800BA(H) - User function 62 settings


Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Dialing type
0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialing
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
4800BB(H) - PSTN access number for loop start
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0
F0

0
00

F0
00

99

99

4800C0 to 4800CF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches


(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4800D0 to 4800EF(H) - G4 Internal Switches


(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)
4800F0 to 480103(H) - RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
480104 to 480117(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
480118 to 800137(H) - TTI (Max. 32 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
480138(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex)
Note: If the number of characters are less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a
stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
480139 to 480147(H) - Service stations fax number (Service function 13)
See 48018F(H) for the type of network used for this number.
480157 to 480165(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) (User function 61)
480166 to 480174(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (User function 61)
480175 to 480183(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G3) (User function 61)
480184(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
480185(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
480186(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
480187(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
480188(H) - Memory lock ID (low - Hex)
480189(H) - Memory lock ID (high - Hex)
48018C(H) - Remote ID (low - BCD)
48018D(H) - Remote ID (high - BCD)
48018F(H) - Network type used for the service station number
00(H) - G3 (PSTN)
01(H) - G4 (ISDN)

SM

4-87

H515

480198 to 48019F(H) - Last power off time (Read only)


480198(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock
(PM)
480199(H) - Year (BCD)
48019A(H) - Month (BCD)
48019B(H) - Day (BCD)
48019C(H) - Hour
48019D(H) - Minute
48019E(H) - Second
48019F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
4801AC(H) - Optional equipment (Read only)
Bit 0: Memory card
Bit 1: Hard disk
Bit 2: Function upgrade card
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: 100 sheet cassette
Bit 5: 1st paper feed unit (type F)
Bit 6: 2nd paper feed unit (type F)
Bit 7: Not used
4801AD(H) - Optional equipment (Read only)
Bit 0: 1st paper feed unit (type S)
Bit 1: 2nd paper feed unit (type S)
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Printer interface
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: G4
Bit 7: Fax On Demand

0: Not installed, 1: Installed


0: Not installed, 1: Installed
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
0: Not installed, 1: Installed

0: Not installed, 1: Installed


0: Not installed, 1: Installed

0: Not installed, 1: Installed


0: Not installed, 1: Installed
0: Not installed, 1: Installed

4801C0 to 4801C2(H) - Tx counter


Address
4801C0(H)
4801C1(H)
4801C2(H)

High
Tens digit
Thousands digit
Hundred thousands digit

Low
Unit digit
Hundrets digit
Ten thousands digit

Note: The following counters have the same data format as above.
4801C4 to 4801C6(H) - Rx counter
4801C8 to 4801CA(H) - Scan counter
4801CC to 4801CE(H) - Print counter
4801D0 to 4801D2(H) - Printer interface output counter
4801D4 to 4801D6(H) - ADF counter
4801D8 to 4801DA(H) - Paper feed counter (standard cassette)
4801DC to 4801DE(H) - Paper feed counter (1st optional paper feed unit)
4801E0 to 4801E2(H) - Paper feed counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4801E4 to 4801E6H) - Paper feed counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4801E8 to 4801EA(H) - Paper feed counter (bypass feed)
4801F0 to 4801F2(H) - Scanner total jam counter
4801F4 to 4801F6(H) - Printer total jam counter
4801F8 to 4801FA(H) - Paper jam counter (standard cassette)
4801FC to 4801FE(H) - Paper jam counter (1st optional paper feed unit)

H515

4-88

SM

480200 to 480202(H) - Paper jam counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
480204 to 480206(H) - Paper jam counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
480208 to 48020A(H) - Paper jam counter (bypass feed)
480210 to 480212(H) - Fusing exit jam counter
480214 to 480216(H) - Registration jam counter
480218 to 48021A(H) - PM counter
48021C to 48021E(H) - PM call interval (default 60,000)
480220 to 480222(H) - Copy counter
480224 to 480226(H) - OPC (master drum) counter
480228 to 48022A(H) - OPC (master drum) replacement interval (default: 30,000 prints)
If bit 5 of system bit switch 04 is 0, the machine will ask the user to replace the drum at this
interval.
48022C to 48022E(H) - CTM counter
480276 to 480285(H) - Excessive jam call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details.)
4802A2 to 4802AD(H) - G4 NSC code
4802AE to 4802C5(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4802C6 to 4802D9(H) - ISDN G3 CSI (ASCII - Max. 20 digits)


4802DA(H) - Number of digits programmed in the ISDN G3 CSI (Hex)
4802DB to 4802DE(H) - ISDN IP
4802DF to 4802E2(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address
4802E3 to 4802E6(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address
4802E7 to 4802EB(H) - CiG4 board ROM information
4802E7(H) - Suffix
4802E8(H) - Version (BCD)
4802E9(H) - Year (BCD)
4802EA(H) - Month (BCD)
4802EB(H) - Day (BCD)
480300(H) - Number of copies for multi-sort document reception (User function 83)
480301(H) - Daylight saving time settings (User function 62)

SM

4-89

H515

480302 to 48032B(H) - Night timer period (User function 72)


480302 to 480304(H) - Setting #1 for Monday
480305 to 480307(H) - Setting #2 for Monday
480308 to 48030A(H) - Setting #1 for Tuesday
48030B to 48030D(H) - Setting #2 for Tuesday
48030E to 480310(H) - Setting #1 for Wednesday
480311 to 480313(H) - Setting #2 for Wednesday
480314 to 480316(H) - Setting #1 for Thursday
480317 to 480319(H) - Setting #2 for Thursday
48031A to 48031C(H) - Setting #1 for Friday
48031D to 48031F(H) - Setting #2 for Friday
480320 to 480322(H) - Setting #1 for Saturday
480323 to 480325(H) - Setting #2 for Saturday
480326 to 480328(H) - Setting #1 for Sunday
480329 to 48032B(H) - Setting #2 for Sunday
Program format
First byte - Hour (BCD)
Second byte - Minute (BCD)
Third byte - 00(H): Timer start time, 01(H): Timer end time
480356(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
480357(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
480358 to 48035C(H) - Last RDS operation (Read only)
480358(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM)
480359(H) - Year (BCD)
48035A(H) - Month (BCD)
48035B(H) - Day (BCD)
48035C(H) - Hour
48035D(H) - Minute
48035E(H) - Second
48035F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
480364 to 48036B(H) - Last Fax On Demand report printout (Read only)
480364(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM)
480365(H) - Year (BCD)
480366(H) - Month (BCD)
480367(H) - Day (BCD)
480368(H) - Hour
480369(H) - Minute
48036A(H) - Second
48036B(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
48036E to 48036F(H) - Length (mm) of the non-scanning area from the leading edge for partial image scanning
48036E(H) - Low byte (BCD)
48036F(H) - High byte (BCD)
In the US, the user input value is in inch format. The machine will convert this into mm format and store the converted value here.
480370 to 480371(H) - Length (mm) of the scanning area for partial image scanning
480370(H) - Low byte (BCD)
480371(H) - High byte (BCD)
480372(H) - Transmission monitor volume
480373(H) - Reception monitor volume
480374(H) - On-hook monitor volume
480376(H) - Buzzer volume
480377(H) - Key acknowledgement tone volume

00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)

480379 to 48037D(H) - Periodic service call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details)

H515

4-90

SM

480383 to 480385(H) - Effective term of automatic service calls (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details)
480400 to 4804DA(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)
4804EA(H) - Print top margin (standard cassette)
4804EB(H) - Print top margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
4804EC(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4804EF(H) - Print top margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4804F0(H) - Print top margin (bypass feeder)
Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.
4804F5(H) - Print left margin (standard cassette)
4804F6(H) - Print left margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
4804F7(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4804FA(H) - Print left margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4804FB(H) - Print left margin (bypass feeder)
Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.

4805AF(H) - Fusing unit failure details


01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 C while printing.
02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 C before starting printing.
03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby mode (when
fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby mode (when
fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 C during printing
08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 C
09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected
When a service call was caused by a fusing unit failure (codes 01 - 09):
After fixing the problem, reset the data at this address to 00(H), then restart the machine to
clear the service call. (Refer to address 4805B1(H) for other hardware failures.)
4805B0(H) - Excessive jam alarm
Bit 3: Scanner excessive jam alarm
1: An alarm has occurred
Bit 4: Printer excessive jam alarm
1: An alarm has occurred
Either or both of these bits will change to 1 when an excessive jam alarm occurs. Reset
each bit to 0 when you have solved the problem. The machine will not be able to detect excessive jams in future if you do not reset these bits.

SM

4-91

H515

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

480586(H) - Print bottom margin when bypass feeder is used.


Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.

4805B1(H) - Details of the service call (hardware error)


01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 C while printing.
02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 C before starting printing.
03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby mode (when
fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby mode (when
fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 C while printing
08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 C
09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected
11(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was activated
12(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was not activated
21(H) - The laser synchronization signal was not detected during printing
31(H) - Polygonal mirror motor startup error
32(H) - Polygonal mirror motor error during printing
41(H) - Main motor startup error
42(H) - Main motor error during printing
When a service call was caused by a fusing lamp failure (codes 01 - 09):
The same code is stored at address 4805AF(H).
After fixing the problem, reset the data at address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then restart the machine to clear the service call.
When a service call was caused by another hardware failure (codes 11 - 42):
If the problem remains after restarting the machine (power off/on), fix the hardware problem.
The service call condition is cleared after power up.
4805C8(H) - Initial Toner Supply
Bit 3: Initial toner supply 0: Off, 1: On
Whenever the development unit is replaced, do the following procedure.
1. Ensure that the drum, CTM, and the new development unit are correctly installed.
2. Turn the machine on and change this bit to 1.
3. Turn the machine off.
4. Turn the machine on. The machine starts filling up the empty development unit hopper
with new toner. (This bit is reset to zero automatically.)
5. Make test copies or test patterns to check the print quality.
4805E5(H) - Sensor status (standard cassette and internal printer mechanism)
Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor
(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette
Bit 2 = 0 : not installed

Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4
Bit 2 = 1 : lengthwise


Bit 3 0

0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0

1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0

0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0

1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0

1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1

1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1

Bit 4: Paper end sensor


Bit 5: Registration sensor
Bit 6: Fusing exit sensor
Bit 7: Standard cassette availability

H515

1: Paper end
1: Paper present
1: Paper present
0: Available, 1: Not available
(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)

4-92

SM

4805E6(H) - Sensor status (1st Optional Paper Feed Unit)


Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor
(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette
Bit 2 = 0 : not installed


Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4
Bit 2 = 1 : lengthwise


Bit 3 0

0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0

1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0

0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0

1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1

Bit 4: Paper end sensor


Bit 5: Relay sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7:Cassette availability

1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1

1: Paper end
1: Paper present
0: Available, 1: Not available
(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)

4805E7(H) - Sensor status (2nd optional Paper Feed Unit)


Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor
(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)

Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4
Bit 2 = 1 : lengthwise


Bit 3 0

0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0

1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0

0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0

1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1

Bit 4: Paper end sensor


Bit 5: Relay sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7:Cassette availability

1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette
Bit 2 = 0 : not installed

Bit 3 0

1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1

1: Paper end
1: Paper present
0: Available, 1: Not available
(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)

4805EA(H) - Sensor status (optional 100 sheet cassette)


Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor
(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)
0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0

0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0

1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0

1
0
Cassette
0 : not installed

1

Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette
Bit 2 = 0 : not installed

Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4
Bit 2 = 1 : lengthwise


Bit 3 0

Bit 4: Paper end sensor


Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Cassette availability

SM

1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1

1: Paper end

0: Available, 1: Not available


(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)

4-93

H515

4805EB(H) - Sensor status (bypass feed)


Bit 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Paper in the bypass feed slot
Bit 5: Bypass feed sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Bypass feed availability

1: Paper not present


1: Paper present
0: Available, 1: Not available
(1: Jam, no paper, etc.)

48061C(H) - Scanning top margin adjustment


480620(H) to 480624(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment
Refer to section 5.12 for details.
492716 to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 64 and Speed Dial #00 #99.
As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes.
492716 to 49271D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 01
49271E to 492725(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 02
492726 to 49272D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03

49290E to 492915(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 64


492916 to 49291D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #00
49291E to 492925H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #01
492926 to 49292D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #03

492C2E to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99


49A709(H) - Selection of the other cassette for printer interface output (User Function 62)
01(H) - 1st optional paper feed unit
02(H) - 2nd optional paper feed unit
03(H) - Optional 100 sheet cassette
Note: The standard cassette and the cassette selected using function 62 are used for printer
interface output.
49A79C to 49A91B(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)
One error record consists of 6 bytes of data.
First error record start address - 49A79C(H)
Second error record start address - 49A7A2(H)
Third error record start address - 49A7A8(H)
:
:
:
64th error record start address - 49A916(H)
The format is as follows:
1st byte - Minute (BCD)
2nd byte - Hour (BCD)
3rd byte - Day (BCD)
4th byte - Month (BCD)
5th byte - Error code (low) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]
6th byte - Error code (high) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]
49D71C to 49DDFB(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)
One error communication record consists of 88 bytes. The format is as follows:

H515

4-94

SM

1st byte - Header


Bit 0: Communication result
0: OK, 1: NG
Bit 1: Document jam
1: Occurred
Bit 2: Power down
1: Occurred
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: Yes
Bit 5: Type of technical data
0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rate
Bit 6: Error report
0: Not printed, 1: Printed
Bit 7: Data validity
0: Not valid, 1: Valid
2nd byte - Not used
3rd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started
3rd byte - Month (BCD)
4th byte - Day (BCD)
5th byte - Hour (BCD)
6th byte - Minute (BCD)
7th and 8th bytes - Communication time
7th byte - Minutes (BCD)
8th byte - Seconds (BCD)
9th and 10th byte - Number of pages transmitted or received
9th byte - Low byte (Hex)
10th byte - High byte (Hex)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

11th and 12th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error lines
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0:
11th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)
12th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1:
11th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)
12th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)
13th byte - File number (low - Hex)
14th byte - File number (high - Hex)
15th and 16th bytes - Rx level or measure of error rate
If bit 5 of the 1st byte is 0:
15th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)
16th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1:
15th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)
16th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)
17th byte - Final modem rate
Bits 0 to 2: Final modem speed
0
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 = 0 : 2.4k 1 : 4.8k

0
Bit 2 0

1
1 : 7.2k

0

Bit 3: Not used


Bits 4 to 6: Final modem type
Bit 4 1
0
Bit 5 = 0 : V.27ter 1 : V.29



Bit 6 0
0

0
0 : 9.6k

1

1
1 : V.33

0

1
0 : 12.0k

1

0 V.17
0 :
(Long
)
1

0
1 : 14.4k

1

1 V.17
0 :
(Short)
1

Bit 7: Not used


18th to 20th byte - Not used
21st to 44th byte - Remote terminals ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)

SM

4-95

H515

45th byte - Communication mode #1


Bits 0 - 1: Resolution used
Bit 0 = 1 : Standard 0 : Detail,
,
Bit 1 0
1

1 : Fine
1

Bit 2: Communication Protocol


Bit 3: ECM
Bits 4 to 7: Communication mode used
1
Bit 4 0
0
Bit 5 0
Bit 6 = 0 : Normal 0 : Confidential

0
Bit 7 0
Bit 4 0
Bit 5 0
Bit 6 = 1 : Forwarding


Bit 7 0

0: G3, 1: G4
0: Off, 1: On
0
1
1
1
0 : Polling 0 : Transfer


0
0

1
0 Automatic
1 : Service Call

0

46th byte - Communication mode #2


Bit 0: Tx or Rx
Bit 1: Reduction in Tx
Bit 2: Batch transmission
Bit 3: Send later transmission
Bit 4: Transmission from
Bit 5: Not used
Bits 6 and 7: Network type used
Bit 6 = 1 : PSTN, 0 : ISDN
1
Bit 7 0

1 Transfer
1
1 : using
DTMFUUI
0

0
0
Fax
0 : On Demand

1

0: Tx, 1: Rx
0: Not reduced, 1: Reduced
0: Not used, 1: Used
0: Not used, 1: Used
0: ADF, 1: Memory

47th byte - Not used


48th byte - Number of errors duing communication (Hex)
49th to 52nd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred
49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)
50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)
51th byte - Error code (low - BCD)
52st byte - Error code (high - BCD)
53th to 56th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred
57th to 60th byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred
61st to 64th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred
65th to 68th byte - 5th error code and page number where the error occurred
69th to 72nd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred
73rd to 76th byte - 7th error code and page number where the error occurred
77th to 80th byte - 8th error code and page number where the error occurred
81st to 84th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred
85th to 88th byte - 10th error code and page number where the error occurred
70001E to 700025(H) - Hard disk information
If the data in these addresses do not match the following values after installing an optional
hard disk, format the hard disk and check these addresses again.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 50(H)
700025(H) - 00(H)
700026(H) - 80(H)

H515

4-96

SM

4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS


Flash/SRAM data copy harness (P/N: H5159100)
EPROM board (universal EPROM PCB)
Scan line adjustment chart (P/N: H5159300)
200 dpi test chart (P/N: H0829020)
Test harness (P/N: H5159301)
SBU adjustment knobs (P/N: H0129300)

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

SM

4-97

H515

4.7. PM TABLE
Scanner
Item
Exposure Glass
R1 and R2 Rollers
White Shading Plate
Mirrors
ADF Roller Assy
Separation Pad

C: Clean, R: Replace
30K
60K
90K
C (user) C (user) C (user)
C (user) C (user) C (user)
C (user) C (user) C (user)
C
R (user) R (user) R (user)
R (user) R (user) R (user)

1 year
C (user)
C (user)
C (user)
C
C (user)
C (user)

Notes
Soft cloth and water
Soft cloth and water
Soft cloth and water

1 year

Notes
Soft cloth and water
Soft cloth and water

Soft cloth and water


Soft cloth and water

Printer
Item
Paper Feed Roller
Registration Roller
Thermistor
Hot Roller Strippers
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
(Fusing)
Cleaning Pad
Transfer Roller
Development Unit
Ozone Filter

30K

60K
C
C (user)
R
R
R

90K

C (user)

R
R (user)
Replaced when a new CTM is installed.
R
R
R

A cleaning pad is
enclosed in the CTM.

100 Sheet Cassette (Optional)


Item
Feed Roller

10K

30K

60K

1 year
C (user)

Notes
Soft cloth and water

30K
C (user)

60K
C (user)

1 year
C (user)
C (user)

Notes
Soft cloth and water
Soft cloth and water

Paper Feed Unit (Optional)


Item
Relay Roller
Feed Roller

H515

10K
C (user)

4-98

SM

4.8. SYSTEM PRINTOUTS

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4.8.1. System Parameter List (page 1 of 2)

SM

4-99

H515

System Parameter List (page 2 of 2)

H515

4-100

SM

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

4.8.2. Ram Dump

SM

4-101

H515

REPLACEMENT AND
ADJUSTMENT

5. REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT


+WARNING
The machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams can
cause permanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or look
along the laser beam path while the main power is on.

+CAUTION
Before starting disassembly, be sure to print all message files in the
SAF memory. Then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord for safety.
Lithium Battery: The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type
is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.

5.1. COVERS

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

5.1.1. Document Table and Tray

[A]

[B]

H515R601.wmf

A: Document Table
B: Document Tray

SM

5-1

H515

5.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly

[A]

H515R008.wmf

A: Rear Cover (4 screws, 3 hooks)

5.1.3. Left Cover

[B]

[A]

H515R603.wmf

A: Cover (1 screw)
B: Left Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks, 1 connector)

H515

5-2

SM

5.1.4. Right Cover

[C]

[B]

[A]

H515R501.wmf

A: Small Cover A (1 screw)


B: Small Cover B (1 screw)
C: Right Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks)

5.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly

Note:
It is not necessary to remove the connectors.
During reassembly, ensure that the harness is replaced in the hooks [D]
as shown.

[C]

[A]

[B]
[D]

H515R009.wmf

B: Bracket (1 tapping screw)


A: Operation Panel Assembly (1 screw with grounding wire, 1 connector)

SM

5-3

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

First, remove the operation panel from the assembly by pushing the operation panel release button [C], then remove the assembly.

5.1.6. Top Cover


Note for reassembly: Thread the ground wire through the recess [B], as
shown.

[A]

[B]

H515R010.wmf

A: Top Cover (1 tapping screw with grounding wire, 1 white clip)

H515

5-4

SM

5.2. ADF
5.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly
[A]

[B]

H515R609.wmf

A: ADF Roller Cover


B: ADF Roller Assembly

5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

[A]

H515R610.wmf

A: Separation Rubber Plate

SM

5-5

H515

5.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment


[A]

To match the paper type that the


user will be scanning, adjust the
position of lever [A] as shown in
the following table.
Paper
Thickness
Thin
Normal
Thick

Pressure
Low
Normal
High

2 1

Position
1
2
3

To correct document feed problems, adjust the position of lever


[A] as shown in the following table.
Problem
Multi-feed - Thin pages
Multi-feed - Thick pages
Jam
Non-feed

Position
1
3
1
3

H515R611.wmf

A: Separation Pressure Adjustment Lever

5.2.4. ADF Sensors

[A]

[B]

H515R504.wmf

A: Operation Panel (4 tapping screws, 5 connectors)


B: ADF Upper Unit

H515

5-6

SM

[F]

[C]

[D]

[E]
[G]
H515R508.wmf

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

C: Bracket (7 tapping screws, 1 grounding wire)


D: Document Width Sensor (B4)
E: Document Sensor
F: Scan Line Sensor
G: Document Width Sensor (A3)

SM

5-7

H515

5.3. SCANNER
5.3.1. Exposure Glass

[A]

H515R003.wmf

A: Exposure Glass (2 white clips)

5.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers

[C]
[A]

[B]

H515R016.wmf

Remove the scanner lower unit first.


B: Scanner Side Cover A (1 screw)
C: Scanner Side Cover B (1 screw)
A: Scanner Lower Unit (5 screws, 1 grounding wire, 3 connectors)

H515

5-8

SM

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R503.wmf

C: Plate (2 screws)
A: R1 Roller (1 E-ring)
B: R2 Roller (1 E-ring)

Note: If the rollers are removed, the gears and the belt will come off easily.

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

5.3.3. Xenon Lamp

[C]

[B]

h505r506.wmf

B: Shading Plate (1 tapping screw)


C: Lens Cover (2 screws)
A: Xenon Lamp (2 clips, 1 connector)

SM

[A]

5-9

H515

5.3.4. Tx Motor

[A]

H515R505.wmf

First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then remove the motor.
A: Tx Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)

5.3.5. Mirrors
[B]
[A]

[D]

[C]

[E]

H515R017.wmf

First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then turn it over.
D: Lower Scanner Unit Cover A: 1st Mirror (2 clips)
E: Bracket (1 tapping screw) B: 2nd Mirror (2 clips)
C: 3rd Mirror (2 clips)

H515

5-10

SM

5.3.6. Stamper

[B]

[A]

[D]
[C]
H515R018.wmf

SM

5-11

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2).


A: Stamper
D: Lower Scanner Unit Cover
B: Bracket A (2 tapping screws with grounding wire)
C: Bracket B (1 tapping screw)

H515

5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS


5.4.1. Laser Unit
First, remove the clip [A] and disconnect harnesses [B], [C], and [D], then remove the Laser Unit [E].

[B]

[A]

[C]

[E]
[D]

H515R619.wmf

E: Laser Unit (1 clip, 3 connectors, 4 positioning pins)

H515

5-12

SM

5.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor


[A]
[C]

[B]

H515R620.wmf

A: Laser Unit Cover


B: Laser Diode (LD) Unit (2 tapping screws)
C: Hexagonal Mirror Motor (3 tapping screws)

Laser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Do not open the
laser unit or look along the laser beam path while the main power is
on.

SM

5-13

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

+WARNING

5.5. DEVELOPMENT
5.5.1. Development Unit
[D]

[B, C]

[A]

H515R621.wmf

Release the clips [B] and [C] and remove the main motor cover [D], then remove the
development unit [A].
A: Development Unit (2 clips, 1 connector)
[B]
[B ]
[A]
[A ]

[F]
[D]

[E]
[C]
H515R655.wmf

Note for reassembly


1. Place the pins [A] and [B] under the hooks [A ] and [B ].
2. Insert the pins [C] and [D] into the openings in the base, then push [E] and [F]
down to lock the development unit onto the base.

H515

5-14

SM

5.5.2. Transfer Roller


[A]

H515R622.wmf

A: Transfer Roller (1 gear, 2 spacers)

First, remove the zener diode [A], then remove the main motor assembly [B].
Note: Once the main motor assembly is removed, the gears and the shafts
will come off the unit easily.
[A]

[B]

H515R623.wmf

A: Zener Diode (1 screw)


B: Main Motor Assembly (2 tapping screws, 1 connector, 1 spring)

SM

5-15

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

5.5.3. Main Motor and Gears

5.5.4. Toner End Sensor

[A]

H515R507.wmf

A: Toner End Sensor (1 connector)

H515

5-16

SM

5.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit


After every 60,000 prints, the following parts have to be replaced.
[A]

[E]

[F]
[D]
[C]
[B]
H515R646.wmf

A: Development Unit
E, F: Bushings
D: Development Roller Gear
C: Pin
B: Development Roller (Rubber)

Development unit [A]


Development roller [B] (A development roller comes with the parts [C]
through [F]. Check for the assembly part number of [B] through [F] in
the parts catalog.)
Transfer roller (refer to section 5.5.2)
Zener diode (refer to section 5.5.3)
The transfer roller unit, main motor and gears, development roller [B], and
the parts labelled [C] to [F] in the above illustration are not included with a
new development unit [A].
To install a new development unit, perform the following:
1. Install a new development roller as shown in the above illustration.
2. Install a new transfer roller, a new zener diode, a main motor, and gears
as described in sections 5.5.2 and 5.5.3.
Continued on the next page

SM

5-17

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

3. Check the electrical resistance of the following.


Charge bias terminals/Zener diode
Toner application roller bias terminals
H515R656.wmf

A: Bias terminal to the CTM


B: Bias terminal from the power pack
C, D: Zener diode terminals

[A]
[C] [D]

Criteria
A - B: 0
C - D: The resistance varies depending
on the voltage applied between the terminals.

[B]

Development roller bias terminals


H515R657.wmf

A:
B:
C:
D:

[A]

Bias terminal from the power pack


Toner application roller shaft
Toner metering blade
Bias brush

Criteria
A - B: Less than 1 k
A - C: Less than 1 k
A - D: Less than 1 k

[C]

[D]
[B]

Transfer roller bias terminals


H515R658.wmf

A: Bias terminal from the power pack


B: Development roller shaft

[A]

Criteria
A - B: Less than 1 k

[B]
H515R659.wmf

A: Bias terminal from the power pack


B: Transfer roller shaft

[A]

Criteria
A - B: Less than 10 k
Note:
Check the resistance while pushing
the roller shaft down onto the roller
holder.

[B]

Continued on the next page

H515

5-18

SM

4. Install the new development unit into the machine.


5. Install the drum and CTM, and ensure that the following points are
connected to the frame ground.
Drum shaft
Main motor bracket
Antistatic brush on the transfer roller unit
Initial Toner Supply
After installing a new development unit, perform the following:
1. Set bit 3 of RAM address 4805C8 to 1. (Refer to section 4.5)
2. Turn off the machine and wait for 10 seconds.
3. Turn on the machine.
4. The machine will supply new toner to the development unit.

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

Bit 3 will be automatically reset to zero at the end of the procedure, which will
take about 90 seconds.

SM

5-19

H515

5.6. FUSING
5.6.1. Thermistor

[A]

[B]

H515R624.wmf

B: Thermistor (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)


A: Thermistor Cover (6 hooks)

5.6.2. Fusing Unit


Preparation - Right hand side
First, open the fusing exit cover, then remove the sensor assembly [A],
bracket [B], and gear [C].
[C]
[B]

[A]
[D]

H515R625.wmf

B: Bracket (1 screw)
C: Gear
A: Feed-out Sensor/Exit Cover Switch Assembly (2 tapping screws, 2 connectors)

+CAUTION
During re-assembly, be sure that the fusing exit cover [D] is open
before inserting the sensor assembly [A].

H515

5-20

SM

Preparation - Left hand side


First, remove the ground wire [A], harness cover [B] and cover [C], 1 connector.
Note: Put back the bracket [D] after removing the ground wire [A].
Fusing Unit Removal
[A]

[B]

[D]
[E]

[F]

[C]

H515R626.wmf

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

D: Ground Wire (1 screw)


B: Harness Cover A (1 tapping screw)
C: Harness Cover B (1 tapping screw)
A: Fusing Left Cover (1 tapping screw)
E: Fusing Unit Fulcrum (1 tapping screw)
F: Thermistor Harness

[A]

H515R627.wmf

A: Fusing Unit (3 screws, 1 connector)

SM

5-21

H515

5.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers


Remove the cleaning felt if it is still in the unit, then remove the strippers.

[A]

[B]
H515R628.wmf

A: Cleaning Felt

B: Hot Roller Strippers (1 spring each)

+CAUTION
Be careful not to lose the springs.
5.6.4. Fusing Lamp

[A]

H515R629.wmf

115V Models

A: Fusing Lamp (2 screws)


[A]

H515R652.wmf

+CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the glass surface.
H515

5-22

SM

5.6.5. Hot Roller

[C]
[E]

[B]

[A]

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

[D]

H515R630.wmf

First, remove the tapping screw [A], then remove the tapping screws [B] and
[C]. The fusing upper and lower units come apart after the ground plate [D] is
released from the upper unit [E].

+CAUTION
Do not bend the ground plate too much.
Continued on the next page

SM

5-23

H515

Remove the bracket [A], then remove the hot roller [B].

[B]

[A]
[C]

H515R631.wmf

115V Models
A: Bracket (3 screws)
B: Hot Roller

C: Fusing Lamp Connector (1 screw)

[B]
[C]

[A]
H515R653.wmf

220V Models
A: Bracket (3 screws)
B: Hot Roller

H515

5-24

SM

5.6.6. Pressure Roller


[A]

[C]

[B]

H515R632.wmf

A: Bracket (2 screws)
B: Bracket (1 tapping screw)
C: Pressure Roller

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

5.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]
H515R654.wmf

A: Thermostat (2 screws)
B: Thermofuse (2 screws) - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)
C,D: Terminal Plates for the Thermofuse - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)

SM

5-25

H515

5.7. PAPER FEED


5.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box

[A]

[B]

H515R634.wmf

A: Paper Feed Motor (2 screws)


B: Paper Feed Clutch Box (1 clip, 2 screws)

5.7.2. Paper End Sensor


First, remove the bracket [A], then remove the sensor [B].

[B]

[A]

H515R635.wmf

A: Bracket (1 screw)
B: Paper End Sensor

H515

5-26

SM

5.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed Sensor,
and Relay Connector

[B]
[C]

[A]

Paper feed rollers [A]: Turn the roller shaft as shown in the diagram until
the screw heads can be seen from the front. Then remove the rollers.
The relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette [C] should be
installed as shown in the diagram (the triangle mark must be at the left hand
side of the connector.
By-pass feed sensor: See below.

h515r022.wmf

SM

5-27

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

H515R636.wmf

A: Feed rollers (1 screw each)


B: Paper size sensor (2 hooks, 1 connector)
C: Relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette (1 screw, 1 connector)

5.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator

[F]

[H]
[A]

[B]

[C]

[G]
[E]
[D]

H515R637.wmf

F: Bracket (2 tapping screws)


H: Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
G: Guide Plate (5 hooks)
A: Paper Guide A (4 hooks)
B: Paper Guide B (4 hooks)
C,D: Springs
E: Registration Roller (1 E-ring, 1 gear)

Registration Roller
Remove the guides ([A], [B]) and springs ([C], [D]) first, then remove the
roller [E].
Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
Remove the bracket [F] and the guide plate [G], then remove the actuator
[H].

H515

5-28

SM

5.8. PCBs
5.8.1. PSU

[A]

H515R026.wmf

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

A: Heat Sink (4 screws)

[B]
H515R027.wmf

B: PSU (4 screws, 2 connectors)

SM

5-29

H515

5.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE


[A]

[B]

[C]
H515R639.wmf

A: NCU (3 screws)

B: MFDU (2 screws)

C: MFCE (2 screws)

If the machine has a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card installed, the SRAM data in the defective MFCE can be copied to the new
MFCE. Otherwise, all the data stored in the card will be initialized the first
time that the power is switched on after replacement.
In such a case, perform the following procedure.
1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is "1", and the battery switch of the
card is ON, before removing the IC card from the MFCE. Then, turn the
machine off.
2. Disconnect the optional IC cards.
3. Replace the old MFCE with the new MFCE (ensure that the battery
switch in the new MFCE is on).
Do not turn on the machine at this point.
4. Connect the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool into the lower slot of the new MFCE,
then connect the old MFCE to the Copy Tool (refer to section 4.1.22).
5. Turn the machine on.
6. Transfer the SRAM data from the old MFCE using service function
12 (refer to section 4.1.22).
7. At the complettion of the data transfer, turn the machine off and
disconnect the tool.
8. Re-insert the optional IC card(s).
9. Turn the machine on and check if the IC cards can be used as before.

Harness Connections from the MFDU

H515

5-30

SM

5.8.3. Power Pack


Fan Motor
Main Motor
Quenching Lamp
Mechanical Counter

Interlock Switch
(+24V)

CN12

CN11

CN15

Paper Feed Motor


Polygonal
Mirror Motor

CN14

Stamper
Ozone Fan
Speaker

Tx Motor

CN17

CN74

PSU
100 Sheet Cassette
(Optional)

CN18

Lamp
Stabilizer

Power Pack

CN21

CN70

CN20
CN71

CN76

CN23

PD1

CN75

CN13

OPU

CN4

Not Used

Paper Size Sensor,


Thermistor

CN26

CN25

SBU

LDDR

CN7

Sensors
-Paper Exit
-Fusing Exit Cover

Lazer
Synchronized
Detector

CN5

PFU
(Optional)

Not Used

Sensors
-Registration
-Bypass Feed
-Paper End
-Toner End

CN3

CN78

NCU

FCE
CN1

CN10

Interlock
Switch
(+5V)

CN73

Printer I/F
(Optional)

Not used

CN72

Microphone
(Optional)

CN77

Not Used

HDD
(Optional)

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

H515R502.wmf

Do not touch the dials on


the power pack during
replacement.

[A]

H515R640.wmf

A: Power Pack (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)

SM

5-31

H515

5.9. OTHERS
5.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor

[D]

[C]
[A]

[B]
H515R641.wmf

A,B: Ozone Filter Holder (2 screws)


C: Ozone Filter
D: Fan Motor (1 connector)

5.9.2. Speaker

[A]

H515R050.wmf

A: Speaker (2 screws)

H515

5-32

SM

5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL)


5.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover
H515R642.wmf

[A]
C: Gear Cover (1 screw)
A: Harness Cover (2 screws)
B: Relay Connector (2 clips)

[B]

[C]

5.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components

A: Sensor Stay (1 hook)


B: Sensor Cover (2 hooks)
C: Paper End Sensor (3 hooks)
E: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)
F: Feed Rollers (2 bushings, 1
clip)

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D]

Paper End Sensor


First, remove the stay [A] and the cover [B], then remove the sensor [C].
Paper Feed Clutch and Rollers
First, remove the gears [D], then remove the clutch [E] and rollers [F].

SM

5-33

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

H515R643.wmf

[A]

5.10.3. Paper Size Sensor


[A]
[B]

[D]

[C]

H515R644.wmf

A: Paper Guide
B: Bottom Plate (2 springs)
C: Paper Size Dial (1 clip, 1 spring)
D: Paper Size Sensor (2 hooks)

H515

5-34

SM

Rev.11/16/98

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT


5.11.1. Replacement

Remove the rear cover, then remove the NCU [A], the rear bracket [B], and
the SBU [C].
Note: After the SBU is replaced, perform the following adjustment procedure.

[C]

[B]
[A]
H515R509.wmf

A: NCU (3 screws)
B: Rear Bracket (3 screws)
C: SBU (2 screws)

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

5.11.2. Tools Required


Scan line adjustment chart: P/N H5159300
200 dot-per-inch test pattern: P/N H0829020
Test lead: P/N H5159301
SBU adjustment knobs: P/N H0129300

5.11.3. Preparation
1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 0.2 V/unit (vertical) and 0.5 ms/unit
(horizontal).

2. Connect the test lead to H515-CN 6 or to H551-CN8 on the MFCE.


3. Connect the oscilloscope probe to pin 2 (blue wire) and the ground to pin
4 (black wire)
4. Clean the white pressure plate with a soft cloth and alcohol.
5. Light the xenon lamp (see section 4.1.15)

SM

5-35

H515

5.11.4. Adjustment
1. White Level

[A]

[B]
H515R552.wmf

H515R043.wmf

A 1.26 V
B 0.46 V

(A-B)/A 0.3

Fit the adjustment knobs [A] through the SBU slots as shown.
Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].
Remove any test charts that are on the exposure glass.
Ensure that the complete white level waveform can be seen on the oscilloscope.
Adjust the waveforms until A and B in the oscilloscope display meet
the requirements.
Carefully tighten the SBU securing screws.
The waveform may have irregular patches if the lens, mirror, exposure
glass, white pressure plate, or CCD is dirty.
The xenon lamp may be wearing out if the waveform level is lower at the
ends than in the middle.
The CCD may be defective if the waveform has sharp peaks or dropouts.

H515

5-36

SM

2. Focusing (MTF)
[A]
[B]

[C]

[A]

H515R044.wmf

H515R553.wmf

Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.


Remove the lens cover [A] (2 screws).
Loosen the lens securing screw [B].
Focus the lens [C] untill B in the oscilloscope display is maximized (see
the diagram on the upper right)
Tighten the lens securing screw.
3. Reduction
Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

[A]
[B]

[A]

H515R045.wmf

H515R554.wmf

Loosen the lens block securing the screws [A].


Focus the lens block [B] until the signal has 8 or fewer crosspoints (see
the diagram on the right.
Tighten the lens block securing screws.
Note: Alternately tighten each screw a little at a time.

SM

5-37

H515

4. Scan Line

[A]

H515R047.wmf

[B]
H515R043.wmf

H515

H515R555.wmf

Place the scan line test chart [A] on the exposure glass as shown.
Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].
Adjust the waveform with the adjusting knobs until it appears as shown
in the diagram on the right.

5-38

SM

5. Scan Start Position

H515R046.wmf

SM

Place the scan line test chart on the exposure glass as shown on the
previous page.
Connect the oscilloscope to the test leads as follows:
Channel 1 to VIDEO (pin 2 - blue wire), channel 2 to VADJ (pin 1 - red
wire), and connect the ground to pin 4 (black wire)
Set the oscilloscope scales as follows:
Vertical - CH 1: 0.2 V/unit, CH 2: 2 V/unit; Horizontal - 20 s/unit.
Adjust the waveform until it appears as shown in the right-hand diagram. Do this by gently tapping the SBU as shown in the left-hand diagram.
The peak of the VIDEO signal must be within 4 bits of the peak VADJ
signal.
Reset the oscilloscope to the original settings and repeat procedure 4
(Scan Line) on the previous page. It may be necessary to recheck procedures 4 and 5 until the scan line is perfectly positioned.
Tighten the SBU securing screws.

5-39

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

H515R556.wmf

5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT


5.12.1. Overview
This section will explain how to adjust various scanning and printing parameters. Among these are the margin parameters as shown in the diagram
below, which are named in accordance with the chart below the diagram.

W2

L3

L2

L1

W1

H515R650.wmf

Parameters

Description

W1
W2
L1
L2
L3

Left margin
Print/Scan width
Top margin
Print/Scan length
Bottom margin

Fax - Tx
Not adjustable
Not adjustable
Scanner
Not adjustable
Scanner

Adjustable by
Fax - Rx
Printer
Not adjustable
Printer
Not adjustable
Not adjustable

Copying
Printer
Not adjustable
Scanner/Printer
Not adjustable
Scanner

+CAUTION
The factory settings may not be the same as the Initial settings
described in the following procedures. RAM reset level 0 will reset all
the scan and print margin parameters to the Initial settings.

H515

5-40

SM

5.12.2. Scanner Parameters


1. Contrast

Normal
Lighten
Darken
Text Area

Text Mode
Bit Switch
Initial Setting
Scanner 02
0E(H)
Scanner 03
10(H)
Scanner 04
0C(H)

Halftone Mode
Bit Switch
Initial Setting
Scanner 05
09(H)
Scanner 06
0D(H)
Scanner 07
02(H)
Scanner 08

08(H)

2. Margins
Parameter
W1, W2

RAM
Address

Formula

Unit

Initial
Setting

Not adjustable

L1

L2

L3

SM

48061C(H)

This parameter will change the number of tx


motor steps after the scan line sensor is
activated.
To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + 15.4x
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - 15.4x
Initial setting of L1: 2 mm
Not adjustable (Original length - L1 - L3)
This parameter will change the number of tx
motor steps after the scan line sensor is
deactivated.
To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - 15.4x
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + 15.4x
Initial setting of L3: 2 mm

5-41

480620(H)
(standard)

9A(H)
1
mm [154(D)]
15.4

79(H)
[121(D)]

1
93(H)
480622(H)
mm
[147(D)
(detail)
15.4
480624(H)
(fine)

AF(H)
[175(D)]

H515

REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

H515R651.wmf

5.12.3. Printer Parameters


1. Margins (Main Scan Direction)
Parameter

RAM
Address

Formula

Unit

Initial
Setting

H515R648.wmf

Standard
cassette:
4804F5(H)
1st paper
feed unit:
4804F6(H)
2nd paper
feed unit: 0.5 mm 0A(H)
4804F7(H)

W1

100 sheet
cassette:
4804FA(H)

1. Fax and Copy Mode


To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + x/0.5
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - x/0.5
Initial setting of W1: 2 mm
W2

H515

Bypass
feed:
4804FB(H)

Not adjustable

5-42

SM

2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction)


Parameter

RAM
Address

Formula

Unit

Initial
Setting

H515R651.wmf

L2

L3

0.34
mm

0D(H)

2nd paper
feed unit:
4804EC(H)

Standard and 100 sheet cassette:


To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + x/0.68
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - x/0.68
Initial setting of L1: 2 mm

00(H)

1st paper
feed unit:
4804EB(H)

L1

0.68
mm

0.34
mm

0D(H)

100 sheet
cassette:
4804EF(H)

0.68
mm

05(H)

Bypass
feeder:
4804F0(H)

0.34
mm

00(H)
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

Standard
cassette:
4804EA(H)

Other:
To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + x/0.34
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - x/0.34
Initial setting of L1: 2 mm
Not adjustable
This is only adjustable in bypass feed mode.
To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - x/0.34
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + x/0.34

480586(H)

0.34
mm

4A(H)

Example: To increase the margin by 5 mm.


5/0.34 14.7 15(D) = F(H)
New setting = 3B - F = 2C(H)

SM

5-43

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is a copy quality problem that cannot be solved easily, try using the
following troubleshooting procedures, while referring to the point-to-point
diagram. The procedures may not be exhaustive, but they may help you to
find the problem.
First, distinguish whether the problem is caused by the remote terminal or by
your machine. If the problem is caused by your machine, distinguish whether
it is due to a scanner problem or a printer problem.

Make a copy

Is the print image


OK?

Print a test pattern

NG

or a report

OK

OK

Check the symptom again

Is the print image


OK?

NG

Check the remote


terminal

OK

NG

TROUBLESHOOTING

Is the image
received by fax
OK?

Check the printer

Check the scanner


H515t614.wmf

SM

6-1

H515

6.1.1. Blank Copies


Possible Cause (Printer):
Poor drum sensitivity.
Laser optic components are out of position.
The proper bias voltages are not applied to the toner application roller
and/or the development roller.
The proper current is not applied to the transfer roller.
Action:
1. Print a test pattern or a report, and open the cover in the middle of
printing.
2. Check if there is toner adhered to the drum surface.
If yes, do the following. If not, go to step 3.
Check if the transfer roller is installed correctly.
Check if the development unit is installed correctly.
Check if the resistance between the transfer bias terminal on the development unit and the transfer roller shaft is less than 10 kOhm, while
pushing the roller shaft down to the roller holder. Refer to page 5-18.
If the resistance is OK, check the connections behind the power pack
and the power pack itself.
3. Check if there is toner on the surface of the development roller.
If yes, do the following. If no, go to step 4.
Check if all the laser optic components are properly positioned.
Try replacing the drum.
4. Check if the toner cartridge is empty. If yes, do the following. If no, go to
step 5.
Check or replace the toner end sensor.
5. Do the following.
Check that the development unit is correctly installed.
Check if the resistance between the development roller bias terminal on
the development unit and the development roller shaft, the toner metering
plate, and the bias brush are less than 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.
Check if the resistance between the toner application roller bias terminal on the development unit and the toner application roller shaft is less
than 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.
If all the resistances are OK, check the connections behind the power
pack and the power pack itself.

H515

6-2

SM

6.1.2. Black Copies


Possible Cause (Scanner)
The scanner lamp, lamp stabilizer, or SBU is not connected or defective.
Action:
1. Check if the scanner lamp is connected properly.
2. Check if the scanner lamp or lamp stabilizer is not defective. If one or
both of them is (are) found defective, replace both items.
3. Check if the SBU is connected properly, or it is not defective.
4. Check if the SBU is defective.
Possible Cause (Printer)
The charge is not properly applied.
Action:
1. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and the
CTM, and the charge wire are properly connected.
If yes, go to step 2.
If no, fix the connections.
2. Check if the zener diode is not shorted.
If the zener diode is shorted, replace the zener diode.
If no, go to step 3.

TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Check the connections behind the power pack.

SM

6-3

H515

6.1.3. Dirty Background

H515t607.wmf

H515t612.wmf

Possible Cause (Scanner)


Scanner shading correction error or wrong threshold.
Action:
1. Clean the shading plate.
2. Adjust the scanner contrast threshold settings.
Possible Cause (Printer)
Poor drum sensitivity.
The charge is not properly applied.
The hot roller is dirty.
Action:
1. Try replacing the drum.
2. Check if the hot roller surface is dirty.
If yes, clean the roller or replace the cleaning pad.
If no, go to step 3.
3. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and the
CTM, and the charge wire are properly connected.
If yes, check or replace the power pack.
If no, fix the connections.

H515

6-4

SM

6.1.4. Uneven Image Density

H515t608.wmf

H515t612.wmf

Possible Cause (Scanner)


Dirty exposure glass or mirrors
SBU position is not aligned to the scan line properly.
Action
Clean the scanner exposure glass or mirrors.
Adjust the SBU position (refer to section 5.11 for details).

Action:
1. Print a solid black test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of
printing.
2. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the development roller.
If no, check the toner metering blade, and the toner supply mechanism
in the toner hopper. If yes, go to step 3.
If the image is lighter in the center of the image, toner may be low. Replace the CTM and supply more toner.
3. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the drum.
If no, check the drum sensitivity, the laser optic components, and the
quenching lamp on the CTM.
If yes, check if there is any dirt on the transfer roller surface.

SM

6-5

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

Possible Cause (Printer)


Poor drum sensitivity.
Dirty laser optic components.
The toner metering blade is deformed, or incorrectly positioned.
Uneven toner supply in the development toner hopper.
Quenching lamp defect.

6.1.5. Vertical Black Lines

H515t603.wmf

H515t612.wmf

Possible Cause (Scanner)


Dirt or dust on the exposure glass or mirrors.
Defective CCD element(s) on the SBU.
Dirty shading plate.
Action:
1. Clean the exposure glass, the mirrors, or the shading plate.
2. Replace the SBU.
Possible Cause (Printer)
Damaged cleaning blade.
Dirty hot roller stripper(s).
Action:
1. Replace the CTM.
2. Clean the hot roller strippers.

H515

6-6

SM

6.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines

H515t610.wmf

H515t611.wmf

Possible Cause (Printer)


The drum surface is scratched or damaged.
Replace corona leak failure.
Action:
1. Check that the surface of the drum is not damaged.
Replace the drum if it is damaged.

TROUBLESHOOTING

2. If the problem still remains, do the following.


Clean the charge wire.
Replace the CTM.

SM

6-7

H515

6.1.7. Vertical White Lines

H515t606.wmf

H515t612.wmf

Possible Cause (Printer)


The laser optic components are dirty.
The hot roller stripper scraped the toner off from the print paper.
Action:
Clean the laser optic components.
Check the hot roller stripper mechanism. Clean the strippers and replace them if they are damaged.

H515

6-8

SM

6.1.8. Horizontal White Lines

H515t609.wmf

H515t611.wmf

Possible Cause (Printer)


The surface of the development roller is damaged or deformed.
The development bias is not stable.
Transfer current is not stable.
Action:
1. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.

3. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear on


the development roller surface.
If yes, check if the development roller surface is not deformed. If it is
OK, check or replace the power pack.
If no, check for damage on the drum surface.

SM

6-9

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear on


the drum surface.
If yes, go to step 3.
If no, check the transfer roller surface and the transfer bias terminals
connections. If they are OK, check or replace the power pack.

6.1.9. Black Dots/Spots

H515t602.wmf

Possible Cause (Scanner)


Dust on the exposure glass.
Action:
Clean the exposure glass.
Try disabling MTF.
Possible Cause (Printer)
The drum surface is damaged (the interval X = approx. 94.2 mm).
Toner on the hot roller (the interval X = approx. 63 mm).
Action:
Replace the drum.
Clean the hot roller surface.

H515

6-10

SM

6.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas

H515t601.wmf

Possible Cause (Printer)


The drum surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots appear at 94.2
mm intervals).
The development roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots appear at 62.8 mm intervals).
The toner application roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots
appear at about 16.75 mm intervals).

TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
Replace the drum.
Clean the surface of the development roller or replace the roller if it is
damaged.
Replace the development unit.

SM

6-11

H515

6.1.11. Faint Copies *

H515t604.wmf

H515t612.wmf

Possible Causes (Scanner)


Dirty shading plate and/or exposure glass
Incorrect scan threshold setting
Defective scanner lamp or SBU
Action:
Clean shading plate.
Adjust the scan threshold settings.
Replace the scanner lamp or the SBU.
Possible Causes (Printer)
Poor drum sensitivity.
Dirty laser optic components.
Incorrect development/ transfer bias
Defective quenching lamp
Low toner
Low fusing temperature

H515

6-12

SM

Action:
1. Check whether the toner saving feature has not been selected with the
user parameters. (If it has been selected, there is no problem.)
2. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.
3. Check if the toner on the paper at the entrance of the fusing unit looks
faint.
If yes, check or replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, and PSU.
If no, go to step 4.
4. Check if the toner on the drum looks faint.
If yes, go to step 5.
If no, check the contacts between the transfer bias terminals and power
pack.

TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Check if the toner on the development roller looks faint.


If yes, check all the contacts between the development and toner application rollers bias terminals.
If no, try replacing the CTM and drum.

SM

6-13

H515

6.1.12. Vertical Black Band

H515t605

H515t612

Possible Cause (Printer)


Dirty charge corona wire.
The toner metering blade is deformed, damaged, or incorrectly positioned.
Action:
Clean the charge corona wire. The wire cleaner is on the CTM.
Replace the CTM.
Check the toner metering blade and replace if damaged.

H515

6-14

SM

6.1.13. Unfused Copies


Possible Cause (Printer)
The thermistor is defective.
The fusing pressure roller spring mechanism is defective.
The wrong type of toner is being used.
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
Action:
1. Check if the correct type of paper and toner are being used.
If yes, go to step 2.
If no, use recommended types of paper and toner.
2. Try replacing the fusing lamp and the roller.
6.1.14. Ghost Image
Possible Cause (Printer)
Poor drum sensitivity.
The cleaning blade is deformed or incorrectly positioned.
Dirty hot roller

TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
Clean the cleaning blade.
Replace the CTM.
Clean the hot roller surface and/or replace the cleaning pad.
Replace the drum.

SM

6-15

H515

6.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper


Possible Cause (Printer)
Dirty transfer roller
Dirty fusing pressure roller
Action:
1. Check if the transfer roller is dirty with toner.
If yes, clean the roller surface.
1) Take the roller off the machine.
2) Gently tap the roller shaft to remove the toner.
3) Turn the roller against a clean sheet of paper to let the toner transfer
onto the paper.

If no, go to step 2.

2. Check if the fusing pressure roller is dirty with toner or not.


If yes, clean the fusing pressure roller.
If no, check for any other dirty rollers and clean them.

H515

6-16

SM

6.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left)


Possible Cause (Scanner)
Incorrect setting of the document guide.
Action:
Align each side of the document to the document guides.
Possible Cause (Printer)
The laser optics are misaligned.
Improper print margin setting (main scan direction).
Action:
Adjust the main scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)
Check that the laser optics are aligned correctly.
6.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image
Possible Cause:
Improper print margin (sub scan direction).
Dirty registration roller.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
Adjust the sub scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)
Clean the registration roller.

SM

6-17

H515

6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS


6.2.1. ADF/Scanner
1. Non Feed
Possible Cause:
An incorrect type or size of document is used.
The operation panel is not properly closed.
The pick-up and feed rollers are dirty or worn out.
The mechanical clutch mechanism for document pick-up is defective.
Incorrect positioning of the separation pad, or the pad is missing.
Inappropriate separation pressure setting.
The Tx motor is defective.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.
2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed.
3. If the problem still remains, do the following.
Clean the pick-up and feed rollers with a soft cloth and water, and replace them if they are damaged.
Check the spring mechanism of the pick-up roller and replace it if it is
damaged.
Adjust the separation pressure to the appropriate setting.
Check the connection between the MFDU (CN17) and the Tx motor.
Replace the Tx motor.

H515

6-18

SM

2. Jam
Possible Cause:
An incorrect type or size of document is used.
The document is too long.
The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.
Obstruction in the document paper path.
The scan line sensor is defective.
Defective tx motor
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used, and that the
document length is within the maximum setting.
2. Check for obstructions in the paper path.

TROUBLESHOOTING

3. If the problem still remains, do the following.


Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, or replace if damaged.
Check that the scan line sensor is working correctly.
Replace the Tx motor.

SM

6-19

H515

3. Skew
Possible Cause:
An incorrect type or size of document is used.
The document guide are not properly set.
The operation panel is not properly closed.
The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.
Obstruction in the document paper path.
The separation pad is out of position.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.
2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed and also check that
the document guide are properly set.
3. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
4. If the problem still remains, do the following.
Check that the separation pad is properly set. Replace if damaged.
Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, and replace if damaged.
4. Multi-feed
Action:
Adjust the separation pressure to the proper setting.
Clean or replace the separation pad.

H515

6-20

SM

6.2.2. Printer
1. Non-feed
Possible Cause:
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
The paper cassette end fence are not properly set.
The paper lift mechaninsm (slide lock) are not working properly.
Malfunction in the paper feed clutch.
The paper feed roller(s) is not properly set.
The paper feed motor is defective.
The registration sensor is defective.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of paper is being used.
2. Check that the paper cassette end fence is correctly set and check the
paper lift mechanism (slide lock and the springs).
3. Check that the feed clutch for the cassette that was used is working
properly.
4. Check that the paper feed roller(s) were properly installed. Clean or
replace if necessary.
5. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace if
necessary.

7. If the problem still remains, do the following.


Check the connections between the MFDU (CN74) and the paper feed
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.

SM

6-21

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.

2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer


Possible Cause:
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
The paper end fence and/or the paper guides in the cassette are not
properly set.
The registraton roller is dirty.
The registration sensor is defective.
Obstruction in the paper path.
The main motor is defective.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used, and check that the paper
end fence and the paper guides are correctly set.
2. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
3. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace, if
necessary.
4. Check that the registration sensor is working properly.
5. If the problem still remains, do the following.
Check the connections between the MFDU (CN15) and the main motor.
Replace the main motor.
Check the MFDU output of power and drive signals to the main motor
(CN15-1, 3). If signals are not output, replace the MFDU or MFCE.
Check the fusing unit drive mechanism. Check that all the gears are
properly installed.

H515

6-22

SM

3. Jam - Fusing Exit


Possible Cause:
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
Obstruction in the paper path.
The registration sensor is defective.
Malfunction in the fusing drive mechanism.
The paper feed out sensor is defective.
Malfunction in the hot roller stripper(s) mechanism.
Malfunction in the pressure mechanism in the fusing unit.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
2. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
3. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.
4. Check all the gears in the fusing drive mechanism.
5. Check that the paper feed out sensor is working correctly.

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Check the hot roller strippers and the pressure mechanism in the fusing
unit.

SM

6-23

H515

4. Skew
Possible Cause:
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
Incorrect positioning of the paper guides in the paper cassette.
The corner separators are out of position.
The paper feed rollers are worn out or damaged.
Obstruction in the paper path.
Malfunction in the registration mechanism.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
2. Check that the paper guides and the corner separators in the paper
cassette are correctly set.
3. Check that the paper feed rollers are correctly installed and clean or
replace them if necessary.
4. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
5. Check the registration mechanism and clean or replace the rollers if
necessary.

H515

6-24

SM

5. Multi-feed
Possible Cause:
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
Incorrect positioning of the paper guides and/or end fence in the paper
cassette.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
Check that the paper guides and the end fence are correctly set.

SM

6-25

H515

6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


If the Call Service indicator is lit, any of the following conditions has occurred.
Symptom
Error Code Sub-code
Charge leak current detected while the charge
9-17
11
corona unit was activated.
Charge leak current detected while the charge
9-17
12
corona unit was not activated.
Laser diode failure
9-20
21
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at high
9-22
01
temperature during printing)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp not at printing
9-22
02
temperature after warm-up)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at high
9-22
03
temperature in power saver mode)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at high
9-22
04
temperature in power saver mode)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperature
9-22
05
in power saver mode)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperature
9-22
07
during printing)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at an extremely
9-22
08
high temperature)
Fusing unit failure (thermistor error)
9-22
09
Hexagonal mirror motor startup error
9-23
31
Hexagonal mirror motor error while printing
9-23
32
Main motor startup error
9-24
41
Main motor error while printing
9-24
42

SC-code
1-11
1-12
2-21
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-07
0-08
0-09
3-31
3-32
4-41
4-42

To determine which problem has occurred, either:


See the Auto Service Call report that was sent to the service station by
the machine. This report will list a sub-code, as well as the error message; the sub-code may help you locate the problem.
Or, check the sub-code stored at RAM addresses 4805AF(H) and
4805B1(H).
Check the error code history using service function 03.
Try to clear the service call condition (for failures which are not related
to the fusing unit): switch the power off, wait 10 seconds, then switch
back on.
An SC-code is displayed on the LCD panel when the error occurs.
If the problem remains, work through the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure, from the following pages.
After each troubleshooting attempt, reset the machine and try to operate it. If
the machine still does not work, continue troubleshooting.

H515

6-26

SM

Symptom: Charger Leak (Error Code 9-17)


This error will occur in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is on (subcode 11)
If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is off (subcode 12)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Clean the charge corona wire and unit. Check if the charge wire is cut off, replace the
CTM if it is broken.
2. If the sub-code is 11, do the following. If the sub-code is 12, go to step 5.
3. Are all of the charge bias
Go to step 4.
Secure the connections
terminals connected ?
and/or replace the CTM or
development unit.
4. Replace the power pack.
Replace the MFDU or
Does the problem still
MFCE.
remain?
5. If the sub-code is 12, do the following.
6. Does CN21-3 stay low
Replace the MFDU or
Go to step 7.
while in standby mode ?
MFCE.
7. Does CN21-8 stay low
Replace the power pack.
while in standby mode ?

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom: LD Failure (Error Code 9-20)


This error occurs in the following condition:
The laser synchronization signal was not detected within 10 ms of the start of printing
(sub-code 21)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
Check that all the laser optic components are aligned correctly and clean them if
necessary.
Check that the optical fibre is properly set.
Check the connection between the MFDU (CN26) and the LDDR.
Check that the polygonal mirror motor and LDDR are correctly positioned.
If the problem still remains, replace the LDDR, MFDU or MFCE.

SM

6-27

H515

Symptom: Fusing Unit Failure (Error Code 9-22)


This error occurs in any of the following conditions:
During printing: If the fusing lamp stays above 190 C for more than 60 seconds (subcode 01)
Before start printing: If the fusing lamp takes more than 40 seconds to reach 165 C
(sub-code 02)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp OFF selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than 20
minutes to fall back to 100 C. (sub-code 03)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than
20 minutes to fall back to 100 C. (sub-code 04)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp stays below 80
C for more than 18 seconds (sub-code 05)
During printing: If the fusing lamp stays below 140 C for more than 1second (subcode 07)
At any time: If the fusing lamp temperature reaches 250 C (sub-code 08)
At power on: If the thermistor is defective (disconnection) (sub-code 09)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
Before checking anything, do the following.
Reset the RAM address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then switch the power off, wait for a few seconds, then switch back on. If the problem remains, check the following points.
Sub-code 01, 03, 04:
1. Replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, PSU, MFDU and/or MFCE.
Sub-code 02, 05, 07:
1. Check if the fusing lamp, thermostat, and/or the thermofuse is(are) open or not.
- If yes, replace the defective component(s).
- If no, go to step 2.
2. Check if ac power is supplied to the lamp from the PSU or not.
- If yes, go to step 3.
- If no, replace the PSU.
3. Check if MFDU CN12-1 and/or MFDU CN12-2 stays low during printing.
- If yes, replace the MFDU, or MFCE.
- If no, check the connection from the PSU to the lamp.
Sub-code 08:
1. Check for any defects in the machine, and replace the defective parts.
If any damage could not be found, go to step 2.
2. Check if the thermistor is shorted or not.
- If yes, replace the thermistor.
- If no, try replacing the MFDU and/or MFCE
Sub-code 09:
1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN25) and the thermistor.

H515

6-28

SM

Symptom: Polygonal Mirror Motor Failure (Error Code 9-23)


This will error occur in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN14-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the polygonal mirror motor being switched on (sub-code 31)
If MFDU CN14-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during polygonal mirror motor operation (sub-code 32)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN14) and the polygonal mirror motor.
2. Check that +24VM from
Replace the polygonal
Replace the MFDU.
the MFDU (CN14-1) is
mirror motor.
If the problem still remains,
replace the MFCE.
supplied to the polygonal
mirror motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom: Main Motor Failure (Error Code 9-24)


This error occurs in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN15-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the main motor being switched
on (sub-code 41)
If MFDU CN15-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during main motor operation
(sub-code 42)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Check that the main motor drive mechanism is not obstructed.
2. Check that all the main motor drive gears are correctly installed.
3. Replace the main motor.
Replace the MFDU.
Does the problem still re- If the problem still occurs,
main?
replace the MFCE.

SM

6-29

H515

6.4. ERROR CODES


If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem
occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that error codes
4-00, 01, 02, and 10 only appear in the error code display and on the service
report.
Code
0-00

Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected
within 40 seconds of
Start being pressed

0-01

DCN received
unexpectedly

0-03

Incompatible modem at
the other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training

0-04

0-05

Unsuccessful after
modem training at 2400
bps

0-06

The other terminal did


not reply to DCS

H515

Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be incompatible.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the MFCE or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a
bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 807FB7
(PABX)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch
08 (PABX)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Replace the MFCE or NCU.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
The other end may be defective or incompatible; try
sending to another machine.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.

6-30

SM

Meaning
No post-message
response from the other
end after a page was
sent

0-08

The other end sent RTN


or PIN after receiving a
page, because there
were too many errors

0-14

Non-standard post
message response code
received

0-15

The other end does not


have the confidential or
transfer function
CFR or FTT not detected
after modem training in
confidential or transfer
mode

0-16

0-17

SM

Communication was
interrupted by pressing
the Stop key.

Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
The other end may have jammed or run out of paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper
or memory space.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/MFDU; try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 4804B4
(PABX)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch
08 (PABX)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
The other terminal does not have the confidential rx
or transfer function, or the other terminals memory is
full.
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may be
defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps
occurring, replace the operation panel or OPU.

6-31

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

Code
0-07

Code
0-20

Meaning
Facsimile data not
received within
6 seconds of retraining

0-21

EOL signal (end-of-line)


from the other end not
received within 5
seconds of the previous
EOL signal

0-22

The signal from the other


end was interrupted for
more than the
acceptable modem
carrier drop time (default:
0.2 s)

0-23

Too many errors during


reception

0-24

Printer failure occurred


while the memory was
full during non-ECM
reception; negative
response returned
The other terminal did
not reply to NSS(A) in AI
short protocol mode

0-30

H515

Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Check for line problems.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line
and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3
Switch 08 (PABX)
Check the connections between the MFDU, NCU, &
line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
The remote machine may be defective or may have
disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and ECM frames G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A,
bits 0 and 1
Check the line connection.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU, MFDU or MFCE.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx
error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3
Switch 08 (PABX)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
There is no memory space available, or substitute
reception is disabled.
Try asking the user to add optional extra memory.

Check the line connection.


Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4-4

6-32

SM

1-00

Meaning
Polarity changed during
communication
Document jam

1-01

Document length
exceeded the maximum

1-10

Paper at the scan line


when the power was
turned on.

1-17

Document jam in the


feed-out area

1-20

Paper did not reach the


fusing exit at the end of
printing

1-21

Paper present at the


fusing exit after printing

1-30

Paper ran out during


printing
Paper ran out after
printing
The cover was opened
or the cassette was
pulled out during printing
The modem cannot enter
tx mode
Only one V.21
connection flag was
received
Modem clock irregularity
Abnormal
coding/decoding (cpu not
ready)
The machine reset itself
G4 interface board reset
Disconnection during
ISDN G3 communication
Disconnection during
ISDN G4 communication

1-34
1-71

2-10
2-11

2-12
2-20

2-50
3-00
3-10
3-11

SM

Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Retry communication.
Incorrectly inserted document or unsuitable
document type.
Check the ADF drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1
Try changing the maximum acceptable document
length.
Divide the document into smaller pieces.
Check the ADF drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
Max. document length - Scanner switch 00, bits 2
and 3
ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1
Remove the paper.
Check the scan line sensor.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1
Clear any debris from the sensor actuator.
Check the ADF drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1
Remove the paper.
Check the printer drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2
Remove the paper.
Check the printer drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2
Add paper in the cassette.
Add paper in the cassette.
Close the cover or re-insert the cassette.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Code
0-52

Replace the MFCE.


Replace the MFCE.

Replace the MFCE.


Replace the MFCE.

If this is frequent, replace the MFCE.


Replace the G4 interface board or MFCE.
Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
The other terminal may dialed a wrong number.
Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.

6-33

H515

Code
3-20

3-21

3-30

4-00

Meaning
A SAC signal was
received during ISDN G4
communication
A CSA was sent during
ISDN G4
communication, because
the Stop key was
pressed
Mismatched
specifications (rx
capability)
One page took longer
than 8 minutes to
transmit

4-01

Line current was cut

4-02

The other end cut the


received page as it was
longer than the
maximum limit.
Communication failed
because of ID Code
mismatch (Closed
Network) or Tel. No./CSI
mismatch (Protection
against Wrong
Connections)
Start mark not detected
at the top of the OMR
sheet

4-10

4-80

4-81
4-82
4-83

4-84

4-85

4-89

H515

OMR sheet placed in the


ADF the wrong way
Skew detection mark not
detected
Skew was detected
before scanning the
OMR data field
Guide mark not detected
while scanning an OMR
sheet
Skew was detected
while scanning the OMR
data field
End mark not detected
at the bottom of the
OMR sheet

Suggested Cause/Action
The operator at the other terminal may have
interrupted the communication.
The local operator has interrupted the
communication.

Check the receive capabilities requested from the


other terminal.
Check for a bad line.
Try the communication at a lower resolution, or
without halftone.
Change the MFCE.
Check the line connector.
Check the connection between MFDU and NCU.
Check for line problems.
Replace the MFDU or the NCU.
Split the page into smaller pieces, or ask the other
end to change their maximum receive length setting,
then resend.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.

Check the ADF/scanner mechanisms.


Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.
Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.
Check if the document guide was not adjusted
correctly.
Check if the sheet was dirty.
Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.
Place the sheet in the correct way.
Same as 4-80.
Check the ADF mechanisms.
Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.
Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.
Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.
Same as 4-80.

Same as 4-83

Same as 4-80.

6-34

SM

5-00
5-10
5-20

5-21
5-22

5-23

5-24

5-25
5-30

6-01
6-02
6-03
6-04

Meaning
Reduction rate in the
main scan direction not
acceptable while
scanning an OMR sheet
Data reconstruction not
possible
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible
because of a lack of
memory
Memory overflow
Mode table overflow
after the second page of
a scanned document
Print data error when
printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
Memory overflow after
the second page of a
scanned document
SAF file access error
Mode table for the first
page to be printed was
not effective
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - non-standard
V.21 code received
G3 ECM - RTC not
detected

6-05

G3 ECM - facsimile data


frame not received within
18 seconds of CFR, but
there was no line fail

6-06

G3 ECM coding/decoding error


G3 ECM - PIP/PIN
received in reply to
PPS.NULL
G3 ECM - ERR received

6-08

6-09

SM

Suggested Cause/Action
Check if a reduced photocopy was used.
Adjust the scanner correctly (refer to section 5.11).

Replace the MFCE.


Replace the MFCE.
Temporary memory shortage.
Test the SAF memory.
Replace the MFCE or optional IC card.
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from memory.
Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the MFCE or IC memory card.
Try using a lower resolution setting.
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from memory.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, or the hard
disk.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, the function
upgrade card, or the hard disk.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.

The other terminal may be defective.


Check the line connection.
Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.
Check the line connection.
Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3
Switch 08 (PABX)
Defective MFDU.
The other terminal may be defective.
The other end pressed Stop during communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.
See code 6-05.

6-35

H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

Code
4-90

Rev. 6/97
Code
6-10

6-11

6-21

6-39
9-07

Meaning
G3 ECM - error frames
still received at the other
end after all
communication attempts
at 2400 bps
G3 ECM - printing
impossible because of a
missing first line in the
MMR coding
V.21 flag detected during
high speed modem
communication
V.21 signal not stopped
within 6 seconds
Paper non-feed or jam
at the cassette entrance

9-08

Paper jam inside the


development area

9-09

Paper jam in the fusing


exit area

9-10
9-12

Toner end detected


Cover open detected
during printing
Charge corona unit
failure

9-17

9-20

Laser diode failure

9-22

Fusing lamp failure

9-23

Hexagonal mirror motor


failure

9-24

Main motor failure

9-30
9-31
9-32
9-40

Hard Disk Drive Error


Disk Controller Error
Disk Memory Error
CRC error while
receiveing a frame
Command 3rd try failed
DCN received
unexpectedly
Unexpected frame
received
Response time over
Frame transmission error

9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45

H515

Suggested Cause/Action
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
Check the line connection.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for problems in the printer mechanism.

The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.

Replace the MFCE.


If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Paper non-feed - Section 6-2-2
Jam at the cassette entrance - Section 6-2-2
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Paper jam - Section 6-2-2
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Paper jam - Section 6-2-2
Replace the CTM.
Close the cover, or check the cover sensors.
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Charge corona failure - Section 6-3
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
LD failure - Section 6-3
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Fusing lamp failure - Section 6-3
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Mirror motor failure - Section 6-3
If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Main motor failure - Section 6-3

Check and adjust the host PCs RS232C port


settings.
Check if a proper cable is used and connected
securely.
Check if the application is working correctly.
If the problem persists, replace the MFCE.
Note: The optional RS232C interface may not be
available in some countries.

6-36

SM

Code
9-50

9-51

9-52

9-53

9-80

Meaning
Paper non-feed or jam
inside the upper paper
feed unit

Suggested Cause/Action
Check if the recommended types of paper is used.
Check if the paper guides are aligned to the paper
correctly.
Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.
Jam at the paper exit of
Check if any blockage in the paper feed path.
the upper paper feed unit. Check the paper feed mechanisms inside the unit.
Check if the sensor is defective.
Check if the recommended types of paper is used.
Paper non-feed or jam
inside the lower paper
Check if the paper guides are aligned to the paper
feed unit
correctly.
Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.
Jam at the paper exit
Check if any blockage in the paper feed path.
from the lower paper
Check the paper feed mechanisms inside the unit.
feed unit.
Check if the sensor is defective.
Bypass feed - paper non- Check the registration roller and sensor.
Cross reference
feed or jam at the
entrance
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

9-81

Bypass feed - paper


length exceeds the
maximum limit (600 mm)

Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.


Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

9-82

Optional 100 sheet


cassette - paper nonfeed or jam at the
cassette entrance
Optional 100 sheet
cassette - paper length
exceeds the maximum
limit (600 mm)

Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.


Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2
Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.
Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

TROUBLESHOOTING

9-83

SM

6-37

H515

6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS


6.5.1. Defective Sensor Table *
Sensor
Document sensor

closed
open

Scan line sensor

closed
open

B4-width sensor *
A3-width sensor *
Interlock switches

Registration sensor
Fusing exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor
Toner end sensor
Paper size sensor - Standard cassette

open
open
closed
open
closed
open
open
open
open
closed

Paper end sensor - Standard casclosed


sette
open
Paper size sensor - 100 sheet
cassette
Paper end sensor - 100 sheet
cassette

closed
open
closed

open
Paper size sensor - Paper feed
unit
Paper end sensor - Paper feed
unit

open
closed
closed
open

Relay sensor - Paper feed unit

closed
open

Jam release cover switch - Paper


feed unit type S

H515

closed
open

Symptoms if Defective
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" or "DIAL FAX NO" is
displayed at power-up.
"SET DOCUMENT" is still displayed after a
document is placed in the feeder.
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed at powerup.
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed soon after
the start of copying.
The machine cannot scan B4 width.
The machine cannot scan A3 width.
There is no alarm on opening the cover, and
"CLOSE COVER" is not displayed.
"CLOSE COVER" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after the
start of copying.
Bypass feed cannot be used.
Toner end is not indicated.
"ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.
Page separation may be done even if the
original is the same size as the copy paper.
The Add Paper indicator lights even if paper
is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator does not light when
the paper has run out.
"ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.
Page separation may be done even if the
original is the same size as the copy paper.
The Add Paper indicator on the lower
cassettes operation panel lights even if
paper is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator on the lower
cassettes operation panel does not light
when the paper has run out.
"ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.
Page separation may be done even if the
original is the same size as the copy paper.
The Add Paper indicator lights even if paper
is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator does not light when
the paper has run out.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after the
start of copying.
Cover open is not detected.
CLOSE COVER is displayed.

6-38

SM

6.5.2. Fuses
The only service-replaceable fuses are the following.
Fuse

TROUBLESHOOTING

PSU - F1/ F2
MFDU - F1

Symptoms if Defective
No power to the machine
No power to the drive components and
lamps.

SM

6-39

H515

ISDN OPTION TYPE 140

SERVICE MANUAL

1.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE


Install the hardware as described in secion 3.3.2. Then program the following
items.
1.1.1. User Level Programming
The following items can be programmed with user function 61. Ensure that
the items are programmed correctly.
Item

ISDN
G4
G3

PSTN
G3

Own analog number


Own ISDN-G4 number

Polling ID
Confidential ID
Memory lock ID








Own ISDN-G3 number

Remote ID




RTI
TTI
G4_TID (Terminal ID)

4
4

CSI
4
IG3_CSI (ISDN G3 CSI)

SM

1-1

Remarks
Used for transfer operations in
PSTN G3 communication
Used for transfer operations in
ISDN G4 communication.
Used for transfer operations in
ISDN G3 communicaiton.
Used for secured polling, transfer
operations, and closed network.
Used for confidential reception.
Optional SAF memory required.
Used for memory lock. Optional
SAF memory required.
Used for fax on demand operations
or transfer request using DTMF
tones. Optional SAF memory or
Fax On Demand kit required.
Used to identify the terminal in G3
NSF/NSS communications.
Printed on each transmitted page in
G3 communicaitons.
Used to identify the terminal in G4
communications.
Used to identify the terminal in G3
DIS/DCS communications over
PSTN.
Used to identify the terminal in G3
communications over an ISDN.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

1. INSTALLATION

1.1.2. Service Level Programming


Item
System Switches

Function No.
01 - 0

Communication Switches

01 - 4

G4 internal switches
17 - 01
G4 parameter switches
17 - 02

ISDN international prefix


G4 subscriber number - 1

Program the international access code.


When not using MSN* service:
Program the ISDN subscriber number
here. If an another terminal is on the same
bus from the DSU, identify the terminals
using a sub-address.
When using MSN* service:
Program the dedicated ISDN number for
the terminal as the 1st ISDN subscriber
number. If the customer wishes the
machine to answer the calls to a different
number, program it as the 2nd subscriber
number.

17 - 03

17 - 04

G4 subscriber number - 2

17 - 05

ISDN G3 subscriber
number - 1
ISDN G3 subscriber
number - 2

Remarks
System Switch 0A
- Network used for G3 transmission
- Network used for G4-to-G3 fallback
Communication Switch 07
- G4-to-G3 fallback On/Off
Change the country code, and reset the
machine first. Then change any of the
locally required settings and/or the
following.
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B and 1C
- G4 to G3 automatic fallback parameters
Parameter Switch 01, bits 4 to 6
- Codec attenuation level

When not using MSN* service:


Program the ISDN subscriber number
here. If an another terminal is on the same
bus from the DSU, identify the terminals
using a sub-address.
When using MSN* service:
Program the dedicated ISDN number for
the terminal as the 1st ISDN subscriber
number. If the customer wishes the
machine to answer the calls to a different
number, program it as the 2nd subscriber
number.

17 - 06

17 - 07

G4 subaddress

Program a subaddress to identify the


terminal, if two or more terminals answer
the call to the subscriber number for G4 fax.
Program a subaddress to identify the
terminal, if two or more terminals answer
the call to the subscriber number for G3 fax.

17 - 08
ISDN G3 subaddress
17 - 09

* MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number; This is also referred to as Direct Dialing In in some
countries

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

1-2

SM

1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS


The following tables show the default settings of the Internal Switches and
the Parameter Switches for each country setting.
1.2.1. Internal Switches
Switch No.

USA

00
Country code

11(H)

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)

SM

Europe

Asia

European
Asian
country
country
code setting code setting
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
10(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)

1-3

Germany
(1TR6)

France
(CNET)

01(H)

00(H)

00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
20(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
02(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)

00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
??(H)
00(H)
??(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
02(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

After changing any setting, turn the machine off, wait for 5 or more seconds,
then turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.

1.2.2. Parameter Switches


Switch No.

USA

Europe

Asia

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F

00(H)
30(H)
01(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)

00(H)
21(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)

00(H)
21(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

1-4

Germany
(1TR6)
00(H)
30(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
06(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
07(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)

France
(CNET)
00(H)
30(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)

SM

2.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS


To enter G4 service mode, press the following sequence of keys:

       then immediately  .
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

G4
01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP

Then press   .

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

NO: _ OR NO
02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1

After completing a G4 service mode operation, you must reset the machine
by switching it off, waiting for more a few minutes, then switching back on.
There is no need to do this for any of the G3 service modes.
2.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000

Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settings are
shown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.
2. Increment bit switch:
Decrement bit switch:
Example:
Display bit switch 3: x 3

G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

3. Adjust the bit switch.


Example: To change the value of
bit 7, press  .

SM

G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000

2-1

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

2. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4. Either:
Adjust more bit switches - go to step 2.
Finish - 

2.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000

Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settings
are shown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.
2. Increment bit switch:
Decrement bit switch:
Example:
Display bit switch 3: x 3

G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

3. Adjust the bit switch.


Example: To change the value of
bit 7, press  .

G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000

4. Either:
Adjust more bit switches - go to step 2.
Finish - 

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-2

SM

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

ISDN_IP
_

2. Input the ISDN International Prefix (ISDN-IP).


Example:     
2.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04)

Program the Second Subscriber Number when you have two units connected to the same line. Program the number of the other unit as the Second
Subscriber Number. When a call comes in, if the other unit is busy, your machine will answer the call. Also, note the following:
When calling, the first subscriber number will be added to the Setup signal as the Calling ID.
When receiving, the Called ID will be compared with the first and second subscriber numbers.
1. After entering G4 service mode,
press   .

G4_SN1
_

2. Input the number in the following format.


Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number
Then press  .
2.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

G4_SN2
_

2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.


Then press  .

SM

2-3

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

2.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03)

2.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06)


The function of this is similar to the G4 Subscriber Number, except that it operates for G3 communications on the IDSN.
1. After entering G4 service mode,
IG3_SN1
press   .
_

2. Input the number in the following format.


Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number
Then press  .
2.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

IG3_SN2
_

2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.


Then press  .
2.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

G4_SA
_

2. Input the subaddress. Then press  .


2.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

IG3_SA
_

2. Input the subaddress. Then press  .

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-4

SM

Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list. Refer to the Appendix A
for more details.
1. After entering G4 service mode,
press   .

G4 MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.

FFH

2. Input the range of addresses that you wish to print.


Example: Addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:
Input   %    %  .
2.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11)

1. After entering G4 service mode, set parameter switch E bit 1 to 1 (use


G4 function 02). Then make a test communication.
2. From the G4 service mode menu,
press   .

G4_DMP2
0 D+Bch1
PRESS

START

3. Either:
Print a protocol dump list for the B and D channels:
Print a protocol dump list for the D channel:

Print a protocol dump list for the B channel link layer: 


Print a protocol dump list for the D channel link layer: 
4. Reset parameter switch E bit 1 to "0" after you have finished.

SM

2-5

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

2.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10)

2.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12)

1. After entering G4 service mode,


press   .

G4 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST


PRESS START

2.

2.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13)

This is only for use during PTT approval tests.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-6

SM

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,
such as Japan.

Note: After changing any of the switches below, turn off the machine, wait for
5 seconds or more, and turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.
2.2.1. G4 Internal Switches
Bit Switch 00
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Country code

0
to
7

Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Country
France
Germany (1TR6 mode)
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Netherlands
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Japan
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia

Note: In Germany, use the UK setting for the EuroISDN lines.

Bit switches 01 and 02 are not used.

SM

2-7

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

2.2. BIT SWITCHES

Bit Switch 03
FUNCTION

1
to
7

COMMENTS

Amount of protocol dump


data in one protocol dump list
0: Last communication only
1: Up to the limit of the
memory area for protocol
dumping

Change this bit to 0 if you want to have a protocol


dump list of the last communication only.
This bit is only effective for the dump list #2 (D +
Bch1).

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

Bit Switch 04
FUNCTION
0
to
4
5
6

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

RCBCTR
0: Not valid 1: Valid

This bit is used in Germany; set it to 1 for German PTT


approval tests.
1: RCBCTR counts consecutive R:RNR signals. If the
counter reaches the value of N2, the link is disconnected.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

7
Bit Switch 05
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the factory setting.

Logical channel
number (LCN)
0: Not controlled
1: Fixed at 01

This bit is normally 0. However, some networks may require


a fixed LCN. In such cases, this bit should be 1, and you
may have to set a different value for the LCN using G4
Parameter Switch A.

Protocol ID check
0: Yes 1: No

The Protocol ID is in the CR packet.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

3
to
7

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-8

SM

Bit Switch 06
COMMENTS

Inclusion of the DTE


address in the S:CR
packet
0: No 1: Yes

When the CR packet format matches ISO8208 protocol,


some networks may require this bit to be set at 1.
This bit is only effective if bit 0 of G4 Parameter switch 6 is
at 0.

Calling and called


DTE addresses
0: Not used 1: Used

This is only for packet networks. The CR packet should


contain the rx sides DTE address, but does not have to
include the tx sides; it can include it as an option.

Not used

Do not change the factory setting.

2
to
7

Bit switch 07 and 08 are not used.


Bit Switch 09
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the factory setting.

New session within


the same call
0: Not accepted
1: Accepted

0: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends back


S:RSSN.
1: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends back
S:RSSP. Set this bit to 1 for German PTT approval tests.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

2
to
7

Bit switches 0A to 0F are not used.


Bit Switch 10 (Dch. Layer 1)
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Connection detector
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

In most countries (including Europe), this should be


disabled.

Layer 1 T3 timer
Bit 2 1 Time
0 0
5 seconds
0 1 29 seconds
1 0 10 seconds
1 1 Not used

This should be kept at 5 seconds (both bits at 0) for


normal operation. However, you may have to change this
during PTT approval tests.

Layer 1 T4 timer
0: Not used 1: Used

Set this bit to 1 for French PTT approval tests.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

INFO1 signal resend


0: Resend
1: No resend

0: Some DSUs may not reply to the INFO1 signal with


INFO2, if there is noise in the INFO1 signal accidentally.
Try changing this bit to 0, to resend INFO1 before the
machine displays CHECK INTERFACE.

Loop back 4 mode


0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This is normally kept at 0. However, set it to 1 for British


PTT approval tests.

1
2

5
6

SM

2-9

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

FUNCTION

Bit Switch 11 (Dch. Layer 2)


FUNCTION
0

COMMENTS
Do not change the factory setting.

Type of TEI used


0: Dynamic TEI
1: Static TEI

This is normally fixed at 0. However, some networks such


as the Northern Telecom ISDN may require this bit to be set
at 1 (see below). In this case, you may have to change the
values of bits 2 to 7.

Static TEI value

Not used

This is used in the USA with the DMS100 (Northern


Telecom ISDN) exchanger.
Store the lowest bit of the TEI at bit 7 and the highest bit of
the TEI at bit 2.
Example: If the static TEI is 011000, set bits 3 and 4 to 1
and bits 2, 5, 6, and 7 to 0.

2
to
7

Bit switch 12 is not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.
Bit Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP)
FUNCTION
0

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

Attachment of calling
ID
0: No 1: Yes

Normally, this bit should be at 0, because most networks


add the calling ID to the SETUP signal to the receiver.
However, some networks may require the machine to add
this ID. Only in this case should this bit be at 1.

Attachment of the
Lower Layer
Capabilities
0: No 1: Yes

This bit determines whether Lower Layer Capabilities are


informed in the [SETUP] signal or not.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.

Attachment of the
Higher Layer
Capabilities
0: Yes 1: No

This bit determines whether Higher Layer Capabilities are


informed in the [SETUP] signal or not.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

1
2

5
to
7

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-10

SM

Bit Switch 14: D channel layer 3 (Selection IE in S: SETUP)


COMMENTS

ISDN G3 information
transfer capability
0: 3.1 kHz audio
1: Speech

In tx mode, this determines the information transfer


capability informed in the [SETUP] message.
In rx mode, this determines the information transfer
capability that the machine can use to receive a call.
Refer to Appendix C for more details.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHz
audio. This bit is only used in the USA and the UK.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

Channel selection in
[SETUP] in tx mode
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Any channel
0 1 B1 channel
1 0 B2 channel
1 1 Not used

Any channel: When this is informed to the exchanger,


the exchanger will select either B1 or B2.

Called ID mapping
0: Called party number
1: Keypad facility

0: Called ID is mapped to the called party number.


1: Called ID is mapped to the keypad facility.
On the 5ESS network (USA), set it to 1.

Numbering plan for the


called party number
0: Unknown
1: E.164

E.164: This may be used in Sweden if an AXE10


exchanger is fitted with old software, and in Australia.
Unknown: This is the normal setting.

Subaddress coding type


0: IA5 (NSAP)
1: BCD (ISO8348)

This is normally kept at 0. However, some networks


require this bit to be at 1.

3
4

Bit Switch 15: D channel layer 3 (Judgement R: MSG)


FUNCTION

1
to
4

COMMENTS

Action when receiving


[SETUP] signal containing
no called subaddress, if the
subaddress was
programmed in the dialed
number
0: A reply is sent
1: No reply is sent

This bit depends on user requirements. If it is at 1,


communication will be halted if the other terminal has
not input the subaddress.
Refer to Appendix C for more details.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings

Global call reference


0: Ignored
1: Global call number is
used

Global call reference means call reference value = 0.


This bit determines how to deal with such an incoming
call if received from the network.
Keep this bit at 1 in France and Germany (1TR6), also
in countries where the global call reference is used.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

SM

2-11

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

FUNCTION

Bit Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval)


FUNCTION

Answer delay time


Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 No delay
0 1 1.0 seconds delayed
(1TR6)
1 0 0.5 seconds delayed
(CNET)
1 1 Not used

In Germany (1TR6) and France (CNET), a time


delay to answer a call is required.
In other countries, use this switch as follows:
If the machine is connected to the same bus from
the DSU as a model K200 is connected, the
machine receives most of the calls because the
response time to a call is faster than the K200.
If the customer wants the K200 to receive most of
the calls, adjust the response time using these bits.
If the customer does not want one machine to
receive most of the calls, use subaddresses to
identify each terminal.

Action when receiving


[SETUP] signal containing
user-specific callrd party
subaddress
0: Ignores the call
1: Receives the call

Normally, the 3rd octet of called party subaddress


information in the [SETUP] signal is set to NSAP.
However, some networks may add user-specific
subaddress to the [SETUP] signal (UK), and the
result of this is that the machine wont answer the
call if a subaddress is specified.
So, change this bit to 1 to let the machine receive
the call if the machine is connected to such a
network.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

Indicated bearer capabilities


0: 56 kbps 1: 64 kbps

COMMENTS

1: 64 kbps calling is indicated in the Bearer


Capabilities, but communication is at 56 k. Use this
bit if the machine is connected to a network which
does not accept a 56 kbps data transfer rate as a
bearer capability.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

6
7

Bit Switch 17: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 1


FUNCTION

0
to
6

COMMENTS

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3


Bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17 contain a CPS code, and bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 18
contain another CPS code. If a CPS code is received which is the same as either of
these, communication will fall back from ISDN G4 mode to ISDN G3 mode.
The CPS codes must be the same as those specified in table 4-13 of CCITT
recommendation Q.931.
Examples: Bit
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 CPS code 65
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 CPS code 88
For the codes in bits 0 to 6 of bit switches 17 and 18 to be recognized, bit 7 of bit
switch 17 must be 1. Also, bit 0 of the Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, or
Fallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-12

SM

Bit Switch 17: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 1

COMMENTS

This bit determines whether fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt of one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17 or 18, or on receipt of a certain standard
code.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of any of the following CPS codes:
UK (EuroISDN mode) - #3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65, #79, #88, and #127
Germany (1TR6 mode) - #3, #31, #53, #58, #62, #89, and #90
France - #3, #65, #88, and #113
Others - #3, #65, and #88
1: Fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt any of above CPS codes or one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17, 18, 1A, 1B, or 1C

Bit Switch 18: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 2


FUNCTION
0
to
6

SM

COMMENTS

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3


See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17
This bit helps to choose the CPS code set for G4 to G3 fallback.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of the CPS code set which is specified by the country
code setting.
1: Fallback occurs on receipt of the UK CPS code set (#3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65,
#79, #88, and #127) even if another counry code is programmed.

2-13

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

FUNCTION

Bit Switch 19
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Permanence of the link


0: Set/released each
LAPD call
1: Permanent

Keep this at 1 in the USA. In other areas, this bit is normally


0, depending on network requirements.

Channel used in ISDN


L2 (64k) mode
0: B1 1: B2

When making an IDSN L2 back-to-back test, you can select


either the B1 or B2 channel with this bit switch.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings.

2
to
7

Bit Switch 1A: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 3


FUNCTION

COMMENTS

0
to
6

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3


See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17

Not used.

Do not change the setting.

Bit Switch 1B: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 4


FUNCTION

COMMENTS

0
to
6

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3


See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17

Not used.

Do not change the setting.

Bit Switch 1C: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 5


FUNCTION

COMMENTS

0
to
6

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3


See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17

Not used.

Do not change the setting.

Bit switches 1D to 1F are not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-14

SM

Parameter Switch 00
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
to
7

COMMENTS

Network type
Bit 2 1 0 Type
x 0 0 Circuit
switched ISDN
Other settings:
Not used

Do not change the default setting.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 01
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Voice coding
0: law
1: A law

0: This setting is used in Japan, Taiwan, and the USA.


1: This setting is used in Europe and Asia.

Action when [SETUP]


signal without HLC is
received
0: Respond to the call
1: Not respond to the
call

If there are several TEs on the same bus and the machine
responds to calls for another TE, the call may be without
HLC information.
Identify the type of calling terminal and change this bit to 1
if the caller is not a fax machine.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

4
5
6

SM

Signal attenuation level for G3 fax signals received from ISDN line.
If an analog signal comes over an digital line, the signal level after decoding by the
TE is theorically the same as the level at the entrance to the digital line. However,
this sometimes causes the received signal level to be too high at the received end. In
this case, adjust the decoded signals attenuation level using these switches.
The values in the Codec column below show the attenuation level at the G4
interface board. The values in the Modem column show the actual attenuation level
at the modem, because the signal is attenuated again on the MFCE by -6dB.
Bit 6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

Not used

4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Codec
-4.5dB
-2.5dB
-0.5dB
+1.5dB
+3.5dB
+5.5dB
+7.5dB
+9.5dB

Modem (Actual attenuation level)


-10.5dB
-8.5dB
-6.5dB
-4.5dB (default setting)
-2.5dB
-0.5dB
+1.5dB
+3.5dB
Do not change the default setting.

2-15

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

2.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches

Parameter Switch 02
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Data rate (kbps)


Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 64 kbps
0 1 56 kbps

Other settings: Not used

Not used

Do not change the default settings.


Other settings: Not used

Transmission mode
Bit 5 4 Mode
0 0 CS

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

0
1
2
3
4

7
Parameter Switch 03
FUNCTION
0
1
to
7

COMMENTS

Link modulus
0: 8 1: 128

This setting determines whether protocol frame numbering


is done using 3 bits (0 to 7 then start again at 0) or 7 bits (0
to 127 then start again at 0). Set this bit switch to match the
networks specifications.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 04 is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.
Parameter Switch 05
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7

COMMENTS

Link timer (D-channel


layer 2 T1 timer)
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0s
0 0 0 1 1s
0 0 1 0 2s
and so on until
1 0 1 0 10 s

The link timer is the maximum allowable time between


sending a protocol frame and receiving a response frame
from the remote terminal.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 06
FUNCTION
0

Layer 3 protocol
0: ISO8208
1: T.70NULL

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

COMMENTS
Set this bit to match the type of layer 3 signalling used by
the ISDN.
The dedicated parameters have the same setting for
specific destinations.

2-16

SM

Parameter Switch 06
1

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Packet modulus
0: 8 1: 128

Do not change the default setting, unless the machine is


experiencing compatibility problems.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

2
3

6
7
Parameter Switch 07
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7

COMMENTS

Packet size
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048

This value is sent in the CR packet. This value must match


the value stored in the other terminal, or communication will
stop (CI will be returned). If the other end returns CI, check
the value of the packet window size with the other party.
Note that this value must be the same as the value
programmed for the transport block size (G4 Parameter
Switch B, bits 0 to 3).
Normally, do not change the default setting.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 08
FUNCTION

0
1

Packet window size


Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
and so on until
1 1 1 1 15

SM

This is the maximum number of unacknowledged packets


that the machine can send out before having to pause and
wait for an acknowledgement from the other end.
This should be kept at 7 normally.
If the packet modulus (G4 Parameter Switch 6, bit 4) is 8,
the packet window size cannot be more than 7. However, if
the packet modulus is 128, the window size can be up to
15. Also, if the layer 3 protocol setting (G4 Parameter
Switch 6, bit 0) is at IS8208, the packet window size cannot
be more than 7.

4
to
7

COMMENTS

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

2-17

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

FUNCTION

Parameter Switch 09
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7

COMMENTS

LCGN
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
and so on until
1 1 1 1 15

Keep the value of the LCGN at 0.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 0A
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

LCN
Bit 7
0
0
0

COMMENTS
Keep at the value of the LCN at 1.

6
0
0
0

5 4 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0 1
1
0 0 0 0 1 0
2
0 0 0 0 1 1
3
and so on until
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255

Parameter Switch 0B
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7

COMMENTS

Transport block size


Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048

This value must match the value set in the other terminal.
Note that this value must be the same as the value
programmed for the packet size (G4 Parameter Switch 7,
bits 0 to 3). Also, the transport block size is limited by the
amount of memory in the remote terminal.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 0C is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-18

SM

Parameter Switch 0D

0
1

2
to
7

COMMENTS

Back-to-back test mode


Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Off
0 1 Not used
1 0 ISDN L2 test mode (TE mode)
1 1 ISDN L2 test mode (NT mode)

When doing a back-to-back test or doing


a demonstration without a line simulator,
use these bits to set up one of the
machines in TE mode, and the other in
NT mode. After the test, return both bits
to 0.
See "Back-to-back Testing" in the
Troubleshooting section for full details.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch E
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Troubleshooing mode real time status codes


display
0: Off 1: On

If this is switched on, the status codes will be displayed in


the lower two lines of the LCD. These codes are explained
in the Troubleshooting section (G4CCU Status Codes).
Change this bit back to 0 after testing.

Saving frames to the


protocol dump list
0: Off 1: On

Keep this bit at 1 normally.

Not used

Do not change the default settings.

2
to
7

SM

2-19

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

FUNCTION

2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS *


The following G4 communication parameter bytes have been added for each
Quick Dial and Speed Dial. For how to program Dedicated Transmission Parameters, refer to the Service Manual for the base machine.
Switches 01 to 04 are for use with Group 3 communication and are explained in the Service Manual for the base machine. Switch 08 is not used.
Switch 05
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3

Data rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting


0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 2, bits 0 and 1
Other settings: Not used

Not used

5
6
7
Switch 06
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3

Link modulus
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 3, bit 0
Other settings: Not used

Not used

5
6
7
Switch 07
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3

Layer 3 protocol Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting


0 0 0 0 IS.8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 6, bit 0
Other settings: Not used

4
5
6
7

Packet modulus Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting


0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 6, bit 4
Other settings: Not used

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

2-20

SM

3.1. ERROR CODES


The tables on the following pages show the error codes that will be printed
on the Service Monitor Report. See the Service Manual for the base machine for instructions on how to print this report.
The meaning of the numbers in the Action column is as follows.
1. Check Layer 1 signalling with a protocol analyzer to determine the cause
of the problem. This may require assistance from a G4 specialist.
2. Repeat the communication. If the problem does not repeat itself, the
problem was a temporary one caused by the user connecting the machine to another interface. However, if the problem remains, there is a
network problem.
3. There is a network problem.
4. There is a network problem. Do the following:
Check the error bit rate of the network. If it is high, contact the network
and ask them to improve the line.
Check the network speed (is it 56 or 64 kbps), and make sure that the
bit switch setting is correct. You may also use the dedicated transmission parameters if this problem only occurs when dialing certain numbers.
Check that the user dialed the correct number.
5. There is a network problem, or a problem in the machine at the other end.
6. There is a problem in the machine at the other end; ask a technician to
check it.
7. The machine at the other end is not a Group 4 fax terminal.
8. The machine is not compatible with the machine at the other end. A compatibility test is needed.
Error codes related with the errors detected by the FCU are listed in the Service Manual of the main body.

SM

3-1

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1.1. D-channel Layer Management


Code
7-00
7-01
7-02
7-03

Probable Cause
Link reset
Link set-up failed because of time-out.
Link release failed because of time-out.
Link set-up parameter error

Action
2
2
2
2

3.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1


Code
7-10
7-11
7-12

Probable Cause
T3 timeout (layer 1 activation error)
No connection on the S0 interface
Deactivated

Action
1
1
1

3.1.3. D-channel Link Layer


Code
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36

Probable Cause
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited S
(F=1).
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=1).
At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=1).
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=0).
At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=0).
SABME received at the start of network link set-up
N200 retransmission error for SABME
N200 retransmission error for DISC
N200 retransmission error for situation enquiry (RR)
N(R) sequence number error
N(S) sequence number error
FRMR received
Non-standard frame received
Abnormal frame length
N201 error; information field N in the I frame exceeded N201
T201 timeout; timeout while waiting for checking
T202 timeout; timeout while waiting for ID assignment

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

3-2

Action
2
2
2
2
2
No error
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

SM

Code
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-51

Probable Cause
Insufficient mandatory information elements
Abnormal LI for a mandatory information element
T301 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN
T303 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc.
T304 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc.
T305 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL
T308 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL-COMP
T310 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:ALERT etc.
T313 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN-ACK
Internal error
Release call reference during communication

Action
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

3.1.5. B-channel Link Layer


Code
7-60
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75

SM

Probable Cause
T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for flag
T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for SABM during an incoming call
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for UA after sending SABM
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to a transmitted
S frame (P=1)
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for SABM or DISC after
sending FRMR
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to DISC
RNR x N2 (other end busy, RCB counter error)
Invalid (Ad) frame received
Invalid short frame received
Link reset error
FRMR received
Non-standard (Cn) frame received
An S or U frame having an information field was received
A frame longer than the maximum N1 length was received
An S or I frame having an N(R) error was received
CRC error

3-3

Action
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3.1.4. D-channel Network Layer

3.1.6. B-channel Network Layer


Code
7-80
7-81
7-82
7-83
7-84
7-85
7-86
7-87
7-88
7-89
7-90
7-91
7-92
7-93
7-94
7-95
7-96

Probable Cause
A packet having an abnormal GFI was received
A packet was received that had a logical channel number different
from the logical channel being used for the communication
A packet containing a format error was received
A packet containing an LI error was received
A CN packet was received that had a PID different from 02
Unsupported packet type received
Abnormal or unsupported facility received
P(s) sequence number error
P(r) sequence number error
A reset using S:RQ or R:RI occurred
A restart using S:RQ or R:SI occurred
Call set-up error; in reply to S:CR, R:CI was received to indicate
rejection of the call
T20 timeout; timeout while waiting for an SF packet
T21 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CC packet
T22 timeout; timeout while waiting for an RF packet
T23 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CF packet
T10 timeout; timeout while waiting for the first frame

Action
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6

3.1.7. Transport Layer


Code
8-00
8-01
8-02
8-05
8-06
8-07
8-08
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-26
8-27
8-28

Probable Cause
Invalid block received
TCC block received
TBR block received
TCR block; block format error
TCR block; block size parameter LI error
TCR block; extended addressing LI error
TCR block; block size length error
TCA block; block format error
TCA block; Tx origin reference data in TCR disagreed with the
address reference data in TCA
TCA block; octet 7 did not equal 0
TCA block; extended addressing LI error
TCA block; block size exceeded that set by TCR
TCA block; block size parameter LI error
TDT block; block format error
TDT block; octet 3 did not equal either 00 or 80(H)
TDT block; the end indicator was "Continue" even though there was
no field data
TDT block; an end block with no field data was received after an end
indicator of "End"
Timeout during state 0.2
Timeout during state 1.1
Timeout during state 0.3

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

3-4

Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

SM

Code
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-34
8-35
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-45
8-47
8-48
8-50
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-57

Probable Cause
Invalid frame received
RSSN received
CSA received
Calling terminal identification error in CSS
Date and time error in CSS
Window size error in CSS
Service identification error in CSS
Session user data error in CSS
CSS rejected (new session rejected)
Called terminal identification error in RSSP
Date and time error in RSSP
Date and time in RSSP was not the same as that in CSS
Window size error in RSSP
Service identification error in RSSP
Session user data error in RSSP
Message synchronization error inside the CCU
Document task busy
Ti timeout; non-communication surveillance timer (T.62)
T2 timeout; timeout while waiting for a response (T.62)
T3 timeout; CSA timer timeout (T.62)
G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for a new
session
G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for transport
probability
G4 board load timer timeout; called side waited too long for S:RSSP
G4 board load timer timeout; document transmission surveillance
timer timeout
G4 board load timer timeout; timeout while waiting for a user abort
request after a provider fail

Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

3.1.9. Document Layer


Code
8-60
8-61
8-62
8-63
8-64
8-65
8-66
8-70
8-71
8-72
8-73
8-74
8-75
8-76
SM

Probable Cause
T.62 coding format error (LI error)
A mandatory PI was absent, or the LI for a mandatory PI was 0
Calling/called terminal identification LI was different from that
specified by F.184 (LI = 24)
The LI for session user data exceeded the maximum value (512)
The LI for CDUI was not 0
Checkpoint and document reference numbers LI error, or they were
not in T.61 (ASCII) coding
The checkpoint reference number differed from the expected value
RDGR received
A non-standard PDU was received while in calling mode
A non-standard PDU was received while in called mode
Abnormal PDU received while in calling state ds1
15 consecutive CDCL signals received
Session window size control error (size not equal to 0)
Internal error
3-5

Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3.1.8. Session Layer

3.1.10. Presentation Layer


Code
8-80
8-81
8-82
8-83
8-84
8-85
8-86
8-87
8-88
8-89
8-90
8-91
8-92
8-93
8-94
8-95
8-96
8-97

Probable Cause
X.209 coding error in session user data (LI error)
PV error in session user data
PI error in session user data
The capabilities in the session user data of CDS/CDC were not the
same as those in RDCLP
X.209 coding error in the DP (LI error)
X.209 coding error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
(LI error)
SLD object type absent
PI error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
The capabilities in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
are duplicated or are not the same as those in RDCLP
No document descriptor at the start of the document
No page descriptor at the start of the page
Page descriptor PV error
X.209 coding error in the TU (LI error)
The TU was absent
PV error in the TU
TI error
X.209 coding nest level > 8, or an LI form error
CDPB/CDE received while TU/TI not yet completed, or an
unexpected PDU was received while analyzing an SLD

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

3-6

Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

SM

The display of G4CCU status codes is affected by the Real Time Display
On/off setting (G4 Parameter Switch E, bit 0).
If Real Time Display is off (the bit is 0; this is the default setting), there
is no indication on the operation panel.
If Real Time Display is on (the bit is 1), the codes are fully displayed on
the operation panel.
The codes are defined in the following pages.
3.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer)
Code (H)
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
12
13
14

Status
Ready
S: [SETUP]
R: [CALL_PROC]
R: [CONN]
S: [CONN_ACK]
R: [SETUP ACK]
R: [ALERT]
R: [SETUP]
S: [CALL_PROC]
S: [CONN]
R: [CONN_ACK]

Code (H)
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
F0
F1
F2
F3

Status
R: [DISC]
S: [REL]
R: [REL_COMP]
R: [STAT]
R: [STAT_ENQ]
S: [DISC]
R: [REL]
S: [REL_COMP]
S: [STAT]

Code (H)
D0
D1

Status
S: DISC, or R: DISC
S: DM, or R: DM

3.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer)


Code (H)
20
21
22
28

SM

Status
S: SABM, or R: SABM
S: UA, or R: UA
S: FRMR, or R: FRMR
S: SABME, or R: SABME

3-7

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES *

3.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3)


Code (H)
30
31
38
39
32
3A
3B
C0
C1
C8
C9

Status

Code (H)
C2
C3
CA
CB
C4
C5
CC
CD
C6
C7
CE

S: SQ
R: SF
R: SI
S: SF
S: RQ
R: RF
R: RI
S: RF
R: IT
R: IF
R: DIAG

Code (H)
42
43

S: CR
R: CC
R: CN
S: CA
S: GF
R: GQ
R: GF
S: CQ
R: CF
R: CI
S: CF

Status

Status
S: TBR, or R: TBR
S: TCC or R: TCC

3.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4)


Code (H)
40
41

Status
S: TCR, or R: TCR
S: TCA, or R: TCA

3.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5)


Code (H)
50
51
52
53
54

Status
S: CSS, or R: CSS
S: RSSP, or R: RSSP
S: RSSN, or R: RSSN
S: CSCC, or R: CSCC
S: RSCCP, or R: RSCCP

Code (H)
56
A0
A1
A2
A3

Status
S: RSUI, or R: RSUI
S: CSA, or R: CSA
S: RSAP, or R: RSAP
S: CSE, or R: CSE
S: RSEP, or R: RSEP

3.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5)


Code (H)
60
61
62
63
64
65
70

Status
S: CDCL, or R: CDCL
S: RDCLP, or R: RDCLP
S: CDS, or R: CDS
S: CDC, or R: CDC
S: CDPB, or R: CDPB
S: RDPBP, or R: RDPBP
S: CDUI, or R: CDUI (Data
phase - layer 6 and facsimile
data)

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

Code (H)
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97

3-8

Status
S: CDE, or R: CDE
S: RDEP, or R: RDEP
S: CDD, or R: CDD
S: RDDP, or R: RDDP
S: CDR, or R: CDR
S: RDRP, or R: RDRP
S: RDGR, or R: RDGR
S: RDPBN, or R: RDPBN

SM

There are six LEDs on the G4 Interface board, as shown below.

LED 1

LED 5
LED 3

LED 2

LED 6
LED 4

These LEDs give the following information about the status of the machine.
O = ON, -- = OFF
Initial Settings
Power-up/Reset
--

--

O
--

O
--

--

--

---

O
--

--

--

---

---

--

---

---

---

---

-O

---

---

-O

---

---

--

---

---

Initial setting request from FCU

Initial setting confirmation to FCU


Communication
Layer 1 activated

Layer 2 set
O
B channel connected (ISDN G4)
O
B channel connected (ISDN G3)
O
B channel released

Layer 2 released

Layer 1 deactivated
--The following will be displayed if bit 1 of G4 parameter switch E is at 1.
B channel: send I frame (A blinks at this time if bit 1 of
G4 parameter switch E is at 1)
O
O

---

---

-O

A
--

B channel: receive I frame (B blinks at this time if bit 1 of


G4 parameter switch E is at 1)
O

B
O

---

Note: At the start and end of communication, both A and B will blink.

SM

3-9

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3.3. LEDs *

3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST *


To perforom a back-to-back test, you need:
Two machines (both of them must have CiG4 board)
Cross rosette
The procedure is as follows.
1. Switch off the machines
2. Connect two machines back-to-back using the cross rosette as follows.

8
Machine B

Machine A

Cross Rosette

Both resistors
must be between
50 and 100 .
h143t501.gem

3. Make the following bit switch adjustments:


In the machine acting in NT mode, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter
switch 0D to 1.
In the machine acting in TE mode, set bit 0 of G4 parameter switch 0D
to 0 and bit 1 to 1.
4. Reset the machine by switching it off, waiting a few seconds, then switching back on.
5. Place a document in one of the machines, dial a number, then press
Start.
6. After you have finished the test, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch
0D back to 0. then reset the machine.
Note: The following cannot be tested using this procedure:
ISDN G3 communication
P to M

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

3-10

SM

ISDN Type 140

A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List


A.1. How to Print the Dump List
Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list.
1. After entering G4 service mode,
press   .
2. Input the addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:
Input   %    %  .
List Sample
Refer to How to Read the Dump List later in this chapter.

* * * G4 CCU MEMORY DUMP LIST (SEP. 25.1995


0

4.05PM) * * *
C

03B000

00 00 00 F2

10 1E 00 F3

01 1C 64 F4

10 12 00 F5

03B010

11 22 00 F6

10 36 00 F7

02 00 08 F7

20 A6 08 F7

03B020

03 81 00 F7

07 34 60 F7

10 32 00 F7

02 00 03 F7

03B030

20 29 03 F7

02 00 18 F7

20 A9 04 F7

20 AB 0B F7

03B040

02 00 04 F7

20 AB 0C F7

02 00 04 F7

02 00 08 F7

03B050

20 A9 04 F7

20 AB 0E F7

02 00 04 F7

02 00 08 F7

03B060

20 A9 04 F7

20 00 03 F7

20 29 03 F7

10 02 7C F3

03B070

10 3E 40 F3

10 1E 00 F3

FF FF FF FF

00 00 FF FF

03B080

FF FF 00 00

00 00 FF FF

FF FF 00 00

00 00 FF FF

03B090

FF FF 00 00

00 00 FF FF

H143X501.wmf

SM

A-1

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A.2. How to Read the Dump List


A.2.1. Data Format
The machine logs the details of layer 1 communication whenever a event
has taken place. The event can be either a request from the machine, a request from the DSU, a transmission of a signal, or a reception of a signal.
Each log consists of 4 bytes. The first byte indicates the type of event, the
second and the third bytes for optional data, which depends on the type of
event, and the fourth byte indicates the layer 1 status. The following table explains all types of data formats.
1st byte
00(H): TE mode
initialization request
01(H): Layer 1
activation request
10(H): Layer 1
status has changed
02(H): Frame
transmission request

2nd byte
00(H)

3rd byte
00(H)

4th byte
Layer 1 status

See note 1

See note 2

00(H)

TE mode
F1(H): F1 status
F2(H): F2 status
F3(H): F3 status
F4(H): F4 status
F5(H): F5 status
F6(H): F6 status
F7(H): F7 status
F8(H): F8 status

20(H): Frame
reception indication

See note 3

03(H): TEI
assignment request
04(H): Layer 1
de-activation request
05(H): Loop back
mode request
06(H): NT mode
initialization request
EE(H):
Communication
error

Assigned TEI value

Number of
transmitted data
bytes
(Max. 255 bytes)
Number of received
data bytes
(Max. 255 bytes)
00(H)

See note 4

See note 2

00(H)

00(H)

00(H)

00(H)

See note 5

00(H)

NT mode
C1(H): G1 status
C2(H): G2 status
C3(H): G3 status
C4(H): G4 status
Refer to the Layer
1 Activation/
Deactivation
Procedure later in
this chaper.

The data FF FF FF FF indicates the end of the data.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A-2

SM

1. Status Register Value


Data (Hex)
1E or 1C
02 or 00
0E or 0C
1A or 18
12 or 10
22 or 20
32 or 30
36 or 34
3E or 3C

Description
Deactivated or standby
INFO0 signal received
Not connected
Error status
Non-synchronized signal received
INFO2 signal received
Priority high
Priority low
Terminated

2. Command Register Value


Data (Hex)
00
40
44
60
64
7C

Description
No command requested
Standby request
Reset request
Priority change requset (High priority)
Priority change request (Low priority)
Termination request

3. Received Frame Status Register


Bit 7 - Not used
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Received data overflow
Bit 5 - 0: Normal, 1: CRC error
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Received frame aborted
Bits 3 to 0: Not used

4. Interrupt Status Register


Bit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame received
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Receive buffer full
Bit 5 - Not used
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission buffer full
Bit 3 - Not used
Bit 2 - 0: Normal, 1: Layer 1 status has changed
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 0: Normal, 1: Communication error

5. Communication Error Status Register


Bit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame resend
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission underrun
Bit 5 - Not used
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission pool overflow
Bits 3 to 0 - Not used

SM

A-3

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

Notes

A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List


Line #1
TE mode initialization request
Layer 1 status changed to F3

03B000

00 00 00 F2

10 1E 00 F3

01 1C 64 F4

10 12 00 F5

Layer 1 activation request


Non-synchronized signal received,
and the status changed to F5
H143X502.wmf

Line #2
INFO2 signal received,
and the status changed to F6
Priority class low indication, and
the status changed to F7

03B010

10 22 00 F6

10 36 00 F7

02 00 08 F7

20 A6 08 F7

8 bytes data frame transmission


request for TEI assignament
8 bytes of data frame received for
TEI assignment
H143X503.wmf

Line #3

TEI "81" assigned


Priority change request from low
to high

03B020

03 81 00 F7

07 34 60 F7

10 32 00 F7

02 00 03 F7

Priority changed to high


S: SABME
H143X504.wmf

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A-4

SM

R: UA
S: SETUP

03B030

20 29 03 F7

02 00 18 F7

20 A9 04 F7

20 AB 0B F7

R: RR
R: CALL_PROC
H143X505.wmf

Line #5
S: RR
R: CONN

03B040

02 00 04 F7

20 AB 0C F7

02 00 04 F7

02 00 08 F7

S: RR
S: DISC
H143X506.wmf

Line #6
R: RR
R: REL

03B050

20 A9 04 F7

20 AB 0E F7

02 00 04 F7

02 00 08 F7

S: RR
S: REL_COMP
H143X507.wmf

SM

A-5

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

Line #4

Line #7
R: RR
S: disc

03B060

20 A9 04 F7

20 00 03 F7

20 29 03 F7

10 02 7C F3

R: UA
INFO0 received for termination
H143X508.wmf

Line #8

Terminated
Deactivated

03B070

10 3E 40 F3

10 1E 00 F3

FF FF FF FF

00 00 FF FF

Data End

H143X509.wmf

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A-6

SM

The ITU-T I.430 recommendation (the basic user-network interface - Layer 1


specification) specifies layer 1 activation/deactivation procedures.
Before understanding the procedures, the status and INFO signals should be
noted.
TE (Terminal Equipment) Status
Status
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7

Description
TE is turned off.
TE is turned on, but no signal is exchanged.
TE is stopped. No signal is exchanged between TE and NT.
TE is waiting for the response to INFO1 signal from NT.
TE is checking if the signal from the NT is INFO2 or INFO4.
TE is waiting for signals from NT after receiving INFO2 signal.
TE and NT are in synchronized condition.
TE has failed to synchronize to NT, and waiting for the stop request from
NT

F8

NT (Network Termination) Status


Status
G1
G2
G3
G4

Description
NT is stopped.
NT is sending INFO2 signal.
TE and NT are in synchronized condition.
NT is terminating itself.

INFO Signals
INFO0
INFO2
INFO4

SM

NT to TE Direction
No signal
(11111111...)
Activation signal in
synchronized condition
(B=0, D=0, E=0, A=0)
Synchronized frame

INFO0
INFO1
INFO3

A-7

TE to NT direction
No signal
(11111111...)
Activation signal in
non-synchronized condition
(+0-0111111+0-0)
Synchronized frame

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

A.2.3. Layer 1 Status

1. Activation Procedure from the TE


In idle F3 status, the TE send the
INFO1 signal to the NT and changes to
F4 status. The NT then changes to
G2 status and sends INFO2 signal to
the TE.
The TE changes to F5 status and
stops sending signals to synchronize itself to the signal from the NT.
After the TE has synchronized to the
signal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NT
and changes to the F6 status.
The NT then changes to G3 status
and sends INFO4 signal back to the
TE to inform that a physical link has
been established.
The timers T1, T2 and T3 are used to
reset the TE or NT if a correct response has not received before the
timers expire.

NT

TE
F3

G1

F4

INFO1

F5

INFO2
INFO0

F6

INFO3

G2

T1

INFO4

G3

INFO0
INFO0

T3

G4

F7

T2

G1

INFO0

G1

INFO0

F3

H143X510.wmf

2. Activation Procesure from the NT


The procedure starts from the NT by
sending INFO2 signal to the TE.

NT

TE
F3

After the TE has synchronized to the


signal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NT
and changes to the F6 status.
The NT then changes to G3 status
and sends INFO4 signal back to the
TE to inform that a physical link has
been established.
The timers T1 and T2 are used to reset
the NT if a correct response has not received before the timers expire.

F6

G1
INFO2
INFO3

G2

INFO4

G3

INFO0
INFO0

T1

G4

F7

G1
INFO0

T2

G1

H143X511.wmf

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A-8

SM

The termination procedure starts from synchronized status (F7status for the
TE and G3 status for the NT).
NT
TE
To terminate the physical connection,
the NT just stops sending signals and
F7
G3
changes to G1 status. (The INFO0
signal means no signal is sent from
G4
INFO0
the NT.) Then, the TE also stops sendINFO0
T2
ing signals and changes to F3 status.
F3
G1

G1
H143X512.wmf

SM

A-9

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

3. Termination Procedure from the NT

B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List


Note: The model CGO is only for the US and Taiwan markets.
Item
Country code
Own analog number
Area code prefix
Own ISDN-G4 number
Own ISDN-G3 number
Next transfer station
G4 internal switches
G4 parameter switches
Data network international prefix
ISDN international prefix
G4 subscriber number 1
G4 subscriber number 2
IG3 subscriber number 1
IG3 subscriber number 2
Internal Access Unit 1
Internal Access Unit 2
G4 subaddress
IG3 subaddress
G4 terminal ID
IG3 CSI
G4 dump 1 (RAM dump)
G4 dump 2 (Protocol dump)
G4 parameter list
Service level password

CFO
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-18-01
S: F-18-02
S: F-18-03
S: F-18-04
S: F-18-05
S: F-18-06
S: F-18-07
S: F-18-08
S: F-18-09
S: F-18-10
S: F-18-11
S: F-18-12
S: F-18-13
S: F-18-14
S: F-18-15
S: F-18-16
S: F-18-17
1991

LHO/CGO
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-18-01
S: F-18-02
S: F-18-03
S: F-18-04
S: F-18-05
S: F-18-06
S: F-18-07
S: F-18-08
S: F-18-09
S: F-18-10
S: F-18-11
S: F-18-12
S: F-18-13
S: F-18-14
S: F-18-15
S: F-18-16
S: F-18-17
1991

FX4
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-17-01
S: F-17-02
S: F-17-03
S: F-17-04
S: F-17-05
S: F-17-06
S: F-17-07

S: F-17-08
S: F-17-09
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-17-10
S: F-17-11
S: F-17-12
1995

U: User level function (Function - 60 - 2222)


S: Service level function (Function - 60 - 1991 or 1995)

SM

B-1

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

B. G4 Parameter Locations

B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List


Note: The model CGO is only for the US and Taiwan markets.
1. Communication Parameter Display
Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
Bit switch 00, bit 7
Bit switch 00, bit 7
System switch 00, bit 5

Setting
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

2. Default Communication Mode


Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
000153(H), bit 2
080053(H), bit 2
System switch 0A, bit 0

Setting
0: G3, 1: G4
0: G3, 1: G4
0: G3, 1: G4

3. Network Used for G3 Transmission


Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
000153(H), bit 3
080053(H), bit 3
System switch 0A, bit 6

Setting
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN

4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback


Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
000153(H), bit 3
080053(H), bit 3
System switch 0A, bit 7

Setting
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN

5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback


Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
00015C(H), bit 0
08005C(H), bit 0
Communication switch 07, bit 0

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

B-2

Setting
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

SM

Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4

Switch Location
00015C(H), bit 1
08005C(H), bit 1
Function not available

Setting
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission


Model
CFO

Switch Location
Bit switch 08, bits 6 and 7

LHO/CGO

FX4

G3 switch 09, bits 0 and 1

Bit 7
0
0
1
1

Setting
Bit 6
Setting
0
None
1
Low
0
Medium
1
High

Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Bit 7
0
0
1
1

Setting
Bit 6
Setting
0
None
1
Low
0
Medium
1
High

Bit 3
0
0
1
1

Bit 2
0
1
0
1

Setting
None
Low
Medium
High

8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception


Model
CFO

Switch Location
Bit switch 0A, bits 6 and 7

LHO/CGO

FX4

SM

G3 switch 09, bits 2 and 3

B-3

Setting
None
Low
Medium
High

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

6. Specified Two Step Transfer

BC: Bearer Capability


HLC: Higher Layer Compatibility
SA: Subaddress
Tx
Terminal

BC
Digital

Digital

Setup
Called No./ Response
HLC
Called SA
G4 Not included G4 reception
G4 reception
G4

Included

No response

G4 reception

G4 Fax
Digital

N/A

Not included

No response
G4 reception

Digital

3.1k

3.1k

N/A

Included

No response

G2/G3 Not included G3 reception


G3 reception
G2/G3

Included

No response

G3 reception

G3 Fax
3.1k

N/A

Not included

No response
G3 reception

3.1k

SM

N/A

Included

No response

C-1

Condition

If called no. and called


subaddress match the G4
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the G4
subscriber no.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 0.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 1.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the G4
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the G4
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 0.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 1.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

C. Conditions for Receiving a Call

Tx
Terminal

Setup
Called No./ Response
BC
HLC
Called SA
Speech G2/G3 Not included G3 reception
G3 reception
Speech G2/G3

Included

No response

No response

G3 reception
G3 Fax
Speech

N/A

Not included
No response

No response

G3 reception
Speech

N/A

Speech
Speech

TEL
TEL

Included

No response

Not included No response


Included No response
No response

G3 reception
Speech

N/A

Not included
No response

Telephone
No response

G3 reception
Speech

N/A

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

Included

No response

C-2

Condition

If called no. and called


subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 0.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1=0
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 1.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 1.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.

If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,


and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 0.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1=0
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 1.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 1.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.

SM

BC
3.1k
3.1k
3.1k

Setup
Called No./ Response
HLC
Called SA
TEL Not included No response
TEL
Included No response
G3 reception
N/A

Not included

No response

Telephone
G3 reception
3.1k

SM

N/A

Included

No response

C-3

Condition

If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1


= 0.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 1.
If called no. and called
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
If called no. and called
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140

ISDN Type 140

Tx
Terminal

PRINTER INTERFACE
TYPE 100
SERVICE MANUAL

Trademark Notices
Epson and Epson ESC/P are registered trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Epson LQ-2500, Epson FX-800/1000, Epson FX-86e/286e, Epson GL, Epson LQ, Epson
FX, Epson LQ-1050/850, Epson LQ-500, Epson LQ-1500, EpsonFX-85, Epson FX-80, Epson GL Identity Card, Epson Roman T, and Epson Sans Serif U are are registered trademarks of Epson America Inc.
Action Laser and SelecType are trademarks and EPSON Connection is a service mark of Epson America, Inc.
EpsonScript and EPSON Talk are trademarks of Epson America Inc.
IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HP
Laser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and HewlettPackard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
ITC Zapf Dingbats, ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery are registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation.
Bookman and Cantury Schoolbook are registered trademarks of Kingsley-ATF Type
Corporation.
Bitstream is a registered trademark of Bitstream Inc.
Speedo and FaceLift are trademarks of Bitstream Inc.
CG Times is a product of AGFA Compugraphic, a division of AGFA Corporation.
Univers, Times, Helvetica Narrow and Palatino are U.S. registered trademarks of Linotype
AG and its subsidiaries.
Phoenix, PhoenixPage, and Phoenix MultiGray are registered trademarks of Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Emulation

Resident Fonts

Paper Size
Note: All the acceptable sizes
must be in portrait orientation.

Host Interface

300 x 300 dpi


1.0 MB (Standard)
Upgradable to 2, 3, or 5 MB
Standard:
HP LaserJet 4L TM emulation (LJ4L mode)
ESC/P 24-pin printer emulation (LQ mode)
ESC/P 9-pin printer emulation (LX mode)
HP GL/2 TM emulation (EPSON GL/2 mode)
Optional:
PostScript TM Level 2
21 scalable fonts and 3 bitmap fonts
(Refer to the Operators Manual for additional
information.)
A4
A5
B5
LT (Letter)
HLT (Half letter)
LGL (Legal)
GLT (Government letter)
GLG (Government legal)
EXE (Executive)
F4
MON (Monarch)
C10 (Commercial 10)
DL
C5
IB5 (International B5)
C6
Standard:
Bi-Centronics TM parallel interface x 1
Optional:
LocalTalk TM Interface x 1

Printer
Interface Type
100

Resolution
RAM Capacity

Specifications

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS


Item
Resolution
Print Speed (Engine Speed)
Warm-up Time
Paper Size

SM

Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4)
20 seconds or less at normal temperature
The available paper sizes are not the same as those
available with the controller. The selected paper size
depends on the machines hardware specifications.
Refer to the Operators Manual for additional
information.

1-1

PIF100

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH


The printer interface unit consists of a controller board and an interface board (PIF-L).
FDU
FCE
PSTN
NCU

Modem

Fax

Printer Interface
Controller
Page
Memory

Firmware

PIF-L

CPU

C PU

Font or PostScript
Cartridge
(Optional)

(Optional)

C PU
LocalTalk I/F

Bi-Centronics I/F

ADDRESS/DATA BUS

Page
Memory

Laser Unit
Video/Command Interface

PC-AT
Compatible

Macintosh
H144V501.wmf

The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called the
Controller Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual as
the PIF-L Board).
The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, Page
Memory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) Host
Interface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).
Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.
The PIF-L Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate the
commands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed message
in the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machine
can not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L board will modify
the displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayed
selection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is not
displayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.
Data Path
The Controllers CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computer
and will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on the
Controller Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the Page
Memory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to the
CPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the Laser
Unit for printing.

PIF100

1-2

SM

The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAX
machine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface is
to specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.
Dual Access

If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data from
the computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will be
temporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completion
of the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX message
that was stored in the SAF Memory.
If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busy
receiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from the
computer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the Controller
Board. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switch
the printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. If
the print data exceeds the Controllers memory size, the print data will be
spooled in the computer (if the computers operating system or the
Application Program contains the Print Spooler Function).
The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.
Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,
will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect it
to a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data will
then be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is that
by diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating it
with the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completed
before moving to another task.

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION


The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interface
from the FAX machine. The PIF-L board will then generate a different +5
volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L and Controller boards.

SM

1-3

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed to
perform multiple tasks.

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. CONTROLLER
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface

Signal
Pin

Return
Pin

Signal

Direction

19

STROBE

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8

The STROBE pulse for reading data.


The pulse width of the signal must be at
least 0.5 s at the receiving terminal.
The signals represent the parallel data
bits 1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGH
level when the data is a logical 1 and
LOW when it is a logical 0.

IN

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN

10

28

ACKNLG

29

BUSY

OUT

12

30

PE

OUT

13

SLCT

OUT

14

AUTO

IN

15
16

17

18
19~30

NC
GND
CHASSIS
GND
NC
GND

31

INIT

About a 10 s pulse width. A LOW


signal indicates that data has been
received and the printer is ready to
accept more data.
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal will go
HIGH in the following cases:
1. During printing
2. When off line
3. During a printer-error state
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
Available only for bidirectional use.
Available only for bidirectional use.
A LOW signal enables an automatic line
feed upon receiving a CR signal. This
signal is only detected when the machine
has just been turned on, or when the
printer interface is initialized.
In ESC/P mode, this signal effects a CR
operation in accordance with the
SelecType TM setting.
In HP TM mode, this signal will be ignored.
Not used
Logic ground level
Chassis ground, which is connected to
the signal ground.
Not used
Twisted-pair return signal ground level.
When this signal goes LOW, the printer
controller will ignore the STROBE signal.

OUT

11

IN

SM

Description

2-1

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of the


interface signals are shown in the table below.

Signal
Pin

Return
Pin

Signal

Direction

32

ERROR

GND
NC
+5V
SLCTIN

This signal will go LOW when the printer


is:
1. Out of paper
2. In an error state
3. Off line
Same as for Pins 19~30
Not used
Pulled up to +5V through a 1K resistor.
Available only for bidirectional use.

OUT

33
34
35
36

Description

IN

Note: All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise and
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.

The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow as


viewed from the printer interface.

Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signal


ground level.
For the interface wiring, use a twisted-pair cable for each signal
and to complete the connection on the return side.

PIF100

Data transfer is carried out by observing the ACKNLG or BUSY


signal.
(Data transfer to the printer interface can only be carried out after
the receipt of the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY
signal is LOW.)

The pulse width of the ACKNLG signal will vary.

2-2

SM

To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printer


and computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:

Printer Interface

Computer
1

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17

Chassis GND

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Printer
Interface Type
100

1
2

17
1825

31
32
36

16, 1930, 33 connected to GND


H144d501.wmf

2.1.2. LocalTalk

TM

Interface (Optional)

Specifications
Compatibility
Baud rate
Topology
Signaling standard
Signal encoding
Frame format
Node identification
Cabling

SM

Phase 1 and phase 2


230.4 kbps
Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating
ground.
EIA standard RS422, balanced voltage
FMO (bi-phase) space
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)
AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user
action required.
AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN

2-3

PIF100

2.2. PIF
Controller

PIF-L

FDU/FCE
on the
Fax Machine

5LSYNC
5VSYNC
5PRRDY
IC4
SWINT

5PIFRESET

PPRDY
RESET

1INTPR

CONNECT
LCD/KEY DATA
SERIAL CLOCK

CPU

SERIAL CLOCK

CTBSY
COMMAND

SERIAL DATA

STSBSY
STATUS

SERIAL DATA

LIGHT

DARK

NORMAL

VIDEO SIGNAL

Print Density Adjustment


Circuit

5LGATE
VIDEO SIGNAL

5PRINT
5CPRDY

Printer Interface Unit

FAX
H144D502.wmf

The CPU on the PIF-L board acts as a interpreter (emulator) between the
printer controller board and the FAX machine.
2.2.1. Command and Status Signals
The controller board will send various command signals to the FAX machine
through the CPU on the PIF-L board requesting hardware status (e.g.,
cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette for
printing. The FAX machine will respond to each command signal with a
status signal.
The CPU on the PIF-L board emulates the commands for FAX machines
hardware specifications (e.g, some models can have only one cassette).

PIF100

2-4

SM

2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation

Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not the
same (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but not
with the FAX machine), the PIF-L board will emulate the user key operations
for the controller board and the display message to the FAX machine, so that
the user cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable of
performing.
2.2.3. Print Density Control
The controller controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2 menu.
Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, the PIF-L
board will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset

Controller
CPU

+5V

PIF-L
CN5-1,2

+5V

+5V

+5V

FDU
DC/DC
Converter

+24V

5PIFRESET

FCE
CN1-20

CPU

CN1-2

+5V

CPU

RESET

Reset Circuit

H144D504.wmf

If the FAX machines CPU chip activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the reset
circuit on the PIF-L board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on the
will shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.
The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described in
Section 4.

SM

2-5

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

When the operator is using the printer function of the FAX machine, the FAX
machines keys and LCD panel are connected to the printer controller board.
through the CPU on the PIF-L board.

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE


2.3.1. Overview
The video interface specifies the print timing between the printer interface
and the FAX machine.
2.3.2. Main Scan Direction
T1

LSYNC

T4

VIDEO

T3

T2

L2

VSYNC

VIDEO

L1

L3

W1

W2

W3
H144D503.wmf

PIF100

2-6

SM

T5
T1

LSYNC

T6

VIDEO

H144D506.wmf

The LSYNC signal will go low for T1 time before the printer interface sends
each line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T1
T2
T5
T6

Setting
2.36 s
9.44 s
1.253 ms
295 ns

The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W2) are set at 4 mm.
2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction
The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sends
each page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T3
T4

Setting
22.55 ms
varies with paper length

The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L2) are set at 4 mm.

SM

2-7

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

T2

3. INSTALLATION
Before installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform the
following:
1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT


3.1.1. Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L, & FAX3700L
[A]

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws),


and two small covers [B] (1 screw)
and [C].
[B]
2. Re-install the rear cover [A] on the
machine (1 screw at the lower left
corner), and install two brackets [D]
(2 screws) and [E] (2 screws - one
screw secures the rear cover as well,
and a ground wire [F]).

[C]

H144i520.wmf

3. Connect the harness [G] to the FDU [D]


through the lower window in the rear
cover, hook the Printer Interface Unit
[H] onto the brackets [D] and [E].
Secure the unit [H] (3 screws).
4. Connect a parallel printer cable to the
Printer Interface Unit.
5. Plug in the machine and turn on the
main switch.
6. Confirm that the On Line indicator on
the operation panel is lit. If not, check
the harness connection from the
Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.

[F]

[E]
H144i521.wmf

[H]

[G]
H144i522.wmf

SM

3-1

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

 CAUTION

3.1.2. Model: FAX4700L


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws), and two small covers [B]
(1 screw) and [C].
2. Attach the grounding wire [D]
(1 screw) to the machine and
re-install the rear cover [A] (1 screw
at the lower left corner).

[A]

3. Install two brackets [E] (2 screws)


and [F] (2 screws - one screw
secures the rear cover as well).
[D]

4. Remove the hooks [G] (1 screw


[B]
each) from the unit and install the
hooks. [H] (1 screw each). The
hooks are included, but screws are
not. Use the screws that originally [E]
secured the hooks [G].
5. Connect the harness [I] to the FDU
through the lower window in the
rear cover and secure the
grounding wire [J] to the Printer
Interface Unit [K]. Then, hook the
Printer Interface Unit onto the
brackets [H].

[C]

H144i510.wmf

[F]
H144i513.wmf

6. Secure the unit [K] (3 screws) to the


machine.

[H]

7. Connect a parallel printer cable to


the Printer Interface Unit.
8. Plug in the machine and turn on the
main switch.
9. Confirm that the On Line indicator
on the operation panel is lit. If not,
[G]
check the harness connection from
the Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.

H144i511.wmf

[I]
[K]

[J]
H144i512.wmf

PIF100

3-2

SM

Fig.1

3.1.3. Operation Panel Decals

English
Reset
Initalize

Continue

Copy End

Continue

Feed

Level 1

Level 2

Feed

Reset
Initialize

Refer to the illustration in figure 1 to


identify each numbered decal.

Copy End

Exit
On Line

Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L &


FAX3700L

Level 1

Continue

Copy End

Level 2

Exit
On Line

Adhere the decal labels numbered 1 &


3 onto the operation panel as illustrated
Fig.2
in figure 2.

Feed

h144i550.wmf
1

Model FAX4700L:
Adhere the decal labels numbered 4 &
5 onto the operation panel as illustrated
in figure 3.
3

h144i551.wmf

Fig.3

h144i552.wmf

SM

3-3

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

Reset
Initialize

3.2. SIMM MEMORY


Note: The SIMM memory upgrade is not included in the kit.
3.2.1. Type 100
1. Remove the cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to the
RAM SLOT (lower slot).
3. Re-install the cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Turn on the machine, and enter
printer mode. Refer to the
Operators Manual, Page 3.

h144i540.wmf

[A]

5. Print the status sheet. The


Installed Memory should have
increased to the new SIMM
memory capacity plus 1 Mbyte. If
the Installed Memory is still 1
Mbyte or an error is indicated
while in printer mode, ensure that
the SIMM was correctly installed.
Refer to the Operators Manual
page 4 .
h144i541.wmf

3.2.2. SIMM Requirements

[B]

1. Number of pins
2. Access speed
3. Capacity
4. Parity

PIF100

72
70 ns or faster
1, 2 or 4 MB
N/A

3-4

SM

3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items)


3.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge
Install the cartridge [A] as shown in the diagram.

Printer
Interface Type
100

Note: A minimum of 2 MB of memory is required to use the PostScript TM


emulation.

3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface


1. Remove the cover [A] (2
screws).
2. Install the interface board [B] as
shown in the diagram (2
screws).

[A]

Notes: The optional PostScript


TM
cartridge is required
for printing from Macintosh TM computers.
A minimum of 2 MB of
memory is required to
use the LocalTalk TM interface and the PostScript TM emulation.

h144i543.wmf

[A]

[B]
h144i544.wmf

SM

3-5

PIF100

3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT


3.4.1. Parallel Interface
A Bi-Centronics TM parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.
Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pin
assignments.
3.4.2. LocalTalk TM Interface
Connect a LocalTalk TM cable from a Macintosh TM PC to the LocalTalk TM
port on the interface card.
Notes: The optional PostScript TM cartridge is required to print from a
Macintosh TM PC.
TM
2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk
interTM
face and the PostScript
cartridge.

3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS


3.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection
1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface option
should light at power on.
2. Enter the printer function. Refer to the Operators Manual, page 3.
3. Print the status sheet from the SelecType SM Level 1 menu. If the status
sheet is not printed, check the harness connection between the printer
interface and the FAX machine. Refer to the Operators Manual, page 4.
4. Press the On Line key to exit SelecType SM mode.

PIF100

3-6

SM

3.5.2. DOS Based Computers


Important
To avoid any damage to the customers data files, it is not recommended
that the service technicians operate the customers computer,
The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.

Printer
Interface Type
100

1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection


1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.
2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.
3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.
4. After DOS is initialized, type the following at the C:\> prompt:
PRINT AUTOEXEC.BAT
The computer will display the following:
NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);
Type the following:
LPT1
The autoexex.bat file will be printed from the fax machine.
If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable was used and
connected securely to both the computer and the printer interface. Refer to
the Operators Manual, page 6.
2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications
Printer drivers for DOS applications are not provided with the printer
interface unit, select one of the following printers in the order of preference
listed below.

EPL-5200+

EPL-3000

EPL-5200

EPL-9000
TM
HP LaserJet 4L
TM
HP LaserJet 4
TM
HP LaserJet IIISi
TM
HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID
If an emulation other than HP TM PCL5E is required, select EPSON GL/2 ,
LQ , or FX emulation mode. However, the emulation setting of the printer
interface should be changed from the default (HP LaserJet 4L TM), if one of
these is selected.
Since each application program differs in its setup procedure, there is no
standard method to select the printer driver. Refer to the application software
manual for the proper procedure to select the printer driver.

SM

3-7

PIF100

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows


1. Insert the Windows driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).
2. Choose Run in the File menu of the Program Manager, then type the
following:
A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)
3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.
4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to the
Operators Manual, page 7.
3.5.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers
Important
To avoid any damage to the customers data files, it is not recommended
that the service technicians operate the customers computer.
The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.
1. Install the printer driver as explained in the Operators Manual of the PS
cartridge.
2. Ensure that the LocalTalk" TM is selected in the control panel.
3. Choose Printer I/F T100 as an active printer in the Chooser.
4. Open an document for a test print. Choose the paper size, orientation
(and options if necessary) in the PageSetup.
5. Choose Print from the file menu.

PIF100

3-8

SM

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS

To access Level 1 menus, press the


Level 1 key (the third Quick dial key
from the bottom right).
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
To exit from the Level 1 menus,
press On Line (the last Quick dial
key).
Refer to the Operators Manual for details about the menus.

h144m501.wmf

4.1.2. Level 2 Menus


To access Level 2 menus, press the
Level 2 key (the second Quick dial
key from the bottom right).
To exit from the Level 2 menus,
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
press On Line (the last Quick dial
key).
Refer to the Operators Manual for details about the menus.

h144m502.wmf

4.1.3. Dump Mode


1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turned
off.
2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer to
the Operators Manual, page 3.
3. If RAM CHECK x.x MB is still displayed, hold down the Level 2 key
until READY P:DUMP is displayed. If the controller has finished RAM
check, turn off the machine and return to step 1.
4. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All the
print data will be printed in hexadecimal.
5. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or by
INITIALIZE the printer controller. Refer to section 4.1.4.

SM

4-1

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

4.1.1. Level 1 Menus

4.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize


1. Enter the printer mode.
2. Hold down the left arrow key until the message RESET appears, or
keep holding down the key until the message INITIALIZE appears in
the display.
RESET - Resets the controller to the previously saved settings, cancels the print job now in progress, and clears all the received data in
the controllers memory.
INITIALIZE - Resets the controller to the power-on default settings.
The received data will be cleared.
4.1.5. Factory Reset
1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turned
off.
2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer to
the operators manual, page 3.
3. If the message RAM CHECK x.x MB is still displayed, hold down the
Left Arrow key until FACTORY RESET is displayed. All the controller
settings will be returned to the factory settings.
If the controller has finished the RAM check, turn off the machine and
return to step 1.

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS


4.2.1. Printer Interface Reset
The controller and the PIF boards can be reset using the following
procedure, without turning off the machines main power.
1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the Operators Manual, page 3)
2. Press the following keys simultaneously.
- All the arrow keys
- On Line
- Level 1
- Level 2
Level 1

Level 2

On Line

h144m503.wmf

PIF100

4-2

SM

4.2.2. Counter Reset


The controller board has its own print counter, which is independent from the
FAX machines print counter. The counter value can be checked by using the
Level 2 menu.
To reset this counter to zero, Perform the following procedure.
Printer
Interface Type
100

1. Reset the printer interface as described in section 4.1.5.


2. While the controller is checking memory, press the following keys
simutaneously.
- Right arrow
- Down arrow
- On Line
The Message STARTUP
ERROR will appear on the
display.

Level 1

Level 2

On Line

h144m504.wmf

3. Press the right arrow and down arrow keys simultaneously.

Level 1

Level 2

On Line

h144m505.wmf
4. Enter the Level 2 menu and
confirm that the counter has
been reset to zero. Refer to the Operators Mamual, page 17 and 18.

Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter
(PRN) of the fax machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting the RAM
addresses for this counter. Refer to the service manual for the procedure.

SM

4-3

PIF100

4.3. BIT SWITCHES


The system bit switch 14 is dedicated to printer interface operations.
System Switch 14
No

FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Wait time between pages in


printer mode (with an
optional printer interface
unit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines the


machines wait time between pages in printer mode.
A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing an
incoming fax message.
A shorter setting will allow the fax machine to print an
incoming fax messages while printing from a
computer. If the controller takes more than the
specfied time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the FAX machine will release the printer
resources for fax output.

0
to
7

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES


Printer interface output counter (PRN)
Model
FAX2700L
FAX4700L
FAX3700L
FAX2400L

PIF100

Millions and ten


thousands digits
800166 (H)
4801D2 (H)
800166 (H)
800166 (H)

Thousands and
hundreds digits
800165 (H)
4801D1 (H)
800165 (H)
800165 (H)

4-4

Unit and tens digits


800164 (H)
4801D0 (H)
800164 (H)
800164 (H)

SM

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS
Action if No
Go to step 2.
Fix the cable connection.

Symptom: SERVICE REQ. Exxxx is displayed while in printer mode.


Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The FAX machine disThere is a hardware error
Reset the printer interface
inside the machine.
unit as explained in secton
play SERVICE CODE xFollow the troubleshooting
4.2.1, then go to step 2.
xx ?
procedure as described in
(Refer to the table below
the FAX machines service
for details.)
manual.
2. Is the SERVICE REQ.
Replace the controller
The problem has been
board.
solved.
code still displayed while
in printer mode ?
Error Code
E0003
E0004
E0006
E0009
E0014

Error Condition
Fusing unit error
Main motor error
Polygonal mirror motor error
Laser diode error
Comminication error between the controller and the FAX machine.

Symptom: SERVICE REQ. Cxxxx is displayed while in printer mode.


Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Reset the printer interReplace the controller
The problem has been
board.
solved.
face unit as explained in
section 4.2.1.
Does the machine still
show a SERVICE REQ.
code ?

SM

5-1

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

Symptom: The machine does not go into printer mode.


Check
Action if Yes
1. The On Line and Data
Replace the FAX machines
FCE or FDU board.
LEDs light at power up ?
2. Is the cable from the
Replace the cable.
printer interface connected to the FAX machines FDU correctly ?

Symptom: RAM ERROR is displayed while in printer mode.


Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The error message apGo to step 2.
Reset the printer interface
unit as explained in section
pear after installing an op4.2.1, then go to step 3.
tional SIMM memory ?
2. Is the SIMM memory inReplace the SIMM memory. Reinstall the SIMM memory.
stalled correctly ?
3. Does the message apReplace the controller
The problem has been
board or the SIMM memory. solved.
pear again while in
printer mode ?
Symptom: STARTUP ERROR is displayed while in printer mode.
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The error message apThe error message should
Reset the printer interface
be STARTUP ERROR
unit as explained in section
pear after resetting the
>A4 (paper size).
4.2.1, then go to step 2.
printer interface ?
This is not a problem. Press
> (right arrow key) to go
back to standby mode.
2. Does the message apReplace the controller
The problem has been
board.
solved.
pear again while in the
printer mode ?

PIF100

5-2

SM

Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.


Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The Check Display LED
Enter printer mode, and
Remove and reseat the
check the display.
cassette.
blink ?
Go to step 2.
2. PAPER SET AUTO xx
The paper size requested
Go to step 3.
does not match the paper
displayed ?
size in the cassette.
Replace the paper with the
size requested by the
machine, or press the right
arrow key (Feed) to print on
the current paper.
Tip: If AUTO CONT. is
enabled in the Level 2
menu, the data will be
printed on paper, even if the
paper size does not match
with the paper size of the
document to be printed.
3. Is MANUAL FEED disThe controller is set for the
Reset the printer interface
bypass feed mode.
by one of the following
played ?
Press the right arrow key
methods, and print the
(Feed) to print each page.
document again.
Disable MANUAL FEED in
Try each method in the
the Level 2 menu, if bypass
order given.
feeder is not being used.
1. Remove and reseat the
cassette.
2. Press the left arrow key
until RESET is displayed.
3. Press the left arrow key
until INITIALIZE is
displayed.
4. Reset the printer
interface as explained in
section 4.2.1.
5. Turn off the machine and
turn it back on.

SM

5-3

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES

Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.


Check
Action if Yes
1. The paper size and orien- Adjust the paper position in
the cassette or in the
tation settings of the apbypass feed slot.
plication, printer driver,
If the problem remains,
and the printer controller
adjust the FAX machines
agree ?
print registration settings.

Action if No
Change any incorrect
settings as shown below.

Mobile Computing

Radio Tower

Telephone
Computer

Laptop computer

Modem

Public Switch

Printer Setting = Portrait

Printer Setting = Landscape

Radio Tower

Modem

Computer

Laptop computer

Modem

Radio Tower

Public Switch

Public Switch

Telephone

Telephone

Mobile
Computing

Computer

Mobile
Computing

Laptop computer

Printed Area
H144T501.wmf

Example: Print orientation error.

PIF100

5-4

SM

Action if Partial
The wrong symbol set is
selected.
Choose an appropriate
symbol set in the Level 1
menu.

Symptom: PostScript TM is not available even if an optional PostScript TM cartridge is


installed.
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Is OPT set to CARIf the cartridge is correctly
Change the OPT setting to
installed, replace the
CARTRIDGE.
TRIDGE in the Level 2
cartridge.
menu ?

5.3. PRINT QUALITY


Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer drivers setup, and/or
if Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settings
or refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machines service manual.

SM

5-5

PIF100

Printer
Interface Type
100

Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.


Check
Action if All
1. All of the data appear as
The controllers emulation
setting does not match the
strange characters ?
Some of the symbols ap- printer driver.
Change the emulation
pear strange ?
setting or the printer driver
to match each other.

6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 100

1
2
100

Printer
Interface Type
100

6
100

3
100

100
7

100

10
100

100

9 100
100

100
13

100

100
12

10
11

14
15

100
13
14

100

100
17

18

20
100

19

16
100
100
101
21

100
100

100
26
100

25
24

23
100
22
H144A501.wmf

SM

6-1

PIF100

Parts List
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
100
101
*
*
*
*

PIF100

Part No.
H1443625
H1443626
H1443420
H1443618
H1443623
H1443640
H1443619
H1443616
H1443620
H1443624
H1443610
H1443621
H0202318
H1443627
H1443611
11050321
H1443615
H1443612
H1443617
H1443622
H5155355
H1444429
H5156075
H5156060
16070841
H5155351
03530060Z
03530160Z
H1443438
H1444335
H1444336
H1444337

Description
Bracket - PIF - 4
Bracket - PIF - 3
Hook - H515
Cover - Right
Side Plate Right
Cover - SIMM Slot
Cover - Font Cartridge
Cover - Upper
Spring - Font Cartridge
Hook
Base - Frame
Guide - Font Cartridge
Rivet - NRP345
Insulating Sheet
Side Plate
Edge Saddle - EDS25L
Spring Plate
Side Plate - Left
Cover - Left
Cover - Optional I/F
Harness: PIF - Controller
Guide Rail
PCB - Controller - A1
PCB - PIF - L
Ferrite Core
Harness: FDU - PIF
Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 6
Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 16
Decal - Operation Panel
Operators Manual - English
Operators Manual - German
Operators Manual - French

6-2

SM

PRINTER INTERFACE
TYPE 200
SERVICE MANUAL
For the H515

Trademark Notices
Arial and Times New Roman are registered trademark of the Monotype Corporation plc.
Bitstream and Fontware are registered trademarks and Swiss, Dutch, and FaceLift are trademarks of Bitstream Inc.
CG is a registered trademark of Miles Inc.
CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, is
a product of Miles, Inc.
IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HP
Laser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and HewlettPackard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
Times and Univers are registered trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and
may be trademarks of their companies.

1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
RAM Capacity
Emulation

Resident Fonts
Paper Size
Note: All the acceptable sizes
must be in portrait orientation.

Host Interface

Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
1.0 MB (Standard)
Upgradable to 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 MB
Standard:
HP LaserJet 4 emulation (LJ4 mode)
HP GL/2 emulation (EPSON GL/2 mode)
Optional:
PostScript Level 2
22 scalable fonts and 1 bitmap fonts
(Refer to the operators manual for more details.)
A4
A5
B5
LT (Letter)
HLT (Half letter)
LGL (Legal)
GLT (Government letter)
GLG (Government legal)
EXE (Executive)
F4
MON (Monarch)
C10 (Commercial 10)
DL
C5
IB5 (International B5)
C6
Standard:
Bi-Centronics parallel interface x 1
Optional:
LocalTalk Interface x 1

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS


Item
Resolution
Print Speed (Engine Speed)
Warm-up Time
Paper Size

SM

Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4)
20 seconds or less at normal temperature
The available paper sizes are not the same as those
available with the controller. They depend on the
machines hardware specifications.
Refer to the operators manual for details.

1-1

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

Item

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH

FDU
FCE
PSTN
NCU

Modem

Fax

Printer Interface
Controller
Page
Memory

Firmware

PIF-L 2

CPU

C PU

Font or PostScript
Cartridge
(Optional)

(Optional)

C PU
LocalTalk I/F

Bi-Centronics I/F

ADDRESS/DATA BUS

Page
Memory

Laser Unit
Video/Command Interface

PC-AT
Compatible

Macintosh
H144V501.wmf

The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called the
Controller Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual as
the PIF-L2 Board).
The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, Page
Memory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) Host
Interface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).
Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.
The PIF-L2 Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate the
commands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed message
in the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machine
can not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L2 board will modify
the displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayed
selection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is not
displayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.
Data Path
The Controllers CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computer
and will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on the
Controller Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the Page
Memory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to the
CPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the Laser
Unit for printing.

H515 PIF200

1-2

SM

The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAX
machine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface is
to specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.
Dual Access
Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed to
perform multiple tasks.

If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busy
receiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from the
computer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the Controller
Board. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switch
the printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. If
the print data exceeds the Controllers memory size, the print data will be
spooled in the computer (if the computers operating system or the
Application Program contains the Print Spooler Function).
The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.
Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,
will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect it
to a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data will
then be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is that
by diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating it
with the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completed
before moving to another task.

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION


The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interface
from the FAX machine. The PIF-L2 board will then generate a different +5
volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L2 and Controller boards.

SM

1-3

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data from
the computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will be
temporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completion
of the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX message
that was stored in the SAF Memory.

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. CONTROLLER
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface
The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of the
interface signals are shown in the table below.
Return
Pin

Signal

Direction

19

STROBE

IN

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8

IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN

10

28

ACKNLG

29

BUSY

30

PE

OUT

13

SLCT

OUT

14

AUTO

IN

15
16

17

18
19~30

NC
GND
CHASSIS
GND
NC
GND

31

INIT

About a 10 s pulse width. LOW


indicates that data has been received
and the printer is ready to accept more
data.
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal goes
HIGH in the following cases:
1. During printing
2. When off line
3. During a printer-error state
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
Available only for bidirectional use.
Available only for bidirectional use.
A LOW signal enables automatic line
feed upon receiving a CR signal. This
signal is detected only when the
machine has just been turned on, or
when the printer interface is initialized.
Not used
Logic ground level
Chassis ground, which is connected to
the signal ground.
Not used
Twisted-pair return signal ground level.
When this signal goes LOW, the printer
controller ignores the STROBE signal.

OUT

12

The STROBE pulse for reading data.


The pulse width must be at least 0.5 s
at the receiving terminal.
These signals represent parallel data bits
1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGH level
when the data is a logical 1 and LOW
when it is a logical 0.

OUT

11

IN

SM

Description

2-1

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

Signal
Pin

Signal
Pin

Return
Pin

Signal

Direction

32

ERROR

GND
NC
+5V
SLCTIN

This signal goes LOW when the printer


is:
1. Out of paper
2. In an error state
3. Off line
Same as for Pins 19~30
Not used
Pulled up to +5V through a 1K resistor.
Available only for bidirectional use.

OUT

33
34
35
36

Description

IN

Note: All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise and
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.
Data transfer must be carried out by observing the ACKNLG or
BUSY signal.
(Data transfer to this printer can be carried out only after receipt of
the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY signal is LOW.)
The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow as
viewed from the printer.
Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signal
ground level.
For the interface wiring, be sure to use a twisted-pair cable for
each signal and to complete the connection on the return side.
The ACKNLG pulse width varies.

H515 PIF200

2-2

SM

To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printer


and computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:
2.1.2. LocalTalk TM Interface (Optional)

Printer Interface

Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Chassis GND

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Printer
Interface Type
200

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17

17
1825

31
32
36

16, 1930, 33 connected to GND


H144d501.wmf

Specifications
Compatibility
Baud rate
Topology
Signaling standard
Signal encoding
Frame format
Node identification
Cabling

SM

Phase 1 and phase 2


230.4 kbps
Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating
ground.
EIA standard RS422, balanced voltage
FMO (bi-phase) space
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)
AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user
action required.
AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN

2-3

H515 PIF200

2.2. PIF
Controller

PIF-L2

FDU/FCE
on the
Fax Machine

5LSYNC
5VSYNC
5PRRDY
IC4
5PIFRESET

SWINT
PPRDY
RESET

1INTPR

LCD/KEY DATA
SERIAL CLOCK

CPU

CTBSY
COMMAND

SERIAL DATA

SETBSY
STATUS

SERIAL DATA

DARK

LIGHT
NORMAL

VIDEO SIGNAL

SERIAL CLOCK

Print Density Adjustment


Circuit

5LGATE
VIDEO SIGNAL

5PRINT
5CPRDY

Printer Interface Unit

FAX
H144D511.wmf

The CPU on the PIF-L2 works as a interpreter (emulator) between the printer
controller and the fax machine.
2.2.1. Command and Status Signals
The controller will send various command signals to the FAX machine
through the CPU on the PIF-L2 for requesting hardware status (e.g.,
cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette for
printing. The FAX machine will respond to a command signal with a status
signal.
The CPU on the PIF-L2 emulates the commands for FAX machines
hardware specifications (e.g, some models can only have one cassette).

H515 PIF200

2-4

SM

2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation


While the operator is using the printer function from the FAX machine, the
FAX machines keys and LCD are connected to the printer controller board
through the CPU on the PIF-L2 board.
Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not the
same (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but not
with the FAX machine), the PIF-L2 will emulate the user key operations for
the controller board and the display messages to the FAX machine, so that
the operator cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable of
performing.

The controller board controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2
menu. Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, the
PIF-L2 board will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset

Controller
CPU

+5V

PIF-L2
CN2-16, 18

+5V

+5V

+5V

FDU
DC/DC
Converter

+24V

5PIFRESET

FCE
CN1-20

CN1-2

CPU

+5V

CPU

RESET

Reset Circuit

H144D510.wmf

If the FAX machines CPU activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the reset circuit
on the PIF-L2 board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on the
PIF-L2 board will shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.
The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described in section 4.

SM

2-5

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

2.2.3. Print Density Control

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE


2.3.1. Overview
The video interface specified between the printer interface and the FAX
machine controls print timing.
T1

LSYNC

T4

VIDEO

T3

T2

L2

VSYNC

VIDEO

L1

L3

W1

W2

W3
H144D503.wmf

H515 PIF200

2-6

SM

2.3.2. Main Scan Direction

T5
T1

LSYNC

T6

VIDEO

T2

The LSYNC signal goes low for T1 time before the printer interface sends
each line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T1
T2
T5
T6

Setting
2.36 s
9.44 s
1.253 ms
295 ns

The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W3) are both 4 mm.
2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction
The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sends
each page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T3
T4

Setting
22.55 ms
depends on paper length

The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L3) are both 4 mm.

SM

2-7

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

H144D506.wmf

2.3.4. LEDs
The LEDs on the control panel indicates the status within the PIF.
Please note that the On Line LED is always on when the PIF is installed.
u
Button

q
LED
(Red)

LEDs on the
Operation Panel
On Line LED
Data LED

r
LED
(Green)

LEDs on the Control Panel

Fast flashing of the green LED

Slow flashing of the green LED


Check Display
LED and
"Check Printer"
on the LCD

H515 PIF200

Lighting of the red LED


Fast flashing of the red LED
Slow flashing of the red LED

2-8

Condition
On Line LED is always on when the
PIF is installed.
Print data is being received to the
controller.
Data is being printed.
Print data has been received to the
controller.
Paper jam, cover open, no paper, or
no toner.
The manual feed mode is on.
Software error.

SM

3. INSTALLATION
 CAUTION
Before installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform the
following:
1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT


Printer
Interface Type
200

Model: FAX4700L
[B]

1. Remove the cassette cover [A] from the


rear cover [B].
Note: The cassette cover is not installed
in some models.

[A]
H144i564.wmf

2. Remove the rear cover [B] (2 screws) and


[B]
two small covers [C] (1 screw) and [D].

[C]
H144i510.wmf

[D]

3. Install the rear cover [B] back on the


[F]
machine (1 screw at the lower left
corner), and install two brackets [F]
(2 screws) and [G] (2 screws - one of
these screws also secures the rear cover).

[G]
H144i513.wmf

SM

3-1

H515 PIF200

4. Attach the brackets [H] and [I] onto


the bracket plate [J] (2 screws).
Note: For the brackets [H] and [I],
used the ones which have the letter
"B" stamped on them.

[J]

[I]

5. Attach the bracket plate [J] (4


screws) and the side bracket [L] (1
screw) to the Printer Interface Unit.

[H]
[L]

H144i568.wmf

[Letter "B"]

6. Remove the side covers [M] and [N].


[O]

7. Connect the harness [O] to the FDU


through the lower window in the rear
cover. Hook the Printer Interface
Unit onto the machine by the
brackets [G] and [H], then secure
the unit (3 screws).
8. Reinstall the side covers [M] and [N].
9. Connect a parallel printer cable to
the Printer Interface Unit.

H144i569.wmf

[P]

10. Plug in the machine and turn on the


main switch.
11. Check if the On Line indicator on the
operation panel is lit. If not, check
the harness connection from the
Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.
12. Print a status sheet by pressing the
button [P] at the top of the printer
interface unit.

[M]
[N]
H144i570.wmf

[Mylar sheet]

13. Place the mylar as shown in the


diagram.

H144i580.wmf

H515 PIF200

3-2

SM

3.1.
3.2. OPTIONS

[B]

3.2.1. SIMM MEMORY


1. Remove the cover [A] (4 screws).
2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to the
RAM SLOT (lower slot).
3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).
[A]
H144i573.wmf

Printer
Interface Type
200

4. Turn on the machine, and print the


status sheet to verify that the
amount of memory shown on the
status sheet is correct.

SIMM RAM Requirements


1. Type
2. Number of pins
3. Access speed
4. Capacity
5. Parity
6. Dimensions

PC-AT
72
70 ns or faster
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 MB
Dont care
Size within 108 mm x 26 mm (4.25" x 1.02")
Thickness within 10 mm (0.4 ")
[B]

3.2.2. PostScript TM SIMM


1. Remove the cover [A] (4 screws).
2. Install a PostScript SIMM [B] to the
ROM SLOT (upper slot).
3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).
4. Turn on the machine, and print the
status sheet to verify that the
PostScript SIMM was correctly
installed.

SM

3-3

[A]
H144i573.wmf

H515 PIF200

3.2.3. LocalTalk TM /Serial Interface

[B]

[C]
[A]
H144i573.wmf

H144i573.wmf

1. Change the slide switches and jumper settings for the required type of
interface as shown in the diagram on the left. The default setting is
LocalTalk
Note: The Current Loop is a special type of serial interface, which
transfers binary data by closing and opening the current loop.
2. Remove the cover [A] (4 screws), and the rubber cap [B].
3. Install the interface board [C] as shown in the diagram (2 screws), then
reinstall the rear cover [A].
4. Turn on the machine, and print the status sheet to verify that the
interface board is correctly installed.

H515 PIF200

3-4

SM

3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT


3.3.1. Parallel Interface
A Bi-Centronics parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.
Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pin assignments.
3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface

Notes: The optional PostScript board is required to print from a Macintosh PC.
TM
2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk
interface and the PostScript board.

3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS


3.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection
1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface option
should light at power on.
2. Print the status sheet by pressing the button on the control panel of the
printer interface. If the status sheet is not printed, check the harness
connection between the printer interface and the FAX machine.

SM

3-5

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

Connect a LocalTalk cable from a Macintosh PC to the LocalTalk port on the


interface board.

3.4.2. DOS Based Computers


Important
It is not recommended for service technicians to operate the customers
computer to avoid any damage to the customers data files.
The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.
1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection
1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.
2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.
3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.
4. After DOS has started, type the following at the C:\> prompt:
PRINT CONFIG.SYS
The computer displays the following:
NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);
Then, type the following:
LPT1
The config.sys file will be printed from the FAX machine.
If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable is used and connected securely to both the computer and the printer interface.
2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications
Printer drivers for DOS applications do not come with the printer interface
unit, select one of the following printers in the order of preference listed below.
EPL-5500
EPL-3000
EPL-5200/5200+
HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID
HP LaserJet IIISi
HP Laser Jet 4L
EPL-5600
EPL-9000
HP LaserJet 4
If an emulation other than HP PCL5 is required, select EPSON GL/2 emulation mode. The emulation setting of the printer interface should be changed
from the default (HP LaserJet 4), if this is selected.

H515 PIF200

3-6

SM

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows


1. Insert the Windows driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).
2. Choose Run in the File menu of the Program Manager, then type the
following:
A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)
3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.
4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to the
Operators Manual.

Important
It is not recommended for servise technicians to operate the customers
computer to avoid any damage to the customers data files.
The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.
1. Install the printer driver as explained in PS option operators manual.
2. Ensure that the LocalTalk" is selected in the control panel.
3. Choose Printer I/F as an active printer in the Chooser.
4. Open an document for a test print. Choose a paper size, orientation (and
options if necessary) in the PageSetup.
5. Choose Print from the file menu.

SM

3-7

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

3.4.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4.1.1. Controller Reset
Press and hold the button on the control panel for a few seconds until both
LEDs are flashing alternately on and off.
This will reset the controller to the previously
saved settings, cancel the print job now in
u
q
r
progress, and will clear all the received data in the
Button
LED
LED
controlers memory.
(Green)

Controll Panel
Press and hold the button on the control panel for about 8 seconds until both
LEDs are flashing together.
This will reset the controller to the power-on default settings. Any received
data will be cleared.

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS


4.2.1. Dump Mode
To enter the PIF service mode, turn the main switch off, hold down the button
on the control panel, then turn the main switch back on. The flashing of the
LEDs on the control panel changes as follows.
Button

u
u
u
u
u

LED
(Red)

LED
(Green)

r
r
q

r
q
r

: Start up
: Pattern 0
: Pattern 1
: Pattern 2
: Pattern 3

1. Ensure that the paper is loaded and the machine is turned off.
2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch back
on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 1.
3. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All of
the print data will be printed in hexadecimal dump.
4. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or by initializing
the printer controler.

SM

4-1

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

(Red)

4.1.2. Controller Initialize

4.2.2. Factory Reset


1. Ensure that the paper is loaded and the machine is turned off.
2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch back
on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 3. Press the button again within 2 seconds.

4.2.3. Printer Interface Reset


The controler and the PIF can be reset using the following procedure,
without turning off the machine.
1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the operators manual for the function
number. This number is different for each model.)
2. Press the following keys at the same time.
- All the arrow keys
- The last Quick Dial Key
- The second Quick dial key form the bottom right
- The third Quick dial key from the bottom right

h144m510.wmf

4.2.4. Counter Reset


The controler has its own print counter, which is independent from the FAX
machines print counter. The counter value can be checked by printing out
the status sheet. (Described as the "PAGE COUNT" in the CONFIG column.)
To reset this counter to zero, perform the following.
1. Ensure that the paper is loaded and the machine is turned off.
2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch back
on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 2. Press the button again within 2 seconds.
3. Print out the status sheet and confirm that the counter has been reset to
zero.
Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter
(PRN) of the FAX machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting the
RAM addresses for this counter.

H515 PIF200

4-2

SM

4.3. BIT SWITCHES


This bit switch is dedicated to printer interface operations.
System Switch 14
FUNCTION

COMMENTS

Wait time between pages in


printer mode (with an
optional printer interface
unit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines the


machines wait time between pages in printer mode.
A longer setting forces the FAX machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing any
incoming FAX message.
A shorter setting allows the FAX machine to print
incoming FAX messages while printing from a
computer. If the controler takes more than the specfied
time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the FAX machine releases the printer
resources for FAX output.

0
to
7

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES


Printer interface output counter (PRN)
Model
H516
H521
H515
H526
H527

SM

Millions and ten


thousands digits
800166 (H)
800166 (H)
4801D2 (H)
800166 (H)
800166 (H)

Thousands and
hundreds digits
800165 (H)
800165 (H)
4801D1 (H)
800165 (H)
800165 (H)

4-3

Unit and tens digits


800164 (H)
800164 (H)
4801D0 (H)
800164 (H)
800164 (H)

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

No

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS
Symptom: The machine does not go into the printer mode.
Action:
1. Check if the On Line and Data LEDs light at power up. If not, replace the
FAX machines FCE or FDU.

Symptom: The green LED and the red LED on the control panel repeatedly
flashes alternately and then simultaneously (an error indication).
Action:
1. There is a hardware error inside the machine. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure as described in the FAX machines service manual.
2. Reset the printer interface unit as explained in section 4.2. If the problem
still remains, replace the controller.
3. If the error indication appears after installing an optional SIMM memory
board, check if the SIMM board is correctly installed. If the problem still
remains, reinstall or replace the SIMM memory board.

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES


Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.
Action:
1. Check if the red LED on the PIF is blinking. If so, the controller is set for
bypass feed mode. Press the button on the control panel to print each
page. If not, pull out the cassette and put it back.
2. Check if the paper size requested matches the paper size in the cassette. Replace the paper with the correct size, or change the paper size
setting using the printer driver or the Remote Control Panel.
Refer to the printer interface operation manual for how to use the Remote Control Panel utilities.

SM

5-1

H515 PIF200

Printer
Interface Type
200

2. Check if the On Line LED is on. If not, check the connection between the
printer interface and the FAX machines FDU. If the problem still remains,
replace the cable.

3. Reset the printer interface by one of the following methods, and print the
document again.
Pull out the cassette and put it back.
Reset the controller as explained in section 4.1.
Reset the printer interface as explained in section 4.2.
Turn off the machine and turn it back on.

H515 PIF200

5-2

SM

Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.


Check
Action if Yes
1. Does the paper size and
Adjust the paper position in
orientation settings of the the cassette or in the
application, printer driver, bypass feed slot.
If the problem remains,
and the printer controller
adjust the FAX machines
agree ?
print registration settings.

Printer
Interface Type
200

Action if No
Change any incorrect
settings as shown below.

Mobile Computing

Radio Tower

Telephone
Computer

Laptop computer

Modem

Public Switch

Printer Setting = Portrait

Printer Setting = Landscape

Radio Tower

Modem

Computer

Telephone

Telephone

Mobile
Computing

Computer

Mobile
Computing

Laptop computer

Modem

Radio Tower

Public Switch

Public Switch

Laptop computer

Printed Area
H144T501.wmf

Example: Print orientation error.

SM

5-3

H515 PIF200

Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.


Check
Action if All
1. Does all the data appear
The controllers emulation
setting does not match the
as strange characters ?
printer driver.
Do some of the symbols
Change the emulation
appear strange ?
setting or the printer driver
to match each other.

Action if Partial
The wrong symbol set is
selected.
Choose an appropriate
symbol set in the Level 1
menu.

5.3. PRINT QUALITY


Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer drivers setup, and/or
if Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settings
or refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machines service manual.

H515 PIF200

5-4

SM

6. PARTS CATALOG

Printer
Interface Type
200

6.1. TYPE 200

H144A050.wmf

SM

6-1

H515 PIF200

Parts List(TYPE200)
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
100
101
102
*
*
*

H515 PIF200

Part No.
H5156076
H5156077
H5156078
H1443332
H1443809
H1443811
H1443812
H1443820
H1443821
H1443826
H1443823
H1443311
H1443313
H1443325
H1443420
H1443624
H1443625
H1443626
H1443801
H1443802
H1443804
H1443807
H1443808
H1443810
H5155349
H5155350
H5155351
11050334
03130060Z
03530060Z
04523008Z
H1448600
H1448602
H1448605

Description
PCB - EPL-5500
PCB - PIF96
PCB - CONTROLLER
COVER - RS232C
COVER - TYPE B
COVER -HOOK
COVER - L/T
COVER - PIF2 - UPPER
COVER - PIF2 - FRONT
COVER - PIF2 - LEFT
COVER - PIF2 - REAR
BRACKET - UPPER
BRACKET - RIGHT
BRACKET - LEFT
HOOK - H515
HOOK
BRACKET - PIF-4
BRACKET - PIF-3
BASE FRAME
FRAME - FRONT
FRAME - REAR
BRACKET - PCB
BRACKET - HOOK
BRACKET - PIF
HARNESS - PIF96 - 5P
HARNESS - PIF96 - 20P
HARNESS : FDU - PIF(20P)
EDGE - 17
PAN HEAD SCREW - M3X6
SCREW - M3X6
BIND TAPPING SCREW - M3 x 8
OPERATORS MANUAL - ENGLISH
OPERATORS MANUAL - GERMAN
OPERATORS MANUAL - FRENCH

6-2

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140


SERVICE MANUAL

This product is to be used with the RICOH FAX4700L. Users of this document should
be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Training
Program in English.

Standards Applied

EIA/TIA RS-232 (up to 19.2k bps internal speed)


EIA/TIA-SP2388A (Class 2)

Installation Method

Service Installation
Program is downloaded with SROM copy tool from EPROM board

Agency Approvals

FCC part 15, Class A (USA)


IC Class A (CANADA)
UL, cUL

Compatiblility

PC/AT Hardware:
OS:
FAX Applications:
Fax Applications for
Networks
Networks:

80486DX2-66MHz, 80586-150MHz
DOS 6.X, Windows 3.11, Windows 95
Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MS-FAX Win95
WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95),
Cheyenne FAXserve for NetWare 3.0
WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Windows For Workgroups 3.11,

Software Bundling

PCFAX application : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh


TWAIN Driver : Ricoh CFM TWAIN

All copyrights, trademarks, and tradenames are the property of their respective owners.

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140


PARTS CHECKLIST

1.

Installation Guide

2.

Users Guide

3.

DIU PWA Assembly

4.

EPROM FCE F/L Type 140

5.

Grounding Strap

6.

Harness, Internal DIU-FCE

7.

Bracket

8.

Screws, M3 x 6, (5)

9.

Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, Diskette

10.

Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, Users Manual

11.

Ricoh CFM TWAIN, Diskette

12.

Ricoh CFM TWAIN Supplement (Users Guide)

Additional Requirements:
RS-232 Shielded Serial Cable, User Supplied
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool, Ricoh Part No. H5159100
Universal EPROM PCB, Ricoh Part No. H5159500
Loop Back Connector, Purchased Locally

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


1.

INTRODUCTION

The Ricoh RS232 PC-Fax Expander Type 140 is a service-installed fax option kit
that will add an RS-232 serial interface - the Digitial Interface Unit (DIU) - to the Ricoh
FAX4700L fax machine. With a shielded serial transmission cable provided by the
customer, the DIU is connected from the fax machine to a personal computer serial
communication port. When installed, it will allow the PC to use the fax machine to:

transmit and receive fax messages from the PC through the fax machine,
direct and through fax memory
scan documents from supporting applications using the TWAIN driver,
scan documents from the fax into the PC
use the fax machine to print PC file documents

The PCFE has been satisfactorily tested with some network applications.
The PC-Fax Expander is designed to work with the 300 dpi Printer Interface
option (PIF Type 100 and Type 200) for improved print quality.

The Type 140 option is one of the requirements for the Scan Autoroute option.
It will permit the connection to the network File Server. It is used with the NEST card
option.
The option kit includes:

a pre-programmed EPROM which is used to modify the System Flash ROM


in the fax machine,
a faxing application (Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh) to be installed in the PC,
a TWAIN driver (Ricoh CFM TWAIN) to be installed in the PC.

Not included in the option are:

the RS-232 shielded serial cable that is used to connect the fax machine with
the PC,
a null modem adapter (the null function is built into the DIU),
a loop back connector,
OCR software.

FAX4700L Base Machine Changes

SM

An OMR sheet for programming the User Parameter Switch 14 will not be
available.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

The options software will load a new User Parameter Switch (14) to the fax
machines parameter switches. It will add fax Function 17 to enable scanning from
the fax machine and fax Function 27 will be added specifically to delete PC faxing
memory files. It will not have OCR capability no OCR software has been provided.

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


2.

FUNCTIONS

2.1.

PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS

2.2.

PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES

2.3.

Direct transmission and reception


Fax SAF memory transmission and reception
Local printout
PC-Fax Expander modem emulation
200 x 200 dpi with Super Smoothing
1 ppm
Local scanning
PC-Fax Expander modem emulation
200 x 200 dpi
1 ppm

Class 2 communication
G4 for PC (with ISDN G4 Type 140 option and memory tx selection)
Autoroute scanning (with NEST option

FAXING APPLICATION

The PC must have a faxing application. The Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh diskette
and manual are included in the PC-Fax Expander kit.
NOTE : To avoid communication failures, Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 requires the
change of the default communication port from TAPI to the same COM port selected for
the PCFAX EXPANDER. See section 8.2.
2.4.

TWAIN CAPABILITY

When the TWAIN driver is installed, scanning parameters such as contrast,


resolution and halftone can be set at the PC. Also, the PC will work with TWAIN
compatible scanners. The Ricoh CFM TWAIN diskette and manual are included in the
kit.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


3.

QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

Comparison
Basic Feature
Modem Class
Null Modem
Memory File Deletion
User Parameter Switch
Scanning Function
TWAIN
PC Protocol Dump
DIU Hardware Tests

3.1.

Type 100/130
Class 1, Class 2
Built into DIU
Function 24
Switch 14
Function 16
Compatible
Service 05
Service 15

FAX2500L, FAX2600L, FAX3500L


Class 2
Additional hardware requirement
Function 21
Switch 7
Function 17
No
No
Service 8

BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE

Check the settings.


DIRECT TRANSMISSION
FAX MEMORY TRANSMISSION
PC is on and running the faxing application, and modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.
Bit 5 is
0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MSFAX (Win3.1)
a
1 : WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax 7.0 (Win95), WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Bit 6 is
0 : Off (Default)
1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0

FAX: User Parameter Switch 14


FAX: User Parameter Switch 14
Bit 0 : 0
Direct Transmission Bit 0 : 1
Memory Transmission
Bit 2 : 0
No TTI
Bit 2 : 1
TTI

1.
2.
3.
4.

PC: Prepare file or message for sending.


PC: Call up dialing (or sending)
PC: Enter recipients name. Select options.
PC: Dial recipients fax number

PC: Dial the full fax number (for G3 only), or use coded
dial numbers :
b
# (Quick Dial Number),
G3/G4
b
# * (Speed Dial Number),
G3/G4
b
# * * (Group Number)
G3/G4

5. PC: Click Start (Send).


a

Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to same COM port selected for the
PCFE. See section 8-2. b G4 requires ISDN G4 Interface Type 140 Option.

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial Prefixes


Fax numbers programmed at the fax machine as Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group
numbers can be dialed from the PC by prefixing the numbers with the symbols #. #*, #**.
For example :
TO DIAL FROM PC
QUICK DIAL 01

ENTER
#01

FOR
G3/G4

SPEED DIAL 0 1

#*01

G3/G4

GROUP 01 (stored in Quick Dial 02)

# * * 01 (or # 0 2)

G3/G4

SM

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Type 140
Class 2
Built into DIU
Function 27
Switch 14
Function 17
Compatible
Service 05
Service 18

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


3.2. BASIC RECEPTION

Check the settings.


DIRECT RECEPTION
FAX MEMORY RECEPTION
PC is running the faxing machine and set for automatic answering.
PC modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.
Bit 5 is
0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MSFAX (Win95)
a
1 : Delrina WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), Delrina WinFax 7.0 (Win95) , WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Bit 6
0 : Off (Default)
1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0.
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14
Bit 1 : 0
Direct Reception

Memory Reception
Print at FAX
Send to PC
Print at FAX and Send to PC

Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to same
COM port selected for the PCFE. See section 8-2.

3.3.

FAX: User Parameter Switch 14


Bit 1 : 1
Bit 3 : 0 Bit 4 : 0
Bit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 0
Bit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 1

USING THE FAX MACHINES SCANNER

Check the settings.


a

PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answering .

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

FAX: Place document in the machine.

PC modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: Check for Contrast, Resolution (Standard or Detail). Halftone
FAX: Press Function key.
FAX: Type 1 7 at the ten-key pad.
FAX: Press Yes.
FAX: Press Start.
a

If TWAIN cant be loaded, turn off auto answer.

3.4.

USING THE FAX MACHINES PRINTER

Check the settings.

PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answering.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

PC: Change the printer selection to faxing software option.


PC: Select the file to print.
PC: Select the print command and print options. Click OK.

Fax machine is on.

PC: Dialing or sending dialog box appears. Dial 0 0 0 0.


PC: Click Start (Send).

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.

PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION

4.1.

USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14

The PCFE Type 140 is compatible with the Class 2 modem communication mode. Class
1 is not supported. BFT is not supported.
The DIU is connected directly to the fax machines data/address bus at CN5 on the
MFCE PWA. The signal flow through the system is controlled by a special PCFE Type 140 fax
bitswitch, User Parameter Switch 14. The fax machine switch can :
(1) route the PC fax data directly to and from the fax machines modem, bypassing the
usual PSTN data path through the MFCE. This is PCFE DIRECT transmission and reception
(Note : This is not fax immediate transmission.),
(2) or route the data to include the MFCE system control (DCR, DCMMR), SAF Memory
and ECM to and from the modem. This is PCFE MEMORY transmission and reception,
(3) suppress the fax machines TTI to avoid conflicting with the PC faxing applications
header,
(4) direct the output to specific locations,
(5) or select specific faxing applications (to overcome speed problems).
FUNCTION

DEFAULT

PCFE TRANSMISSION
0 : DIRECT TX
1 : MEMORY TX

PCFE RECEPTION
0 : DIRECT RX
1 : MEMORY RX

FAX TTI MEMORY TRANSMISSION (BIT 0 IS 1)


0 : NO FAX TTI
1 : FAX TTI

3
4
5

OUTPUT DESTINATION FOR MEMORY RECEPTION (BIT 1 IS 1)


a
PRINT AT FAX
SEND TO PC AND PRINT AT FAX
SEND TO PC
0
1
1
0
1
0
FAX APPLICATION SELECTION
0 : CHEYENNE BITWARE FOR RICOH; MSFAX (Win95)
b
1 : WINFAX PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WINFAX PRO 7.0 (Win95) WinFax PRO For NETWORKS
4.0

0
0
0

FAX APPLICATION SELECTION


0 : OFF
1 : CHEYENNE FAXSERVE FOR NETWARE

DO NOT CHANGE THE FACTORY SETTING.

Substitute Reception
b
Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to COM port selected for the PCFE. See
section 8-2.

The Switch settings are changed with fax Function 63. FAX4700L Optical Mark
Reader (OMR) is not supported for User Parameter Switch 14.

SM

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

BIT

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.2.

DIRECT TRANSMISSION

Direct PCFE transmissions will bypass the fax machine DCR/DCMMR and other
fax resources. The fax machine will be used as an external faxmodem, exchanging
protocols with remote devices. The communications have the characterstics provided
by the PC faxing application. The operation is governed from the PC by the faxing
application.
Compression will be MH or MR, dpending on the faxing application; MMR
compression will not be available. ECM will be available only if the faxing software
provides it. The fax machines pre-programmed Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group
numbers cannot be used to dial when the fax machine is set for Direct Transmission.
ISDN G4 dialing is not available in Direct Transmission.
Direct transmissions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PC
faxing application.
FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER
Type 140
MEMORY

DCR/
DCMMR

DIU
(RS232 Port)

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.3.

DIRECT RECEPTION

Direct PCFE receptions use the fax machine as an external faxmodem to


exchange communication protocols. The data route will bypass the fax machine
processes such as DCR/DCMMR and ECM/SAF memory.
To receive the communication, the PC must be turned on, and the PC faxing
application must be running and set for Auto Receive. The fax machine will notify the
PC when it detects an incoming call. The PC will then have control of the reception.
If the PC is unable to receive, the fax data will be sent to the DCR as in a normal
G3 reception. The message will then be reconstructed and printed by the fax machine.
Direct receptions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PC
faxing application.

FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER


Type 140
MEMORY
SUB RX

PRINT

DCR/
DCMMR

FAX Expander
Type 140

OR
DIU
(RS232 Port)

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read

SM

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.4.

MEMORY TRANSMISSION
A PCFE memory transmission occurs in two stages.

(1) PC to FAX : The PC will send the image data in compressed form, MH or
MR, to the fax machine. The data is passed through the DCR where errors can be
detected and reported back to the PC for retransmission. The data will be routed to and
accumulated in SAF memory. This is reported in the TCR as a reception by the fax
machine.
(2) FAX to REMOTE : When all the information has been accumulated, the fax
machine will send it to the destination as a normal FAX4700L fax transmission.
Depending on the capabilities of the receiver, the data will be sent as MR, MH, or MMR
files and will be passed to either FIFO or ECM memory on its way to the modem. This
transaction is reported as a transmission in the fax machines TCR. The fax machine
can also generate a Communication Result Report or a Communication Failure Report
for PCFE memory transmissions.
Fax TTI is normally added to fax transmissions. Switch 14 allows the TTI to be
turned off to avoid conflicting with the faxing application header.
PCFE adds prefixes similar to the Transfer Request notations (Operators
Manual, page 59) so that Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group numbers programmed with
Functions 31, 32, and 33 can be used to dial from the PC :

#
#*
#**

Quick Dial
Speed Dial
Group number

ISDN G4 addresses can be dialed with Quick Dials, Speed Dials and Groups
stored in the fax with G4 destinations. ISDN G4 dialing requires the ISDN Interface
Type 140 option.
FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER
Type 140
MEMORY

DCR/
DCMMR
DIU
(RS232 Port)

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


SAF Memory Overflow
If the SAF reaches its memory capacity during transmission, the data
accumulated to that point will be sent to the destination as a file. An error report will be
issued by the fax machine.
Memory PC TX File Delete (Fax Function 27)
The PCFE option introduces fax Function 27 specifically to delete PCFE memory
transmission files. (Fax Function 21 deletes standard fax memory files.)

FAX Expander
Type 140

A file can be deleted while being sent as a memory transmission or during an


automatic redialing operation. The deletion will end the redialing. (The standard
FAX4700L redialing default of 4 times every 5 minutes remains unchanged.)

SM

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.5.

MEMORY RECEPTION

When set for memory reception, the fax machine governs the reception, sending
the demodulated data to SAF or to page memory. PCFE adds the ability to direct the
data to different output locations with User Parameter Switch 14.

to the fax machine printer


to the PCa
to the fax printer and the PCa
a

When the PC is selected as an output location, the PC must be on and running


the faxing application, which should be set for automatic receive or auto answer.
If the output location is the fax machine printer, the image data will follow the
reception path described in the Service Manual section 1.5.2. (including either FIFO or
ECM memory). The demodulated, decompressed data will be sent to page memory for
printing and the demodulated data will be stored in SAF for Substitute Reception, if
Substitute reception is on (User Parameter Switch 05-0).
If the PC is specified as an output location, the path is the same except that the
data stored in SAF will be recompressed with MH or MR technique before it is sent to
the PC. If the PC is unable to receive the data, it will be printed by the fax machine and
deleted from SAF (Substitute Reception).
The fax machine will attempt to resend the message to the PC according to
COMSW 10 and COMSW 12 settings for memory transmission redials. The default
settings are 5 attempts every 5 minutes (05H, 05H).
The PC may be unable to receive the incoming message because the PC has no
power, the faxing application is not activated, or the faxing application is not set to
receive faxes.
FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER
Type 140
MEMORY

PRINT
DCR/
DCMMR
DIU
(RS232 Port)

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read

SAF Memory Overflow


If SAF reaches its memory capacity while receiving a message, the data
accumulated to that point will be sent to the PC as a file. An error report will be issued
by the fax machine.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

10

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.6.

SCANNING (Fax Function 17)

PCFE adds fax Function 17 to the set of FAX4700L fax functions. With Function
17, the fax machine will scan a document and send it to the PC, where it will be
received by the faxing application.
Scanning from the fax machine is similar to sending an immediate fax message
from the fax to the PC, except that all basic transmission options (OPTIONSf) are
disabled during the scanner operation. For example, there will be no TTI. Also, the Fine
resolution mode is not available (the setting will default to Detail resolution). Resolution
is not adjustable during multi-page scanning. And, SAF memory will be bypassed.
Scanning will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3T*S, or G3T*D). See Transmit
File 002 in TCR, page 19. An error will terminate the process and generate an error
report.
For the PC, receiving the scanned image is the same as receiving a fax as
described in the faxing application manual.
FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER
Type 140
MEMORY

PRINT

DIU
(RS232 Port)

FAX Expander
Type 140

DCR/
DCMMR

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read

SM

11

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL

Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN Scanning


The PCFE Type 140 option provides the customer with a TWAIN scanner driver,
RICOH CFM TWAIN. Scanning can be activated from a PC application supporting TWAIN,
for example, Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, or CFM ScanWork. The procedure is
described in documentation supplied with the software.
If the TWAIN driver cant be activated the faxing applications Auto Receive
should be turned off.
Basically, the document is set in the fax machine document feeder. The
application is opened, the source is selected from the scan feature, and R ICOH CFM
TWAIN is acquired. When the module is opened, the scan parameters, such as line or
halftone mode, page size format, resolution, brightness are set and scanning can be
performed. The details and limitations are described in the documentation.
The Scan Autoroute Option
When the NEST option is installed, Function 17 will allow dialing network clients
with the autoroute code (#...#). The fax machine must be set for immediate
transmission.
Press Memory key if indicator light is on.

IMMEDIATE TX
JUL.30.02:45PM
SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO.
MEMORY100%

Set the document in the document feeder.


Press Function 1 7 Yes
SCANNER MODE
DIAL AUTOROUTE CODE OR START

Dial Autoroute number with code


For example, # 1 2 3 4 # Yes

SCANNER MODE
PRESS START
#1234#

Press Start
TRANSMITTING
A4 -> A4

When finished, the display returns to the


default transmit mode.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

MEMORY TRANS.
JUL.30.02:45PM
SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO.
MEMORY100%

12

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.7.

PRINTING

The PC-Fax Expander can use the fax machine as a printer for the PC. Using
the special four-digit fax number, 0 0 0 0, as a destination number, the faxing
application can send a document to the PC-Fax Expander for printing.
The fax machine will receive the data from the PC and send it to the DCR to be
decompressed. It will then be sent to page memory for printing. The memory file will be
deleted when printing is completed.
Unless Substitute Reception is switched off (User Parameter Switch 05-0), the
data will also be routed to the SAF memory. If the fax machine is out of paper or a jam
occurs, the document will be stored in SAF memory and will be printed out after the
problem has been corrected.
Printing will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3R*S or G3R*D). See Receive File
003 in the TCR, page 19.

FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER


Type 140

(SUB RX)

PRINT

DCR

DIU
(RS232 Port)

MODEM

DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port


DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit

SM

13

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

MEMORY

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIX
Ref. : Operators Manual Ricoh FAX4700L , page 169.
When the PCFAX EXPANDER Type 140 option (PCFE) is installed, additions
are made to Dual Access table shown in the Fax4700L Operators Manual. This matrix
indicates which simultaneous operations may be possible.
JOB :
1
1
Store Original
2
Memory Printout '
3
Copy
4
Report Printout '
5
G3 Immediate Tx
6
G3 Memory Tx '
7 G3 Immediate Rx '
8
G3 Memory Rx '
9
Report Tx '
10 G4 Immediate Tx
11
G4 Memory Tx '
12 G4 Immediate Rx '
13
G4 Memory Rx '
14
PCFE Scan
15
PCFE Direct Tx '
16
PCFE Direct Rx '
17 PCFE Memory Tx '
18 PCFE Memory Rx '
19
PCFE Printout '

'

'

'
'
' ' '

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

' ' ' '


' '
' ' '
'
' '
' '
' ' '

' ' '


'
' '
'
'
'
' '

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

' '
'
' '
' '
' '
' '

'
'
'
'

'
'
'
'

' '
'
'
'

'

' ' '


' ' '
'
'
' ' '
'
'
'
'
'
'

'
'
'
'

'

'

'

14

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


5.

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS


For PC-Fax Expander maintenance purposes,

5.1.

A PC Protocol Dump has been added to Service Function 05, the Group 3
Protocol Dump.
DIU Diagnostics, Service Function 18, are two tests added for the DIU
hardware.

PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

Press 0 5

PROTOCOL DUMP
0PSTN
1PC

NO. :__ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR L

Press 1
START
PC PROTOCOL DUMP

Press Start
List is printing.

PC PROTOCOL DUMP

List has printed


START
PC PROTOCOL DUMP

Press Function when finished.

SM

15

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


5.2.

PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE TESTS


PCFE adds service Function 18 for two hardware inspection tests:

an internal test,
an external test.

DIU Internal Test


An internal DIU LSI loop back test does not require additional hardware.
DIU
DCD
RI

MB89371A
TXD
RXD

RS232C
DRIVERS
RECEIVERS

RTS

TO
FCU

CTS

RS232C
DTR

INT

DSR
RI
TXCLK
RXCLK

DCD

LOOP BACK SIGNAL HERE

Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

Press 1 8

DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE


NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK

NO. :__ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR L

DIU Test :
Press 0

TEST RUNNING WAIT


ABORT PRESS STOP

DIU test is OK

DIU TEST COMPLETED

DIU Test Error Messages :

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

16

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


FCEDIU connection problem

DIU NOT FOUND

DIU board failure

DIU ERROR

Press Function or Stop

DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE


NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK

DIU External Test


A Loop Back connector is installed before selecting this test mode.
DIU
DCD

MB89371A
TXD
RXD

RS232C
DRIVERS
RECEIVERS

2
3

RTS

TO
FCU

CTS
INT

4
5
20

DTR

DSR
TXCLK

3
4
5
20
6

RI

RXCLK

DCD

22

RS232C

LOOP BACK
CONNECTOR

Loop Back Test :


DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE
NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK

Press 1

SM

TEST RUNNING WAIT


ABORT PRESS STOP

17

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

RI

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL

Test is OK

L.B. TEST COMPLETED

Loop Back Test Error Messages :


FCEDIU connection problem

DIU NOT FOUND

DIU board failure

LOOP BACK ERROR

Press Function or Stop

DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE


NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

18

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


6.

PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS

6.1

TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT TCR

PCFE transmissions and receptions are recorded on the TCR. They are
identified with two new symbols.
* : PC Fax Application
% : Direct PC TX or RX
PCFAX is the PC faxing applications CSI.
* * * TCR (JUL. 23. 1996

5:00PM) * * *
TTI

<RX>
DATE
JUN 10

TX
#
M
S
!S

TIME
9:00AM
10:21AM
1:00PM
3:05PM
4:57PM
5:10PM

ADDRESS
NEW YORK OFFICE
PCFAX
TOKYO OFFICE
PCFAX
NEW YORK OFFICE
NEW YORK OFFICE

MODE
G3TS
G3T*D
G4T*SM
G3T*S@M
G3T%S
G3T*SM

TIME
040
032
002
058
058
028

PAGE
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1

RESULT PERS. NAME FILE


OK
001
OK
002
OK
004
OK
005
OK
007
E
008

TIME
11:30AM
12:58PM
3:03PM
4:30PM
5:08

ADDRESS
PCFAX
PCFAX
LONDON OFFICE
NEW YORK OFFICE
PCFAX

MODE
G3R*S
G4R*SM
G3RSM
G3R%S
G3R*SM

TIME
044
002
030
030
118

PAGE
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1

RESULT PERS. NAME FILE


OK
003
OK
004
OK
005
OK
006
OK
008

000005
:
:
:
:

XYZ COMPANY

BATCH
MEMORY
STANDARD
REMOTE TRANSFER

RX
C
L
D
B

:
:
:
:

CONFIDENTIAL
SEND LATER
DETAIL
FAX ON DEMAND

$
@
F
*

000004
:
:
:
:

TRANSFER
FORWARDING
FINE
PC

P
E
>
%

:
:
:
:

POLLING
ECM
REDUCTION
PC DIRECT

Transmit Files for July 23


File 1 (9:00AM)
File 2 (10:21AM)
File 4 (1:00PM)
File 5 (3:05PM)
File 7 (4:57PM)
File 8 (5:10PM)

G3 immediate transmission from fax to New York


Scanning in detail resolution to PCFunction 17 or CFM TWAIN
G4 memory transmission of Receive File 004 from PC to Tokyo
Receive File 005 forwarded from fax memory to PC
G3 direct transmission from PC to New York
G3 memory transmission of Receive File 008 failure

Receive Files for June 10


File 3 (11:30AM)
File 4 (12:58PM)
File 5 (3:03PM)
File 6 (4:30PM)
File 8 (5:08PM)

SM

Printing in standard resolutionDial 0000 from PC


G4 memory reception of Transmit File 004 from PC
G3 memory reception from London to be forwarded to PC
G3 direct reception from New York to PC
G3 memory reception from PC for New York

19

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

<TX>
DATE
JUL 23

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


6.2.

MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS

PC MEMORY TX is a new mode name for PC-Fax Expander memory


transmissions appearing on the following reports.
Result Report
* * * COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1996
FILE

MODE

004

OPTION

PC MEMORY TX

1:01PM ) * * *
TTI
XYZ COMPANY

ADDRESS (GROUP)

RESULT

PAGE

TOKYO OFFICE

OK

REASON FOR ERRORS


1)HANG UP LINE FAIL
3)NO ANSWER

2)BUSY
4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION

Failure Report
* * * COMMUNICATION FAILURE REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1995 5:11PM ) * * *
TTI
XYZ COMPANY
FILE

MODE

008

OPTION

PC MEMORY TX

ADDRESS (GROUP)

RESULT

PAGE

NEW YORK OFFICE

E-2)2)2)2)2)

P. 1

REASON FOR ERRORS


1)HANG UP LINE FAIL
3)NO ANSWER

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

2)BUSY
4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION

20

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


6.3.

USER PARAMETER LIST

PCFE Switch 14 appears below SW12 on the User Parameter List (Function 63).
* * * USER PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995

10:00AM ) * * *
TTI XYZ COMPANY

COUNTER
SCN

6.4

000005

ON
LIGHTEN
ON

* OFF
* NORMAL
* OFF

ON
ON
ON
* FAX

* OFF
* OFF
* OFF
PC

DARKEN

FAX+PC

SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

The ROM version line is modified to show the software version for the PCFE,
and the PCFE is added to the Parameter list .
* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995

SERIAL NO.
ROM VER.
F14-USA[PCFE]
ROM NO.
H5157210F 8579
R T I
T T I
C S I

PARAMETER
SCN THRESHOLD (L, M, H)
PCFAX EXPANDER

SM

IC
2AD4

96 06 11
5AA5

21

10:00AM ) * * *
TTI XYZ COMPANY

REV: A

VER: 1.04

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

000001
PRT

USER SWITCH

(SW12)
ECONOMY PRINTING MODE
PRINT DENSITY
COPY MODE
(SW14) PCFAX
MEMORY TX MODE
MEMORY RX MODE
PRINT TTI
RECEPTION MODE

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


7.

INSTALLATION

NOTE : Before installing this option read the warnings and cautions in sections
3.3 and 5 of the FAX4700L Service Manual.
This product is to be installed in a FAX4700L facsimile machine. The installation must
be done by qualified service personnel only, with the aid of the Service Manual (SM).
With a customer-provided double shielded serial cable, the RICOH RS232 PCFAX
EXPANDER Type 140 connects the fax machine to a PC that has a faxing application
installed.
Tools Required : Philips metric screwdriver set; FlashS/RAM copy tool, EPROM board.
Additional Part Required : Customer-provided RS232 shielded serial cable fitted with
either DB25-pin and DB25-socket connectors, or DB25-pin and DB-9 socket
connectors.
Procedure :
1. Turn off the fax machine and disconnect it from its power source.
2. Remove the Printer Interface unit if one is installed. Disconnect harness from
MFDU CN13. (SM section 3.3.6.)
3. Remove the rear cover. Remove the RS232 cover and replace it with DIU cover.
4. Remove the ISDN G4 Interface if one is installed. Disconnect harness from MFCE
CN4. (SM section 3.3.2.)
5. Detach and pull out the MFCE/MFDU subassembly, following the SM replacement
procedure. (SM section 5.8.2.)
6. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to MCFE CN5.
7. Mount the DIU bracket onto the chassis.
8. Fasten the DIU board onto the bracket.
9. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to DIU CN2.
10. Re-install the ISDN G4 Interface if one was removed.
11. Replace the rear cover, fitting it over the DIU RS232 connector.
12. Re-install the Printer Interface unit if one was removed.
13. Turn off the PC and disconnect it from its power source.
14. Connect the fax machine from the DIU port to the PC 25-pin or 9-pin COM port with
the serial cable.
CAUTION : Make sure all connections have been made before going on to the
next step. See Service Manual section 4.1.20. for Download procedure.
15. Insert the Copy Tool into the lower IC slot. Put EPROM 28648-001 into socket 1,
28648-002 into socket 2, etc., of the EPROM board. Turn Tool switch ON.Turn on
the power and download the software to the MFCE. (SM section 4.1.20.)
16. Reprogram the fax machine as necessary.
The MS-DOS diagnostics program should be run on the PC to check COM port
availability and IRQ status. See also CSG F.L. 84 and 86.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

22

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL

FAX Expander
Type 140

RS232 Cover

SM

23

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


8.

INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS

If the faxing application has a difficulty in locating the modem, check the fax
machine to ensure that it is on and ready : Turn it off, wait a few seconds, then turn it
back on. Run the MS-DOS diagnostics to review the COM ports and IRQs for possible
conflicts. Review the faxing applications manual for possible solutions.
8.1.

COMMUNICATION PORTS

The PCs serial ports are usually configured as COM1 and COM2. These are
assigned the Interrupt Request numbers (IRQs). IRQs are used to establish priorities
which will prevent conflicts from occurring when two devices want to use the same
resources at the same time.
To determine the availability of COM ports and their IRQs, Windows usersa can
the MS-DOS diagnostics program. Change the directory to the root and type msd :
C:\WIN> cd\
C:\>msd
When the diagnostics menu appears, choose COM Ports.... The next
screen will indicate if the COM ports (1 through 4) are enabled or available. Choose
IRQ to indicate the Interrupt Request status of each COM port. The COM ports must
not have the same IRQ. The PCs serial ports are usually configured with IRQ4 and
IRQ3. For example.
IRQ Status
IRQ
3
4

Address

Description

F000:EF6F
CE29:0096

COM2:
COM1:

Detected

COM4: COM2:
COM3 COM1: SERIAL MOUSE

Handled By
BIOS
BIOS

The installation of an internal modem may cause an IRQ conflict to occur


between two ports even if no device is using the second port. The second port may
have to be disabled to overcome this problem.
One solution is to remove the internal modem and re-enable the COM port for
PCFE use. Another solution is to install a third serial port.

MSDOS Version 5.0 and higher; Windows 95

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

24

SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL


8.2.

FAXING APPLICATION NOTE

The PCFE Type 140 has been tested with the following Class 2 faxing
applications :

Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh


MSFAX (Win95)
Delrina WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1)
Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95)
Delrina WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR DELRINA WINFAX PRO 7.0 USERS : To avoid


communication failures, the applications default communication port should be the
same as the communication port selected for the PCFAX EXPANDER Type 140,
(COM2, COM3, or other).

1. Select Modem.
2. Select Properties.
3. Pull down the list of communication port settings and select the PCFAX
EXPANDER communication port : COM 2, COM 3, or other.
4. Close.

SM

25

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

The applications original default port is TAPI. To change it, pull down the
applications Setup menu.

APPENDIX A

Appendix A

PC-FAX EXPANDER
OVERVIEW
(includes NEST)
Components of the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander Overview

The Ricoh PC-Fax Expander (PCFE) Guide is a convenient compilation of the most
important information regarding the PCFE optionn. The information has been extracted from
various PCFE sources, including the PCFE Product Information Book and respective
software user manuals.
Topics covered include:
A brief introduction to the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander
An overview of Ricoh's strategic partners, Cheyenne Software and Novell
An easy-to-follow explanation of the software installation process
Hands-on exercises to show the PCFE in action
A brief introduction to NEST
And a glossary of key terms associated with the PCFE

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

26

SM

What is a Ricoh PC-Fax Expander?


Ricoh Fax With
RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

PC With
Cheyenne
BitWare for Ricoh

It is the physical connection between a Ricoh facsimile machine and a personal computer,
linking the optional RS232 serial port on the fax to the RS232 port on the PC.
With appropriate software, it expands the functionality of both devices, providing the
following features:
PC-Faxing (send and receive)*
Printing
Scanning
Windows TWAIN Scanning
Unlimited autodialing capacity
Can integrate a standalone fax into a Local Area Network (LAN)
It is compatible with IBM PC AT (non PS/2) computers that employ either Microsoft
DOS or Microsoft Windows operating platforms.
Can be integrated into or onto a local area network (LAN) so that all network users
can share the PCFE.
There are two series of Ricoh PC-Fax Expanders available:
Type 80 Series
Includes only the Type 80 interface
Type 100 Series
Includes the Type 100, Type 130, Type 130E, Type 140, and Type 174 interfaces

*In addition to PC compatibility, the Type 100 Series can connect to a Macintosh computer for
single user applications via a serial cable.

SM

27

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

RS232 LINE

Distinguishing Factors Between the


Type 80 Series & Type 100 Series

Feature

Type 80 Series

Type 100 Series

PC Fax

Yes

Yes

EIA Class 2 support

Yes

Yes

Scan with fax software

Yes

Yes

TWAIN Scanning

No

Yes

Includes Cheyenne BitWare


for Ricoh

Yes

Yes

Includes Windows
TWAIN driver &
scanning software

No

Yes

LAN connectivity

No

Yes

In addition to minor installation differences, the Type 80 Series does not include the
following features that come standard with the Type 100 Series:
TWAIN Scanning - An industry standard that allows users to scan a document with a
wide variety of compatible scanning software and hardware. TWAIN is an acronym for
Technology Without Any Important Name.
Windows TWAIN driver/Scanning software - Since the Type 80 does not support the
TWAIN standard, there is no reason to include the respective driver and software.
LAN Connectivity - The Type 100 can be integrated into a local area network, which is
fast becoming a popular means for businesses of many sizes to allow employees to share
different office devices, including printers, files, and fax functions. It is estimated that
85% of corporate PCs are on LANs.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

28

SM

Benefits of a PCFE over a Modem


Feature

PC-Fax Expander

vs.

Modem

Yes

Yes

Error Correction
Mode (ECM)

Yes

No (Class 2)

Compression

MMR

MH only

Scan to PC

Yes

No

Send data files

No

Yes

Print fax messages

Yes

No

A RICOH PC-Fax Expander provides different solutions than a fax modem does.
An Error Correction Mode (ECM) that automatically corrects corrupted streams of data
before they are received. With this, the receiving unit will check the data for errors prior
to printing the document. If errors are found, it will request that the data be retransmitted.
This process continues until the data is sufficiently received.
The more effective Modified Modified Read compression method versus the more
archaic and less effective Modified Huffman method. Published findings indicate that
Modified Modified Read (MMR) can transmit a document approximately 25% faster than
Modified Huffman (MH) can.
The ability to Scan and "recognize" (also known as Optical Character Recognition)
fax messages and convert them into text documents that the PC can edit and
manipulate. Optional software is required.
Because the RICOH PC-Fax Expander is based on a fax machine with a laser printer
engine and printing capabilities, it can print out received faxes.

SM

29

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

TX/RX faxes

RICOH PC-FAX EXPANDER


Fax Machine Compatibility by Model

Type 80

Type 100

FAX5600L
MV715

FAX2400L
FAX2700L
FAX3700L

Type 130

Type 140

MV310

FAX4700L

Type 130E

Type 174

MV310E

MV74

Not all Ricoh fax machines use the same PC-Fax Expander.

While all of the operating functions of the Type 100 Series are identical, the design of each
specific model in the series may differ, as well as the way each are installed.

RICOH PC-Fax Expanders cannot work with fax machines other than Ricoh fax machines.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

30

SM

RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software


Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh

PC-Faxing
Fax Forwarding
Printing
TWAIN Scanning (from a PC)
Broadcasting

Who is Cheyenne Software?

FAX Expander
Type 140

A leading-edge developer of software solutions for problems associated with data and
network management.
It provides powerful, yet easy-to-use software with advanced features that answer the
needs of both stand-alone and LAN environments.

What is Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH fax software?


It is a single user-friendly Windows interface for a standalone PC that fully
integrates fax capabilities, supporting such features as PC-faxing, fax
forwarding, printing, and scanning.
BitWare was recently recognized by the American Facsimile Association as the top
performer in its extensive evaluation of fax/data/voice products. BitWare was cited for,
among other areas, ease of use, installation, documentation, and speed and reliability.

SM

31

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Cheyenne FAXserve Software

Cheyenne FAXSERVE Software


Offers facsimile management service for Novell Netware LAN environments.
Provides customers with a cost-effective means of centralizing fax services on network
servers.
Network users can create, send, receive, and print faxes right from their desktop PCs.
Also, because it uses the existing network infrastructure, there are no costs for additional
hardware or telephone lines.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

32

SM

Computer Installation Procedure

FAX Expander
Type 140

Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software

The following installation procedure is a generic listing. Later versions of the


software may slightly vary the procedure. The installation procedure is
provided as a reference only. It will allow you to further understand the
function and operation of the program. It is NOT provided for you to load
the program in the customers computer.
The PC Fax Expander is a User Installable Option It is the responsibility
of the users to install the software on thier PCs. It is NOT recommended
that the service technician install software on, or operate, the customers PC.

SM

33

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Installing the Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software

Before you attempt to install the Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software, you first must make
sure that the computer on which the software will be loaded accommodates all the
requirements:

t 386, 486 or Pentium microprocessor


t Minimum 4 megabytes of random access memory (RAM)
t Windows 3.1 or later
t DOS 3.1 or higher (DOS 5.0 or higher is preferred)
t A hard disk drive with 5 megabytes of free disk space
t A mouse is optional

The PC-Fax Expander must be installed, and then the serial cable connected, prior to
installing the Cheyenne software. Also, the fax machine must be turned on. The customer
must obtain a "Straight Through Serial Cable" separately. The port on a PC is either 9-pin
or 25-pin. There are two cable configurations available:
DB25 male
DB25 male

DB9 female
DB25 female

For Apple/Macintosh applications, there are different cable configurations depending on the
model of the computer. Advise the customer to contact an Apple Computer reseller about
obtaining a straight through serial cable terminating in a DB25 connector.

Once you are sure that the computer is equipped with the above items, you can proceed to
install Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh by inserting your BitWare diskette into either Drive A
or Drive B.

Then choose "Run" from Windows' Program Manager.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

34

SM

Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh


OPENING MENUS
"Run"

After inserting the Cheyenne Bitware floppy disk into a floppy drive, click on "Run" from
the Windows Main menu.
In the Command Line text-entry box, type: A (or B): \SETUP

FAX Expander
Type 140

Click "OK" The "Install Dialogue Box" will appear.

"Destination Directory"
The Destination Directory will appear, telling you that it will automatically create a BitWare
directory on your hared drve (c:\).

(continued)
SM

35

PC FAX Expander Type 140

"User Information"

The "User Information" box will ask you to enter the appropriate information. Please do so
and click "OK".
Copying Files (?)

"Group Name

Now the software is asking you to provide a group name for your BitWare software which
will appear in the Program Manager. Please type in whatever name you desire, or accept the
default name of Ricoh BitWare by Cheyenne.

Click "OK"

(continued)
PC-FAX Expander Type 140

36

SM

"Independent Program Icons"


The "Independent Program Icons" is a function that will automatically create icons for you
to drag and drop into a application for quick access.

Click "OK"

FAX Expander
Type 140

"Default Driver"

Now you are being asked if you want the Cheyenne BitWare Fax Driver, which is the
driver you will choose when transmitting a document, to be your default driver. If you
respond "Yes", then every time you want to print something you must manually change the
print driver to back your existing PC printer.

Choose either "Yes" or "No"

SM

37

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh


FINAL MENUS
"Copying Macros"

The software will now ask if you want to create macros for a "Send fax" command to be
copied into various software packages. The benefit is that users can create "shortcuts" to
installed software packages, reducing the number of steps required to send a fax.

Select "Copy" or "Don't Copy"

"Modem Detection"

The software will now look for COM port 1 (or COM 1) to make sure it can detect a modem
connected to that port.

And the final installation box you will see is asking you to simply review the information that
the software will be using to run effectively. Please review the information for accuracy.

Click "OK"

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

38

SM

If the software was installed successfully, a message will appear telling you so. If it does, then
you are ready to begin using Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software. If it does not, then consider
the following troubleshooter areas:
Check that the fax machine is turned on.
Check the serial cable for a secure connection.
Try installing the software again.
If it was sold by a dealer, then the customer should call the dealer.
If it was sold through a direct sales representative, then have the customer call the service
hotline.

SM

39

FAX Expander
Type 140

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Sending A Fax with Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh


The BitWare Tool Bar

When you are not in the application from which you want to fax a document, you can easily
fax directly from the Cheyenne BitWare Tool Bar. Of course, you must know the file name
you want to fax.

Each icon on the Tool Bar represents a different function, giving you quick access and the
flexibility of running only the function you need.

Each icon can be dragged and dropped into any Windows program group for convenience
purposes. For instance, you can drag and drop the Receive Log icon into the Startup group
in Windows. This way, the Receive Log will run every time you start Windows, allowing
you to see if you have received any faxes. You can also customize the desired means of
notification on either the fax machine or on the PC.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

40

SM

Faxing From Within An Application


Print Menu

You can fax from any Windows application, such as Microsoft Word. When you have a
document opened which you want to fax . . .

FAX Expander
Type 140

Click "File". The File Menu will appear.


Then click "Print". The Print Menu will appear.
If you didn't install the BitWare Fax driver as the default driver during installation,
change the print driver in the Print Menu to BitWare fax driver.
Click "OK". The Dial fax box will appear.

Dial Fax Box


SM

41

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Enter the recipient's name, the company name, and the fax number.
In that same Dial fax Box you can set any desired variables, including a cover page or
to dial an outside line if your telephone network requires you to.
Click "Start/Fax" when you are done.
The Transmission Status Box will appear. Here you can check to see at which baud
rate (speed) your document is being transmitted, the connection time, and the success or
failure of your transmission.
After your document has been successfully transmitted, the Response will indicate
"OK".

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

42

SM

Broadcasting a Document with Cheyenne Bitware


Bitware Phonebook
With Cheyenne BitWare, you can send a document to an unlimited number of destinations.
Begin sending a fax as you learned earlier. When the "Dial Fax" dialog box appears,
chose "Phone Book". The Phone Book dialog box appears.
Select the desired fax numbers.
When you are finished, choose "OK".
A text box will display all the selected fax numbers. If you want to remove one or more
of the fax numbers, use the "Remove Phone" button.
If you are transmitting to both local and long distance fax destinations, include the area
code in all numbers. When BitWare dials, it will automatically check the area code. If
it matches the one you entered previously, it will not dial the "1".
Click on "Start/Fax".
If you included a cover page, BitWare will automatically address each cover page
appropriately.

SM

43

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Receiving a Fax With


Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh
Receive Manager Window

When you want to set your computer to receive a fax, simply click the Receive Manager
icon in the BitWare Tool Bar, and . . .
the Receive Manager window will appear.
When you see "Waiting for a call" in the Operation field, your computer is ready to
receive a fax. Then it can be minimized to icon size.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

44

SM

Receive Status Dialog Box


After the fax is received, the Receive Manager will notify you by displaying the
Receive Status dialog box.
To view your fax, simply click "View". The "View Fax" window will appear and
show you the fax it received.
If you want your computer to automatically load Receive Manager when you boot it up,
select "Automatically load the Receive Manager when Windows starts" in the Receive
Setup dialog box.

FAX Expander
Type 140

SM

45

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Transmit & Receive Logs

The Cheyenne BitWare Transmit Log and Receive Log automatically maintain a detailed
record of each fax that was sent or received. The information they contain can be configured
by the user's preferences.

Transmit Log
The Transmit Log . . .

Indicates whether the transmission was successful


Shows the number of pages sent
Shows where it was sent to
Shows forwarded faxes
Allows the user to search and sort by any field
And automatically deletes listings after a specified time

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

46

SM

Receive Log
The Receive Log . . .
Indicates when each fax was received
The number of pages received
Where it was received from
Allows the user to search and sort by any field
And automatically deletes listings after a specified time

FAX Expander
Type 140

Both logs allow users to choose what information each will display and in what order.

SM

47

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Scanning with the PCFE: Manual Scanning

If you want to get a hard copy document into your PC, the Ricoh PCFE can easily scan it in at
200 dpi resolution, using the scanner of the Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE to get the data
entered. This saves much time-consuming keyboarding and allows the hard copy information to
be manipulated before being forwarded.

What is a manual scan?

Although it falls under the category of scanning, the PC-Fax Expander is essentially
sending a fax directly into the Bitware software of the PC, where it can be saved as a
file, manipulated, or faxed.

Before performing a manual scan, you must make sure that you have the Cheyenne Bitware
for Ricoh software program opened and that the "Receive Manager" is activated. The
"Receive Manager", which can be left on permanently, allows for reception of a fax either in
the background (for uninterrupted fax reception while working on the PC) or in the
foreground. An icon at the bottom of the screen will inform you whether it is activated or
not.
To perform a manual scan, press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.
Press "Yes" on the fax.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

48

SM

Place the document in the ADF.


Press "Start" on the fax. The document will be scanned just like a document to being faxed.
When completed, click on "View" on the PC screen.
Click on "View fax".
Now, if you want to fax the document out (perhaps broadcast it to multiple sites), you can
create a custom cover page at this point. Or, you can elect to save the document as a file. If
it is a graphical image, you can save it either as a TIF file, PCX file, or Bitmap file. At this
point you can also reduce or enlarge the image.

FAX Expander
Type 140

SM

49

PC FAX Expander Type 140

TWAIN Scanning

The TWAIN scanning driver enables you to scan from each Windows application that is
equipped with a TWAIN interface.
Here's how to perform TWAIN scanning:

Open Ricoh Bitware software.


Choose "View" and then "File".
Choose "Scan Page".
Click on "Scan". This activates the TWAIN driver.
Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder of the Ricoh
fax machine.
At this point, from your PC, you must select either "Line art" or Halftone".
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax. On the
PC screen, Bitware will measure the size of the document, in bytes, as it is being scanned.
After the scanning is completed, you can either save the document as a file, fax it, or edit
it.

Note: The Ricoh fax machine with the PCFE is a page scanner only, which means that you
can only scan a single page at a time even though the Ricoh fax is equipped with a multiplepage ADF.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

50

SM

FAX Expander
Type 140

CFM TWAIN Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware

CFM TWAIN Scanning is similar to conventional TWAIN scanning though with limited
functionality. For instance, you can only save an image as a Bitmap file, while with TWAIN
scanning it can be saved in a number of different formats.
To perform a CFM TWAIN scan:

From your main window, choose Ricoh CFM TWAIN.


Choose CFM Scanwork.
Select "File" and then "Acquire". This will open the CFM TWAIN driver.
Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder
of the Ricoh fax machine.
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax.
After the scanning is completed, click "Okay".
CFM TWAIN scanning only allows you to save the image as a Bitmap file.

SM

51

PC FAX Expander Type 140

Local Printing: Faxing to Yourself


See what happens when you fax from a PC to the number "0000"!

It's an alternate way to print without changing the printer driver!

Instead of changing the printer driver every time you want to print a document from a client
or PC, you can save yourself those extra steps by faxing the document from the PC to your
Ricoh fax machine equipped with a PCFE. Instead of faxing it out, though, the fax will print
it as if it were receiving an incoming fax.
Here's what you do:
While in an opened application, click "File".
From the File menu, click "Print". The Bitware driver will appear in the "Printer"
typeline.
Click "Okay".
When the Fax Send box appears, type the numbers "0000" in the fax number typeline.
Click "Send".
The document will be sent from the PC to the Ricoh fax machine.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

52

SM

BitWare's On-Line Help Menu

Search command menu

Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help provides instant reference and instructions for commands
and dialog boxes. Here, however, there is a greater amount of useful information than in the
hard copy user's guide, and the on-line help can never be misplaced like the guide can. Also,
the on-line help is simply easier to use than the hard copy guide as it gets you to the needed
topics and answers faster.
There are various ways to use the help function:
For a description or explanation of a BitWare command, highlight the command
and press the F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.
For description or explanation of a BitWare dialog box, open the box and press
the F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.
To find a general topic quickly, use the Help menu's Table of Contents. To do this,
simply choose "Contents" from the Help menu in any BitWare Window. The On Line Help will be displayed, listing all of the major help topics.
Underline a topic and click on it or use the Tab key until the topic desired is
highlighted.
If you do not see the topic desired, use the Search button. The Search dialog box
will be displayed, listing subjects alphabetically.

SM

53

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help

Novell Backbone

NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology)


Autoroute Option

Ricoh Fax
With NEST

CLIENT A

RS232
LINE
RS232
LINE

Ricoh Fax With


NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER

PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With
NEST

Ricoh Fax With


RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software

CLIENT B

CLIENT C

What is NEST?
NEST is an acronym for Novell Embedded Systems Technology, which is a Novell
patent.
It is an alternative routing methodology that lets users route faxes directly to a recipient's
workstation, through a Novell 3.12 or 4.x server, running Cheyenne FaxServe. With this,
the receiving party is always assured of receiving the information.
It uses a numeric code (Nest Autoroute code), typically four digits. The customer enters
the code at the end of the telephone number (preceded and followed by the # ). It is
transmitted attached to the end of the transmitting machines TSI. Its purpose is similar
to that of a post office box number.
The NEST Autoroute code is given to the network during the handshake process. The
FaxServe software directs the information to the appropriate workstation on the LAN.
The benefits include minimizing the number of lost faxes, reducing the possibility of a
confidential fax being read by an unauthorized person(s), and the elimination of dedicated
telephone lines to be installed for direct routing of incoming documents.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

54

SM

The RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software (Nest)

Cheyenne FAXSERVE with NEST

The Various Applications With Autoroute Technology

For the different means of sending information via Autoroute, there are specific
configurations:
Standalone PC - The customer, with a Ricoh fax machine and Cheyenne Bitware with
NEST, should be using the fax machine as an external modem. The fax does not have to
have NEST to send Autoroute faxes from the PC, just Bitware with NEST. However, if
the customer is going to fax from the fax machine and not from the PC, then the fax
machine must have the NEST option.
Peer-to-Peer LAN - There is no NEST Autoroute solution. However, by recommending
Cheyenne Bitshare to your customer and connecting a Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE
to a COM port (via an RS232 cable) on one of the client PCs, you would be providing
them with a solution. The fax is seen as an external modem which can then be shared by
all of the PCs on the Peer-to-Peer network to send out faxes. Any incoming faxes will be
received by the fax machine and printed out as a conventional fax.
In the future, Ricoh expects Bitshare to be upgraded to NEST for fax transmission,
allowing a fax machine to support NEST for walk-up use as well as from a PC.
Local Area Networks - With Cheyenne FAXserve with NEST, users will be able to
send and receive Autoroute messages. The LAN can send or receive via a modem or a
Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE, neither of which needs to have NEST. The telephone
number and subaddress are forwarded to the network by the modem or fax machine. The
decoding of the Autoroute address, which takes place during the fax handshake period, is

SM

55

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Automatically and accurately routes incoming faxes to the appropriate recipients on a


network, whether the device is a PC, printer, copier, or a fax machine.
When FAXserve receives an incoming fax, it interprets the identification number and
routes the fax directly to the recipient's PC or other device according to the
preprogrammed ID number.
Its automatic routing of incoming documents minimizes the number of lost faxes and
reduces the possibility of a confidential fax being seen by unauthorized personnel.

performed by the LAN fax software. The software forwards the fax to the respective
client. The fax transmission takes place as if it were occurring between two fax
machines.
In a Netware LAN application, an autoroute fax can be forwarded to e-mail. Faxes
received can be viewed on the Bitware viewer or the e-mail viewer. This can be very
beneficial to customers who want only one user interface. The fax machine with a PCFE
can connect, via the RS232 cable, to a com port on the file server. This is a viable
solution for small offices with perhaps 20 to 30 people on the network where the file
server is in the immediate work area. In a corporate setting, the file server is generally
farther away. To connect multiple fax machines, a multiport serial board and fax server
are required. Because of the close proximity of the fax server, long serial cables running
throughout the work area are eliminated.

Scan Autoroute - With NEST incorporated into Ricoh's fax products, users can scan a
document into a fax machine and have it automatically routed to an address on a
network. Now users can send hard-copy documents via a fax machine and take
advantage of NEST autorouting features. This function can be supported by a stand-alone
configuration or in a LAN configuration.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

56

SM

Novell Backbone

Transmitting with NEST


Ricoh Fax
With NEST

CLIENT A

RS232 LINE

RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax With


NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER

PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With NEST

Ricoh Fax With


RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

File Server
With Cheyenne
F A X SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software

CLIENT B

The procedure for transmitting a document using the NEST Autoroute option is very
similar to the conventional means of transmitting a document. Just follow these steps:
You must first know the respective passcode or subaddress (again, it's usually four
digits) of the intended recipient. Let's say the subaddress is 1234.
Whether you are faxing from within an application or not, the dialing procedure is the
same. You dial the intended recipient's fax number. Let's say it is 555-1515.
Then you dial a star (*), which is typically found on the lower left-hand corner of a
telephone keypad.
Now dial the subaddress. In this case, it is 1234.
Once again, dial the star (*), so that two stars frame the subaddress.
Now send your document by either pushing the "Start" key on the fax machine or by
clicking on "Send" on your PC.

Your document will now be faxed to the dialed fax number and then automatically onto
the assigned subaddress, being received directly into the recipient's PC, printer, or fax.

SM

57

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

CLIENT C

LAN Connectivity Without NEST


The Benefits of Shared Usage
Ricoh Fax
With NEST

Telephone
Company

CLIENT A
Novell Backbone
RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax With


RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software

CLIENT B

CLIENT C

Multiple users can benefit from a RICOH PC-Fax Expander as it can be used as a shared
device within a Local Area Network (LAN). Here are some of those benefits:
Multiple users can fax directly from a PC and, utilizing the modem of the Ricoh fax
machine, out to the intended recipient. This eliminates the need for the user to leave
the desk and walk over to the fax machine, as well as eliminating the extra step of
printing the document in order to fax it via the automatic document feeder.
All users have access to an unlimited number of remote fax locations to transmit or
broadcast to, thanks to the memory storage capacity of their PCs. Included in this
storage are Quick Dial keys, Speed Dial keys, and Group Dial keys. This is in contrast
to the limited memory capacity typically found on most standalone fax machines.
Multiple users now have access to a departmental scanner for fast and convenient
input of hard-copy documents.
All users have access to a primary or secondary laser printer. This is beneficial
should any alternate standalone printer be out of service or busy printing a large job.
All users also have convenient access to a secondary plain-paper copier within their
department. This is beneficial should the primary copier be out of service or engaged
in a large copying job. Users can even make multiple copies if required, just as a
conventional copier would allow.
If a company was to purchase all of these office tools separately for each individual
on a LAN, the cost would be astronomical and the required office and desk space
would be overwhelming. With the RICOH PC-Fax Expander, though, all users should
share one multifunctional tool that would effectively serve their daily business needs.

In-Bound Routing With NEST

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

58

SM

123-4567#8888#

Novell Backbone

Telephone
Company

Ricoh Fax
With NEST

123-4567#8888#
123-4567#8888#

CLIENT A

8888

RS232 LINE

8888
RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax With


NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER

PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With NEST

Ricoh Fax With


RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software

CLIENT B

CLIENT C

All clients on the LAN must be assigned a four-digit passcode or subaddress by the
Program Administrator.
Any party sending a fax must be informed of this assigned passcode for the document
to be automatically routed on the receiving end.
In the PC Setup Dialog Box on the PC, select automatic answering, so that incoming
faxes will be received without operator assistance.
The benefits of receiving incoming documents directly to the appropriate recipient
include:

Keeping the received document from lying stray on a fax machine catch tray where it
is open for all eyes to see. This can prove detrimental in an environment where
sensitive information is communicated.

Should the fax machine itself run out of toner or paper, and the fax memory be filled
to capacity, there will always be sufficient memory in the PC to successfully receive
the document. This is especially true for environments where documents consisting
of high graphical content are communicated. With this, no important incoming
documents will ever be lost.

SM

59

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

In-Bound Routing with NEST Autoroute gets an incoming document directly to the
intended recipient. To receive documents routed to the appropriate recipient, the
following steps must be taken:

Novell Backbone

Autoroute Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware

CLIENT A

RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax With


RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER

File Server
With Cheyenne
F A X SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software

CLIENT B

CLIENT C

Autoroute Scanning is essentially the same as Manual Scanning except that the autoroute
capability allows the document being scanned to be sent directly to an assigned client on a local
area network via a four-digit address.
To perform an Autoroute Scan:

Press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.


Press "Yes".
Enter the assigned four-digit autoroute code.
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen.

The client receives the document as a fax but now has annotation tools available.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

60

SM

The Various Applications forSending Faxes


Application

Components Required

Without Autoroute:
To...

You need...

Fax from a fax to another fax

Fax machines

Fax from a PC to a fax

PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE

FAX from a PC to a PC

TX1 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFE


RX2 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFE

Fax from a client on a LAN to a fax TX=LAN with LAN fax software
RX=fax machine
TX=LAN with LAN fax software
RX=PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE

With Autoroute
To...

You need...

Autoroute Fax from a fax to a client TX=fax with NEST option


on a LAN
RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST
Autoroute Fax from a client on a
LAN to another client on a LAN

TX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST


RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST

Scanning:
To...

You need...

Autoroute scan to a client on a LAN Ricoh fax with PCFE and NEST option
LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST
Scan to a PC

Ricoh fax with PCFE


PC with Class 2 fax software

TWAIN scan to a PC

Ricoh fax with PCFE


PC with TWAIN-compliant software

1
2

TX=Transmit
RX=Receive

SM

61

PC FAX Expander Type 140

FAX Expander
Type 140

Fax from a client on a LAN to a


standalone PC

Glossary of Terms

The following list will introduce you to some of the most common terms you will encounter
during the selling process and use of a RICOH PC-Fax Expander and its corresponding
Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software.
Application Software - A program or software group of programs used for a specific task, such
as word processing, accounting, desktop publishing, etc.
Background Operation - The ability to transmit or receive a fax form a PC while the user
continues -- without interruption -- working on the PC.
Binary File Transfer - The ability of two equally-equipped computer systems to transmit data
and image files in their original format rather than a series of digitized dots.
Emulation - A printer operational mode in which one type and brand of printer connected or
networked with a PC mimics the operation of another type and brand of printer. This allows it to
print data form an application compatible with the printer it is emulating.
Fax Server - A dedicated PC that provides other PCs on a network with fax capabilities. It is the
only PC directly connected to the department fax machine.
Inbound Routing - The process of relaying a fax received at a LAN fax server past the server to
the specific intended recipient's mailbox or output device (copier, printer, fax, etc.).
Modem - An abbreviation for MOdulator/DEModulator. A communication device which alters
data in digital form suitable for transmission over telephone lines. It then carries out the same
process in reverse when receiving data.
Multitasking - The ability to perform two or more functions simultaneously. For example, scan
an image into a PC while that same PC is printing a job.
NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology) - Novell's response to Microsoft's MS At-Work
operating system. It is an alternative routing method that lets users route faxes and other
information across telephone lines, local area networks and wide area networks directly to a
recipient's workstation environment.
Network Loadable Module (NLM) - Software that follows Novell guidelines to run as a service
on top of a Novell file server.
Sub-addressing - Intentional extra digits (usually four) added to the end of a fax number to
further direct information to a specific destination, such as a PC. Serves a similar function as a
Post Office box number.
PC-FAX Expander Type 140

62

SM

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) - A method of scanning a hard-copy document of text


into a PC for digital storage or editing.
Parallel Input - A method of sending the data to be printed from a PC to a printer into a
continuous stream of sets of 16 or more data bits.
Printer Driver - Software that translates the data generated by an application into the format
needed by the specific type and brand of printer connected to a network or PC.
RS232 (Serial Input) - A method of sending data to be printed in a continuous stream of data
bits. RS232 is a standard that defines the physical, electrical and control parameters for this type
of input.

FAX Expander
Type 140

Remote Retrieval - From a remote site (a PC or fax machine), fax recipients can
have access to received documents that are stored in individual fax mailboxes.
However, the received documents which the user is attempting to retrieve
must be received into memory at the original point

SM

63

PC FAX Expander Type 140

APPENDIX B
Class 1 and Class 2 modem operation.
Class 1 and Class 2 are EIA (Electronics Industry Association) standards which specify
the condition of communications between PCs and facsimile machines.
How do they affect operation?
In this model, the practical difference is that Class 2 operation allows memory
transmission and reception, while Class 1 operation allows only direct transmission and
reception.
If the machine is set up for Class 1 communication, the customer will not be able to use
the fax machines SAF memory capabilities.
In receive mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, the customer can choose to:
print a received fax message,
store it in SAF (Store and Forward) memory, then print it or
store it in SAF memory then send it to the PC.
In transmit mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, memory transmission is
available.
For more details, see Memory Transmission, section 4.3 and Memory Reception,
section 4.4 in this manual.
Additional background information
The Class 1 and Class 2 interfaces are standards for PC-fax adapters. They define
which Group 3, T.30 protocol functions the PC-facsimile device is capable of
performing.
In Class 1 operation, the PC-fax adapter provides an interface between the PC and the
PSTN, allowing basic capabilities such as modem functions for sending fax data,
handshaking, tone generation and tone detection. In Class 1 operation, data is sent
through the fax machines modem, but cannot be stored in its SAF memory, so memory
transmit and receive features are not available.
In Class 2 operation, the fax expander hardware has more functionality. Additional
protocol signals are exchanged between the PC the fax adapter. This allows access to
the SAF memory in the fax machine.

PC-FAX Expander Type 140

64

SM

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION


1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets
Acceptable Paper Sizes:
Model
Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Half Letter
A4
A5 sideways
F/F4
B4
B5
B5 sideways

US

Europe

Asia











Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.
g

Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 m2 [16~24 lb.]

PFU Type 140F

Dimensions (W x D x H): 427 x 549 x 153 mm [16.8 x 21.6 x 6.0 ins]


Weight: 7.5 kg [17 lbs]

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2

7
3

5
4

6
H110D001.wmf

Index
1
2
3

Name
Paper End Sensor
Relay Sensor
Paper Size Sensor (switches)
LEDs

4
5
6

Paper Feed Clutch


Paper Feed Motor
Interface Board

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

Description
Detects when the paper in the cassette has run
out.
Detects when the paper is at the exit point of
the paper feed unit.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.
The user must install the correct size actuator.
The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a
jam condition has been detected in the paper
feed unit.
Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed
motor to the paper feed roller.
Stepper motor, drives the paper feed
mechanisms in the unit.
The board interfaces the control signals and
sensor outputs between the host fax machine
and the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.
It also relays the signals between the host fax
machine and another paper feed unit (if
installed).

SM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. PAPER PATH

[A]

[B]

The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper from
the optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machines registration area
through the entrance.
If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paper
feed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

PFU Type 140F

H110D002.wmf

2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION


The machine will detect paper size
by monitoring the output signals
from the three microswitches in the
paper size sensor [A].

[A]

The following table shows the combinations of the sensors output and
the paper size detected.

H110D003.wmf

L
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On

Microswitch
C
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On

R
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On

US

Europe

Asia

Legal
Letter
F/F4
A4
A5 sideways

Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded conditions.

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

SM

2.3. PAPER END DETECTION


The paper end sensor actuator [A]
will drop through a slot in the bottom plate when the cassette has
run out of paper. The machine will
then detect a paper end condition.

[A]

H110D006.wmf

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK


When the cassette is installed in the paper feed unit, the lock pins ([A] and
[B]) enter the slots at each side of the cassette.

[D]
[C]
PFU Type 140F

[E]

[A]

[B]

H110D005.wmf

H110D004.wmf

The pin [C] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [D] from the
lock [E] when the cassette is installed in the unit.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

2.5. PAPER FEED

[C]
[B]

[E]

[A]

[D]
H110D007.wmf

The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].
The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper from
the cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feed
roller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].
If only one paper feed unit is installed:
The host machines paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printer
mechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host machines registration sensor.
If two paper feed units are installed:
The feed motor in the upper paper feed unit will feed the paper to the fax
machines registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passed
the feed units relay sensor. The fax machines paper feed motor will then
feed the paper into the printer mechanism.
Jam Conditions
A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:
1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed clutch
was turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].
2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2 seconds
after the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated [error code
9-51].
3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was activated
(when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

SM

2.6. INTERFACE BOARD

24V

+5V

(CN6-1) A
(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)

(CN6-2) +24V
(CN6-3) AB

(CN1-7) Serial Clock

IC2

(CN6-4) B
(CN6-5) +24V

(CN1-9) Latch Signal

(CN6-6) BB

Paper Feed Motor


(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)

24V

(CN5-2) +24V
(CN5-2) Clutch On [

924V]

CL

(CN2-5)

Paper Feed Clutch

(CN2-7)
(CN2-6)

+5V

(CN4-1) +5V
(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [

(CN2-4)
(CN1-11)
INSL1
(CN1-12)
INSL0

95V]

LEDs

IC1
Cassette
ID
Creation

+5V
(CN3-5) +5V
(CN3-3) Paper Present [

95V]

(CN3-4) COM1

(CN2-2) OUTSL1

(CN3-2) Paper End [

(CN2-1) OUTSL0

Relay Sensor

95V]
Paper End Sensor

(CN3-1) COM1

+24V
(CN3-9) Paper Size 0 [
(CN3-8) Paper Size 1 [
(CN3-6) Paper Size 2 [

+5V

95V]
95V]
95V]

Paper Size Sensor

(CN3-7) COM1

H110D501.wmf

The host fax machine will control the paper feed unit(s) through a serial interface. The fax machine sends the control signals to the installed paper feed
units one by one. Each paper feed unit will then control its drive components
and/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.
Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paper
feed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assign a
unique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table and
as illustrated on the next page.

1st optional PFU


2nd optional PFU
3rd optional PFU
4th optional PFU

INSL1
High
Low
Low
High

INSL0
High
Low
High
Low

DEF1
Low
Low
High
High

DEF0
Low
High
Low
High

Cassette ID
00
01
10
11

Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.
However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installed
is limited by the host fax machines specifications. As an example, FAX4700L
can only have up to two optional paper feed units.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

PFU Type 140F

IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by control signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor the
sensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2
is the motor driver.

High

1st Paper Feed Unit

High
+5V

IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = Low

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

2nd Paper Feed Unit


+5V
IC1

Low

DEF0 = High
DEF1 = Low

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

Low

3rd Paper Feed Station


+5V
IC1

High

Low

DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = High

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

4th Paper Feed Station


+5V
IC1

Low

High

DEF0 = High
DEF1 = High

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

H110D502.wmf

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

SM

3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Perform the following before installing the optional unit:
1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.
3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the connector cover [B].
Place the fax machine onto the
paper feed unit [A].
[C]

2. Secure the fax machine to the


paper feed unit with the bracket
[C] (2 screws). Connect the
harness [D] to the machine.

[B]

3. Install the harness cover [E] (1


screw), and re-install the
connector cover [B] (which was
removed in step 1).

[E]

[D]

h110i502.wmf

4. Remove the bottom plate holder


bracket [F] as shown.
[F]

5. Load paper into the paper feed


unit and turn the fax machine on.
Make a test print using the paper
feed unit.

h110i503.wmf

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

PFU Type 140F

[A]

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


4.1. COVERS

[A]

[C]

[B]
H110R001.WMF

A: Left Side Cover (3 screws)


B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)
C: Right Side Cover (2 screws)

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR


[A]

[D]
[B]

[C]

h110r002.wmf

A:
B:
C:
D:

Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)


Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)
Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)
Gear

SM

10

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH

[A]

[D]

[B]
[C]

A:
B:
C:
D:

H110R003.WMF

Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)


Gear (1 clip)
Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)
Relay Roller (1 clips, 2 bushings)

PFU Type 140F

4.4. SENSORS
[A]

[B]

[C]
H110R004.wmf

A: Paper End Sensor (1 connector)


B: Relay Sensor (1 connector)
C: Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)

H515 PFU TYPE 140F

11

SM

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140S

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION


1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets
Acceptable Paper Sizes:
Model
Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Half Letter
A4
A5 sideways
F/F4
B4
B5
B5 sideways

US

Europe

Asia











Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.
g

Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 m2 [16~24 lb.]


Dimensions: 540 x 427.3 x 157.7mm (W x D x H) [21.3 x 16.8 x 6.2 ins]

PFU Type 140S

Weight: 9kg [19.8lbs]

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT


Index

Name

Description

1
2
3
4
5

8
7
H110D008.wmf

Interface Board
1

2
3
4
5
6

Paper End Sensor


Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Clutch
Relay Sensor
Cover Switch
LEDs

7
8

Paper Size Sensor (switches)

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

The board interfaces the control signals and


sensor outputs between the host fax machine
and the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.
It also relays the signals between the host fax
machine and another paper feed unit (if
installed).
Detects when the paper in the cassette has run
out.
Stepper motor drives the paper feed
mechanisms in the unit.
Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed
motor to the paper feed roller.
Detects when the paper is at the exit point of
the paper feed unit.
Detects whether the cover is open or closed.
The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a
jam condition has been detected in the paper
feed unit.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.
The user must install the correct size actuator.

SM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1. PAPER PATH

[A]

[B]

H110D009.wmf

The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper from
the optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machines registration area
through the entrance.

PFU Type 140S

If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paper
feed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION


The machine will detect the paper
size by monitoring the output signals from the three microswitches
in the paper size sensor [A].

[A]

The following table shows the combinations of the sensors output


and the paper size detected.

H110D010.wmf

L
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On

Microswitch
C
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On

R
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On

US

Europe

Asia

Legal
Letter
F/F4
A4
A5 sideways

Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded conditions.

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

SM

2.3. PAPER END DETECTION


The paper end sensor actuator [A]
will drop through a slot in the bottom plate when the cassette has
run out of paper. The machine
then detect a paper end condition.

[A]

H110D013.wmf

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK


The rotary catch on the base of the unit [A] is used to lock the cassette to the
paper feed unit when the cassette is installed.

[C]

[A]

[B]

H110D012.wmf

H110D011.wmf

The guide block [B] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [C]
from the lock [D] when the cassette is installed in the unit.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

PFU Type 140S

[D]

2.5. JAM RELEASE

[A]

h110d014.wmf

The cover on the right side of the unit can be opened to remove a jammed
paper. The microswitch [A] detects when the cover is open. The LED will indicate to the user when the cover is open.

2.6. PAPER FEED

[C]
[B]

[A]

[D]
[E]
H110D007.wmf

The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].
The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper from
the cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feed
roller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

SM

If only one paper feed unit is installed:


The host machines paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printer
mechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host machines registration sensor.
If two paper feed units are installed:
The feed motor in the upper paper will feed unit will feed the paper to the fax
machines registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passed
the feed units relay sensor. The fax machines paper feed motor will then
feed the paper into the printer mechanism.
Jam Conditions
A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:
1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed
clutch was turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].
2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated
[error code 9-51].
3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was
activated (when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].

2.7. INTERFACE BOARD

24V

+5V

(CN6-1) A
(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)

(CN6-2) +24V
(CN6-3) AB

(CN1-7) Serial Clock

IC2

(CN6-4) B
(CN6-5) +24V

(CN1-9) Latch Signal

(CN6-6) BB

Paper Feed Motor


(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)

24V

(CN5-2) +24V
(CN5-2) Clutch On [

924V]

CL

(CN2-5)
(CN2-7)
(CN2-6)

+5V

(CN4-1) +5V
(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [

(CN2-4)
(CN1-11)
INSL1
(CN1-12)
INSL0

95V]

LEDs

IC1
Cassette
ID
Creation

+5V
(CN3-5) +5V
(CN3-3) Paper Present [

95V]

(CN3-4) COM1

(CN2-2) OUTSL1

(CN3-2) Paper End [

(CN2-1) OUTSL0

(CN3-1) COM1
(CN3-11) Cover Open [

+24V

Relay Sensor

95V]
95V]

Paper End Sensor


Cover Sensor

(CN3-10) COM1

95V]
(CN3-8) Paper Size 1 [ 95V]
(CN3-6) Paper Size 2 [ 95V]
(CN3-9) Paper Size 0 [

+5V

Paper Size Sensor

(CN3-7) COM1

H110D601.wmf

IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by control signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor the
sensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2
is the motor driver.

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

PFU Type 140S

Paper Feed Clutch

The host fax machine controls the paper feed unit(s) through a serial interface. The fax machine will send the control signals to the installed paper
feed units one by one. Each paper feed unit then control its drive components and/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.
Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paper
feed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assigns a
unique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table and
as illustrated on the next page.

1st optional PFU


2nd optional PFU
3rd optional PFU
4th optional PFU

INSL1
High
Low
Low
High

INSL0
High
Low
High
Low

DEF1
Low
Low
High
High

DEF0
Low
High
Low
High

Cassette ID
00
01
10
11

Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.
However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installed
is limited by the host fax machines specifications. As an example, the
FAX4700L can only have up to two optional paper feed units.

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

SM

High

1st Paper Feed Unit

High
+5V

IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = Low

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

2nd Paper Feed Unit


+5V
IC1

Low

DEF0 = High
DEF1 = Low

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

Low

3rd Paper Feed Station


+5V
IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = High

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

PFU Type 140S

High

Low

4th Paper Feed Station


+5V
IC1

Low

High

DEF0 = High
DEF1 = High

CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1

H110D602.wmf

SM

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Before installing an optional unit, perform the following:
1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.
3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the connector cover [B]. Place the Fax machine onto the paper
feed unit.
2. Secure the fax machine to the
paper feed unit with the bracket
[C] (2 screws). Then connect the
harness [D] to the fax machine.

[C]

3. Install the harness cover [E] (1


screw), and reinstall the connector
cover [B] (which was removed in
step 1).
4. Load the paper into the paper
feed unit and turn on the fax
machine on. Make a test print
using the paper feed unit.

[B]
[E]

[A]

[D]
H110I501.WMF

PSU Type 140S

10

SM

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


4.1. COVERS

[B]

[A]

H110R005.WMF

A: Left Side Cover (3 screws)


B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR

[D]
[C]
A:
B:
C:
D:

SM

[B]

Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)


Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)
Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)
Gear

11

h110r002.wmf

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

PFU Type 140S

[A]

4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEED


CLUTCH
A: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)
B: Gear (1 clip)
[C]

[D]

[A]

[C]
[B]
H110R006.WMF

C: Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)


D: Relay Roller (1 clip, 2 bushings)

4.4. SENSORS
[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

A:
B:
C:
D:

H110R007.WMF

Paper End Sensor (1 connector)


Relay Sensor (1 connector)
Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)
Cover Open Sensor (1 connector)

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

12

SM

4.5. OTHERS
[B]

[A]

[D]

[D]

[C]
H110R008.WMF

A: Pressure Roller
B: Magnet Locks (2 screws each)
C: Spring Plates (1 screw each)

Note: When opening the front cover, carefully disconnect the Spring Hooks [D].

PFU Type 140S

During re-assembly, ensure that the spring hooks are installed as illustrated
above.

SM

13

H515 PFU TYPE 140S

H551
SERVICE MANUAL

OVERALL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Desktop type transceiver
Circuit
PSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)
Connection
Direct couple
Document Size
Length:
105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]
Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assisted
Up to 14 m [46 ft] after service adjustment
Width:
148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]
Thickness:
0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils]
(equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)
Document Feed
Automatic feed, face down
ADF Capacity
50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper or
A4 size 70 g/m2 paper)
25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size
20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)
Scanning Method
Flat bed, with CCD
Scan Width
219.5 mm [8.64 ins] 1% (A4/Letter)
260.1 mm [10.2 ins] 1% (B4)
308.9 mm [12.2 ins] 1% (A3/Double
Letter)
Scan Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan:
Standard - 100 lpi
Detail - 200 lpi
Fine - 400 lpi
Memory Capacity
ECM: 128 kbytes

SM

SAF:
Standard: 1.5 Mbytes: 126 pages
With 2 Mbyte option: 294 pages
With 4 Mbyte option: 462 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD plus Function
Upgrade Card: 3000 pages
Measured using ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter)
Compression
MH, MR, MMR, SSC (MMR only with ECM
and G4),
JBIG (G3 interface option required)
SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and raw
data
Protocol
Group 3 with ECM
Group 4 (ISDN G4 option required)
Modulation
V.34 (TCM), V.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM),
V.27ter (PHM), V.21 (FM)
Data Rate (bps)
G3:
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/
4800/2400, Automatic fallback
G4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps
I/O Rate
With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
Transmission Time
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps;
Measured with G3 ECM using memory for
an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter)
at standard resolution
G4 (option): 3 s at 64 kbps;
Measured with an ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Printing System
Laser printing, plain paper, dry toner

1-1

H551

Overall
Information

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

Paper Size and Capacity


Standard Cassette: 250 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100
sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4
Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.

Weight
Approx. 19 kg [50.9 lbs]
Excluding CTM, handset, trays, and
optional units

Maximum Printing Width


208 mm [8.2 ins] (Letter)
202 mm [8.0 ins] (A4)
Print Resolutions
Fax and Copy Mode:
Main scan: 400 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi
Printer Mode: 300 x 300 dpi
Power Supply
USA:
115 20 Vac, 50 1 Hz
Europe/Asia: 187 - 276 Vac, 60 1 Hz
Power Consumption (Base Machine
Only)
Standby:
Minimum 2 W (see Note)
Normal 30 W
Transmitting: 60 W
Receiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)
Copying: 300 W (Maximum: 950 W)
Note: 2W mode is not available if one of the
following options is installed.
- Printer interface unit
- G4
- RS232C interface
Operating Environment
Temperature: 17 - 28C [63 - 82F]
Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh
Dimensions (W x D x H)
475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]
Excluding handset, trays, and optional units

H551

1-2

SM

Rev.11/12/98

1.2 FEATURES

Video Processing Features

KEY:
O = Used, X = Not Used,
A = With optional memory 2M/4M only
B = With optional memory 80M (HDD)
only
C = With optional function upgrade
card only
D = With optional Fax On Demand kit
only
E = With optional 100 sheet cassette
only
F = With optional paper feed unit only
G = With optional counter only
H = With optional handset only (US
only)
I = With optional printer interface unit
only
J = With optional G4 kit only
Equipment
ADF
Book scan
Built-in handset
Bypass feed: 1 sheet
Cabinet
Counter
Cutter
Handset
Hard disk
Manual feed mechanism
(ADF)
Marker (Stamp)
Monitor speaker
Optional cassette: 100 sheets
Optional Fax On Demand kit
Optional paper feed unit
(up to 2 units)
Optional printer interface

O
O
X
O

Communication Features - Auto


Automatic fallback
O
Automatic redialing
O
Confidential reception
A or B
Dual Access
O
Substitute reception
O

Communication Features User Selectable


Action as a transfer
broadcaster
AI Redial (last ten numbers)
Answering machine interface
Authorized Reception
Auto-answer delay time
Auto dialing (pulse or DTMF)
Auto Document
Auto image density selection
Auto paper size selection
Automatic Voice Message
Batch Transmission (max 6
files)
Broadcasting
Chain Dialing
Communication Result Display
Confidential ID Override
Confidential Reception
Confidential Transmission
Direct Fax Number Entry
Economy Transmission
Fax on demand
Forwarding

O
X
X
O
X
G
X
H
B
X
O
O
E
D
F
I

Video Processing Features


Contrast
O
Halftone
O
(Basic & Error Diffusion)

SM

O
O
O
O
O

Overall
Information

MTF
Reduction before tx (B4 -> A4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> B4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> A4)
Scanning Resolution Standard
Scanning Resolution - Detail
Scanning Resolution - Fine
Scanning Resolution Superfine
Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi
when printing

1.2.1 FEATURES LIST

1-3

X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
D
O
H551

FEATURES
Rev.11/12/98

Communication Features User Selectable


Free Polling
Groups (7 groups)
Group Transfer Station
Hold
ID Transmission
Immediate Redialing
Immediate transmission
Keystroke Programs
Length Reduction
Memory transmission
Multi-step Transfer
Next Transfer Station
OMR
On Hook Dial
Ordering Toner
Page Count
Page separation mark
Parallel memory transmission
Personal Codes
Personal Codes with Conf. ID
Partial Image Area Scanning
Polling Reception
Polling Transmission
Polling tx file lifetime in the
SAF
Quick Dial
(Standard: 64 stations)
Reception modes (Fax, Tel,
Auto)
Remote control features
Remote Transfer
Restricted Access
Secured Polling
Secured Polling with Stored ID
Override
Secure Transmission
Send Later
Silent ringing detection
Speed Dial
(Standard: 100 stations)
Telephone Directory
Tonal Signal Transmission
Transfer Request
Transmission Deadline (TRD)
Turnaround Polling

H551

Communication Features User Selectable


Two-step Transfer
X
Two in one
O
Voice Request (immed. tx
X
only)

O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
C
O
O
O

Communication Features Service Selectable


AI Short Protocol
Auto-reduction override option
Busy tone detection
Cable Equalizer
PSTN
ISDN
Closed Network (tx and rx)
Continuous Polling Reception
Dedicated tx parameters
ECM
EFC
Inch-mm conversion before
transmission
mm-inch conversion when
printing
Page retransmission times
Protection against wrong
conn.
Resolutions available for
reception
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
200 x 400 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
Resoln stepdown override
option
Short Preamble
Well log

O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O

O
O
O
O
J
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

O
O
X
X
X
X
O

Other User Features


Area code prefix
X
Automatic service call
Service
Center mark
O
Checkered mark
O
Clearing a memory file
O
Clearing a polling file
O
Clock
O
Confidential ID
O

O
O
O
O
X

1-4

SM

Rev.11/12/98

FEATURES

SM

Other User Features


Wild Cards

Reports - Automatic
Charge Control Report
Communication Failure Report
Confidential File Report
Error Report
Fax On Demand Report
Memory Storage Report
Mode Change Report
Polling Clear Report
Polling Reserve Report
Polling Result Report
Power Failure Report
TCR (Journal)
Toner Cassette Order Form
Transfer Result Report
Transmission Result Report

X
O
O
O
D
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O

Reports - User-initiated
Authorized Reception List
O
Charge Control Report
X
File List
O
Forwarding List
O
Group List
O
Hard Disk File List
B, C
Personal Code List
O
Program List
O
Quick Dial List
O
Specified Cassette Selection
B
List
Speed Dial List
O
TCR
O
Transmission Status Report
X
User Function List
O
User Parameter List
O

Service Mode Features


Auto Paper Select test
Back-to-back test
Bit switch programming
Book mode test
Buzzer test
Cable equalizer
1-5

X
O
O
X
O
O
H551

Overall
Information

Other User Features


Copy editing
X
(Erase Center/Margin)
Copy mode
O
Copy Mode Restriction
O
Counters
O
Daylight Saving Time
O
Destination Check
X
Direct entry of names
O
File Retention Time
O
File Retransmission
O
Function Programs
O
Hard Disk Filing System
B, C
ID Code
O
Label Insertion (From xxx)
O
Language Selection
O
LCD contrast control
Service
Memory Lock
A or B
Memory Lock ID
O
Modifying a memory file
X
Multi Sort Document
O
Reception
Multicopy mode
O
Own telephone number
O
Energy Saver (Night Timer
O
and standby mode)
Print density control
O
Printing a memory file
O
RDS on/off
O
Reception Mode Switching
X
Timer
Reception time printing
O
Reduction/Enlargement
X
Remaining memory indicator
O
Remote ID
O
Reverse Order Printing
O
RTI, TTI, CSI
O
Secure ID
X
Service Report Transmission
O
Speaker volume control
O
Specified Cassette Selection
F
Substitute reception on/off
O
Telephone line type
O
Toner Saving Mode
O
TTI/CIL on/off
O
User Function Keys (5 keys)
O
User Parameters
O

FEATURES
Service Mode Features
Cable equalizer
Comm. parameter display
Counter check
Country code
DTMF tone test
Echo countermeasure
Effective term of service calls
Error code display
Excessive jam alarm
File Transfer
Hard Disk Utilities
(Format etc.)
LCD contrast adjustment
Line error mark
Memory file printout (all files)
Modem test
NCU parameters
Operation panel test
Periodic service call
PM Call
Printer mechanism test
Printer test patterns
Programmable attenuation
Protocol dump list
RAM display/rewrite
RAM dump
RAM test
Ringer test
Scanner lamp test
Scanner mechanism test
Sensor initialization
Serial number
Service monitor report
Service station number
Software upload/download
SRAM data download
System parameter list
Technical data on the TCR
Thermal head parameters
Transmission Status Report
User data transfer

H551

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O

1-6

SM

The following table shows how the capability of each programmable item changes
after the optional function upgrade card is installed.
Item

Standard

Maximum number of memory files plus


polling rx files
Maximum number of memory files
Maximum number of destinations per file
Maximum number of destinations overall
Maximum number of pages overall
Number of Quick Dials
Number of Speed Dials
Number of Groups
Maximum number of destinations per
Group
Maximum number of destinations dialed
from the ten-key pad overall
Maximum number of programs

200

With function
upgrade card
1000

200
200
500
1200
64
100
9
200

1000
1000
2000
3000
64
1000
30
200

100

1000

64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)

200

164
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys plus
100 Speed Dial
codes)
200

300

2000

64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)

256

164
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys plus
100 Speed Dial
codes)
1000

30

50

50

500

Maximum number of destinations per


program
Maximum number of destinations used
for all programs
Maximum number of Auto Documents

Maximum number of communication


records for the TCR (Journal) stored in
the memory
Maximum number of addresses specified
for features such as Authorized
Reception and Specified Cassette
Selection
Maximum number of personal codes

SM

1-7

H551

Overall
Information

1.2.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

FEATURES

1.2.3 POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT


The following table shows which items of optional equipment can be or cannot be
installed at the same time.
in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installed
at the same time.
X in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot be
installed at the same time.

IC Cards
Option/Equipment
A: Feature Expander 2M/4M
B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD)
C: Function Upgrade Card
D: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card
E: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool
(Service Tool)

IC Card
Slot
Upper
Slot

X
X

X
X

Lower
Slot

X
X

Other
A
A: Paper Feed Unit Type F
B: Paper Feed Unit Type S
C: 100 Sheet Cassette
D: Printer Interface
E: G4 Unit
F: G3 Unit

H551

B
X

X
X

1-8

SM

OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

Fax On
Demand
Card

IC Card
(Type A)

Function
Upgrade
Card

Feature
Expander
2M

RS232C
Interface

IC Card
(Type B)

Lower Slot Upper Slot

Feature
Expander
4M

G4
Interface

HDD
Interface

80MB HDD

Bus Interface
Parallel Interface
Serial Interface

SG3 V.34
Interface

Dual
Port
DCR

MFCE

Overall
Information

1.3 OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

DRAM
(2MB)

System ROM
Flash
ROM
(2MB)

DATA/ADDRESS BUS
Modem ROM
SRAM
(256kB)

VPP4F

LPC

Flash
ROM
(512kB)

SBU

MN195003
MFL
Modem

SCP

Hybrid IC

Printer
Interface

DTMF
Receiver

EXIO1
EXIO2

NCU

Speaker

Power
Saver CPU

Sensors

DC/DC
Converter

PSU

Clutches

Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor

MFPD

Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter

Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components

100 Sheet
Cassette

Operation
Panel

SM

CG ROM
(512kB)

Microphone
(FOD)

MFDU

LDDR
Laser Synch.

Voice
A/D
Converter

PFUs

1-9

H551

OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

The MFCE contains most of the logical components for overall system control, and
direct interfaces to the IC cards, an RS232C interface, a G4 interface (CiG4-SV)
and a optional G3 interface (SG3-V.34).
The MFDU has interfaces to the power supply, sensors, drive components, and
optional equipment.
The RS232C interface may not be available in some models.
There are two cpus in the machine: the main cpu (SCP) on the MFCE and the
energy saver cpu on the MFDU. In energy saver mode, the main CPU switches off
and the energy saver CPU takes over.
The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can be updated
through an IC card slot or from the remote control center using RDS.
The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fonts used on
the display and in reports.
The Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used for all the communications (V.34,
V.17, V.29, V.27ter., and V.21). The 512kB flash ROM contains the modem
program.
The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, work area,
and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80 MB with an IC
memory card or a hard disk.
The 256 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. This can be
upgraded by 512 kB with the function upgrade card. These SRAMs are battery
backed-up.
The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turned
off or the machine goes into the 2-watt energy saver. However, the data in
these SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is disconnected from the machine.

CAUTION
When ever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card needs to be
removed for using the service tool, follow the instructions in section 3.3.9
to avoid any data loss.

H551

1-10

SM

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

Rev. 11/98

SEP/SUB CODING

2.1 SEP/SUB CODING


OVERVIEW.

SEP (Selective Polling): This signal informs the other terminal of the polling ID to enable secured
(ID) polling.
PWD (Password): This signal informs the other terminal of the password to enable stored ID
override.
SUB (Sub-address): This signal informs the other terminal of the confidential ID to enable
confidential transmission.
SID (Sender ID): This signal informs the other terminal of the sender ID to enable confidential ID
override.

The ITU-T recommendation only clarifies the requirements for the transmitting terminal, and does
not specify the requirements for the receiving terminal. How the receiving terminal should treat
these signals depends on the manufacturer.
Note: Up to 20 digits or characters can be sent in a SEP, PWD,SUB or SID Frame.

SM

2-1

H551

Detailed
Descriptions

ITU-T introduced the following protocol signals in the T.30 recommendation in 1996. These signals
enable confidential transmission and secured polling between machines produced by different
manufacturers.

SEP/SUB CODING

2.1.1 SELECTIVE POLLING (SEP/PWD)


Tx

Rx

CED
NSF
DIS

SEP
NSC or DTC

NSS or DCS
TCF

CFR

H551D501.wmf

SEP Signal:
When the Rx terminal receives the SEP signal with the NSC or DTC signal, the Rx
terminal switches over to secured polling transmission using the SEP ID. The SEP
(Selective polling) signal must contain four digits as an ID.
The Rx terminal automatically disconnects the line when any of the following
conditions occurs (error code 0-15).
When the SEP ID is other than four digits.
When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.
The communication becomes free polling when the SEP ID programmed is 0000.
PWD Signal:
When the PWD (password) signal is transmitted together with the SEP signal, the
PWD programmed is used as an ID code for stored ID override.
However, PWD reception is disabled for this machine at the factory setting.
NOTE: The machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a PWD
signal. To enable PWD reception, the communication bit switch 17 bit 2
must be switched on.
Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switches
Communication bit switch 17 bit 0: SEP signal reception.
Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID reception.

H551

2-2

SM

SEP/SUB CODING

2.1.2 SUB-ADDRESS (SUB/SID)


Tx

Rx

CED

Detailed
Descriptions

NSF
DIS

SUB
NSS or DCS
TCF

CFR

H551D502.wmf

SUB Signal:
The SUB (sub-address) signal transmitted from the Tx terminal contains a
confidential ID. A stored message can be printed using the SUB ID as confidential
ID override.
The SUB ID must contain four digits. The receiving terminal automatically
disconnects the line when any of the following conditions occurs (error code 0-15).
When the SUB ID is other than four digits.
When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.
When a confidential ID is not programmed in the Rx terminal and when the
transmitted SUB ID is 0000.
A stored message can be printed using the (normal) confidential ID stored in the
machine when the SUB ID sent from the transmitter is 0000.
SID Signal:
SID reception is disabled for this machine.
NOTE: This machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a SID
signal. To enable SDI reception, communication bit switch 17 bit 2 must be
switched on.
Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switches
Communication bit switch 17 bit 1: SUB signal reception.
Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID signal reception.

SM

2-3

H551

JBIG COMPRESSION

2.2 JBIG COMPRESSION


JBIG (Joint Bi-Level Image Coding Expert Group) is a working group which
consists of members of ITU-T and ISO. The JBIG compression method allows data
compression of approximately 1.2 to 1.3 times the MMR method in text mode, and
2 to 10 times in halftone mode.
JBIG compression is only available in the optional G3 unit.
JBIG compression is disabled when any of the following conditions occurs.
When JBIG compression is turned off by communication bit switch 00.
When ECM is turned off by communication bit switch 01.
When the receiving terminal does not have the JBIG feature.
When the receiving terminal does not have the ECM feature.
There are two modes for JBIG compression;
Standard mode: the transmitted data block consists of 128 lines.
Optional mode: the transmitted data block consists of one page (transmission
speed with this mode is faster).
This machine supports both modes for transmission and reception. Which mode to
use for communication is determined during handshaking.
Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switches
Communication bit switch 00 bit 5: JBIG reception mode
0: Standard mode only
1: Standard mode and optional mode (default)
Communication bit switch 00 bit 6: Priority of JBIG mode used for transmission
0: Standard mode
1: Optional mode (default)
Data Compression
JBIG compressed data is called the Bi-level Image Entity (BIE).
The BIE consists of a header frame (BIH: Bi-level Image Header) and compressed
data frame (BID: Bi-level Image Data).
The BIH frame contains information such as main scan width (pixels), sub scan
length, and compression mode (standard/optional) used.
The BID frame contains the actual data.

BIE: Bi-level Image Entity

BIH
(Bi-Level Image
Header)

H551

BID
(Bi-Level Image Data)

Header

Image
Data

Page Data

2-4

H551D503.wmf

SM

MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS

User parameter switch 05 bit 1 allows the user to select how to treat an incoming
message that is without RTI or CSI.
User parameter switch 05 bit 1:
Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received 0: Possible, 1: Impossible
If 0 is selected, the machine receives all message regardless of RTI and CSI.
When this is set to 1 (default setting), the following bit switch works in combination
with the user parameter setting.
System bit switch 11 bit 6:
Conditions for memory reception if no RTI or CSI is received.
0: Memory reception is available only when RTI or CSI is received.
1: Memory reception is always available unless there is a mechanical (printer)
error.
The default setting is set to 1.
The default setting means that if the printer is working, all messages will be
received, regardless of the user parameter setting. But the user can decide
whether or not to print messages that have no RTI or CSI. However, when there is
a mechanical error in the printer, the machine rejects such a message because no
trace of the sender will be stored in the machine.
This switch has been added from the LFO model.

SM

2-5

H551

Detailed
Descriptions

2.3 MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS

SG3-V.34 BOARD

2.4 SG3-V.34 BOARD


DTMF
Receiver

CCP

Standard
NCU
Hybrid IC

MFCE
DPRAM

CPU
(RU8)

DMAC

JBIGIF

TONE

MN195003MFL
Modem

Flash ROM
(4MB)
Modem

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

Flash ROM
(4MB)
Program

DRAM
(4MB)

JBIG
M65761

SG3-V.34

H551D504.wmf

The SG3-V.34 board enables full dual G3 communication with the standard NCU.
The CCP (Communication Control Processor) contains a CPU, and it controls the
entire board.
1. CCP (Communication Control Processor)
CPU (RU8)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the MFCE is done through this
block.
DMA controller
JBIG interface
2. ROM
512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the system program
512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the modem program
Both programs can be updated using the Flash/SRAM data copy board.
3. DRAM
512kB DRAM shared between the line buffer, ECM buffer, and working RAM.
4. Modem
A Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used.
5. JBIG LSI
JBIG compression LSI
6. DTMF Receiver

H551

2-6

SM

INSTALLATION

INSTALLING THE MACHINE

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE
Refer to the Operator's Manual for the installation environment and how to install
and set up the machine.
Refer to section 2.4.5. of the FX4 service manual for how to set up the NCU
hardware in each country.

3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

Items to Program (User Administrator Level)


Clock
Initial programming items
On/off switches
Display/report language
Fusing power control during energy saver mode
(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)

SM

3-1

Function No.
Function 08
Function 01
Function 01
Function 06
Function 06
Function 14
Function 13
Function 01
Function 06

Installation

Items to Program (Service Level)


Country code (NCU parameter 00)
Country code (System switch 0F)
Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B)
PSTN access code (RAM address 4800DB)
PSTN access method (RAM address 4800CD)
Machine's serial number
Service station's fax number
PM call (System switch 01- bit 0)
Periodic service call (RAM address 480401)

Function No.
Function 91
Function 61
Function 62
Function 93
Function 63

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

CAUTION

Do the following before installing an optional unit:


1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.

NOTE:
Refer to the Operators Manual for the user installable options.
For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card, be sure to read
section 3.3.9. after installation.

3.3.1 HARD DISK UNIT (80MB)


NOTE: If the optional G3 unit is also to be installed, install this option before
installing the G3 unit.
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4
screws), left cover [B] (3 screws and
the connector cover), and the IC card
slot cover [C].

[B]
[A]

[C]

H130i501.WMF

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the hard


disk unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the
grounding plate [F] on the bracket
and secure the hard disk unit to the
machine (2 screws).
[F]

[E]

H551

3-2

[D]

H130i504.WMF

SM

FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

Rev. 11/2000

3.3 FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III


This option can be installed in the following models:
- H551 series

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MAY DO THIS INSTALLATION.


!CAUTION
Do the following before installing an optional unit:
1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the System Parameter List.
3. Turn off the Main Switch, and disconnect the power plug.

NOTE:

Refer to the Operators Manual for the user installable options.


For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax on Demand Card, be sure to read section
3.3.9, after installation.

Installation

Installation Procedure
1.

Remove the Rear Cover [A] (4 screws),


Left Cover [B] (3 screws and the
connector Cover), and the IC Card slot
Cover [C].

[B]
[A]

[C]

H130i501.WMF

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the Hard Disk


Unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the Grounding
Plate [F] on the bracket and secure the
Hard Disk Unit to the machine (2
screws).

[F]
[E]

SM

3-3

[D]

H551

Rev. 11/2000

FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

[H]
3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCU
bracket [G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asia
models, 1 screw for USA model.)
NOTE: The Grounding Plate [H] is not
installed in the USA models.
4. Connect the HDD Harness [I] and the
Harness [J] to the Hard Disk Interface
Card [K].

[G]
[I]

[J]

5. Turn on the Battery switch [L] on the Hard


Disk Interface Card. Then insert the Hard
Disk Interface Card into the upper Card
Slot [M].

[K]

NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin Harness [J] to the FDU at this time.
[P]

[G]

[O]

6. Lead the Harness containing the core with the


black marking [N] behind the NCU bracket [G].
Important:
This is to avoid the Hard Disk Data Bus from
interfering with the Hard Disk Drive Signal.
7. Connect the HDD harness to the Interface
Board [O], then connect the Interface
Board to the Hard Disk Unit [P].

[N]
[L]

8. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode. Then do the following:
Set the System Bit Switch 05 bit 4 to 1, and System Bit Switch 00 bit 1 to 1, then
exit the Service Mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.
Enter service function 16 and select 0 (INITIALIZE) to initialize the Hard Disk.
If OK is displayed, exit the Service Mode and turn off the Main Switch.
9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the Hard Disk Interface Card to CN73 on the
FDU.
10. Replace the screws, which were removed in step 3.

(3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw for USA model.)

H551

3-4

SM

Rev. 11/2000

FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

11. Keep the Core [Q] and the Harness as shown and replace the Rear Cover and the Left
Cover.

Installation

[Q]

12. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode.
Print the Memory Dump List (service function 06) for the following addresses and data.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)

700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 00(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)

If any of these addresses contain a value different from the above list, format the Hard
Disk
(service function 16).

CAUTION
The Hard Disk Interface Card contains a Lithium Battery. The danger of an
explosion exists if a Battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.

SM

3-5

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

6. Reinstall the rear cover and the left cover.


Affix the ISDN decal [P] to the small cover
as shown. Connect the ISDN cable so that
the core is closer to the machine.
NOTE: Make sure that the grounding plate
does not come off when replacing
the rear cover.

[P]
H551i013.wmf

7. Plug in the machine and turn on the main


switch.
Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 2 to
1. Then turn the machine off and on to
enable the ISDN unit.
8. Input the initial settings with user function
61 and service function 17.
Please refer to the ISDN option service manual for details.
Make the following settings if necessary.
System bit switch 0A bit 1: Default communication mode.
Bit 1
0: G3
1: G4
System bit switch 0A bit 6: Line used for G3 transmission.
Bit 6
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System bit switch 0A bit 7: Line used when the machine falls back to G3 from
G4
Bit 7
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System bit switch 18 bits 0 and 1: Default communication line for
transmission
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting)
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit must be installed)
1
1 ISDN (Optional G4 Unit)
NOTE: Make sure that you input the following subscriber numbers when you
connect the machine under the US National ISDN network.
Subscriber number: G4 Subscriber No.1 (Main)/ G3 Subscriber No.1 (Main)
SPID Number: G4 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)/ G3 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)

H551

3-6

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS


Rev. 11/16/98

When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed with phone
numbers in Quick Dials and the Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.
Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN, the
communication port for all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to ISDN G3.
This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored numbers at
once.
Procedure:
1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.
4B5846(H) - Current line type setting.
4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after this procedure.
The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).
2) Turn the main switch off and on.
Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, Speed
Dials, AI Redial, and Forwarding Stations. If the communication mode and the
port setting for a number is the same as specified for the current setting in
the above address, the machine changes these to the new setting.
3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).
Setting:
Bit 0 and 1: Communication mode
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 G3
0 1 G4
1 0 Not used
Bit 2 to 4: Communication port
Bit
4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 PSTN1 (Standard G3)
0 0 1 PSTN2 (Optional G3 unit)
0 1 1 ISDN
1 0 0 Any available port
(This setting can be used only when an optional G3 or G4 unit is installed in
the machine.)
Other settings - Not used
Bit 5 to 7: Not used
Example:
If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN G3 to ISDN G3,
change the data to 00(H) (0000 0000) in the address 4B5846(H)
change the data to 0C(H) (00001100) in the address 4B5847(H)
NOTE: Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memory

awaiting transmission.

H551

3-6A

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.3 G3 INTERFACE
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and
the left cover [B] (3 screws) and the PFU
connector cover. Then, remove the small
cover [C] from the rear cover as shown.
[B]

[C]

[D]
2. Remove the PIF brackets [D] and [E].
Bend the flat cable [F] as shown and
connect it to the FCE (CN4) and the G3
interface board [G].
NOTE: Make sure that the core [H] is
placed by the FCE as shown.
Make sure that the w marks
face each other at each end.

H143i501.WMF

[E]

[F]

[G]
[H]
H551i001.WMF

3. Attach the inner bracket [I] (3 screws)


and the grounding plate [J] (3 screws) as
shown.
[I]

[J]

H551i002.wmf

SM

3-7

H551

Installation

[A]

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

4. Secure the SG3 (V.34) board [K] (3


screws) and the optional NCU board [L]
(4 screws).

[K]

[L]

H551i003.wmf

5. Connect the harness [M] between the


SG3 (V.34) board and the optional NCU
board.
Also connect the G3 interface board [G]
to the SG3 (V.34) board.
[M]
NOTE: The core is not installed on the
harness [M] in the USA models.

[G]
H551i004.WMF

[D]
6. Install the PIF brackets [D] and [E] which
were removed in step 2.
Attach the grounding plate [N] to the
outer bracket [O]. Then attach the outer
bracket to the machine.
Align the grounding plate with the left
edge of the outer bracket.

[E]

[O]

[N]

H551

3-8

H551i005.WMF

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

7. Set the phone line harness [P] in the


bracket [Q]. Then attach it to the small
cover [R] (1 tapping screw).

[R]
[P]

H551i006.wmf

[Q]

Installation

[S]
8. Install the small cover and connect the phone
line harness to the connector [S] as shown.

H551i007.wmf

9. Install the rear cover and the left cover. Affix


the Line 2 decal [T] on the small cover.
Make sure that the grounding plate does not
come off when replacing the rear cover.

[T]

H551i008.wmf

SM

3-9

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

[U]

10. Wrap the phone line around the core [U] as


shown and connect it to the machine.
NOTE: Make sure that the core is placed near
the machine.

11. Plug in the machine and turn on the main


switch.
Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 1 to 1.
Then turn the machine off and on to enable the
optional G3 unit.

H551i504.WMF

12. Input the optional G3 CSI by user function 61.


Make the following settings if necessary.
Default communication line for transmission:
System Bit Switch 18 bit 0 and 1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting)
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit)
1
1 ISDN (Optional G4 unit must be installed)
PSTN 2 (optional G3) access code (RAM address 4800D7).
PSTN 2 (optional G3) access method (RAM address 4800CD)

H551

3-10

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.4 FAX ON DEMAND


NOTE: Perform the procedures in the section 3.3.9 after installation.
Installation Procedure

2. Remove the NCU cover (1 screw) and [C]


replace it with the cover for the Fax on
Demand feature [C], then connect the
harness [D] to CN73 on the FCE as shown.

[A]

[D]

[B]

Installation

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and


the IC card slot cover [B].

H132I501.WMF

3. Install the battery on the IC card and turn


on the battery switch.
4. Install the IC card [E] into the lower slot,
and put back the rear cover [A]. Then,
connect the microphone socket [F] to the
NCU cover as shown.
5. Plug in the machine and turn on the main
switch. Then perform the following.
Print the system parameter list and make
sure that "FOD" is listed as an option on
the list.
Check that the functions related to the
Fax on Demand feature can be
accessed.
(Please refer to the operator's manual.)

[E]
[F]

H132I502.WMF

CAUTION
The IC card contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a
battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

SM

3-11

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.5 PAPER FEED UNIT (FRONT FLOW)


Installation Procedure
[C]

1. Put the machine on the paper feed


unit [A], and remove the connector
cover [B] (1 screw).
2. Secure the machine and the paper
feed unit with the bracket [C] (2
screws). Then connect the
harness [D] to the machine.

[B]
[E]
[D]

3. Install the harness cover [E]


(1 screw), and install the
connector cover [B] (which was
removed in step 1).

[A]
H110I502.WMF

4. Remove the bottom plate holder bracket


[F] as shown.

[F]

5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.


Make a test print using the paper feed
unit.

H110I503.WMF

H551

3-12

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.6 PAPER FEED UNIT (SIDE FLOW)


Installation Procedure
1. Put the machine on the paper feed unit [A], and remove the connector cover [B]
(1 screw).
2. Secure the machine and the paper feed unit at the front side with the panel
screw [C], spacer [D], and the collar [E].
NOTE: This step is not required for the H515 models.
3. Secure the rear side with the bracket [F] (2 screws). Then connect the harness
[G] to the machine.

Installation

4. Install the harness cover [H] (1 screw), and install the connector cover [B]
(which was removed in step 1).
5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.
Make a test print using the paper feed unit.

[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[H]
[G]

SM

H110I501.WMF

3-13

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.7 COUNTER
Installation Procedure
[C]
1. Remove the rear cover [A] and the small
cover.

[B]

2. Install the counter [B] as shown.


3. Connect the harness [C] to the FDU
interface harness, then install the rear
cover [A].
4. Plug in the machine and turn on the main
switch.
5. Make some copies and check whether the
counter works or not. If it doesn't, check
the harness connection from the counter to
the FDU.

[A]

H165I505.WMF

H551

3-14

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.8 PRINTER UNIT


Installation Procedure
1. Remove the cassette cover from the
rear cover [A].
NOTE: The cassette cover is not
installed in the Europe models.

[A]

2. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws)


and two small covers [B] (1 screw) and
[C].
[C]

H144I510.WMF

Installation

[B]

3. Attach the grounding plate [D] to the


machine (2 screws).

[D]

H144i523.WMF

4. Install the rear cover back on the


machine (1 screw at the lower left
corner), and install two brackets [E] (2
screws) and [F] (2 screws - one of
these screws also secures the rear
cover) as shown.
[E]

[F]

H144I513.WMF

SM

3-15

H551

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

5. Attach the brackets [G] and [H] onto the


bracket plate [I] (2 screws).
NOTE: For the brackets [G] and [H], used
the ones which have "B" marked.

[I]

6. Attach the bracket plate [I] (4 screws) and


the side bracket [J] (1 screw) to the Printer
Interface Unit.
7. Remove the side covers of the Printer
Interface Unit.

[J]

[H]
[G]
H144I565.WMF

8. Connect the harness [K] to the FDU


through the lower window in the rear
cover. Hook the Printer Interface Unit
onto the machine by the brackets [G] and
[H], then secure the unit (2 screws). Do
not tighten the screw at the side bracket
[J].

[K]

H144i566.wmf

[L]
9. Install the side covers [L] and [M].

[M]

H144I567.WMF

H551

3-16

SM

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

[P]

10. Place the spacers [N] on top of the Printer


Interface Unit and secure the top cover [O] with
two long screws [P] (M3 x 10 mm) and one short
screw [Q] (M3 x 6 mm).

[O]
[Q]

[N]
11. Attach a core at both ends of a parallel printer
cable, then connect it to the Printer Interface Unit.

[R]
H144i541.WMF

13. Print a status sheet by pressing the button [R] at


the top of the printer interface unit.

SM

3-17

H551

Installation

12. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.


Check if the On Line indicator on the operation
panel is lit. If not, check the harness connection
from the Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

3.3.9 DATA PROTECTION


Important notice for the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card:
The Function Upgrade Card holds data that has been programmed, and the Fax
On Demand card holds the voice messages that have been recorded.

CAUTION
The following procedure must be avoided because it erases all the data
stored in the card.
1. Turning off the machine with the card installed.
2. Disconnecting the card.
3. Turning on the machine without the card installed.
To prevent accidental data erasure, change the System Bit Switch 16 - bit 0 to 1
whenever a new card is installed.
When this bit switch is enabled, the machine will not start up unless one of the
following cards is detected at power up, so that the machine will not reinitialize
itself to a without-the-card configuration.
Function Upgrade Card
Fax On Demand Card
FCE Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)

H551

3-18

SM

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE
TABLES

4. A. USER PARAMETERS

SM

4-A

FAX4800L

FAX4800L

4-B

SM

SERVICE
TABLES
SM

4-C

FAX4800L

FAX4800L

4-D

SM

SERVICE
TABLES
SM

4-E

FAX4800L

FAX4800L

4-F

SM

SERVICE
TABLES
SM

4-G

FAX4800L

FAX4800L

4-H

SM

SERVICE
TABLES
SM

4-I

FAX4800L

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES


4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the following symbols.
- Start key
 - Stop key
 - Function key
 - Yes key
 - No key
- Up arrow key
- Down arrow key
- Right arrow key

- Left arrow key

4.1.1 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 01)

1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  
3. To see the system bit switches: 
To see the scanner switches: 
To see the printer (plotter) switches: 
To see the G3 switches: 
To see the communication switches: 
Example: Press 

H515M502.WMF

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
H515M503.WMF

4. Scroll through the bit switches.


Increment bit switch:
Decrement bit switch:
Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

5. Adjust the bit switch.


Example: To change the value of bit 7,
press 

SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000

6. Either:
Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.
Finish - 
SM

4-1

H515M504.WMF

H515M505.WMF

H551

Service Tables

Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the unit's electronic DIP
switches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2 current and defualt settings
are listed on the system parameter list. (section 4.1.2)

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.2 GROUP 3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (FUNCTION 02)


The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and service
programmedc setting of the machine. The listing includes the ID's settings, the
counters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BIT Switches.
Refer to the sample printout.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

G3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST


PRESS START

2.  

NO

3.
Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.
Name
SCN
TX
PM
PCU

Meaning
Scanned page counter
Transmitted page
counter
PM counter

H515M506.WMF

Name

Meaning
Printed page counter
Received page counter

PM Default

Default setting for the


PM service call interval
Copied page counter

PRT
RX

Printed page counter


using the current master
drum
ADF
Scanned page counter
using the ADF
MAIN Cassette Paper feed counter
(Standard cassette)
Cassette 3
Paper feed counter
(Second paper feed unit)
BY-PASS
Paper feed counter
(By-pass feeder)
COPY JAM
Paper jam counter (total)
PAPER JAM
Paper jam counter (Jams
at the registration area)
CST 2 JAM
Paper jam counter
(First paper feed unit)
OPEN CST
Paper jam counter
JAM
(100-sheet cassette)
PRN
Printed page counter
from the PC printer
interface
PPC2
Reserved for future use.
PPC4
Reserved for future use.

H551

TO CANCEL

COPY

TONER
Cassette 2
OPEN
Cassette
DOC. JAM
EJECT JAM
MAIN CST
JAM
CST 3 JAM

Printed page counter


using the current CTM
Paper feed counter
(First paper feed unit)
Paper feed counter
(100 sheet cassette)
Document jam counter

PPC1

Fusing exit jam counter


Paper jam counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper jam counter
(Second paper feed unit)
Paper jam counter
(By-pass feeder)
Reserved for future use.

PPC3

Reserved for future use.

BY-PASS JAM

4-2

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

A sample parameter list is given below.

SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) *

* *
TTI

SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)


ROM VER.
[Version]
[Software release no.]
[Software release date]
ROM NO.
[Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]
R T I
T T I
C S I
CONFIDENTIAL ID
ID CODE
MEMORY LOCK ID
NUMBER
OWN NUMBER
SERVICE NUMBER
NCU PARAMETER

PARAMETER
SCAN THRESHOLD
2MB or 4MB
CASSETTE 2

Service Tables

COUNTER

- Optional memory card capacity installed


- Optional paper feed unit installed

SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)


(SWUSR) - User Parameter Settings

SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)


(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings

(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings

(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings

(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings

(SWG3)

SM

- G3 Bit Switch Settings

4-3

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.3 ERROR CODE DISPLAY (FUNCTION 03)


This function will allo9w the technician to displayh and scroll through the error
codes, if any, that had occurred in the machine. The displayed message will also
include the time and date that each error had occurred.
1.        ,
then immediately 

SERVICE SET

NO: _ OR

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

ERROR CODE
CODE=0-14

JAN

3. Either:
Scroll through the error codes - or
Finish - 

3:15PM

H515M507.WMF

4.1.4 SERVICE MONITOR REPORT (FUNCTION 04)


This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occurred in the
machine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report will include the
time and date that each error had occurred.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

SERVICE MONITOR REPORT


PRESS START
NO

3.

TO CANCEL

H515M508.WMF

4.1.5 GROUP 3 PROTOCOL DUMP (FUNCTION 05)


This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that were exchanged
during the last six communications.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST


PRESS

3.

START
NO

TO CANCEL

H515M509.WMF

H551

4-4

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.6 RAM DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 06)


This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selected address
location and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data is displayed in
hexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed in the RAM dump printout.
The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5.

1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET

NO: _ OR

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

2.  

H515M501.WMF
NO: _

RAM
0.MEMORY R/W

3. 

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

1.MEMORY DUMP

H515M510.WMF
MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 000000

DATA=2E

H515M512.WMF

MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020

DATA=00



5. If you wish to change the data, move the


cursor to the data field: press .
6. Type in the new data.
Example: 80, press  

MEMORY
R/W
ADDRESS= 480020
DATA=

00

H515M513 WMF

7. Either:
View the previous address - press .
View the next address - press .
Finish -  

MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020

DATA= 80

4.1.7 RAM DUMP (FUNCTION 06)


This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in the selected
address location. The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5. The
current listing of each settiong can be printed by performing the RAM Dump Procedure.
Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, not RAM Dump.

1.    
then immediately .

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

2.  

H515M501.WMF
NO: _

RAM

3. 

0.MEMORY R/W

1.MEMORY DUMP

H515M510.WMF
MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.

FFH

H515M515.WMF

SM

4-5

H551

Service Tables

4. Input the address that you wish to see.


Example: Address 480020 

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4. Enter the first four digits of the start and


end addresses.
Example: Start at 480000, end at
4801FF.

MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH

H515M516.WMF

5.

4.1.8 COUNTER DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 07)


This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. The current
totals of the counters are also losted on the system parameter list.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET

2.  

COUNTER R/W

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

0.COUNTER
2.CTM COUNTER

3. Either:
Check the transmitted, received, scanned
and printed page counters, and
the printer and scanner jam counters press 
Check the PM counter - press 
Check the CTM counter - press 
Check the OPU counter - press 
Example: Press 

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR

NO: _
1.PM COUNTER
3.PCU COUNTER
H515M517 WMF

COUNTER
TX : 000000
RX : 000000

SCN: 000000
PRT: 000000
H515M518.WMF

4. To change the contents of a counter,


input the new value, then press  .
5. To finish:  

H551

4-6

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.9 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 08)


This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modem
signals.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM

1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA

2.  

3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF

3. 

MODEM TEST
NO.01=V21

300BPS

PRESS "START"

4. Scroll through the available tests using


or .

H515M520.WMF

5. To start a test:
Service Tables

6. To stop the test: 


7. To finish:  

4.1.10 DTMF TONE TEST (FUNCTION 08)


This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten key
pad.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

2.  

NCU

3. 

DTMF TEST

0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA

1.DTMF
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF

NO.01=TONE [0]
PRESS "START"

4. Scroll through the available tests using


or .

H515M521.WMF

5. To start a test:
6. To stop the test: 
7. To finish:  

SM

4-7

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.11 NCU PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 08)


This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parameters for
such as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and the number of
rings before the machine will answer an incoming call. The current value of each
address is listed on the system parameter list.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET

NO: _ OR

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM

1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA

2.  

3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF

3. 

NCU PARAMETER SET


C.C =017
C.C =019
PRESS "YES/NO"

4. Scroll through the parameters using


or . If you want to change a value,
enter the new value at the keypad,
then press  .

H515M522.WMF

5. To finish :  .
NOTE: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level.
Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.

4.1.12 MODEM DETECTION TEST (FUNCTION 08)


NOTE: This function can be used only when G3 bit switch 0B bit 5 (French PTT
requirements) is 1 in European models. It cannot be used in USA models.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

NCU
0.MODEM

1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA

2.  

3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF

3. 

DETECT TEST

READY

NO.01=V29 9600BPS
PRESS START
H515M523.WMF

H551

4-8

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4. Scroll through the available tests using


or .
5. To start a test:
6. To stop the test: 
7. To finish:  

4.1.13 RINGER TEST (FUNCTION 08)


This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _
1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA

3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF

3. 

RINGER TEST
PRESS START

4. To start the test:

H515M524.WMF

5. To stop : 
6. To finish:  

4.1.14 OPERATION PANEL TEST (FUNCTION 09)


The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel and all of
the LED indicators.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

LED.LCD
PRESS START

3. To start the test, press .


The screen should turn black.

H515M525.WMF

4. To stop the test, press 


5. To finish:  

SM

4-9

H551

Service Tables

NCU
0.MODEM

2.  

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.15 XENON LAMP TEST (FUNCTION 10)


This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.
1.      
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

SCANNER
0.Xe LAMP

3. 

Xe LAMP

NO: _
1.ADF TEST

H515M526.WMF

PRESS START

4. To start the test, press

H515M527.WMF

5. To stop the test, press 


6. To finish:  

4.1.16 ADF TEST (FUNCTION 10)


The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) test
procedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted into the
ADF with out performing an actual FAX, or copy operation.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

NO: _

SCANNER
0.Xe LAMP

1.ADF TEST

3. 

H515M526.WMF

ADF TEST
PRESS START

4. Place a document in the feeder,


then press .

H515M528.WMF

5. To stop the test, press  .


6. Finish:  

H551

4-10

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.17 PRINTER TEST PATTERNS (FUNCTION 11)


The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer section
on the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section of
the machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.
NO: _ OR

SERVICE SET

1.       
then immediately 

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

PRINTER

2.  

0.PATTERN

3. 

1.AGING TEST

H515M529.WMF
ENTER CODE

PATTERN
CODE: _

4. Press a key from  to .

TO CANCEL

NO

SCROLL
H515M530.WMF

CODE: 0

VERTICAL
PRESS START

6. To finish:  

H515M531.WMF

4.1.18 SCANNER AND PRINTER MECHANISM TEST - FREE RUN


(FUNCTION 11)
The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, the
machine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, the xenon
lamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print a light gray
pattern on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test, depress the STOP
key.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

NO: _

PRINTER
0.PATTERN

3. 

1.AGING TEST

H515M529.WMF

MECH. TEST
PRESS START

4. To start the free run, press .


H515M532.WMF

5. To stop the test, press  .


6. To finish: 

SM

4-11

H551

Service Tables

PATTERN

5. Press .
A test pattern is printed.

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.19 RAM TESTS (FUNCTION 12)


This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine into
the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placing
an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System Parameter
List.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

3. Either:
Test the SRAM:
Press 
Test the DRAM:
Press 
If test is successful, the display shows
"OK!!".
If test is unsuccessful, the display shows
"ADDRESS=".

1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

4. To finish:
 

H551

4-12

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.20 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)


Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machine's software, use this
procedure to update the software in the machine's Flash ROM.
This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROM on the
machine's MFCE. The external medium for the new software can be an MFCE or
an EPROM board.
NOTE: Both H5159100 and A1939353 data copy tools can be used for this model.
Both H5159500 and A1939351 data copy boards can be used for this
model.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
MFCE [C] or data copy board [D] with new software to the opposite side of the
tool.

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[B]

[D]

[A]
[E] = ON
[C]
H515M551.CDR

NOTE: The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.
NOTE: The data copy board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet the
following specifications.
Size: 4 Mbits
Data width: 8 bits
Number of pins: 32 Access speed: Faster than 150 ns
Socket 1: ROM0, D15 - D8
Socket 2: ROM1, D15 - D8
Socket 3: ROM0, D7 - D0
Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0
NOTE: The assigned ROM sockets are the same for both H5159500 and A1939351
data copy boards.
SM

4-13

H551

Service Tables

CAUTION

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

3. Turn on the machine.


4.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET

NO: _ OR

01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

RAM TEST

5.  

0.SRAM
2.COPY

1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

7. 

COPY
FLASH ROM -> MACHINE
PRESS START
H515M535.WMF

8. 
If the software download is successful, the display shows "OK".
If the software download fails, the display shows "NG".
9. To finish, press  .
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version.

H551

4-14

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.21 SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)


This procedure copies the software from the machine's built-in MFCE to an
external MFCE.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
external MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

CAUTION

Service Tables

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[D] = OFF

[B]

[A]

[C]
H515M552.CDR

NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn on the machine.
4.        
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

5.  

NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

SM

4-15

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

7. 

COPY
MACHINE

-> FLASH ROM


PRESS START
H515M536.WMF

8.
If the software is successfully uploaded,
the display shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the display
shows "NG".
9. Finish :  
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

H551

4-16

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.22 SRAM DATA DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)


This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCE to the
machine's MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to save any previous
settings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
damaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

CAUTION

Service Tables

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[D] = OFF

[B]

[A]

[C]
H515M552.CDR

NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn on the machine.
4.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

5.  

NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

SM

4-17

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

7. 

COPY
RAM

-> MACHINE
PRESS START

8.
If the SRAM data is successfully
downloaded, the display shows "OK".
If the SRAM download fails, the dispaly
shows "NG".

H515M537.WMF

9. Finish :  
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.

H551

4-18

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.23 MODEM SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)


This procedure copies the V.34 modem software from the data copy board to the
machine's MFCE.
1. Turn off the machine.
3. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
data copy board [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

CAUTION

[B]

[A]

Service Tables

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[C]
[D] = ON

H515M551.CDR

NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6.
The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn on the machine.
5.        
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

6.  

NO: _

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

SM

4-19

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

7. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

8. 

COPY
MACHINE

-> FLASH ROM


PRESS START
H515M536.WMF

10.
If the software is successfully uploaded,
the display shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the display
shows "NG".
11. Finish :  
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

H551

4-20

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.24 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD


NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.
This procedure copies the V.34 program software of an optional G3 unit from the
data copy board to the machine's MFCE.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
data copy board [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

CAUTION

[B]

[A]

Service Tables

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[C]
[D] = OFF

H515M551.CDR

NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in socket 6.
The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn on the machine.
4.        
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

5.  

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

NO: _
1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

SM

4-21

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

7. 

COPY
MACHINE

8.
If the software is successfully uploaded,
the display shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the display
shows "NG".

-> FLASH ROM


PRESS START
H515M536.WMF

9. Finish :  
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

H551

4-22

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.25 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD MODEM SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD


NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.
This procedure copies the V.34 modem software of an optional G3 unit from the
data copy board to the machine's MFCE.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
data copy board [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

CAUTION

[B]

[A]

Service Tables

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax


On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

[C]
[D] = OFF

H515M551.CDR

NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6.
The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
3. Turn on the machine.
4.        
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

5.  

RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY

NO: _
1.DRAM

H515M533.WMF

SM

4-23

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

6. 

NO: _

COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM

1.RAM COPY

H515M534.WMF

7. 

COPY
MACHINE

-> FLASH ROM


PRESS START
H515M536.WMF

8.
If the software is successfully uploaded,
the display shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the display
shows "NG".
9. Finish :  
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

H551

4-24

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.26 SAVING DATA PROGRAMMED IN IC CARDS


If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand Card,
the card has to be removed from the IC card slot before performing any of the
following procedures:
Downloading/uploading software
Replacing the MFCE
Replacing the MFDU or other components
Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 as explained
in section 3.3.9, to prevent the data inside the IC card from being initialized
accidentally.
So, do the following procedures to prevent data from being erased from the card.
NOTE: The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased if the card or
the hard disk interface is removed from the machine.

1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery switch
on the IC card is turned on.
2. Turn off the machine, and remove the IC card.
3. Connect the data copy tool and data copy board or MFCE, and do the required
procedure as explained in section 4.1.20 to 4.1.25.
4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off the
machine and disconnect the data copy tool.
5. Put back the IC card as it originally was, then turn on the machine.
6. Make sure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.

CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower IC
card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and all
the data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.

When replacing the MFCE


When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in the machine
must have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had, before the IC card is
put back.
1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery switch
on the IC card is turned on.
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.
Do not turn on the machine at this point.

SM

4-25

H551

Service Tables

When downloading/uploading software

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained in section
4.1.22, then turn on the machine.
4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCE
inside, as explained in section 4.1.22.
5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn off the machine and
disconnect the tool.
6. Put back the IC card in its original position, and turn on the machine.
NOTE: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at this point, go
back to step 3 again.
7. Make sure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.

When replacing the MFDU or other components


When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other components inside
the machine, follow the procedure below.
1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery switch
on the IC card is turned on.
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the required
components inside the machine.
4. After replacement has been completed, put back the MFCE and the IC card as
they originally were, then turn on the machine.
5. Make sure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.

CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower IC
card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and all
the data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.

H551

4-26

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.27 SERVICE STATION FAX NUMBER (FUNCTION 13)


1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

S.S.NO.

ENTER FAX NUMBER

<G3>

TO CANCEL

NO

_
H515M538.WMF

3. Input the telephone number of the service


station that will receive Auto Service calls
from this machine.

S.S.NO.
<G3>

YES

OR

CLR

. NO

212-555-1234

To use a G4 number, press the G4 key.


To erase the telephone number: press 

Service Tables

4. If the display is correct:  


Cross Reference
Using a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input
- Function 36, Code No = 10

4.1.28 SERIAL NUMBER (FUNCTION 14)


This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine into
the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placing
an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System Parameter
List.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

SERIAL NO.

2.  

_
H515M540.WMF

3. Enter the machine's serial number at the


keypad.
To correct a mistake: 

SERIAL NO.
64997244292
H515M541.WMF

4. If the display is correct:  

SM

4-27

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.29 HARD DISK INITIALIZATION (FUNCTION 16)


NOTE: Do this procedure when installing the hard disk unit.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

NO: _

HD

2.  

0.INITIAL
2.TEST

1.FORMAT

H515M543.WMF

3. 

FILE INITIAL
PRESS START

H515M544.WMF
4.
If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.

H551

4-28

SM

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.30 HARD DISK FORMATTING (FUNCTION 16)


NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation.
1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

NO: _

HD
0.INITIAL
2.TEST

1.FORMAT

H515M543.WMF

3. 

HD FORMAT
PRESS START

H515M545.WMF

Service Tables

4.
Formatting the hard disk takes more than
30 minutes.
If the format was completed without error,
OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be
displayed.

4.1.31 HARD DISK TEST (FUNCTION 16)


1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2. 

NO: _

HD
0.INITIAL
2.TEST

1.FORMAT

H515M543.WMF

3. 

HD TEST
PRESS START

4.
If the test was completed without error,
OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be
displayed.

SM

4-29

H515M546.WMF

H551

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.32 G4 PARAMETER PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 17)


1.       
then immediately 

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR

NO

02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

2.  

G4
01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP

NO: _ OR

NO

02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1
H515M547.WMF

Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details of the G4
parameter programming procedures.

4.1.33 PRINTING CONFIDENTIAL FILES


If the customer forgot the confidential ID number, print the confidential messages
which has been received in the machine's memory using the following procedure.
1.    .
2. Enter   as confidential ID, then press . The machine will print all the
confidential messages in the memory.

H551

4-30

SM

BIT SWITCHES

4.2 BIT SWITCHES


WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,
such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
The switches that have been changed from the previous model (FX4) are shaded.

System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 RAM Reset
1

Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Reset Level
No reset
Reset Level 2
Reset Level 3
Not used

COMMENTS
Reset Level 3: Erases all image data files stored
in the SAF memory and communication files (e.g.
polling rx file). This setting is recommended for
use when it is necessary to clear the SAF.
Always use this reset level after the software has
been updated by a remote diagnostics system.
(This reset is not necessary after local software
update.)
Reset Level 2: In addition to those items erased
by Reset Level 3, the following items are erased:
own telephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI,
report data, programmed telephone numbers
(Quick/Speed/ Groups, service station, etc.), NCU
parameters, personal codes.
After erasing, the machine changes these two bits
back to 0 automatically.
No reset: Normal operation
Cross reference
RAM Reset Level 1 (Factory reset):
Change the data in RAM address 480005(H) to
FF(H), then turn the machine off and on. In
addition to those items erased by Reset Level 2,
the clock and scan/print registration settings are
erased.
Note
After a RAM reset level 1, initial toner supply will
automatically be done for 90 s.

SM

4-31

H551

Service Tables

4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2 Technical data printout on
TCR (Journal)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

COMMENTS
1: Instead of the personal code, the following data
are listed on the TCR for each analog G3
communication.
e.g. 32 V34 288 M 01 03 00 02
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1) First number: Symbol rate used
(for example, 32 means 3200 bps)
2) Second number: Used modem type
3) Third number: Final modem rate
(for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
4) Letter M or L:
An M indicates that is error rate, and an L
indicates Rx level. This is selected by the bit 3
setting below.
5-6) Fifth and sixth numbers: Line quality data.
If an error rate is selected (when M is indicated),
a larger number means more errors.
If Rx level is selected (when L is indicated), the
left hand figure is the high byte and the right hand
figure is the low byte.
7) Seventh number (rx mode only): Total number
of error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
8) Eighth number (rx mode only): Total number of
burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00
for transmission records and ECM reception
records.
How to calculate the rx level listed on the Journal
Example: 32 V34 288 L 01 A0 00 00
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N
by -16 to get the rx level.

H551

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.


So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB
Line quality data output
This bit determines the data type to be printed on
method
the Journal when technical data printout is
0: Measure of error rate
enabled by bit 2 above.
(during image data
transmission only)
1: Rx level
Line error marks on received
If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left
pages
edge of the page at any place where a line error
0: Disabled
occurred in the data. Such errors are caused by a
1: Enabled
noisy line, for example.

4-32

SM

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
5 G3/G4 Communication
parameter display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Protocol dump list output
after each communication
0: Off 1: On

Amount of protocol dump


data in one protocol dump list
printout operation
0: Up to the limit of the
memory area for protocol
dumping
1: Last communication only

Service Tables

COMMENTS
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameters (see the next 2 pages). This is
normally disabled because it cancels the CSI
display for the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
This is only used for communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocol
dump list of the last communication only.

SM

4-33

H551

BIT SWITCHES

G3 Communication Parameters
Mode
Modem rate

DCS: ITU-T standard


336: 33,600 bps
312: 31,200 bps
288: 28,800 bps
264: 26,400 bps
240: 24,000 bps
216: 21,600 bps
192: 19,200 bps

Resolution

S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)


D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG (optional) compression
JBB: JBIG (standard) compression
ECM: With ECM
SSC: Using SSC
EFC: Using EFC
NML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)
0: 0 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line

Compression mode

Communication mode

Width and reduction

I/O rate

H551

4-34

NSS: Non-standard G3
168: 16,800 bps
144: 14400 bps
120: 12000 bps
96: 9600 bps
72: 7200 bps
48: 4800 bps
24: 2400 bps

SM

BIT SWITCHES

Compression mode

Resolution

Width and reduction

Transfer
Confidential
Other parameters

MMR: MMR compression


MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)
T: Transfer
- : Other
C: Confidential
- : Other
The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the
first bit from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 3 - 1: Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5 - Engine type
0: mm, 1: inch
Bit 6 - Resolution unit
0: mm, 1: inch

System Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0 PM call
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-7 Not used

SM

COMMENTS
This bit switch determines whether the machine
will send an Auto Service Call to the service
station when it is time for PM.
Do not change the settings.

4-35

H551

Service Tables

G4 Communication Parameters

BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0 Memory file transfer
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

1-3
4

5
6
7

Not used
Automatic reset (during
communication)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Not used
Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled

System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to "User
selectable"

H551

COMMENTS
1: All messages in the memory (including
confidential rx messages) are sent to the fax
number which is programmed as the service
station.
Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.
Cross reference
Service station number programming: Function 13
Do not change the settings.
1: Machine automatically returns to the standby
mode when a communication of one page
exceeds a timer (default setting is 60 min).
This timer could be adjusted by the RAM settings
(RAM address 480378 and 480379).
When the optional G3 or G4 unit is installed, the
machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit every
period of this timer (default setting is 15 min). This
timer could be adjusted by the RAM settings
(RAM address 48037A and 48037B).
When this timer expires during communication,
the machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit
immediately after the communication is finished.
Cross reference
Service RAM Addresses, section 4.5.
Do not change the setting.
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on
to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03 (see
below). Note that if an RDS operation takes place,
RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.

COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to "User selectable".
The default setting is 24 hours.

4-36

SM

BIT SWITCHES

SM

G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID
programming level
0: User level
1: Service level
Telephone line type
programming mode
0: User level
1: Service level

COMMENTS
Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast of
the LCD on the operation panel.

This bit must be set to 1 before changing any


dedicated transmission parameters.
0: The user does not need to press the Start key
when operating a keystroke program.

0: The machine asks the user to replace the drum


at 30,000 print intervals (default interval).
After the user replaces the drum, the machine
asks the user if the drum has been replaced or
not. If the user answers yes, the machine resets
the OPC counter to zero. The drum replacement
interval is programmed at addresses 4803D2 to
4803D5(H). Refer to section 4.5 for more details.
1: The machine will not ask the user to replace
the drum.
1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be
programmed using a service function.
The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a
Group 4 option is installed.
1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or
pulse dial) can only be programmed using a
service function.

4-37

H551

Service Tables

System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0 LCD contrast
Bit 2 1 0 Contrast
1
0 0 0 Brightest
0 0 1

1 1 0

1 1 1 Darkest
3 Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 Inclusion of the Start key in
Keystroke Programs
0: Not needed
1: Needed
5 Drum replacement level
0: User
1: Service

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2 Display of both RTI and CSI
on the LCD
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Not used
4 Hard disk option
0: Not installed
1: Installed
5-7 Not used
System Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0 Use of the Stop key during
memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1-4
5

6
7

Not used
PC Fax Expander option
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Not used
On-screen function list
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

System Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 Date of monthly Fax On
to Demand report printout
7

H551

COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of the
protocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed
after phase C.
Do not change the settings.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard disk
option.
Do not change the settings.

COMMENTS
1: Memory transmissions can be stopped by
pressing the Stop key. However, users might
accidentally cancel another person's memory
transmission in progress.
Do not change the setting.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the PC Fax
Expander option.
Do not change the setting.
If this feature is enabled, the most frequently used
function numbers will be displayed for quick
reference whenever the user presses the
Function key.

COMMENTS
00 - 31 (BCD).
[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)]
[01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter
04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout
enabled).

4-38

SM

BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0 Addition of part of the image
data from confidential
transmissions on the
transmission result report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications
on the Journal (TCR) when
no image data was
exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2

6
7

SM

Automatic error report


printout
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Printing of the error code on
the error report
0: No 1: Yes
Listing of Confidential IDs on
the Personal Code List
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Power failure report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Not used
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >
Tel. number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI

COMMENTS
00 - 23 hours (BCD).
00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)
01 (BCD) - 1 am

23 (BCD) - 11 pm
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter
04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout
enabled).

COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.

0: Communications which reached phase C


(message Tx/Rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed
on the Journal (TCR).
1: Communications which reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

1: Confidential IDs registered with Personal


Codes by the users will appear on the Personal
Code List.
1: A power failure report will be automatically
printed after the power is switched on if a fax
message disappeared from the memory when the
power was turned off last.
Do not change the setting.
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored with the
Quick/Speed Dial number by the user.

4-39

H551

Service Tables

System Switch 08
No
FUNCTION
0 Time of monthly Fax On
to Demand report printout
7

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0 Not used
1 Default communication mode
0: G3
1: G4
2 Not used
3 Continuous polling reception
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad
when the external telephone
is off-hook
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5
6

On hook dial
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Line used for G3
transmission
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
Line used when the machine
falls back to G3 from G4 if
the other end is not a G4
machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN

System Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0 Automatic reset timer
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
2 Energy Saver mode timer
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
4-7 Not used

H551

COMMENTS
Keep this bit at 0.
These bits determine the machine's standby
default communication mode if a G4 option has
been installed.
Do not change the setting.
This feature allows a series of stations to be
polled in a continuous cycle.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting
when the external telephone is not by the
machine or a wireless telephone is connected as
an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bit
determines whether G3 transmissions go out over
the PSTN or the ISDN.
This bit switch has no effect if Communication
Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.

COMMENTS
(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.
(Other): The machine returns to the standby
mode when the timer expires after the last
operation.

(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.


(Other): The machine goes into an Energy Saver
mode when the timer expires after the last
operation.

Do not change the settings.

4-40

SM

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

00: France
01: Germany
02: UK
03: Italy
04: Austria
05: Belgium
06: Denmark
07: Finland
08: Ireland
09: Norway
0A: Sweden
0B: Swiss
0C: Portugal
0D: Holland
0E: Spain
0F: Israel

10: Canada
11: USA
12: Asia
13: Japan
14: Hong Kong
15: South Africa
16: Australia
17: New Zealand
18: Singapore
19: Malaysia
1A: China
1B: Taiwan
20: Turkey
21: Greece

System Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0 Threshold memory level for
to parallel memory transmission
7

System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0 TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 CIL printing position
0: Printed before the data
leading edge
1: Superimposed on the page
data
2 Label Insertion position
0: Left end 1: Right end
3-5

SM

Not used

COMMENTS
This country code determines the factory settings
of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it
has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and
communication parameter RAM addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 08, parameter C.C.

Service Tables

System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0 Country code for functional
to settings (Hex)
7

COMMENTS
Threshold mount = N x 64 kbytes
N can be between 00 FF(H)
Default setting: 04(H) = 256 kbytes

COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints
information that the customer considers to be
important (G3 transmissions).

Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprints


information that the customer considers to be
important (G4 transmissions).

Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprints


information that the customer considers to be
important.
Do not change the factory settings.

4-41

H551

BIT SWITCHES

Rev. 11/98

Conditions for memory


reception if no RTI or CSI is
received

Use of parallel memory


transmission with G4
transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Memory reception is available only when the


machine receives RTI or CSI.
1: Memory reception is always available unless
there is a printer (mechanical) error. If there is a
printer error, memory reception becomes
available only when the machine receives RTI or
CSI.
This function becomes effective in combination
with the user parameter switch 05 bit 1.
This bit determines whether parallel transmission
can be used with a G4 transmission or not.
.

System Switch 12
No
0
to
7

FUNCTION
TTI/CIL printing position in
the main scan direction
CIL: Command Information
Line (Group 4)

COMMENTS
08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
interfere with the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL is
moved over by more than 60 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13
No
0
1

3
4

5-7

H551

FUNCTION
Remaining memory threshold for
activating the hard disk filing
system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Threshold
0
0
25%
0
1
50% (default)
1
0
75%
1
1
Not used
Not used
Files that can be stored in the hard
disk filing system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Files
0 0
All files
0 1
Received files only
1 0
Transmitted files only
1 1
Not used

COMMENTS
If the remaining hard disk space is below
the threshold value, the hard disk filing
system cannot be used. Adjust the
threshold value to meet the customer's
requirements.

Do not change the factory settings


The default setting is (0 0).
Change the settings to limit the files that
can be stored in the hard disk filing system.

Not used

Do not change the factory settings

4-42

SM

BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 14
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Wait time between pages in
05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines
to printer mode (with an optional the machine's wait time between pages in printer
7 printer interface unit)
mode.
A longer setting forces the fax machine to wait
until the end of printer interface output before
printing any incoming fax message.
A shorter setting allows the fax machine to print
incoming fax messages while printing from a
computer. If the controller takes more than the
specified time to process a page of data from the
host computer, the fax machine releases the
printer resources for fax output.
Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s

System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0 Function Upgrade Card or
Fax On Demand Card
0: Not installed
1: Installed

1-7

Not used.

System Switch 17
No
FUNCTION
0 Not used.
1 Dialing without inserting a
document in the ADF
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1-7 Not used.

SM

COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 after installing a Function
Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card in the
machine's lower IC card slot.
0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax
On Demand Card is installed in the machine's
lower IC card slot before power-off, all the data in
these cards will be initialized if the machine does
not detect the card at the next power-on.
1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax
On Demand Card is installed in the machine's
lower IC card slot before power-off, the machine
will not start up unless the machine detects the IC
card or the data copy tool at the next power-on.
This prevents the data inside the card from being
initialized while replacing PCBs or downloading
software.
Do not change the default setting.

COMMENTS
Do not change the default setting.
0: Prevents dialing when a document is not
placed in the ADF.
Do not change the default setting.

4-43

H551

Service Tables

System Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 18
No
FUNCTION
0 Default communication line for
1 transmission
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 unit)
1
1 ISDN (G4 unit required)
2-7 Not used

COMMENTS
These bits determine the machines
standby default transmission line if an
optional G3 or G4 unit has been
installed.

Do not change the settings.

System Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)


System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H551

4-44

SM

BIT SWITCHES

4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES

6-7

OR processing for immediate


tx and copying (Detail
resolution)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Not used

COMMENTS

Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftone


quality.
If the user wants to send very long documents
such as well logs, select 14 m or a higher setting.

0: The machine scans the document in 3.85


line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine scans the document in 7.7
line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed
before transmission or making copies. Toner may
be used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.
0: The machine scans the document in 7.7
line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine scans the document in 15.4
line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed
before transmission or making copies. Toner may
be used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.
Do not change the settings.

Scanner Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone disabled - Normal
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0E(H)

Scanner Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone disabled - Lighten
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 10(H)

SM

4-45

H551

Service Tables

Scanner Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 MTF
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Text/photo separation in
halftone mode
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2 Maximum transmittable
3 document length
Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 600 mm
0 1 1200 mm
1 0 14 m
1 1 Not used
4 OR processing for immediate
tx and copying (Standard
resolution)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

BIT SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone disabled - Darken
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0C(H)

Scanner Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone enabled - Normal
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 09(H)

Scanner Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone enabled - Lighten
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0D(H)

Scanner Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone enabled - Darken
7 setting

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 02(H)

Scanner Switch 08
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold for text
to areas when halftone is
7 enabled

COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F.
This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1
is at 0.
Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H551

4-46

SM

BIT SWITCHES

4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Repetition of data when the


received page is longer than
the printer paper
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2
3

Not used
Cleaning mode after bypass
feed
0: Disabled
1: After each page is fed from
the bypass feed slot
Not used
mm-inch conversion when
printing
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4-6
7

COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an "x" inside a small box is printed at the
bottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a
"2" inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split up.
0: The next page continues from where the
previous page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
printed at the top of the next page.
Do not change the setting.
0: Cleaning mode is not done at all if bypass feed
is used.
1: Cleaning mode is done every time after a sheet
of paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.
Do not change the setting.
0: Printing is always done in inch format.
1: If the other end has scanned the document in
mm format, the machine converts the data to inch
format before printing.

Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Printer Switch 02 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM

4-47

H551

Service Tables

Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 Page separation mark
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1-3
4
to
7

COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
Cross reference
Page separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4
to 7.
1: Incoming pages are reduced in the length
direction when printing.
Cross reference
Reduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05

Not used
Do not change the settings.
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portion
will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copy
paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7
0
1
and so on until
F

x (mm)
0
1
15

Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

H551

4-48

SM

BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switches 04 and 05
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch
to 03-0 above)
7
If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction before
printing. These switch